Manual ZPL II

ZPL II Programming
Guide
For Firmware Version x.14 and Later
2008 ZIH Corp. The copyrights in this manual and the software and/or firmware in the printer described
therein are owned by ZIH Corp. Unauthorized reproduction of this manual or the software and/or firmware in the
printer may result in imprisonment of up to one year and fines of up to $10,000 (17 U.S.C.506). Copyright violators
may be subject to civil liability.
This product may contain ZPL
, ZPL II
, and ZebraLink programs; Element Energy Equalizer
Circuit; E
3
; and
Monotype Imaging fonts. Software ZIH Corp. All rights reserved worldwide.
ZebraLink and all product names and numbers are trademarks, and Zebra, the Zebra logo, ZPL, ZPL II, Element
Energy Equalizer Circuit, and E
3
Circuit are registered trademarks of ZIH Corp. All rights reserved worldwide.
All other brand names, product names, or trademarks belong to their respective holders. For additional trademark
information, please see Trademarks on the product CD.
Proprietary Statement This manual contains proprietary information of Zebra Technologies Corporation and its
subsidiaries (Zebra Technologies). It is intended solely for the information and use of parties operating and
maintaining the equipment described herein. Such proprietary information may not be used, reproduced, or disclosed
to any other parties for any other purpose without the express, written permission of Zebra Technologies.
Product Improvements Continuous improvement of products is a policy of Zebra Technologies. All
specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.
Liability Disclaimer Zebra Technologies takes steps to ensure that its published Engineering specifications and
manuals are correct; however, errors do occur. Zebra Technologies reserves the right to correct any such errors and
disclaims liability resulting therefrom.
Limitation of Liability In no event shall Zebra Technologies or anyone else involved in the creation, production,
or delivery of the accompanying product (including hardware and software) be liable for any damages whatsoever
(including, without limitation, consequential damages including loss of business profits, business interruption, or loss
of business information) arising out of the use of, the results of use of, or inability to use such product, even if Zebra
Technologies has been advised of the possibility of such damages. Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or
limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you.
9/4/08 ZPL II Programming Guide 13979L-011 Rev. A
Contents
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Functional List of ZPL Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Alphabetical List of ZBI Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Alphabetical List of Set/Get/Do Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
About This Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Who Should Use This Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
How This Document Is Organized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Web Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
The Americas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Europe, Africa, Middle East, and India . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Asia Pacific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Document Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
2 ZPL Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Basic ZPL Exercises and Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Before you begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Â Scalable/Bitmapped Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Â@ Use Font Name to Call Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
^B0 Aztec Bar Code Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
^B1 Code 11 Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
^B2 Interleaved 2 of 5 Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
^B3 Code 39 Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
^B4 Code 49 Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Contents
4
13979L-011 Rev. A ZPL II Programming Guide 9/4/08
^B5 Planet Code bar code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
^B7 PDF417 Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
^B8 EAN-8 Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
^B9 UPC-E Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
^BA Code 93 Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
^BB CODABLOCK Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
^BC Code 128 Bar Code (Subsets A, B, and C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
^BD UPS MaxiCode Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
^BE EAN-13 Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
^BF MicroPDF417 Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
^BI Industrial 2 of 5 Bar Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
^BJ Standard 2 of 5 Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
^BK ANSI Codabar Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
^BL LOGMARS Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
^BM MSI Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
^BO Aztec Bar Code Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
^BP Plessey Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
^BQ QR Code Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
^BR RSS (Reduced Space Symbology) Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
^BS UPC/EAN Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
^BT TLC39 Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
^BU UPC-A Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
^BX Data Matrix Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
^BY Bar Code Field Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
^BZ POSTAL Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
^CC ~CC Change Caret . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
^CD ~CD Change Delimiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
^CF Change Alphanumeric Default Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
^CI Change International Font/Encoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
^CM Change Memory Letter Designation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
^CO Cache On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
^CT ~CT Change Tilde . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
^CV Code Validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
^CW Font Identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
~DB Download Bitmap Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
~DE Download Encoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
^DF Download Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
~DG Download Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
~DN Abort Download Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
~DS Download Intellifont (Scalable Font) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
5
Contents
~DT Download Bounded TrueType Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
~DU Download Unbounded TrueType Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
~DY Download Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
~EG Erase Download Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
^FB Field Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
^FC Field Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
^FD Field Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
^FH Field Hexadecimal Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
^FL Font Linking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
^FM Multiple Field Origin Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
^FN Field Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
^FO Field Origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
^FP Field Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
^FR Field Reverse Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
^FS Field Separator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
^FT Field Typeset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
^FV Field Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
^FW Field Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
^FX Comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
^GB Graphic Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
^GC Graphic Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
^GD Graphic Diagonal Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
^GE Graphic Ellipse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
^GF Graphic Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
^GS Graphic Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
~HB Battery Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
~HD Head Diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
^HF Host Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
^HG Host Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
^HH Configuration Label Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
~HI Host Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
~HM Host RAM Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
~HQ Host Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
~HQ Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
~HS Host Status Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
^HT Host Linked Fonts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
~HU Return ZebraNet Alert Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
^HV Host Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
^HW Host Directory List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
^HY Upload Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Contents
6
^HZ Display Description Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
ÎD Object Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
ÎL Image Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
ÎM Image Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
ÎS Image Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
~JA Cancel All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
^JB Initialize Flash Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
~JB Reset Optional Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
~JC Set Media Sensor Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
~JD Enable Communications Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
~JE Disable Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
~JF Set Battery Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
~JG Graphing Sensor Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
^JH Early Warning Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
^JI Start ZBI (Zebra BASIC Interpreter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
~JI Start ZBI (Zebra BASIC Interpreter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
^JJ Set Auxiliary Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
~JL Set Label Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
^JM Set Dots per Millimeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
~JN Head Test Fatal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
~JO Head Test Non-Fatal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
~JP Pause and Cancel Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
~JQ Terminate Zebra BASIC Interpreter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
~JR Power On Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
^JS Sensor Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
~JS Change Backfeed Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
^JT Head Test Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
^JU Configuration Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
^JW Set Ribbon Tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
~JX Cancel Current Partially Input Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
^JZ Reprint After Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
~KB Kill Battery (Battery Discharge Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
^KD Select Date and Time Format (for Real Time Clock) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
^KL Define Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
^KN Define Printer Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
^KP Define Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
^LF List Font Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
^LH Label Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
^LL Label Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
^LR Label Reverse Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
7
Contents
^LS Label Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
^LT Label Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
^MA Set Maintenance Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
^MC Map Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
^MD Media Darkness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
^MF Media Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
^MI Set Maintenance Information Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
^ML Maximum Label Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
^MM Print Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
^MN Media Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
^MP Mode Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
^MT Media Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
^MU Set Units of Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
^MW Modify Head Cold Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
^NC Select the Primary Network Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
~NC Network Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
^ND Change Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
^NI Network ID Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
~NR Set All Network Printers Transparent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
^NS Change Wired Networking Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
~NT Set Currently Connected Printer Transparent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
^PA Advanced Text Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
^PF Slew Given Number of Dot Rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
^PH ~PH Slew to Home Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
^PM Printing Mirror Image of Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
^PO Print Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
^PP ~PP Programmable Pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
^PQ Print Quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
^PR Print Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
~PR Applicator Reprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
~PS Print Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
^PW Print Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
~RO Reset Advanced Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
^SC Set Serial Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
~SD Set Darkness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
^SE Select Encoding Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
^SF Serialization Field (with a Standard ^FD String) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
^SI Set Sensor Intensity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
^SL Set Mode and Language (for Real-Time Clock) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
^SN Serialization Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Contents
8
^SO Set Offset (for Real-Time Clock) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
^SP Start Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
^SQ Halt ZebraNet Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
^SR Set Printhead Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
^SS Set Media Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
^ST Set Date and Time (for Real-Time Clock) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
^SX Set ZebraNet Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
^SZ Set ZPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
~TA Tear-off Adjust Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
^TB Text Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
^TO Transfer Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
~WC Print Configuration Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
^WD Print Directory Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
~WQ Write Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
~WQ Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
^XA Start Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
^XB Suppress Backfeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
^XF Recall Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
^XG Recall Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
^XS Set Dynamic Media Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
^XZ End Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
^ZZ Printer Sleep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
3 ZPL RFID Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
RFID Command Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Printer and Firmware Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
^HL or ~HL Return RFID Data Log to Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
^HR Calibrate RFID Transponder Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
^RA Read AFI or DSFID Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
^RB Define EPC Data Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
^RE Enable/Disable E.A.S. Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
^RF Read or Write RFID Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
^RI Get RFID Tag ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
^RM Enable RFID Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
^RN Detect Multiple RFID Tags in Encoding Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
^RQ Quick Write EPC Data and Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
^RR Specify RFID Retries for a Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
^RS Set Up RFID Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
^RT Read RFID Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
~RV Report RFID Encoding Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
9
Contents
^RW Set RFID Read and Write Power Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
^RZ Set RFID Tag Password and Lock Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
^WF Encode AFI or DSFID Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
^WT Write (Encode) Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
^WV Verify RFID Encoding Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
4 ZPL Wireless Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
^KC Set Client Identifier (Option 61) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
^NB Search for Wired Print Server during Network Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
^NN Set SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
^NP Set Primary/Secondary Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
^NT Set SMTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
^NW Set Web Authentication Timeout Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
^WA Set Antenna Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
^WE Set WEP Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
^WI Change Wireless Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
^WL Set LEAP Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
~WL Print Network Configuration Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
^WP Set Wireless Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
^WR Set Transmit Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
~WR Reset Wireless Radio Card and Print Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
^WS Set Wireless Radio Card Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
^WX Configure Wireless Securities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Supporting Parameters for Different Security Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
5 ZBI Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Command and Function Reference Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Function Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Introduction to Zebra Basic Interpreter (ZBI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
What is ZBI and why is it for me? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Printers, ZBI Keys, & ZBI Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Section Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Writing ZBI Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Editing Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Running and Debugging Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Contents
10
Base Types and Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Variable Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Variable Declarations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Numeric Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
String Concatenation (&) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Sub-strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Boolean Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Combined Boolean Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Control and Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Input and Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Available Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Creating Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Reading and Writing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Port Usage Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
File System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Runtime Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Comma Separated Values (CSV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
Accessing Comma Separated Value (CSV) and Text File Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Available Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
ZBI Key Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
Applicator Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
String Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
Math Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
Array Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
Time and Date Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
Set/Get/Do Interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
Example Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
Array Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
CSV Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
DPI Conversion Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599
Email Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Extraction 1 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
Extraction 2 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
Front Panel Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
Recall Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611
Scale Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
11
Contents
6 SGD Printer Setting Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616
setvar Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616
getvar Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616
do Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
Command Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
How to Send Multiple SGD Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
appl.option_board_version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619
appl.bootblock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620
appl.name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621
cutter.clean_cutter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622
device.download_connection_timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
device.friendly_name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624
device.frontpanel.key_press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
device.frontpanel.line1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
device.frontpanel.line2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627
device.frontpanel.xml . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628
device.jobs_print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
device.languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630
device.pnp_option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
device.reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632
device.restore_defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
device.unique_id . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
device.uptime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
device.user_p1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
device.user_p2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637
device.xml.enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
display.text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
file.delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
file.dir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
file.type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642
file.run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643
head.latch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644
interface.network.active.gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
interface.network.active.ip_addr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646
interface.network.active.mac_addr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
interface.network.active.mac_raw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648
interface.network.active.netmask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
interface.network.active.protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650
media.darkness_mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
media.printmode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652
media.speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654
odometer.headclean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655
odometer.headnew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656
Contents
12
odometer.label_dot_length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657
odometer.media_marker_count1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658
odometer.media_marker_count2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659
odometer.total_print_length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660
print.tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661
rfid.error.response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662
rfid.position.program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663
rfid.reader_1.antenna_port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664
rfid.reader_1.power.read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665
rfid.reader_1.power.single_power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666
rfid.reader_1.power.write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667
zbi.control.add_breakpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668
zbi.control.break . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
zbi.control.clear_breakpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670
zbi.control.delete_breakpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
zbi.control.line_number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672
zbi.control.restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673
zbi.control.run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674
zbi.control.step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675
zbi.control.terminate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676
zbi.control.variable_name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
zbi.control.variable_value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678
zbi.key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679
zbi.last_error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680
zbi.reseller_key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681
zbi.revision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682
zbi.running_program_name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683
zbi.start_info.execute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684
zbi.start_info.file_name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685
zbi.start_info.memory_alloc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686
zbi.state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687
7 SGD Wired Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 689
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690
setvar Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690
getvar Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690
do Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691
external_wired.check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693
external_wired.ip.addr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 694
external_wired.ip.arp_interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695
external_wired.ip.default_addr_enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696
external_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_all . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697
external_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698
13
Contents
external_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_prefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699
external_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_suffix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700
external_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701
external_wired.ip.gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 702
external_wired.ip.netmask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703
external_wired.ip.port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 704
external_wired.ip.protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 705
external_wired.ip.timeout.enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 706
external_wired.ip.timeout.value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 707
external_wired.ip.v6.addr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 708
external_wired.ip.v6.gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709
external_wired.ip.v6.prefix_length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710
external_wired.mac_addr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .711
external_wired.mac_raw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 712
internal_wired.auto_switchover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713
internal_wired.ip.addr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714
internal_wired.ip.arp_interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715
internal_wired.ip.default_addr_enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716
internal_wired.ip.dhcp.cache_ip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
internal_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_all . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718
internal_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719
internal_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_prefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720
internal_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_suffix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721
internal_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 722
internal_wired.ip.dhcp.option12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727
internal_wired.ip.dhcp.option12_format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728
internal_wired.ip.gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733
internal_wired.ip.netmask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 734
internal_wired.ip.port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 735
internal_wired.ip.protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 736
internal_wired.ip.timeout.enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737
internal_wired.ip.timeout.value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738
internal_wired.mac_addr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
internal_wired.mac_raw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 740
8 SGD Wireless Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 742
setvar Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 742
getvar Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 742
do Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743
bluetooth.address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745
bluetooth.afh_map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746
bluetooth.afh_map_curr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 747
Contents
14
bluetooth.afh_mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 748
bluetooth.authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 749
bluetooth.bluetooth_pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 750
bluetooth.date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751
bluetooth.discoverable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 752
bluetooth.enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 753
bluetooth.friendly_name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 754
bluetooth.local_name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 755
bluetooth.radio_auto_baud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756
bluetooth.radio_version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757
bluetooth.short_address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 758
bluetooth.version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 759
card.mac_addr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 760
card.inserted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
ip.active_network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762
ip.addr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763
ip.arp_interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 764
ip.bootp.enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 765
ip.dhcp.cache_ip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766
ip.dhcp.cid_all . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767
ip.dhcp.cid_enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768
ip.dhcp.cid_prefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769
ip.dhcp.cid_suffix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 770
ip.dhcp.lease.length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771
ip.dhcp.cid_type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772
ip.dhcp.enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773
ip.dhcp.lease.last_attempt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774
ip.dhcp.lease.server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775
ip.dhcp.lease.time_left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776
ip.dhcp.option12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 777
ip.dhcp.option12_format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 778
ip.dhcp.option12_value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 779
ip.dhcp.request_timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 780
ip.dhcp.requests_per_session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 781
ip.dhcp.session_interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 782
ip.dns.domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 783
ip.dns.servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 784
ip.ftp.enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 785
ip.gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 786
ip.http.enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 787
ip.lpd.enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 788
ip.mac_raw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 789
ip.netmask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 790
ip.pop3.enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 791
ip.pop3.password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 792
15
Contents
ip.pop3.poll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 793
ip.pop3.server_addr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794
ip.pop3.username . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795
ip.port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 796
ip.primary_network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797
ip.smtp.domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798
ip.smtp.enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 799
ip.smtp.server_addr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800
ip.snmp.get_community_name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801
ip.snmp.set_community_name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802
ip.snmp.enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803
ip.telnet.enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804
ip.tcp.enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805
ip.udp.enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806
wlan.adhocautomode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807
wlan.adhocchannel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808
wlan.associated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809
wlan.bssid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 810
wlan.channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .811
wlan.channel_mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812
wlan.current_tx_rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813
wlan.essid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814
wlan.firmware_version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815
wlan.ip.addr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 816
wlan.ip.arp_interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 817
wlan.ip.default_addr_enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 818
wlan.ip.dhcp.cache_ip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 819
wlan.ip.dhcp.cid_all . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 820
wlan.ip.dhcp.cid_enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 821
wlan.ip.dhcp.cid_prefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 822
wlan.ip.dhcp.cid_suffix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 823
wlan.ip.dhcp.cid_type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 824
wlan.ip.dhcp.lease.last_attempt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 825
wlan.ip.dhcp.lease.length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826
wlan.ip.dhcp.lease.server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827
wlan.ip.dhcp.lease.time_left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 828
wlan.ip.dhcp.option12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 829
wlan.ip.dhcp.option12_format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 830
wlan.ip.dhcp.option12_value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831
wlan.ip.dhcp.request_timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 832
wlan.ip.dhcp.requests_per_session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 833
wlan.ip.dhcp.session_interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 834
wlan.ip.gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 835
wlan.ip.netmask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836
wlan.ip.port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 837
Contents
16
wlan.ip.protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 838
wlan.ip.timeout.enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839
wlan.ip.timeout.value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 840
wlan.keep_alive.enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 841
wlan.keep_alive.timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 842
wlan.kerberos.kdc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 843
wlan.kerberos.password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 844
wlan.kerberos.realm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 845
wlan.kerberos.username . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 846
wlan.mac_addr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 847
wlan.mac_raw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 848
wlan.operating_mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 849
wlan.password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 850
wlan.preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 851
wlan.private_key_password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852
wlan.roam.interchannel_delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 853
wlan.roam.interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 854
wlan.roam.max_chan_scan_time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 855
wlan.roam.signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856
wlan.security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 857
Supporting SGD Commands for Different Security Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 859
wlan.signal_noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 866
wlan.signal_quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 867
wlan.signal_strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 868
wlan.station_name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 869
wlan.tx_power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 870
wlan.tx_rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 871
wlan.username . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 872
wlan.wep.auth_type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 873
wlan.wep.index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 874
wlan.wep.key1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 875
wlan.wep.key2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 876
wlan.wep.key3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 877
wlan.wep.key4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 878
wlan.wpa.psk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 879
wlan.wep.key_format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 880
A Zebra Code Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 881
Zebra Code Page 850 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 882
Zebra Code Page 1250 (Scalable/Downloaded TTF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 884
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 885
Zebra Code Page 1250 (Bitmap fonts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 886
Zebra Code Page 1252 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 888
17
Contents
B ASCII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 891
ASCII Code Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 892
C Fonts and Bar Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 893
Standard Printer Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 894
Proportional and Fixed Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 896
Scalable Versus Bitmapped Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 898
Scalable Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 898
Bitmapped Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 898
Font Matrices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900
Bar Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 902
Basic Format for Bar Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 903
Bar Code Field Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 903
Bar Code Command Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 905
D Mod 10 and Mod 43 Check Digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 907
Mod 10 Check Digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 908
Mod 43 Check Digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 909
E ZB64 Encoding and Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 911
Introduction to B64 and Z64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 912
B64 and Z64 Encoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 914
F Field Interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 917
Normal Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 918
Rotated Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 919
Bottom Up Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 920
Inverted Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921
G Real Time Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 923
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 924
Control Panel Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 925
Real Time Clock Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 925
RTC Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 926
RTC Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 927
RTC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 928
First Day of the Week Affects Calendar Week . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 930
Time and Date Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 933
ZPL II Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 935
H ZBI Character Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 939
Character Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940
Contents
18
I SGD Command Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 943
Printer and Firmware Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 944
Printer Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 944
RFID Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 955
J Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 961
Firmware x.16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 962
Firmware x.15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 964
Wireless Securities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 964
ZPL and SGD Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 965
SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 965
Set / Get / Do Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 965
XML-Enabled Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 965
Firmware x.14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 966
Global Printing Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 967
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 969
Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 970
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 973
Functional List
of ZPL Commands
Abort Download Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Advanced Text Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
ANSI Codabar Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Applicator Reprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Aztec Bar Code Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Aztec Bar Code Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Bar Code Field Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Battery Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Cache On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Calibrate RFID Transponder Position . . . . . . . 374
Cancel All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Cancel Current Partially Input Format . . . . . . 270
Change Alphanumeric Default Font . . . . . . 146
Change Backfeed Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Change Caret . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Change Delimiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Change International Font/Encoding . . . . . . . 147
Change Memory Letter Designation . . . . . . 152
Change Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Change Tilde . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Change Wired Networking Settings . . . . . . . . 306
Change Wireless Network Settings . . . . . . . . 421
CODABLOCK Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Code 11 Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Code 128 Bar Code (Subsets A, B, and C) . . . 82
Code 39 Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Code 49 Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Code 93 Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Code Validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Configuration Label Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Configuration Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Configure Wireless Securities . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Data Matrix Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Define EPC Data Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Define Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Define Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Define Printer Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Detect Multiple RFID Tags in Encoding Field . 386
Disable Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Display Description Information . . . . . . . . . . 233
Download Bitmap Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Download Bounded TrueType Font . . . . . . . 170
Download Encoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Download Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Download Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Download Intellifont (Scalable Font) . . . . . . . 169
Download Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Download Unbounded TrueType Font . . . . . 171
EAN-13 Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
EAN-8 Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Early Warning Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Enable Communications Diagnostics . . . . . . 246
Enable RFID Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Enable/Disable E.A.S. Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Encode AFI or DSFID Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
End Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Erase Download Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Field Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Field Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Field Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Field Hexadecimal Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Field Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Field Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Field Origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Field Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Field Reverse Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Field Separator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Field Typeset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Field Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Font Identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Font Linking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Functional List of ZPL Commands
20
Get RFID Tag ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Graphic Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Graphic Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Graphic Diagonal Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Graphic Ellipse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Graphic Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Graphic Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Graphing Sensor Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Halt ZebraNet Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Head Diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Head Test Fatal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Head Test Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Head Test Non-Fatal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Host Directory List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Host Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Host Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Host Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Host Linked Fonts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Host Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Host RAM Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Host Status Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Host Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Image Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Image Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Image Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Industrial 2 of 5 Bar Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Initialize Flash Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Interleaved 2 of 5 Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Kill Battery (Battery Discharge Mode) . . . . . 272
Label Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Label Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Label Reverse Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Label Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Label Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
List Font Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
LOGMARS Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Map Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Maximum Label Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Media Darkness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Media Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Media Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Media Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
MicroPDF417 Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Mode Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Modify Head Cold Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
MSI Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Multiple Field Origin Locations . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Network Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Network ID Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Object Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Pause and Cancel Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
PDF417 Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Planet Code bar code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Plessey Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
POSTAL Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Power On Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Print Configuration Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Print Directory Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Print Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Print Network Configuration Label . . . . . . . . . 424
Print Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Print Quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Print Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Print Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Print Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Printer Sleep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Printing Mirror Image of Label . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Programmable Pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
QR Code Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Quick Write EPC Data and Passwords . . . . . . 387
Read AFI or DSFID Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Read or Write RFID Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Read RFID Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Recall Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Recall Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Report RFID Encoding Results . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Reprint After Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Reset Advanced Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Reset Optional Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Reset Wireless Radio Card and Print Server . 427
Return RFID Data Log to Host . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Return ZebraNet Alert Configuration . . . . . . . . 228
RSS (Reduced Space Symbology) Bar Code . 126
Scalable/Bitmapped Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Search for Wired Print Server during
Network Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Select Date and Time Format (for Real
Time Clock) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Select Encoding Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Select the Primary Network Device . . . . . . . . . 300
Sensor Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Serialization Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Serialization Field (with a Standard
^FD String) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Set All Network Printers Transparent . . . . . . 305
Set Antenna Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Set Auxiliary Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Set Battery Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Set Client Identifier (Option 61) . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Set Currently Connected Printer Transparent 308
Set Darkness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Set Date and Time (for Real-Time Clock) . . . 342
Set Dots per Millimeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Set Dynamic Media Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Set Label Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Set LEAP Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Set Maintenance Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Set Maintenance Information Message . . . . . . 289
21
Set Media Sensor Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Set Media Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Set Mode and Language (for Real-Time
Clock) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Set Offset (for Real-Time Clock) . . . . . . . . . . 334
Set Primary/Secondary Device . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Set Printhead Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Set RFID Read and Write Power Levels . . . . 400
Set RFID Tag Password and Lock Tag . . . . . 402
Set Ribbon Tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Set Sensor Intensity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Set Serial Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Set SMTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Set SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Set Transmit Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Set Units of Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Set Up RFID Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Set Web Authentication Timeout Value . . . . . 417
Set WEP Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Set Wireless Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Set Wireless Radio Card Values . . . . . . . . . . 428
Set ZebraNet Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Set ZPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Slew Given Number of Dot Rows . . . . . . . . . 310
Slew to Home Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Specify RFID Retries for a Block . . . . . . . . . . 389
Standard 2 of 5 Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Start Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Start Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Start ZBI (Zebra BASIC Interpreter) . . . . . . . 252
Start ZBI (Zebra BASIC Interpreter) . . . . . . . . 254
Suppress Backfeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Tear-off Adjust Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Terminate Zebra BASIC Interpreter . . . . . . . 262
Text Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
TLC39 Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Transfer Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
UPC/EAN Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
UPC-A Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
UPC-E Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Upload Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
UPS MaxiCode Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Use Font Name to Call Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Verify RFID Encoding Operation . . . . . . . . . . 409
Write (Encode) Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Write Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
22

Notes ___________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
Alphabetical List
of ZBI Commands
! (EXCLAMATION MARK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
ACCEPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
ADDBREAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
AUTONUM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
AUXPORT_GETPIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
AUXPORT_RELEASEPIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
AUXPORT_SETPIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
AUXPORT_STEALPIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
BREAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
CHR$ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
CLIENTSOCKET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
CLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
CLRERR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
COLUMNSIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580
CSVLOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
CSVSTORE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
CTRL-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
DATAREADY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
DATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
DATE$ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
DEBUG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
DELBREAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
DELETE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
DELROW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
DIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
DO Loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
ECHO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
END . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
EXIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
EXTRACT$ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
FIND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
FOR Loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
GETVAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590
GOTO/GOSUB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
HANDLEEVENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
HEXTOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
IF Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
INBYTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
INSERTROW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
INTTOHEX$ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
ISERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
ISWARNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
LCASE$ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
LEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
LOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
LTRIM$ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
MAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
MAXNUM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
MIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
MOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
NEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
ON ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
ORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
OUTBYTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
POS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
PRINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
READ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
REDIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
REGISTEREVENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
REM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
RENUM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
REPEAT$ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
RESTART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
ROWSIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
RTRIM$ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
RUN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
SEARCHTO$ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
SERVERCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
SERVERSOCKET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Alphabetical List of ZBI Commands
24
SETERR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
SETVAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
SLEEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
SPLIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
SPLITCOUNT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
STEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
STORE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
STR$ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
SUB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
TIME$ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
TRACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
TRIGGEREVENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
TXTLOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
TXTSTORE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
UCASE$ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
UNREGISTEREVENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
VAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
WRITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
ZPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Alphabetical List
of Set/Get/Do Commands
appl.bootblock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620
appl.name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621
appl.option_board_version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619
bluetooth.address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745
bluetooth.afh_map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746
bluetooth.afh_map_curr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 747
bluetooth.afh_mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 748
bluetooth.authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 749
bluetooth.bluetooth_pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 750
bluetooth.date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751
bluetooth.discoverable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 752
bluetooth.enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 753
bluetooth.friendly_name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 754
bluetooth.local_name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 755
bluetooth.radio_auto_baud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756
bluetooth.radio_version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757
bluetooth.short_address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 758
bluetooth.version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 759
card.inserted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
card.mac_addr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 760
cutter.clean_cutter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622
device.download_connection_timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
device.friendly_name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624
device.frontpanel.key_press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
device.frontpanel.line1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
device.frontpanel.line2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627
device.frontpanel.xml . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628
device.jobs_print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
device.languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630
device.pnp_option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
device.reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632
device.restore_defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
device.unique_id . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
device.uptime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
device.user_p1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
device.user_p2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637
device.xml.enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
display.text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
external_wired.check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693
external_wired.ip.addr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 694
external_wired.ip.arp_interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695
external_wired.ip.default_addr_enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696
external_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_all . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697
external_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698
external_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_prefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699
external_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_suffix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700
external_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701
external_wired.ip.gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 702
external_wired.ip.netmask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703
external_wired.ip.port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 704
external_wired.ip.protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 705
external_wired.ip.timeout.enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 706
external_wired.ip.timeout.value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 707
external_wired.ip.v6.addr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 708
external_wired.ip.v6.gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709
external_wired.ip.v6.prefix_length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710
external_wired.mac_addr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711
external_wired.mac_raw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 712
file.delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
file.dir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
file.run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643
file.type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642
head.latch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644
interface.network.active.gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
interface.network.active.ip_addr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646
interface.network.active.mac_addr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
interface.network.active.mac_raw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648
interface.network.active.netmask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
interface.network.active.protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650
internal_wired.auto_switchover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713
internal_wired.ip.addr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714
internal_wired.ip.arp_interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715
internal_wired.ip.default_addr_enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716
internal_wired.ip.dhcp.cache_ip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
internal_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_all . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718
internal_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719
internal_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_prefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720
internal_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_suffix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721
internal_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 722
internal_wired.ip.dhcp.lease.last_attempt . . . . . . . . . . . 723
internal_wired.ip.dhcp.lease.length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724
internal_wired.ip.dhcp.lease.server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 725
Alphabetical List of Set/Get/Do Commands
26
internal_wired.ip.dhcp.lease.time_left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726
internal_wired.ip.dhcp.option12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727
internal_wired.ip.dhcp.option12_format . . . . . . . . . . . . 728
internal_wired.ip.dhcp.option12_value . . . . . . . . . . . . . 729
internal_wired.ip.dhcp.request_timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . 730
internal_wired.ip.dhcp.requests_per_session . . . . . . . . 731
internal_wired.ip.dhcp.session_interval . . . . . . . . . . . . 732
internal_wired.ip.gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733
internal_wired.ip.netmask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 734
internal_wired.ip.port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 735
internal_wired.ip.protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 736
internal_wired.ip.timeout.enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737
internal_wired.ip.timeout.value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738
internal_wired.mac_addr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
internal_wired.mac_raw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 740
ip.active_network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762
ip.addr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763
ip.arp_interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 764
ip.bootp.enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 765
ip.dhcp.cache_ip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766
ip.dhcp.cid_all . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767
ip.dhcp.cid_enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768
ip.dhcp.cid_prefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769
ip.dhcp.cid_suffix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 770
ip.dhcp.cid_type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772
ip.dhcp.enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773
ip.dhcp.lease.last_attempt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774
ip.dhcp.lease.length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771
ip.dhcp.lease.server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775
ip.dhcp.lease.time_left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776
ip.dhcp.option12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 777
ip.dhcp.option12_format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 778
ip.dhcp.option12_value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 779
ip.dhcp.request_timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 780
ip.dhcp.requests_per_session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 781
ip.dhcp.session_interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 782
ip.dns.domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 783
ip.dns.servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 784
ip.ftp.enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 785
ip.gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 786
ip.http.enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 787
ip.lpd.enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 788
ip.mac_raw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 789
ip.netmask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 790
ip.pop3.enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 791
ip.pop3.password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 792
ip.pop3.poll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 793
ip.pop3.server_addr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794
ip.pop3.username . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795
ip.port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 796
ip.primary_network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797
ip.smtp.domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798
ip.smtp.enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 799
ip.smtp.server_addr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800
ip.snmp.enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803
ip.snmp.get_community_name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801
ip.snmp.set_community_name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802
ip.tcp.enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805
ip.telnet.enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804
ip.udp.enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806
media.darkness_mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
media.printmode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652
media.speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654
odometer.headclean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655
odometer.headnew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656
odometer.label_dot_length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657
odometer.media_marker_count1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658
odometer.media_marker_count2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659
odometer.total_print_length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660
print.tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661
rfid.error.response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662
rfid.position.program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663
rfid.reader_1.antenna_port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664
rfid.reader_1.power.read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665
rfid.reader_1.power.single_power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666
rfid.reader_1.power.write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667
wlan.adhocautomode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807
wlan.adhocchannel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808
wlan.associated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809
wlan.bssid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 810
wlan.channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811
wlan.channel_mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812
wlan.current_tx_rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813
wlan.essid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814
wlan.firmware_version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815
wlan.ip.addr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 816
wlan.ip.arp_interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 817
wlan.ip.default_addr_enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 818
wlan.ip.dhcp.cache_ip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 819
wlan.ip.dhcp.cid_all . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 820
wlan.ip.dhcp.cid_enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 821
wlan.ip.dhcp.cid_prefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 822
wlan.ip.dhcp.cid_suffix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 823
wlan.ip.dhcp.cid_type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 824
wlan.ip.dhcp.lease.last_attempt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 825
wlan.ip.dhcp.lease.length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826
wlan.ip.dhcp.lease.server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827
wlan.ip.dhcp.lease.time_left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 828
wlan.ip.dhcp.option12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 829
wlan.ip.dhcp.option12_format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 830
wlan.ip.dhcp.option12_value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831
wlan.ip.dhcp.request_timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 832
wlan.ip.dhcp.requests_per_session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 833
wlan.ip.dhcp.session_interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 834
wlan.ip.gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 835
wlan.ip.netmask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836
wlan.ip.port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 837
wlan.ip.protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 838
wlan.ip.timeout.enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839
wlan.ip.timeout.value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 840
wlan.keep_alive.enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 841
wlan.keep_alive.timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 842
wlan.kerberos.kdc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 843
wlan.kerberos.password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 844
wlan.kerberos.realm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 845
wlan.kerberos.username . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 846
wlan.mac_addr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 847
wlan.mac_raw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 848
wlan.operating_mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 849
wlan.password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 850
wlan.preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 851
wlan.private_key_password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852
wlan.roam.interchannel_delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 853
wlan.roam.interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 854
27
wlan.roam.max_chan_scan_time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 855
wlan.roam.signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856
wlan.security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 857
wlan.signal_noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 866
wlan.signal_quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 867
wlan.signal_strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 868
wlan.station_name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 869
wlan.tx_power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 870
wlan.tx_rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 871
wlan.username . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 872
wlan.wep.auth_type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 873
wlan.wep.index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 874
wlan.wep.key_format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 880
wlan.wep.key1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 875
wlan.wep.key2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 876
wlan.wep.key3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 877
wlan.wep.key4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 878
wlan.wpa.psk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 879
zbi.control.add_breakpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668
zbi.control.break . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
zbi.control.clear_breakpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670
zbi.control.delete_breakpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
zbi.control.line_number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672
zbi.control.restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673
zbi.control.run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674
zbi.control.step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675
zbi.control.terminate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676
zbi.control.variable_name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
zbi.control.variable_value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678
zbi.key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679
zbi.last_error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680
zbi.reseller_key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681
zbi.revision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682
zbi.running_program_name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683
zbi.start_info.execute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684
zbi.start_info.file_name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685
zbi.start_info.memory_alloc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686
zbi.state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687
28

Notes ____________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
About This Document
This section provides you with contact information, document structure and organization, and
additional reference documents.
Contents
Who Should Use This Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
How This Document Is Organized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Contacts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Document Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
About This Document
Who Should Use This Document
30
Who Should Use This Document
This Guide is for programmers who are familiar working with programming languages.
How This Document Is Organized
The ZPL II Programming Guide is set up as follows:
Section Description
Introduction Provides a high-level overview about this guide
and Zebra Programming Language (ZPL).
ZPL Commands Provides an alphabetical, detailed description of
each ZPL command.
ZPL RFID Commands Provides an alphabetical, detailed description of
each ZPL RFID command, and some examples of
how to use them.
ZPL Wireless Commands Provides new and modified ZPL commands for the
wireless print server.
ZBI Commands Provides details about the Zebra Basic Interpreter,
its commands, descriptions, formats, and
parameters.
SGD Printer Setting Commands Provides a high-level overview of printer setting
Set / Get / Do (SGD) commands.
SGD Wired Commands Provides a high-level overview of the wired
SGD Wireless Commands Provides a high-level overview of the wireless
Appendixes The appendixes include:
Zebra Code Pages
ASCII
Fonts and Bar Codes
Mod 10 and Mod 43 Check Digits
ZB64 Encoding and Compression
Field Interactions
Real Time Clock
ZBI Character Set
SGD Command Support
Features
Glossary Glossary of terms.
31
About This Document
Contacts
Contacts
You can contact Zebra Technologies at the following:
Web Site
http://www.zebra.com
Technical Support via the Internet is available 24 hours per day, 365 days per year. Go to
http://www.zebra.com/support.
The Americas
Europe, Africa, Middle East, and India
Asia Pacific
Regional Headquarters Technical Support Customer Service Dept.
Zebra Technologies International, LLC
333 Corporate Woods Parkway
Vernon Hills, Illinois 60061.3109 U.S.A
T: +1 847 793 2600
Toll-free +1 800 423 0422
F: +1 847 913 8766
T: +1 877 ASK ZEBRA (275 9327)
F: +1 847 913 2578
Hardware: ts1@zebra.com
Software: ts3@zebra.com
For printers, parts, media, and ribbon, please
call your distributor, or contact us.
T: +1 877 ASK ZEBRA (275 9327)
E: clientcare@zebra.com
Regional Headquarters Technical Support Internal Sales Dept.
Dukes Meadow
Millboard Road
Bourne End
Buckinghamshire
SL8 5XF
United Kingdom
Switchboard: +44 (0)1628 556000
Fax: +44 (0)1628 556001
T: +44 (0) 1494 768298
F: +44 (0) 1494 768210
Germany: Tsgermany@zebra.com
France: Tsfrance@zebra.com
Spain/Portugal: Tsspain@zebra.com
All other areas: Tseurope@zebra.com
T: +44 (0) 1494 768316
F: +44 (0) 1494 768244
E: cseurope@zebra.com
Regional Headquarters Technical Support Customer Service
Zebra Technologies Asia Pacific, LLC
120 Robinson Road
#06-01 Parakou Building
Singapore 068913
T: +65 6858 0722
F: +65 6885 0838
T: +65 6858 0722
F: +65 6885 0838
E: China: tschina@zebra.com
All other areas:
tsasiapacific@zebra.com
T: +65 6858 0722
F: +65 6885 0836
About This Document
Document Conventions
32
Document Conventions
The following conventions are used throughout this document to convey certain information.
Alternate Color (online only) Cross-references contain hot links to other sections in this
guide. If you are viewing this guide online in .pdf format, you can click the cross-reference
(blue text) to jump directly to its location.
Icons Used
Illustration Callouts Callouts are used when an illustration contains information that needs
to be labeled and described. A table that contains the labels and descriptions follows the
graphic. Figure 1 provides an example.
Figure 1 Sample Figure with Callouts
Identifies features that are available in printers with firmware version V60.16.x, V53.16.x, or
later.
later.
Identifies features that are available in printers with firmware version V60.14, V50.14, or
later.
Important Advises you of information that is essential to complete a task.
Note Indicates neutral or positive information that emphasizes or supplements important
points of the main text.
1 ZPL Code
2 Generated Label
CODE 49 BAR CODE
^XA
^FO150,100^BY3
^B4N,20,A,A
^FD12345ABCDE^FS
^XZ
ZPL II CODE
1 2
1
Introduction
This guide is the unabridged, alphabetical reference of programming commands supported in
the firmware. This includes all ZPL commands and SGD commands.
Firmware You can get the printers firmware version by printing out a configuration label.
For instructions to do so, see your printers user guide.
Many word processors or a text editor is capable of creating ASCII files can be used to
recreate most examples in this guide. However, for other encodings such as Unicode, a text
editor such as Microsoft Notepad is needed.
If there are any terms used in this guide that you need clarification on, please see the Glossary
on page 969.
Important These are important points to note when using ZPL and SGD commands:
ZPL and SGD commands should be sent to the printer as separate files.
Certain settings can be controlled by both ZPL and SGD. Configuration changes made in
ZPL can affect configuration changes made in SGD.
Note For firmware upgrades go to: www.zebra.com.
Important These are important points to note when using a Zebra G-Series printer:
You can send instructions to the printer using multiple programming languages: EPL,
ZPL, or SGD. EPL and ZPL commands configure the printer, print labels, and get device
status information. SGD commands set and get configuration details. These three
languages can be used without the need to send the printer instructions to switch from
one language to another.
EPL, ZPL, and SGD commands must be sent to the printer as separate files. They cannot
be used together in one format, or set of commands. For example, if you send a series of
SGD commands to the printer and they are followed by a printable format, this needs to
be done using separate files.
Introduction
34

Notes ___________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
2
ZPL Commands
This section contains the complete alphabetical listing of ZPL II commands.
Description This heading provides an explanation of how the command is used, what it is
capable of, and any defining characteristics it has.
Format Format explains how the command is syntactically arranged and what parameters it
contains.
For Example The ^B8 command prints a EAN-8 bar code. The format of the ^B8
command is: ^B8o,h,f,g. It is arranged with the caret symbol (^), the command code
(B8), and the parameters and are replaced with supported values.
Parameters If a command has values that can be defined to make its function more specific,
these are outlined as parameters. Parameters typically have Accepted Values and Default
Values.
Still using the ^B8 example, the h parameter is defined as:
h = bar code height (in dots)
Accepted Values: 1 to 32000
Default Value: value set by ^BY
If the command has no parameters for example ~JA (Cancel All) the parameter heading is
removed, indicating that the format of the command (~JA) is acceptable ZPL II code.
ZPL Commands
36
Comment This section is reserved for notes that are of value to a programmer, warnings of
potential command interactions, or command-specific information that should be taken into
consideration.
Example When the command is best clarified in context, an example of the
ZPL II code is provided. Text indicating exact code entered is printed in an easily
recognizable Courier font. An example of code using the ^B8 command looks like this:
^XA
^FO50,50
^B8N,100,Y,N
^FD1234567^FS
^XZ
Notice that the ^B8 parameter letters have been replaced with real values that apply to the
command. In this example N,100,Y,N have been entered.
Example An example comment is: This command works only when the printer is idle,
or This command is ignored if a value exceeds the parameter limits.
Comments are also included next to parameters if they apply directly to a particular setting.
37
ZPL Commands
Basic ZPL Exercises and Examples
The purpose of these exercises is to introduce basic ZPL commands to novice ZPL users.
Make sure this checklist is complete:
Load the printer with labels that are big enough to give you ample space to work with.
Print a configuration label (CANCEL test).
Look at the configuration label and make sure that the LEFT POSITION is set to
000 and LABEL TOP is set to 000.
Determine the printers resolution. It is listed on the configuration label. 8/MM =
200 dpi, 12/MM = 300 dpi and 24/MM = 600 dpi.
Tips
These are some tips when using ZPL:
Use the DOS text editor to write ZPL files.
Save the file as a .txt file and copy it to the printer from DOS command line.
Before you begin
Some things that are important to understand before you begin are:
200 dpi means the resolution of the printhead is 200 dots per inch. If you program the
printer to draw a line 100 dots long that equals a half inch. 100 dots on a
300 dpi printer prints a line 1/3 inch long.
The home position that all your coordinates are referencing is at the left-hand trailing edge
of the label as the label comes out of the printer. (There are some exceptions to this.)
ZPL Commands
38
Exercises
The exercises start simple and gradually progress to give you an opportunity to try a variety of
commonly used ZPL commands. Not all commands are covered, but this should be a good
core of commands to learn. Some commands may not be supported due to the firmware
version in your printer.
Exercise 1 This exercise shows you how to specify a location for an entered name.
1. Print your name on the label.
2. Start by printing just your name on the label. Use this format as a model:
3. Send this format to the printer:
4. When the label prints correctly, alter the first number after the ^FOx. See how that
change affects the print position. Alter the second number after the ^FO50,x and see
how that the print position.
Font instruction
ÂDN
1. Alter the numbers after the ÂDN,x,x command.
18,10 is the smallest size you can make the D font.
The first number is the height of the font in dots. The second number is the width in
dots.
You can use direct multiples up to ten times that size as a maximum.
25,18 would not be a valid size. The printer rounds to the next recognizable size.
Important Your name goes where you see xxxxxxxxxxx in the second line of code.
1 Every format starts with the ^XA command
2 ^FO (field origin) command
3 ^FS (field separator) command
4 Every format ends with the ^XZ command
5 ^FD (field data) command
^XA
^FO50,50ÂDN,36,20^FDxxxxxxxxxxx
^FS
^XZ
1
5
3
4
2
Example 180,100 is the largest you can make the D font.
39
ZPL Commands
2. Check the font matrices tables for other fonts to try. See Fonts and Bar Codes
on page 893.
3. Try the zero scalable font Â0N,x,x.
This font is scalable, and you can choose any height and width.
Rotation commands
1. Change ÂDN to ÂDR, and then ÂDI, and then ÂDB.
See how the print position changes.
2. Add more fields.
3. Add two more fields to print directly under your name using the ÂDN,36,20 font and
size:
Your street address
Your city, state, zip
4. You must add two more lines of code that start off with:
^XA
^FO50,50ÂDN,36,20^FDxxxxxxxxxxx^FS
^FO (fill in the rest)
^FO (fill in the rest)
^XZ
Make sure all these fields print in the same font and size and left side of fields has same
vertical alignment.
Your name
1200 W Main Street
Anytown, Il 60061
ZPL Commands
40
Special Effects commands
The Graphic Box or ^GB command or is used in some of the speical effects commands.
Reverse Printing a Field
1. Write the following format and send to the printer:
^XA
^PR1
^FO100,100
^GB70,70,70,,3^FS
^FO200,100
^GB70,70,70,,3^FS
^FO300,100
^GB70,70,70,,3^FS
^FO400,100
^GB70,70,70,,3^FS
^FO107,110^CF0,70,93
^FR^FDREVERSE^FS
^XZ
2. To see the effects, remove:
^FR^FDREVERSE^FS
3. To see the effects, try removing one of the ^GB lines of code.
Label Reverse Print
^XA^LRY
^FO100,50
^GB195,203,195^FS
^FO180,110^CFG
^FDLABEL^FS
^FO130,170
^FDREVERSE^FS
^XZ
2. To see the effects, remove:
^GB195,203,195^FS
41
ZPL Commands
Mirror Image of Label
^XA^PMY
^FO100,100
^CFG
^FDMIRROR^FS
^FO100,160
^FDIMAGE^FS
^XZ
2. To see the effects, in the first line of code change ^PMY to ^PMN.
Print Orientation
^XA^CFD
^POI
^LH330,10
^FO50,50
^FDZEBRA TECHNOLOGIES^FS
^FO50,75
^FDVernon Hills, IL^FS
^XZ
2. To see the effects, in the second line of code change ^POI to ^PON.
Exercise 2 Boxes and lines
1. Use the address format from Exercise 1.
2. Add this new line to your existing format:
^FO50,200^GB200,200,2^FS
This prints a box one wide by one inch long and the thickness of the line is 2 dots.
3. Reposition and resize the square so that it goes around the name and address uniformly.
4. Print a line by adding:
^FO50,300^GB400,0,4,^FS
This prints a horizontal line two inches wide by 4 dots thick.
5. Print a vertical line using this code:
^F0100,50^GBO,400,4^FS
ZPL Commands
42
Exercise 3 Bar codes ^B3 code 39 bar code
^XA
^FO50,50^B3N,N,100,Y,N^FD123456^FS
^XZ
2. Try changing each of the parameters in the ^B3 string so you can see the effects.
^B3o,e,h,f,g
^BY
3. Insert the ^BY command just before the ^B3 to see how the narrow bar width can be
altered.
^FO50,50^BY2^B3..etc ^BYx, acceptable values for x are 1
through 10
4. Alter the ratio of the narrow to wide bar.
^FO50,50^BY2,3^B3..etc ^BY2,x acceptable values for x are
2.1 through 3 in .1 increments
5. Print out a ^B3 bar code with the interpretation line on top of the bar code and the bar
code rotated 90 degrees.
6. Add a ^PQ just before the ^XZ to print several labels.
^PQ4
^XZ
^PR Print rate (in inches per second)
7. Add a ^PR command after the ^XA at the beginning of the format to change the print rate
(print speed).
^XA
^PR4 then try ^PR6 ^PRx acceptable values for x are 2 through
12 (check printer specs)
See how the print speed affects the print quality of the bar code. You may need to increase
the printer darkness setting at higher print speeds.
Important For valid parameter choices, see ^B3 on page 57.
43
ZPL Commands
Exercise 4 ^SN Serial Number command
^XA
^FO100,100ÂDN,36,20^SN001,1,Y^FS
^PQ3
^XZ
To vary the ^SNv,n,z to exercise increment/decrement and leading zeros functions,
consult this guide.
If your serial number contains alpha and numeric characters, you can increment or
decrement a specific segment of the data even if it is in the middle, as this sample
sequence shows:
ABCD1000EFGH, ABCD1001EFGH, ABCD1002EFGH
2. Send this file to the printer and to see how it increments the serial number. The ^SF
command can also work with alpha characters.
^XA
^FO100,100ÂDN,36,20^FDABCD1000EFGH^SF%%%%dddd%%%%,10000^FS
^PQ15
^XZ
Notice how the field data character position aligns with the ^SF data string:
And on through
The last label prints ABCD1014EFGH.
The % is placed in positions that you do not want to increment or decrement,
d = decimal, 10000 = increment value.
For more details on ^SF, see ^SF on page 325.
^ F D A B C D 1 0 0 0 E F G H
^ S F % % % % d d d d % % % %
1 0 0 0 0
2 0 0 0 0
3 0 0 0 0
1 0 1 4 0 0 0 0
ZPL Commands
44
Exercise 5 Saving a template to memory. ÎS and image save and image load.
^XA
^FO20,30^GB750,1100,4^FS
^FO20,30^GB750,200,4^FS
^FO20,30^GB750,400,4^FS
^FO20,30^GB750,700,4^FS
^FO20,226^GB325,204,4^FS
^FO30,40ÂDN,36,20^FDShip to:^FS
^FO30,260ÂDN,18,10^FDPart number #^FS
^FO360,260ÂDN,18,10^FDDescription:^FS
^FO30,750ÂDN,36,20^FDFrom:^FS
ÎSR:SAMPLE.GRF^FS
^XZ
2. Send this format:
^XA
ÎLR:SAMPLE.GRF^FS
^FO150,125ÂDN,36,20^FDAcme Printing^FS
^FO60,330ÂDN,36,20^FD14042^FS
^FO400,330ÂDN,36,20^FDScrew^FS
^FO70,480^BY4^B3N,,200^FD12345678^FS
^FO150,800ÂDN,36,20^FDMacks Fabricating^FS
^XZ
In this way the template only needs to be sent one time to the printers memory. Subsequent
formats can be sent recalling the template and merging variable data into the template. In this
exercise, the file was saved in the printers R: memory, which is volatile.
Note This exercise helps you troubleshoot your code against the errors you see on your
labels.
45
ZPL Commands
Exercise 6 ^DF and ^XF Download format and recall format
Similar concept to ÎS and ÎL command. ÎS and ÎL processes faster in the printer than
^DF and ^XF.
This is how the ^DF and ^XF format structure produces a label similar to the ÎS/ÎL
sample you just tried.
Figure 2 Download and Recall Format
1 Download format code
2 Recall format call that generates the generated label in Figure 2.
^XA
^DFR:SAMPLE.GRF^FS
^FO20,30^GB750,1100,4^FS
^FO20,30^GB750,200,4^FS
^FO20,30^GB750,400,4^FS
^FO20,30^GB750,700,4^FS
^FO20,226^GB325,204,4^FS
^FO30,40ÂDN,36,20^FDShip to:^FS
^FO30,260ÂDN,18,10^FDPart number #^FS
^FO360,260ÂDN,18,10^FDDescription:^FS
^FO30,750ÂDN,36,20^FDFrom:^FS
^FO150,125ÂDN,36,20^FN1^FS (ship to)
^FO60,330ÂDN,36,20^FN2^FS(part num)
^FO400,330ÂDN,36,20^FN3^FS(description)
^FO70,480^BY4^B3N,,200^FN4^FS(barcode)
^FO150,800ÂDN,36,20^FN5^FS (from)
^XZ
^XA
^XFR:SAMPLE.GRF
^FN1^FDAcme Printing^FS
^FN2^FD14042^FS
^FN3^FDScrew^FS
^FN4^FD12345678^FS
^FN5^FDMacks Fabricating^FS
^XZ
ZPL II CODE GENERATED LABEL
1
2
ZPL Commands
46
Exercise 7 Asian and Unicode Encodings
In each of the following examples, the format is saved in the corresponding encoding before
being sent down to the printer and the ZPL script was made in Microsoft Notepad, a basic text
editor. The characters were inserted from the character map in Windows or typed from the
keyboard.
This exercise works in printers with firmware version v60.14, v50.14, or later.
Example This is an example of using an Asian encoding, such as UHANGUL, with ASCII
text. Using the CI26 command tells the printer to recognize any byte less than 7F as ASCII
text and every byte above as the first byte of UHANGUAL encoding:
Example This is an example of using the Unicode encoding, UTF-8:
ZPL II CODE
GENERATED LABEL
47
ZPL Commands
Â
Â
Scalable/Bitmapped Font
Description The Â command specifies the font to use in a text field. Â designates the
font for the current ^FD statement or field. The font specified by Â is used only once for that
^FD entry. If a value for Â is not specified again, the default ^CF font is used for the next
^FD entry.
Format Âfo,h,w
This table identifies the parameters for this format:
Important Parameter f is required. If f is omitted it defaults to the last value of the ^CF
command.
Command Details
f = font name Accepted Values: A through Z, and 0 to 9
Any font in the printer (downloaded, EPROM, stored fonts,
fonts A through Z and 0 to 9).
o = field orientation Accepted Values:
N = normal
R = rotated 90 degrees (clockwise)
I = inverted 180 degrees
B = read from bottom up, 270 degrees
Default Value: the last accepted ^FW value or the ^FW default
h = Character Height
(in dots)
Scalable
Default Value: last accepted ^CF
Bitmapped
Accepted Values: multiples of height from 1 to 10 times the
standard height, in increments of 1
w = width (in dots) Scalable
Bitmapped
Accepted Values: multiples of width from 1 to 10 times the
standard width, in increments of 1
ZPL Commands
Â
48
Scalable Font Command
Bitmap Font Command
For reference, see Standard Printer Fonts on page 894, Zebra Code Page 850 on page 882,
Fonts and Bar Codes on page 893, and ASCII on page 891.
Comments Fonts are built using a matrix that defines standard height-to-width ratios. If you
specify only the height or width value, the standard matrix for that font automatically
determines the other value. If the value is not given or a 0 (zero) is entered, the height or width
is determined by the standard font matrix.
Example This is an example of a scalable font command:
Example This is an example of a bitmap font command:
This command interacts with the justification parameters of ^FO and ^FT and with the field
direction parameter of ^FP. For output and examples, see Field Interactions on page 917.
49
ZPL Commands
Â@
Â@
Use Font Name to Call Font
Description The Â@ command uses the complete name of a font, rather than the character
designation used in Â. Once a value for Â@ is defined, it represents that font until a new
font name is specified by Â@.
Format Â@o,h,w,d:o.x
Parameters Details
N = normal
R = rotates 90 degrees (clockwise)
Default Value: N or the last ^FW value
h = character height (in
dots)
Default Value: specifies magnification by w (character width)
or the last accepted ^CF value. Uses the base height if none is
specified.
Scalable The value is the height in dots of the entire
character block. Magnification factors are unnecessary,
because characters are scaled.
Bitmapped The value is rounded to the nearest integer
multiple of the fonts base height, then divided by the
fonts base height to give a magnification nearest limit.
w = width (in dots) Default Value: specifies magnification by h (height) or the
last accepted ^CF value. Specifies the base width is used if
none is specified.
Scalable The value is the width in dots of the entire
character block. Magnification factors are unnecessary,
because characters are scaled.
Bitmapped The value rounds to the nearest integer
multiple of the fonts base width, then divided by the
fonts base width to give a magnification nearest limit.
d = drive location of font Accepted Values: R:, E:, B:, and A:
Default Value: R:
ZPL Commands
Â@
50
For reference, see Zebra Code Page 850 on page 882, Fonts and Bar Codes on page 893, and
ASCII on page 891.
o = font name Accepted Values: any valid font
Default Value: if an invalid or no name is entered, the default
set by ^CF is used. If no font has been specified in ^CF, font
A is used.
The font named carries over on all subsequent Â@
commands without a font name.
x = extension
.TTE is only supported in
firmware version V60.14.x,
V50.14.x, or later.
Accepted Values:
.FNT = font
.TTF = TrueType Font
.TTE = TrueType Extension
Example This example is followed by a table that identifies the called out lines of code:
1 Starts the label format.
2 Searches non-volatile printer memory (B:) for CYRI_UB.FNT. When
the font is found, the Â@ command sets the print orientation to
normal and the character size to 50 dots by 50 dots.
3 Sets the field origin at 100,100.
4 Prints the field data, Zebra Printer Fonts on the label.
5 Calls the font again and character size is decreased to 40 dots by 40
dots.
6 Sets the new field origin at 100,150.
7 Prints the field data, This uses the B:CYRI_UB.FNT on the label.
8 Ends the label format.
Parameters Details
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
51
ZPL Commands
^B0
9/4/08 ZPL II ProgrammingGuide 13979L-011 Rev. A
^B0
Aztec Bar Code Parameters
Description The ^B0 command creates a two-dimensional matrix symbology made up of
square modules arranged around a bulls-eye pattern at the center.
Format ^B0a,b,c,d,e,f,g
Note The Aztec bar code works with firmware version v60.13.0.11A and v50.13.2 or later.
Parameters Details
a = orientation Accepted Values:
N = normal
R = rotated
Default Value: current ^FW value
b = magnification factor Accepted Values: 1 to 10
Default Value:
1 on 150 dpi printers
c = extended channel
interpretation code
indicator
Accepted Values:
Y = if data contains ECICs
N = if data does not contain ECICs
Default Value: N
d = error control and
symbol size/type
indicator
Accepted Values:
0 = default error correction level
01 to 99 = error correction percentage (minimum)
101 to 104 = 1 to 4-layer compact symbol
201 to 232 = 1 to 32-layer full-range symbol
300 = a simple Aztec Rune
Default Value: 0
e = menu symbol
indicator
Accepted Values:
Y = if this symbol is to be a menu (bar code reader
initialization) symbol
N = if it is not a menu symbol
Default Value: N
ZPL Commands
^B0
52
f = number of symbols
for structured append
Accepted Values: 1 through 26
Default Value: 1
g = optional ID field for
structured append
The ID field is a text string with 24-character maximum
Default Value: no ID
Example This is an example of the ^B0 command:
Parameters Details
^XA
^B0R,7,N,0,N,1,0
^FD 7. This is testing label 7^FS
^XZ
53
ZPL Commands
^B1
^B1
Code 11 Bar Code
Description The ^B1 command produces the Code 11 bar code, also known as USD-8
code. In a Code 11 bar code, each character is composed of three bars and two spaces, and the
character set includes 10 digits and the hyphen (-).
^B1 supports print ratios of 2.0:1 to 3.0:1.
Field data (^FD) is limited to the width (or length, if rotated) of the label.
Format ^B1o,e,h,f,g
Important If additional information about the Code 11 bar code is required, go to
www.aimglobal.org.
Parameters Details
o = orientation Accepted Values:
N = normal
e = check digit Accepted Values:
Y = 1 digit
N = 2 digits
Default Value: N
h = bar code height (in
dots)
f = print interpretation
line
Accepted Values:
Y = yes
N = no
Default Value: Y
g = print interpretation
line above code
Accepted Values:
Y = yes
N = no
Default Value: N
ZPL Commands
^B1
54
Example This is an example of the Code 11 bar code:
CODE 11 BAR CODE
^XA
^FO100,100^BY3
^B1N,N,150,Y,N
^FD123456^FS
^XZ
CODE 11 BAR CODE CHARACTERS
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 -
Internal Start/Stop Character:
ZPL II CODE
is used with 1 check digit
is used with 2 check digits
When used as a stop character:
55
ZPL Commands
^B2
^B2
Interleaved 2 of 5 Bar Code
Description The ^B2 command produces the Interleaved 2 of 5 bar code, a high-density,
self-checking, continuous, numeric symbology.
Each data character for the Interleaved 2 of 5 bar code is composed of five elements: five bars
or five spaces. Of the five elements, two are wide and three are narrow. The bar code is formed
by interleaving characters formed with all spaces into characters formed with all bars.
Format ^B2o,h,f,g,e,j
Important If additional information about the Interleaved 2 of 5 bar code is required, go to
www.aimglobal.org.
Parameters Details
N = normal
dots)
line
Accepted Values:
Y = yes
N = no
Default Value: Y
line above code
Accepted Values:
Y = yes
N = no
Default Value: N
e = calculate and print
Mod 10 check digit
Accepted Values:
Y = yes
N = no
Default Value: N
ZPL Commands
^B2
56
Comments The total number of digits in an Interleaved 2 of 5 bar code must be even. The
printer automatically adds a leading 0 (zero) if an odd number of digits is received.
The Interleaved 2 of 5 bar code uses the Mod 10 check-digit scheme for error checking. For
more information on Mod 10 check digits, see Mod 10 Check Digit on page 908.
Example This is an example of an Interleaved 2 of 5 bar code:
INTERLEAVED 2 OF 5 BAR CODE
^XA
^FO100,100^BY3
^B2N,150,Y,N,N
^FD123456^FS
^XZ
INTERLEAVED 2 OF 5 BAR CODE CHARACTERS
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Start/Stop (internal)
ZPL II CODE
57
ZPL Commands
^B3
^B3
Code 39 Bar Code
Description The Code 39 bar code is the standard for many industries, including the U.S.
Department of Defense. It is one of three symbologies identified in the American National
Standards Institute (ANSI) standard MH10.8M-1983. Code 39 is also known as USD-3 Code
and 3 of 9 Code.
Each character in a Code 39 bar code is composed of nine elements: five bars, four spaces, and
an inter-character gap. Three of the nine elements are wide; the six remaining elements are
narrow.
Code 39 automatically generates the start and stop character (*).
Asterisk (*) for start and stop character prints in the interpretation line, if the interpretation
line is turned on.
Code 39 is capable of encoding the full 128-character ASCII set.
Format ^B3o,e,h,f,g
www.aimglobal.org.
Parameters Details
N = normal
e = Mod-43 check digit Accepted Values:
Y = yes
N = no
Default Value: N
dots)
ZPL Commands
^B3
58
Comments Extended ASCII is a function of the scanner, not of the bar code. Your scanner
must have extended ASCII enabled for this feature to work. To enable extended ASCII in the
Code 39, you must first encode +$ in your ^FD statement. To disable extended ASCII, you
must encode -$ in your ^FD statement.
line
Accepted Values:
Y = yes
N = no
Default Value: Y
line above code
Accepted Values:
Y = yes
N = no
Default Value: N
Example This is an example of a Code 39 bar code:
Example This example encodes a carriage return with line feed into a Code 39 bar code:
Parameters Details
CODE 39 BAR CODE
^XA
^FO100,100^BY3
^B3N,N,100,Y,N
^FD123ABC^FS
^XZ
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
- . $ / + % Space
ZPL II CODE
^XA
^FO20,20
^B3N,N,100,Y
^FDTEST+$$M$J-$^FS
^XZ
ZPL II CODE GENERATED LABELS
59
ZPL Commands
^B3
Full ASCII Mode for Code 39
Code 39 can generate the full 128-character ASCII set using paired characters as shown in
these tables:
Table 1 Code 39 Full ASCII Mode
ASCII Code 39
SOH
STX
ETX
EOT
ENQ
ACK
BEL
BS
HT
LF
VT
FF
CR
SO
SI
DLE
DC1
DC2
DC3
DC4
NAK
SYN
ETB
CAN
EM
SUB
ESC
FS
FS
RS
US
$A
$B
$C
$D
$E
$F
$G
$H
$I
$J
$K
$L
$M
$N
$O
$P
$Q
$R
$S
$T
$U
$V
$W
$X
$Y
$Z
%A
%B
%C
%D
%E
ASCII Code 39
SP
!
#
$
%
&
(
)
*
++
-
.
/
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?
Space
/A
/B
/C
/D
/E
/F
/G
/H
/I
/J
/K
/L
-
.
/O
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
/Z
%F
%G
%H
%I
%J
ZPL Commands
^B3
60
ASCII Code 39
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
\
]
^
_
%V
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
%K
%L
%M
%N
%O
ASCII Code 39
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
I
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
|
}
~
DEL
%W
+A
+B
+C
+D
+E
+F
+G
+H
+I
+J
+K
+L
+M
+N
+O
+P
+Q
+R
+S
+T
+U
+V
+W
+X
+Y
+Z
%P
%Q
%R
%S
%T, %X
61
ZPL Commands
^B4
^B4
Code 49 Bar Code
Description The ^B4 command creates a multi-row, continuous, variable-length
symbology capable of encoding the full 128-character ASCII set. It is ideally suited for
applications requiring large amounts of data in a small space.
The code consists of two to eight rows. A row consists of a leading quiet zone, four symbol
characters encoding eight code characters, a stop pattern, and a trailing quiet zone. A separator
bar with a height of one module separates each row. Each symbol character encodes two
characters from a set of Code 49 characters.
^B4 has a fixed print ratio.
Rows can be scanned in any order.
Format ^B4o,h,f,m
Important For additional information about the Code 49 bar code is required, go to
www.aimglobal.org.
Parameters Details
N = normal
h = height multiplier of
individual rows
Accepted Values: 1 to height of label
This number multiplied by the module equals the height of
the individual rows in dots. 1 is not a recommended value.
ZPL Commands
^B4
62
line
Accepted Values:
N = no line printed
A = print interpretation line above code
B = print interpretation line below code
Default Value: N
When the field data exceeds two rows, expect the
interpretation line to extend beyond the right edge of the
bar code symbol.
m = starting mode Accepted Values:
0 = Regular Alphanumeric Mode
1 = Multiple Read Alphanumeric
2 = Regular Numeric Mode
3 = Group Alphanumeric Mode
4 = Regular Alphanumeric Shift 1
5 = Regular Alphanumeric Shift 2
A = Automatic Mode. The printer determines the starting
mode by analyzing the field data.
Default Value: A
Parameters Details
CODE 49 BAR CODE
^XA
^FO150,100^BY3
^B4N,20,A,A
^FD12345ABCDE^FS
^XZ
ZPL II CODE
63
ZPL Commands
^B4
Table 3 Code 49
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
-
.
SPACE
$
/
++
%
< (Shift 1)
> (Shift 2)
: (N.A.)
; (N.A.)
? (N.A.)
= (Numeric Shift)
Field Data
Set
Unshifted
Character Set
Shift 1
Character Set
Shift 2
Character Set
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
-
.
SPACE
$
/
++
%
ESC
FS
GS
RS
US
!
#
&
SOH
STX
ETX
EOT
ENQ
ACK
BEL
BS
HT
LF
VT
FF
CR
SO
SI
DLE
DC1
DC2
DC3
DC4
NAK
SYN
ETB
CAN
EM
SUB
(
)
Null
*
,
:
reserved
;
<
=
>
?
@
[
\
]
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
I
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
_
DEL
{
|
}
~
Code 49 Shift 1 and 2 Character Substitutions
ZPL Commands
^B4
64
Code 49 Field Data Character Set
The ^FD data sent to the printer when using starting modes 0 to 5 is based on the
Code 49 Internal Character Set. This is shown in the first column of the Code 49 table on the
previous page. These characters are Code 49 control characters:
: ; < = > ?
Valid field data must be supplied when using modes 0 to 5. Shifted characters are sent as a
two-character sequence of a shift character followed by a character in the unshifted character
set.
If an invalid sequence is detected, the Code 49 formatter stops interpreting field data and prints
a symbol with the data up to the invalid sequence. These are examples of invalid sequences:
Terminating numeric mode with any characters other than 0 to 9 or a Numeric Space.
Starting in Mode 4 (Regular Alphanumeric Shift 1) and the first field data character is
not in the Shift 1 set.
Starting in Mode 5 (Regular Alphanumeric Shift 2) and the first field data character is
not in the Shift 2 set.
Sending Shift 1 followed by a character not in the Shift 1 set.
Sending Shift 2 followed by a character not in the Shift 2 set.
Sending two Shift 1 or Shift 2 control characters.
Advantages of Using the Code 49 Automatic Mode
Using the default (Automatic Mode) completely eliminates the need for selecting the starting
mode or manually performing character shifts. The Automatic Mode analyzes the incoming
ASCII string, determines the proper mode, performs all character shifts, and compacts the data
for maximum efficiency.
Numeric Mode is selected or shifted only when five or more continuous digits are found.
Numeric packaging provides no space advantage for numeric strings consisting of fewer than
eight characters.
Example To encode a lowercase a, send a > (Shift 2) followed by an uppercase A. If
interpretation line printing is selected, a lowercase a prints in the interpretation line. This
reflects what the output from the scanner reads. Code 49 uses uppercase alphanumeric
characters only.
65
ZPL Commands
^B5
^B5
Planet Code bar code
Description The ^B5 command is supported in all printers as a resident bar code.
Format ^B5o,h,f,g
Note Accepted bar code characters are 0 - 9.
Parameters Details
o = orientation code Accepted Values:
N = normal
R = rotated
dots)
f = interpretation line Accepted Values:
N = no
Y = yes
Default Value: N
g = determines if the
interpretation line is
printed above the bar
code
Accepted Values:
N = no
Y = yes
Default Value: N
Example This is an example of a Planet Code bar code:
^XA
^FO150,100^BY3
^B5N,100,Y,N
^FD12345678901^FS
^XZ
ZPL Commands
^B7
66
^B7
PDF417 Bar Code
Description The ^B7 command produces the PDF417 bar code, a two-dimensional,
multirow, continuous, stacked symbology. PDF417 is capable of encoding over 1,000
characters per bar code. It is ideally suited for applications requiring large amounts of
information at the time the bar code is read.
The bar code consists of three to 90 stacked rows. Each row consists of start and stop patterns
and symbol characters called code-words. A code-word consists of four bars and four spaces.
A three code-word minimum is required per row.
The PDF417 bar code is also capable of using the structured append option (^FM), which
allows you to extend the field data limitations by printing multiple bar codes. For more
information on using structured append, see ^FM on page 187.
PDF417 has a fixed print ratio.
Field data (^FD) is limited to 3K of character data.
Format ^B7o,h,s,c,r,t
Parameters Details
N = normal
h = bar code height for
individual rows (in
dots)
Accepted Values: 1 to height of label
This number multiplied by the module equals the height of
the individual rows in dots. If this number is not specified,
the overall bar code height, divided by the number of
rows, equals the height of the individual rows in dots,
where the overall bar code height is defined by the ^BY
command. 1 is not a recommended value.
s = security level Accepted Values: 1 to 8 (error detection and correction)
Default Value: 0 (error detection only)
This determines the number of error detection and
correction code-words to be generated for the symbol. The
default level provides only error detection without
correction. Increasing the security level adds increasing
levels of error correction and increases the symbol size.
67
ZPL Commands
^B7

c = number of data
columns to encode
Default Value: 1:2 (row-to-column aspect ratio)
You can specify the number of code-word columns giving
control over the width of the symbol.
r = number of rows to
encode
Default Value: 1:2 (row-to-column aspect ratio)
You can specify the number of symbol rows giving control
over the height of the symbol. For example, with no row
or column values entered, 72 code-words would be
encoded into a symbol of six columns and 12 rows.
Depending on code-words, the aspect ratio is not always
exact.
t = truncate right row
indicators and stop
pattern
Accepted Values:
N = no truncation
Y = perform truncation
Default Value: N
Example This is an example of a PDF417 bar code:
Parameters Details
PDF417 BAR CODE
^XA
^BY2,3
^FO10,10^B7N,5,5,,83,N
^FDZebra Technologies
Corporation strives to be
the expert supplier of
innovative solutions to
speciality demand labeling
and ticketing problems of
business and government.
We will attract and retain
the best people who will
understand our customer's
needs and provide them with
systems, hardware, software,
consumables and service
offering the best value,
high quality, and reliable
performance, all delivered
in a timely manner.
^FS^XZ
ZPL II CODE
ZPL Commands
^B7
68
Comments Noted in this bulleted list:
If both columns and rows are specified, their product must be less than 928.
No symbol is printed if the product of columns and rows is greater than 928.
No symbol is printed if total code-words are greater than the product of columns and rows.
Serialization is not allowed with this bar code.
The truncation feature can be used in situations where label damage is not likely. The right
row indicators and stop pattern is reduced to a single module bar width. The difference
between a non truncated and a truncated bar code is shown in the previous examples.
Example This is an example of a PDF417 without and with truncation selected:
Example This example shows the ^B7 command used with field hex (^FH) characters:
^XA
^FO50,50^BY3,3.0^B7N,8,5,7,21,N
^FH_^FD[)>_1E06_1DP12345678_1DQ160
_1D1JUN123456789A2B4C6D8E_1D20LA6-987
_1D21L54321 ZES_1D15KG1155
_1DBSC151208_1D7Q10GT_1E_04^FS
^XZ
69
ZPL Commands
^B7
Special Considerations for ^BY When Using PDF417
When used with ^B7, the parameters for the ^BY command are:
w = module width (in dots)
Default Value: 2
r = ratio
Fixed Value: 3 (ratio has no effect on PDF417)
h = height of bars (in dots)
Default Value: 10
PDF417 uses this only when row height is not specified in the ^B7 h parameter.
Special Considerations for ^FD When Using PDF417
The character set sent to the printer with the ^FD command includes the full ASCII set, except
for those characters with special meaning to the printer.
See Zebra Code Page 850 on page 882, ^CC ~CC on page 144, and ^CT ~CT on page 155.
CR and LF are also valid characters for all ^FD statements. This scheme is used:
\& = carriage return/line feed
\\ = backslash (\)
^CI13 must be selected to print a backslash (\).
ZPL Commands
^B8
70
^B8
EAN-8 Bar Code
Description The ^B8 command is the shortened version of the EAN-13 bar code. EAN is
an acronym for European Article Numbering. Each character in the EAN-8 bar code is
composed of four elements: two bars and two spaces.
^B8 supports a fixed ratio.
Field data (^FD) is limited to exactly seven characters. ZPL II automatically pads or
truncates on the left with zeros to achieve the required number of characters.
When using JAN-8 (Japanese Article Numbering), a specialized application of EAN-8,
the first two non-zero digits sent to the printer are always 49.
Format ^B8o,h,f,g
Important If additional information about the EAN-8 bar code is required, go to
www.aimglobal.org.
Parameters Details
N = normal
dots)
line
Accepted Values:
N = no
Y = yes
Default Value: Y
line above code
Accepted Values:
N = no
Y = yes
Default Value: N
71
ZPL Commands
^B8
Example This is an example of an EAN-8 bar code:
EAN-8 BAR CODE
^XA
^FO100,100^BY3
^B8N,100,Y,N
^FD1234567^FS
^XZ
EAN-8 BAR CODE CHARACTERS
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
ZPL II CODE
ZPL Commands
^B9
72
^B9
UPC-E Bar Code
Description The ^B9 command produces a variation of the UPC symbology used for
number system 0. It is a shortened version of the UPC-A bar code, where zeros are suppressed,
resulting in codes that require less printing space. The 6 dot/mm, 12 dot/mm, and 24 dot/mm
printheads produce the UPC and EAN symbologies at 100 percent of their size. However, an
8 dot/mm printhead produces the UPC and EAN symbologies at a magnification factor of 77
percent.
Each character in a UPC-E bar code is composed of four elements: two bars and two spaces.
The ^BY command must be used to specify the width of the narrow bar.
^B9 supports a fixed ratio.
Field data (^FD) is limited to exactly 10 characters, requiring a five-digit manufacturers
code and five-digit product code.
When using the zero-suppressed versions of UPC, you must enter the full
10-character sequence. ZPL II calculates and prints the shortened version.
Format ^B9,h,f,g,e
Important If additional information about the UPC-E bar code is required, go to
www.aimglobal.org.
Parameters Details
N = normal
dots)
line
Accepted Values:
N = no
Y = yes
Default Value: Y
73
ZPL Commands
^B9
Rules for Proper Product Code Numbers
If the last three digits in the manufacturers number are 000, 100, or 200, valid product
code numbers are 00000 to 00999.
If the last three digits in the manufacturers number are 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, or
900, valid product code numbers are 00000 to 00099.
If the last two digits in the manufacturers number are 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, or 90,
valid product code numbers are 00000 to 00009.
If the manufacturers number does not end in zero (0), valid product code numbers are
00005 to 00009.
line above code
Accepted Values:
N = no
Y = yes
Default Value: N
e = print check digit Accepted Values:
N = no
Y = yes
Default Value: Y
Example This is an example of a UPC-E bar code:
Parameters Details
UPC-E BAR CODE
^XA
^FO150,100^BY3
^B9N,100,Y,N,Y
^FD1230000045^FS
^XZ
UPC-E BAR CODE CHARACTERS
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
ZPL II CODE
ZPL Commands
^BA
74
^BA
Code 93 Bar Code
Description The ^BA command creates a variable length, continuous symbology. The
Code 93 bar code is used in many of the same applications as Code 39. It uses the full 128-
character ASCII set. ZPL II, however, does not support ASCII control codes or escape
sequences. It uses the substitute characters shown below.
Each character in the Code 93 bar code is composed of six elements: three bars and three
spaces. Although invoked differently, the human-readable interpretation line prints as though
the control code has been used.
^BA supports a fixed print ratio.
Format ^BAo,h,f,g,e
Control Code ZPL II Substitute
Ctrl $ &
Ctrl %
Ctrl / (
Ctrl + )
www.aimglobal.org.
Parameters Details
N = normal
dots)
line
Accepted Values:
N = no
Y = yes
Default Value: Y
75
ZPL Commands
^BA
Comments All control codes are used in pairs.
Code 93 is also capable of encoding the full 128-character ASCII set. For more details, see
Table 4 on page 76.
Full ASCII Mode for Code 93
Code 93 can generate the full 128-character ASCII set using paired characters as shown in
Table 4 on page 76.
line above code
Accepted Values:
N = no
Y = yes
Default Value: N
N = no
Y = yes
Default Value: N
Parameters Details
^XA
^FO100,75^BY3
^BAN,100,Y,N,N
^FD12345ABCDE^FS
^XZ
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
- . $ / + % & ( )
SPACE
ZPL II CODE
Denotes an internal start/stop character that must precede and follow
every bar code message.
CODE 93 BAR CODE
ZPL Commands
^BA
76
ASCII Code 93
NUL
SOH
STX
ETX
EOT
ENQ
ACK
BEL
BS
HT
LF
VT
FF
CR
SO
SI
DLE
DC1
DC2
DC3
DC4
NAK
SYN
ETB
CAN
EM
SUB
ESC
FS
FS
RS
US
U
&A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
A
B
C
D
E
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&O
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
ASCII Code 93
SP
!
#
$
%
&
(
)
*
++
-
.
/
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?
Space
(A
(B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
++
(L
-
.
/
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
(Z
F
G
H
I
J
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
77
ZPL Commands
^BA

ASCII Code 93
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
\
]
^
_
V
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
K
L
M
N
O
ASCII Code 93
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
I
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
|
}
~
DEL
W
)A
)B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
P
Q
R
S
T
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
ZPL Commands
^BB
78
^BB
CODABLOCK Bar Code
Description The ^BB command produces a two-dimensional, multirow, stacked
symbology. It is ideally suited for applications that require large amounts of information.
Depending on the mode selected, the code consists of one to 44 stacked rows. Each row begins
and ends with a start and stop pattern.
CODABLOCK A supports variable print ratios.
CODABLOCK E and F support only fixed print ratios.
Format ^BBo,h,s,c,r,m
Important If additional information about the CODABLOCK bar code is required, go to
www.aimglobal.org.
Parameters Details
N = normal
Default Value: N
h = bar code height for
individual rows (in
dots)
Default Value: 8
This number, multiplied by the module, equals the height
of the individual row in dots.
s = security level Accepted Values:
N = no
Y = yes
Default Value: Y
Security level determines whether symbol check-sums are
generated and added to the symbol. Check sums are never
generated for single-row symbols. This can be turned off
only if parameter m is set to A.
c = number of characters
per row (data
columns)
Accepted Values: 2 to 62 characters
This is used to encode a CODABLOCK symbol. It gives
the you control over the width of the symbol.
79
ZPL Commands
^BB
r = number of rows to
encode
Accepted Values:
for CODABLOCK A: 1 to 22
for CODABLOCK E and F: 2 to 4
If values for c and r are not specified, a single row is
produced.
If a value for r is not specified, and c exceeds the
maximum range, a single row equal to the field data
length is produced.
If a value for c is not specified, the number of
characters per row is derived by dividing the field
data by the value of r.
If both parameters are specified, the amount of field
data must be less than the product of the specified
parameters. If the field data exceeds the value of the
product, either no symbol or an error code is printed
(if ^CV is active).
If the data field contains primarily numeric data,
fewer than the specified rows might be printed. If the
field data contains several shift and code-switch
characters, more than the specified number of rows
might be printed.
m = mode Accepted Values: A, E, F
CODABLOCK A uses the Code 39 character set.
CODABLOCK F uses the Code 128 character set.
CODABLOCK E uses the Code 128 character set and
automatically adds FNC1.
Default Value: F
Parameters Details
ZPL Commands
^BB
80
Special Considerations for the ^BY Command When Using ^BB
The parameters for the ^BYw,r,h command, when used with a ^BB code, are as follows:
w = module width (in dots)
Accepted Values: 2 to 10 (CODABLOCK A only)
Default Value: 2
r = ratio
Fixed Value: 3 (ratio has no effect on CODABLOCK E or F)
h = height of bars (in dots)
Accepted Values: 1 to 32,32000
Default Value: 10
CODABLOCK uses this as the overall symbol height only when the row height is not
specified in the ^BB h parameter.
Example This is an example of a CODABLOCK bar code:
^XA
^BY2,3
^FO10,10^BBN,30,,30,44,E
speciality demand labeling
in a timely manner.^FS
^XZ
ZPL II CODE CODABLOCK BAR CODE
81
ZPL Commands
^BB
Special Considerations for ^FD Character Set When Using ^BB
The character set sent to the printer depends on the mode selected in parameter m.
CODABLOCK A: CODABLOCK A uses the same character set as Code 39. If any other
character is used in the ^FD statement, either no bar code is printed or an error message is
printed (if ^CV is active).
CODABLOCK E: The Automatic Mode includes the full ASCII set except for those
characters with special meaning to the printer. Function codes or the
Code 128 Subset A <nul> character can be inserted using of the ^FH command.
For any other character above 84 hex, either no bar code is printed or an error message is
printed (if ^CV is active).
CODABLOCK F: CODABLOCK F uses the full ASCII set, except for those characters
with special meaning to the printer. Function codes or the Code 128 Subset A <nul>
character can be inserted using of the ^FH command.
<fnc1> = 80 hex <fnc3> = 82 hex
<fnc2> = 81 hex <fnc4> = 83 hex
<nul> = 84 hex
<fnc1> = 80 hex <fnc3> = 82 hex
<fnc2> = 81 hex <fnc4> = 83 hex
<nul> = 84 hex
ZPL Commands
^BC
82
^BC
Code 128 Bar Code (Subsets A, B, and C)
Description The ^BC command creates the Code 128 bar code, a high-density, variable
length, continuous, alphanumeric symbology. It was designed for complexly encoded product
identification.
Code 128 has three subsets of characters. There are 106 encoded printing characters in each
set, and each character can have up to three different meanings, depending on the character
subset being used. Each Code 128 character consists of six elements: three bars and three
spaces.
^BC supports a fixed print ratio.
Format ^BCo,h,f,g,e,m
www.aimglobal.org.
Parameters Details
N = normal
dots)
line
Accepted Values: Y (yes) or N (no)
Default Value: Y
The interpretation line can be printed in any font by
placing the font command before the bar code command.
line above code
Accepted Values: Y (yes) or N (no)
Default Value: N
83
ZPL Commands
^BC
e = UCC check digit Accepted Values: Y (turns on) or N (turns off)
Mod 103 check digit is always there. It cannot be turned
on or off. Mod 10 and 103 appear together with e turned
on.
Default Value: N
m = mode Accepted Values:
N = no selected mode
U = UCC Case Mode
More than 19 digits in ^FD or ^SN are eliminated.
Fewer than 19 digits in ^FD or ^SN add zeros to the
right to bring the count to 19. This produces an
invalid interpretation line.
A = Automatic Mode
This analyzes the data sent and automatically
determines the best packing method. The full
ASCII character set can be used in the ^FD
statement the printer determines when to shift
subsets. A string of four or more numeric digits
causes an automatic shift to Subset C.
D = UCC/EAN Mode (x.11.x and newer firmware)
This allows dealing with UCC/EAN with and
without chained application identifiers. The code
starts in the appropriate subset followed by FNC1
to indicate a UCC/EAN 128 bar code. The printer
automatically strips out parentheses and spaces for
encoding, but prints them in the human-readable
section. The printer automatically determines if a
check digit is required, calculate it, and print it.
Automatically sizes the human readable.
Default Value: N
Parameters Details
CODE 128 BAR CODE ZPL II CODE
^XA
^FO100,100^BY3
^BCN,100,Y,N,N
^FD123456^FS
^XZ
ZPL Commands
^BC
84
Code 128 Subsets
The Code 128 character subsets are referred to as Subset A, Subset B, and Subset C. A subset
can be selected in these ways:
A special Invocation Code can be included in the field data (^FD) string associated with
that bar code.
The desired Start Code can be placed at the beginning of the field data. If no Start Code is
entered, Subset B are used.
To change subsets within a bar code, place the Invocation Code at the appropriate points
within the field data (^FD) string. The new subset stays in effect until changed with the
Invocation Code. For example, in Subset C, >7 in the field data changes the Subset to A.
Table 6 shows the Code 128 Invocation Codes and Start Characters for the three subsets.
Table 6 Code 128 Invocation Characters
><
>0
>=
>1
>2
>3
>4
>5
>6
>7
>8
>9
>:
>;
62
30
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
>
USQ
FNC 3
FNC 2
SHIFT
CODE C
CODE B
FNC 4
FNC 1
Start Code A
Start Code B
Start Code C
>
~
DEL
FNC 3
FNC 2
SHIFT
CODE C
FNC 4
CODE A
FNC 1
(Numeric Pairs give Alpha/Numerics)
(Normal Alpha/Numeric)
(All numeric (00 - 99)
CODE B
CODE A
FNC 1
Invocation
Code
Start Characters
Decimal
Value
Subset A
Character
Subset B
Character
Subset C
Character
85
ZPL Commands
^BC
Table 7 shows the character sets for Code 128:
Table 7 Code 128 character sets
Code A
SP
!
''
#
$
%
&
'
(
)
*
+
,
-
.
/
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
Code B
SP
!
''
#
$
%
&
'
(
)
*
+
,
-
.
/
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
Code C
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
Value
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
Code C
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
Code B
Code A
FNC1
Code B
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
\
]
^
_
.
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
|
}
~
DEL
FNC3
FNC2
SHIFT
Code C
FNC4
Code A
FNC1
START (Code A)
START (Code B)
START (Code C)
Code A
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
\
]
^
_
NUL
SOH
STX
ETX
EOT
ENQ
ACK
BEL
BS
HT
LF
VT
FF
CR
SO
SI
DLE
DC1
DC2
DC3
DC4
NAK
SYN
ETB
CAN
EM
SUB
ESC
FS
GS
RS
US
FNC3
FNC2
SHIFT
Code C
Code B
FNC4
FNC1
ZPL Commands
^BC
86
How ^BC Works Within a ZPL II Script
^XA the first command starts the label format.
^FO100,75 the second command sets the field origin at 100 dots across the x-axis and 75
dots down the y-axis from the upper-left corner.
^BCN,100,Y,N,N the third command calls for a Code 128 bar code to be printed with
no rotation (N) and a height of 100 dots. An interpretation line is printed (Y) below the bar
code (N). No UCC check digit is used (N).
^FDCODE128^FS (Figure A) ^FD>:CODE128^FS (Figure B) the field data command
specifies the content of the bar code.
^XZ the last command ends the field data and indicates the end of the label.
The interpretation line prints below the code with the UCC check digit turned off.
Example Figures A and B are examples of identical bar codes, and Figure C is an example
of switching from Subset C to B to A, as follows:
Because Code 128 Subset B is the most commonly used subset, ZPL II defaults to Subset B if
no start character is specified in the data string.
^XA
^FO100,75
^BCN,100,Y,N,N
^FDCODE128^FS
^XZ
Figure A: Subset B with no start character
^XA
^FO100,75
^BCN,100,Y,N,N
^FD>:CODE128^FS
^XZ
Figure B: Subset B with start character
^XA
^FO50,50
^BY3^BCN,100,Y,N,N
^FD>;382436>6CODE128>752375152^FS
^XZ
Figure C: Switching from Subset C to B to A
87
ZPL Commands
^BC
The ^FD command for Figure A does not specify any subset, so Subset B is used. In Figure B,
the ^FD command specifically calls Subset B with the >: Start Code. Although ZPL II defaults
to Code B, it is good practice to include the Invocation Codes in the command.
Code 128 Subset B is programmed directly as ASCII text, except for values greater than 94
decimal and a few special characters that must be programmed using the invocation codes.
Those characters are:
^ > ~
Example Code 128 Subsets A and C
Code 128, Subsets A and C are programmed in pairs of digits, 00 to 99, in the field data
string. For details, see Table 6 on page 84.
In Subset A, each pair of digits results in a single character being encoded in the bar code; in
Subset C, characters are printed as entered. Figure E below is an example of Subset A (>9 is
the Start Code for Subset A).
Nonintegers programmed as the first character of a digit pair (D2) are ignored. However,
nonintegers programmed as the second character of a digit pair (2D) invalidate the entire
digit pair, and the pair is ignored. An extra unpaired digit in the field data string just before a
code shift is also ignored.
Figure C and Figure D below are examples of Subset C. Notice that the bar codes are
identical. In the program code for Figure D, the D is ignored and the 2 is paired with the 4.
^XA
^FO100,75^BY3
^BCN,100,Y,N,N
^FD>;382436^FS
^XZ
Figure C: Subset C with normal data
^XA
^FO100,75^BY3
^BCN,100,Y,N,N
^FD>;38D2436^FS
^XZ
Figure D: Subset C with ignored alpha character
^XA
^FO100,75^BY3
^BCN,100,Y,N,N
^FD>935473637171824^FS
^XZ
Figure E: Subset A
ZPL Commands
^BC
88
The UCC/EAN-128 Symbology
The symbology specified for the representation of Application Identifier data is UCC/EAN-
128, a variant of Code 128, exclusively reserved to EAN International and the Uniform Code
Council (UCC).
UCC/EAN-128 offers several advantages. It is one of the most complete, alphanumeric, one-
dimensional symbologies available today. The use of three different character sets (A, B and
C), facilitates the encoding of the full 128 ASCII character set. Code 128 is one of the most
compact linear bar code symbologies. Character set C enables numeric data to be represented
in a double density mode. In this mode, two digits are represented by only one symbol
character saving valuable space. The code is concatenated. That means that multiple AIs and
their fields may be combined into a single bar code. The code is also very reliable. Code 128
symbols use two independent self-checking features which improves printing and scanning
reliability.
UCC/EAN-128 bar codes always contain a special non-data character known as function 1
(FNC 1), which follows the start character of the bar code. It enables scanners and processing
software to auto-discriminate between UCC/EAN-128 and other bar code symbologies, and
subsequently only process relevant data.
The UCC/EAN-128 bar code is made up of a leading quiet zone, a Code 128 start character A,
B, or C, a FNC 1 character, Data (Application Identifier plus data field), a symbol check
character, a stop character, and a trailing quiet zone.
UCC/EAN, UCC/128 are a couple of ways you'll hear someone refer to the code. This just
indicates that the code is structured as dictated by the application identifiers that are used.
SSCC (Serial Shipping Container Code) formatted following the data structure layout for
Application Identifier 00. See Table 8, UCC Application Identifier Table on page 93. It could
be 00 which is the SSCC code. The customer needs to let us know what application identifiers
are used for their bar code so we can help them.
There are several ways of writing the code to print the code to Application Identifier '00'
structure.
Note It is not intended to be used for data to be scanned at the point of sales in retail outlets.
89
ZPL Commands
^BC
Using N for the mode (m) parameter
>;>8' sets it to subset C, function 1
'00' is the application identifier followed by '17 characters', the check digit is selected
using the 'Y' for the (e) parameter to automatically print the 20th character.
you are not limited to 19 characters with mode set to N
Using U for the mode (m) parameter
UCC Case Mode
Choosing U selects UCC Case mode. You will have exactly 19 characters available in
^FD.
Subset C using FNC1 values are automatically selected.
Check digit is automatically inserted.
Example This example shows with application identifier 00 structure:
^XA
^FO90,200^BY4
^BCN,256,Y,N,Y,N
^FD>;>80012345123451234512^FS
^XZ
ZPL II CODE
N FOR THE M PARAMETER
Example The example shows the application identifier 00 format:
^XA
^FO90,200
^BY4^BC,256,Y,N,,U
^FD0012345123451234512^FS
^XZ
ZPL II CODE
U FOR THE M PARAMETER
ZPL Commands
^BC
90
Using D for the mode (m) parameter
(0 at end of field data is a bogus character that is inserted as a place holder for the check digit
the printer will automatically insert.
Subset C using FNC1 values are automatically selected.
Parentheses and spaces can be in the field data. '00' application identifier, followed by
17 characters, followed by bogus check digit place holder.
Check digit is automatically inserted. The printer will automatically calculate the
check digit and put it into the bar code and interpretation line.
The interpretation line will also show the parentheses and spaces but will strip them
out from the actual bar code.
Printing the Interpretation Line
The font command (Â0N,40,30) can be added and changed to alter the font and size of the
interpretation line.
With firmware version later than x.10.x
A separate text field needs to be written.
The interpretation line needs to be turned off.
Â0N,50,40 is the font and size selection for the separate text field.
Example This example shows application identifier 00 format ((x.11.x or later):
^XA
^FO50,200^BCN,150,Y,N,,D
^FD(00)10084423 7449200940^FS
^XZ
ZPL II CODE D FOR THE M PARAMETER
Example This example shows printing the interpretation in a different font with firmware
x.11.x or later:
^XA
^FO50,200
Â0N,40,30^BCN,150,Y,N,Y
^FD>;>80012345123451234512^FS
^XZ
ZPL II CODE INTERPRETATION LINE
91
ZPL Commands
^BC
You have to make sure you enter the correct check digit in the text field.
Creating a separate text field allows you to format the interpretation line with
parentheses and spaces.
^XA
^FO25,25
^BCN,150,N,N,Y
^FD>;>80012345123451234512^FS
^FO100,190
Â0N,50,40
^FD(00) 1 2345123 451234512 0^FS
^XZ
ZPL II CODE FIRMWARE OLDER THAN X.10.X
ZPL Commands
^BC
92
Application Identifiers UCC/EAN APPLICATION IDENTIFIER
An Application Identifier is a prefix code used to identify the meaning and the format of the
data that follows it (data field).
There are AIs for identification, traceability, dates, quantity, measurements, locations, and
many other types of information.
For example, the AI for batch number is 10, and the batch number AI is always followed by an
alphanumeric batch code not to exceed 20-characters.
The UCC/EAN Application Identifiers provide an open standard that can be used and
understood by all companies in the trading chain, regardless of the company that originally
issued the codes.
93
ZPL Commands
^BC
Table 8 UCC Application Identifier Table
Data Content AI
Plus The Following Data
Structure
Serial Shipping Container Code (SSCC) 00 exactly 18 digits
Shipping Container Code 01 exactly 14 digits
Batch Numbers 10 up to 20 alpha numerics
Production Date (YYMMDD) 11 exactly 6 digits
Packaging Date (YYMMDD) 13 exactly 6 digits
Sell By Date (YYMMDD) 15 exactly 6 digits
Expiration Date (YYMMDD) 17 exactly 6 digits
Product Variant 20 exactly 2 digits
Serial Number 21 up to 20 alpha numerics
HIBCC Quantity, Date, Batch and Link 22 up to 29 alpha numerics
Lot Number 23* up to 19 alpha numerics
Quantity Each 30
Net Weight (Kilograms) 310** exactly 6 digits
Length, Meters 311** exactly 6 digits
Width or Diameter (Meters) 312** exactly 6 digits
Depths (Meters) 313** exactly 6 digits
Area (Sq. Meters) 314** exactly 6 digits
Volume (Liters) 315** exactly 6 digits
Volume (Cubic Meters) 316** exactly 6 digits
Net Weight (Pounds) 320** exactly 6 digits
Customer PO Number 400 up to 29 alpha numerics
Ship To (Deliver To) Location Code using
EAN 13 or DUNS Number with leading
zeros
410 exactly 13 digits
Bill To (Invoice To) Location Code using
EAN 13 or DUNS Number with leading
zeros
Purchase from 412 exactly 13 digits
Ship To (Deliver To) Postal Code within
single postal authority
420 up to 9 alpha numerics
Ship To (Deliver To) Postal Code with 3-
digit ISO Country Code Prefix
421 3 digits plus up to 9 alpha numerics
Roll Products - width, length, core diameter,
direction and splices
Electronic Serial number for cellular mobile
phone
8002 up to 20 alpha numerics
ZPL Commands
^BC
94
For date fields that only need to indicate a year and month, the day field is set to 00.
* Plus one digit for length indication.
** Plus one digit for decimal point indication.
Note Table 8 is a partial table showing the application identifiers. For more current and
complete information, search the Internet for UCC Application Identifier.
95
ZPL Commands
^BC
Chaining several application identifiers (firmware x.11.x or later)
The FNC1, which is invoked by >8, is inserted just before the AI's so that the scanners reading
the code sees the FNC1 and knows that an AI follows.
Example This is an example with the mode parameter set to A (automatic):
^XA
^BY2,2.5,193
^FO33,400
^BCN,,N,N,N,A
^FD>;>80204017773003486100008535>8910001>837252^FS
^FT33,625ÂEN,0,0^FD(02)04017773003486(10)0008535(91)
0001(37)252^FS
^XZ
Example This is an example with the mode parameter set to U:
^XA
^BY3,2.5,193
^FO33,200
^BCN,,N,N,N,U
^FD>;>80204017773003486>8100008535>8910001>837252^FS
^FT33,455Â0N,30,30^FD(02)04017773003486(10)0008535(9
1)0001(37)252^FS
^XZ
Example This is an example with the mode parameter set to D*:
^XA
^PON
^LH0,0
^BY2,2.5,145
^FO218,343
^BCB,,Y,N,N,D
^FD(91)0005886>8(10)0000410549>8(99)05^FS
^XZ
D* When trying to print the last Application Identifier with an odd number of characters,
a problem existed when printing EAN128 bar codes using Mode D. The problem was fixed
in firmware version v60.13.0.6.
ZPL Commands
^BD
96
^BD
UPS MaxiCode Bar Code
Description The ^BD command creates a two-dimensional, optically read (not scanned)
code. This symbology was developed by UPS (United Parcel Service).
Notice that there are no additional parameters for this code and it does not generate an
interpretation line. The ^BY command has no effect on the UPS MaxiCode bar code.
However, the ^CV command can be activated.
Format ^BDm,n,t
Parameters Details
m = mode Accepted Values:
2 = structured carrier message: numeric postal code
(U.S.)
3 = structured carrier message: alphanumeric postal
code (non-U.S.)
4 = standard symbol, secretary
5 = full EEC
6 = reader program, secretary
Default Value: 2
n = symbol number Accepted Values: 1 to 8 can be added in a structured
document
Default Value: 1
t = total number of
symbols
Accepted Values: 1 to 8, representing the total number of
symbols in this sequence
Default Value: 1
Example This is an example of UPS MAXICODE - MODE 2 bar code:
ZPL II CODE
^XA
^FO50,50
^CVY
^BD^FH^FD001840152382802
[)>_1E01_1D961Z00004951_1DUPSN_
1D_06X610_1D159_1D1234567_1D1/1_
1D_1DY_1D634 ALPHA DR_
1DPITTSBURGH_1DPA_1E_04^FS
^FO30,300Â0,30,30^FDMode2^FS
^XZ
UPS MAXICODE - MODE 2
97
ZPL Commands
^BD
Special Considerations for ^FD when Using ^BD
The ^FD statement is divided into two parts: a high priority message (hpm) and a low priority
message (lpm). There are two types of high priority messages. One is for a U.S. Style Postal
Code; the other is for a non-U.S. Style Postal Code. The syntax for either of these high priority
messages must be exactly as shown or an error message is generated.
Format ^FD <hpm><lpm>
Parameters Details
<hpm> = high priority
message (applicable
only in Modes 2 and
3)
Accepted Values: 0 to 9, except where noted
U.S. Style Postal Code (Mode 2)
<hpm> = aaabbbcccccdddd
aaa = three-digit class of service
bbb = three-digit country zip code
ccccc = five-digit zip code
dddd = four-digit zip code extension (if none exists,
four zeros (0000) must be entered)
non-U.S. Style Postal Code (Mode 3)
<hpm> = aaabbbcccccc
aaa = three-digit class of service
bbb = three-digit country zip code
ccccc = six-digit zip code (A through Z or 0 to 9)
<lpm> = low priority
message (only
applicable in Modes
2 and 3)
GS is used to separate fields in a message (0x1D). RS is used
to separate format types (0x1E). EOT is the end of
transmission characters.
Message Header [)>RS
Transportation Data
Format Header 01GS96
Tracking Number* <tracking number>
SCAC* GS<SCAC>
UPS Shipper Number GS<shipper number>
Julian Day of Pickup GS<day of pickup>
Shipment ID Number GS<shipment ID number>
Package n/x GS<n/x>
Package Weight GS<weight>
Address Validation GS<validation>
Ship to Street Address GS<street address>
Ship to City GS<city>
Ship to State GS<state>
RS RS
End of Message EOT
(* Mandatory Data for UPS)
ZPL Commands
^BD
98
Comments
The formatting of <hpm> and <lpm> apply only when using Modes 2 and 3.
Mode 4, for example, takes whatever data is defined in the ^FD command and places it in
the symbol.
UPS requires that certain data be present in a defined manner. When formatting MaxiCode
data for UPS, always use uppercase characters. When filling in the fields in the <lpm> for
UPS, follow the data size and types specified in Guide to Bar Coding with UPS.
If you do not choose a mode, the default is Mode 2. If you use non-U.S. Postal Codes, you
probably get an error message (invalid character or message too short). When using non-
U.S. codes, use Mode 3.
ZPL II doesnt automatically change your mode based on the zip code format.
When using special characters, such as GS, RS, or EOT, use the ^FH command to tell
ZPL II to use the hexadecimal value following the underscore character ( _ ).
99
ZPL Commands
^BE
^BE
EAN-13 Bar Code
Description The ^BE command is similar to the UPC-A bar code. It is widely used
throughout Europe and Japan in the retail marketplace.
The EAN-13 bar code has 12 data characters, one more data character than the UPC-A code.
An EAN-13 symbol contains the same number of bars as the UPC-A, but encodes a 13th digit
into a parity pattern of the left-hand six digits. This 13th digit, in combination with the 12th
digit, represents a country code.
^BE supports fixed print ratios.
Field data (^FD) is limited to exactly 12 characters. ZPL II automatically truncates or
pads on the left with zeros to achieve the required number of characters.
When using JAN-13 (Japanese Article Numbering), a specialized application of EAN-13,
the first two non-zero digits sent to the printer must be 49.
Format ^BEo,h,f,g
Note Use Interleaved 2 of 5 for UCC and EAN 14.
Important If additional information about the EAN-13 bar code is required, go to
www.aimglobal.org.
Parameters Details
N = normal
dots)
line
Accepted Values:
N = no
Y = yes
Default Value: Y
line above code
Accepted Values:
N = no
Y = yes
Default Value: N
ZPL Commands
^BE
100
Comments The EAN-13 bar code uses the Mod 10 check-digit scheme for error checking.
For more information on Mod 10, see Mod 10 Check Digit on page 908.
Example This is an example of an EAN-13 bar code:
^XA
^FO100,100^BY3
^BEN,100,Y,N
^FD12345678^FS
^XZ
EAN-13 BAR CODE CHARACTERS
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
ZPL II CODE EAN-13 BAR CODE
101
ZPL Commands
^BF
^BF
MicroPDF417 Bar Code
Description The ^BF command creates a two-dimensional, multi-row, continuous, stacked
symbology identical to PDF417, except it replaces the 17-module-wide start and stop patterns
and left/right row indicators with a unique set of 10-module-wide row address patterns. These
reduce overall symbol width and allow linear scanning at row heights as low as 2X.
MicroPDF417 is designed for applications with a need for improved area efficiency but
without the requirement for PDF417s maximum data capacity. It can be printed only in
specific combinations of rows and columns up to a maximum of four data columns by 44
rows.
Field data (^FD) and field hexadecimal (^FH) are limited to:
250 7-bit characters
150 8-bit characters
366 4-bit numeric characters
Format ^BFo,h,m
Parameters Details
N = normal
dots)
Default Value: value set by ^BY or 10 (if no ^BY value
exists).
m = mode Accepted Values: 0 to 33 (see MicroPDF417 Mode
on page 103)
Default Value: 0 (see MicroPDF417 Mode on page 103)
ZPL Commands
^BF
102
To encode data into a MicroPDF417 bar code, complete these steps:
1. Determine the type of data to be encoded (for example, ASCII characters, numbers, 8-bit
data, or a combination).
2. Determine the maximum amount of data to be encoded within the bar code (for example,
number of ASCII characters, quantity of numbers, or quantity of 8-bit data characters).
3. Determine the percentage of check digits that are used within the bar code. The higher the
percentage of check digits that are used, the more resistant the bar code is to damage
however, the size of the bar code increases.
4. Use the chart MicroPDF417 Mode on page 103 with the information gathered from the
questions above to select the mode of the bar code.
Example This is an example of a MicroPDF417 bar code:
^XA
^FO100,100^BY6
^BFN,8,3
^FDABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUV^FS
^XZ
ZPL II CODE MICRO-PDF417 BAR CODE
103
ZPL Commands
^BF

Table 9 MicroPDF417 Mode
8
17
26
32
44
55
20
35
52
67
82
93
105
14
26
38
49
67
96
132
167
202
237
32
49
67
85
111
155
208
261
313
366
20
6
12
18
22
30
38
14
24
36
46
56
64
72
10
18
26
34
46
66
90
114
138
162
22
34
46
58
76
106
142
178
214
250
14
64
50
41
40
33
29
50
41
32
29
28
28
29
67
58
53
50
47
43
41
40
39
38
50
44
40
38
35
33
31
30
29
28
50
11
14
17
20
24
28
8
11
14
17
20
23
26
6
8
10
12
15
20
26
32
38
44
6
8
10
12
15
20
26
32
38
44
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Mode
(M)
Number
of Data
Columns
Number
of Data
Rows
% of
Cws for
EC
Max
Alpha
Characters
Max
Digits
ZPL Commands
^BI
104
^BI
Industrial 2 of 5 Bar Codes
Description The ^BI command is a discrete, self-checking, continuous numeric
symbology. The Industrial 2 of 5 bar code has been in use the longest of the 2 of 5 family of
bar codes. Of that family, the Standard 2 of 5 (^BJ) and Interleaved 2 of 5 (^B2) bar codes are
also available in ZPL II.
With Industrial 2 of 5, all of the information is contained in the bars. Two bar widths are
employed in this code, the wide bar measuring three times the width of the narrow bar.
^BI supports a print ratio of 2.0:1 to 3.0:1.
Format ^BIo,h,f,g
Important If additional information about the Industrial 2 of 5 bar code, go to
www.aimglobal.org.
Parameters Details
N = normal
dots)
line
Accepted Values:
N = no
Y = yes
Default Value: Y
line above code
Accepted Values:
N = no
Y = yes
Default Value: N
105
ZPL Commands
^BI
Example This is an example of an Industrial 2 of 5 bar code:
^XA
^FO100,100^BY3
^BIN,150,Y,N
^FD123456^FS
^XZ
INDUSTRIAL 2 OF 5 BAR CODE CHARACTERS
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Start/Stop (internal)
ZPL II CODE INDUSTRIAL 2 OF 5 BAR CODE
ZPL Commands
^BJ
106
^BJ
Standard 2 of 5 Bar Code
Description The ^BJ command is a discrete, self-checking, continuous numeric
symbology.
With Standard 2 of 5, all of the information is contained in the bars. Two bar widths are
employed in this code, the wide bar measuring three times the width of the narrow bar.
^BJ supports a print ratio of 2.0:1 to 3.0:1.
Format ^BJo,h,f,g
Important If additional information about the Standard 2 of 5 bar code is required, go to
www.aimglobal.org.
Parameters Details
N = normal
dots)
line
Accepted Values:
N = no
Y = yes
Default Value: Y
line above code
Accepted Values:
N = no
Y = yes
Default Value: N
107
ZPL Commands
^BJ
Example This is an example of a Standard 2 of 5 bar code:
^XA
^FO100,100^BY3
^BJN,150,Y,N
^FD123456^FS
^XZ
STANDARD 2 OF 5 BAR CODE CHARACTERS
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Start/Stop (automatic)
ZPL II CODE STANDARD 2 OF 5 BAR CODE
ZPL Commands
^BK
108
^BK
ANSI Codabar Bar Code
Description The ANSI Codabar bar code is used in a variety of information processing
applications such as libraries, the medical industry, and overnight package delivery companies.
This bar code is also known as USD-4 code, NW-7, and 2 of 7 code. It was originally
developed for retail price labeling.
Each character in this code is composed of seven elements: four bars and three spaces.
Codabar bar codes use two character sets, numeric and control (start and stop) characters.
^BK supports a print ratio of 2.0:1 to 3.0:1.
Format ^BKo,e,h,f,g,k,l
Important If additional information about the ANSI Codabar bar code is required, go to
www.aimglobal.org.
Parameters Details
N = normal
e = check digit Fixed Value: N
dots)
line
Accepted Values:
N = no
Y = yes
Default Value: Y
line above code
Accepted Values:
N = no
Y = yes
Default Value: N
k = designates a start
character
Accepted Values: A,B, C, D
Default Value: A
l = designates stop
character
Accepted Values: A,B, C, D
Default Value: A
109
ZPL Commands
^BK
Example This is an example of an ANSI Codabar bar code:
^XA
^FO100,100^BY3
^BKN,N,150,Y,N,A,A
^FD123456^FS
^XZ
ANSI CODABAR BAR CODE CHARACTERS
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Control Characters
ZPL II CODE
- : . $ / +
Start/Stop Characters
A B C D
ANSI CODABAR BAR CODE
ZPL Commands
^BL
110
^BL
LOGMARS Bar Code
Description The ^BL command is a special application of Code 39 used by the Department
of Defense. LOGMARS is an acronym for Logistics Applications of Automated Marking and
Reading Symbols.
^BL supports a print ratio of 2.0:1 to 3.0:1.
Field data (^FD) is limited to the width (or length, if rotated) of the label. Lowercase
letters in the ^FD string are converted to the supported uppercase LOGMARS
characters.
Format ^BLo,h,g
Important If additional information about the LOGMARS bar code is required, go to
www.aimglobal.org.
Parameters Details
N = normal
dots)
line above code
Accepted Values:
N = no
Y = yes
Default Value: N
111
ZPL Commands
^BL
Comments The LOGMARS bar code produces a mandatory check digit using
Mod 43 calculations. For further information on the Mod 43 check digit, see
Mod 43 Check Digit on page 909.
Example This is an example of a LOGMARS bar code:

^XA
^FO100,75^BY3
^BLN,100,N
^FD12AB^FS
^XZ
LOGMARS BAR CODE CHARACTERS
ZPL II CODE
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
- . $ / + %
SPACE
LOGMARS BAR CODE
ZPL Commands
^BM
112
^BM
MSI Bar Code
Description The ^BM command is a pulse-width modulated, continuous, non-self-
checking symbology. It is a variant of the Plessey bar code (^BP).
Each character in the MSI bar code is composed of eight elements: four bars and four adjacent
spaces.
^BM supports a print ratio of 2.0:1 to 3.0:1.
For the bar code to be valid, field data (^FD) is limited to 1 to 14 digits when
parameter e is B, C, or D. ^FD is limited to 1 to 13 digits when parameter e is A, plus
a quiet zone.
Format ^BMo,e,h,f,g,e2
Important If additional information about the MSI bar code is required, go to
www.aimglobal.org.
Parameters Details
N = normal
e = check digit selection Accepted Values:
A = no check digits
B = 1 Mod 10
C = 2 Mod 10
D = 1 Mod 11 and 1 Mod 10
Default Value: B
dots)
line
Accepted Values:
N = no
Y = yes
Default Value: Y
113
ZPL Commands
^BM
line above code
Accepted Values:
N = no
Y = yes
Default Value: N
e2 = inserts check digit
into the interpretation
line
Accepted Values:
N = no
Y = yes
Default Value: N
Example This is an example of a MSI bar code:
Parameters Details
^XA
^FO100,100^BY3
^BMN,B,100,Y,N,N
^FD123456^FS
^XZ
MSI BAR CODE CHARACTERS
ZPL II CODE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
MSI BAR CODE
ZPL Commands
^BO
114
^BO
Aztec Bar Code Parameters
Description The ^BO command creates a two-dimensional matrix symbology made up of
square modules arranged around a bulls-eye pattern at the center.
Format ^BOa,b,c,d,e,f,g
Note The Aztec bar code works with firmware version v60.13.0.11A and v50.13.2 or later.
Parameters Details
N = normal
R = rotated
b = magnification factor Accepted Values: 1 to 10
Default Value:
c = extended channel
interpretation code
indicator
Accepted Values:
Y = if data contains ECICs
N = if data does not contain ECICs.
Default Value: N
d = error control and
symbol size/type
indicator
Accepted Values:
0 = default error correction level
01 to 99 = error correction percentage (minimum)
101 to 104 = 1 to 4-layer compact symbol
201 to 232 = 1 to 32-layer full-range symbol
300 = a simple Aztec Rune
Default Value: 0
e = menu symbol
indicator
Accepted Values:
Y = if this symbol is to be a menu (bar code reader
initialization) symbol
N = if it is not a menu symbol
Default Value: N
115
ZPL Commands
^BO
f = number of symbols
for structured append
Default Value: 1
g = optional ID field for
structured append
The ID field is a text string with 24-character maximum
Default Value: no ID
Example This is an example of the ^B0 command:
Parameters Details
^XA
^B0R,7,N,0,N,1,0
^FD 7. This is testing label 7^FS
^XZ
^BP
116
^BP
Plessey Bar Code
Description The ^BP command is a pulse-width modulated, continuous, non-self-
checking symbology.
Each character in the Plessey bar code is composed of eight elements: four bars and four
adjacent spaces.
^BP supports a print ratio of 2.0:1 to 3.0:1.
Format ^BPo,e,h,f,g
Important If additional information about the Plessey bar code is required, go to
www.aimglobal.org.
Parameters Details
N = normal
N = no
Y = yes
Default Value: N
dots)
Accepted Values:
N = no
Y = yes
Default Value: N
line
Accepted Values:
N = no
Y = yes
Default Value: Y
line above code
Accepted Values:
N = no
Y = yes
Default Value: N
117
ZPL Commands
^BP
Example This is an example of a Plessey bar code:
^XA
^FO100,100^BY3
^BPN,N,100,Y,N
^FD12345^FS
^XZ
PLESSEY BAR CODE CHARACTERS
ZPL II CODE
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A B C D E F
PLESSEY BAR CODE
ZPL Commands
^BQ
118
^BQ
QR Code Bar Code
Description The ^BQ command produces a matrix symbology consisting of an array of
nominally square modules arranged in an overall square pattern. A unique pattern at three of
the symbols four corners assists in determining bar code size, position, and inclination.
A wide range of symbol sizes is possible, along with four levels of error correction. User-
specified module dimensions provide a wide variety of symbol production techniques.
QR Code Model 1 is the original specification, while QR Code Model 2 is an enhanced form
of the symbology. Model 2 provides additional features and can be automatically differentiated
from Model 1.
Model 2 is the recommended model and should normally be used.
This bar code is printed using field data specified in a subsequent ^FD string.
Encodable character sets include numeric data, alphanumeric data, 8-bit byte data, and Kanji
characters.
Format ^BQa,b,c,d,e
Important If additional information about the QR Code bar code is required, go to
www.aimglobal.org.
Parameters Details
a = field orientation Fixed Value: normal (^FW has no effect on rotation)
b = model Accepted Values: 1 (original) and 2 (enhanced
recommended)
Default Value: 2
c = magnification factor Accepted Values: 1 to 10
Default Value:
119
ZPL Commands
^BQ
On the pages that follow are specific commands for formatting the ^BQ command with the
^FD statements that contain the information to be coded.
d = H,Q,M,L Accepted Values:
H = ultra-high reliability level
Q = high reliability level
M = standard level
L = high density level
Default Value:
Q = if empty
M = invalid values
e = N,A,B.K Accepted Values: 1 - 7
Default Value: 7
Example This is an example of a QR Code bar code:
Parameters Details
^XA
^FO100,100
^BQN,2,10
^FDMM,AAC-42^FS
^XZ
ZPL II CODE QR CODE BAR CODE
ZPL Commands
^BQ
120
Considerations for ^FD When Using the QR Code:
QR Switches (formatted into the ^FD field data)
mixed mode <D>
D = allows mixing of different types of character modes in one code.
code No. <01 16>
Value = subtracted from the Nth number of the divided code (must be two digits).
No. of divisions <02 16>
Number of divisions (must be two digits).
parity data <1 byte>
Parity data value is obtained by calculating at the input data (the original input data before
divided byte-by-byte through the EX-OR operation).
error correction level <H, Q, M, L>
H = ultra-high reliability level
Q = high reliability level
M = standard level (default)
L = high density level
character Mode <N, A, B, K>
N = numeric
A = alphanumeric
Bxxxx = 8-bit byte mode. This handles the 8-bit Latin/Kana character set in accordance
with JIS X 0201 (character values 0x00 to 0xFF).
xxxx = number of data characters is represented by two bytes of BCD code.
K = Kanji handles only Kanji characters in accordance with the Shift JIS system
based on JIS X 0208. This means that all parameters after the character mode K should be
16-bit characters. If there are any 8-bit characters (such as ASCII code), an error occurs.
data character string <Data>
Follows character mode or it is the last switch in the ^FD statement.
data input <A, M>
A = Automatic Input (default). Data character string JIS8 unit, Shift JIS. When the input
mode is Automatic Input, the binary codes of 0x80 to 0x9F and 0xE0 to 0xFF cannot be
set.
M = Manual Input
Two types of data input mode exist: Automatic (A) and Manual (M). If A is specified, the
character mode does not need to be specified. If M is specified, the character mode must be
specified.
121
ZPL Commands
^BQ
^FD Field Data (Normal Mode)
Automatic Data Input (A) with Switches
^FD
<error correction level>A,
<data character string>
^FS
Manual Data Input (M) with Switches
^FD
<error correction level>M,
<character mode><data character string>
^FS
Example QR Code, normal mode with automatic data input.
1 Q = error correction level
2 A, = automatic setting
3 data string character
^XA
^FO20,20^BQ,2,10^FDQA,0123456789ABCD 2D code^FS
^XZ
3 1 2
ZPL Commands
^BQ
122
Example QR Code, normal mode with manual data input:
1 H = error correction level (ultra-high reliability level
2 M, = input mode (manual input)
3 N = character mode (numeric data)
4 data character string
Example QR Code, normal mode with standard reliability and manual data input:
1 M = error correction level (standard-high reliability level
2 M, = manual input
3 A = alphanumeric data
4 AC-42 = data character string
GENERATED LABEL
^XA
^FO20,20^BQ,2,10
^FDHM,N123456789012345^FS
^XZ
ZPL II CODE
1
2
4
3
GENERATED LABEL
^XA
^FO20,20^BQ,2,10^FDMM,AAC-42^FS
^XZ
ZPL II CODE
2 3 4 1
123
ZPL Commands
^BQ
^FD Field Data (Mixed Mode requires more switches)
Automatic Data Input (A) with Switches
^FD
<D><code No.> <No. of divisions> <parity data>,
<error correction level> A,
<data character string>,
<data character string>,
< : >,
<data character string n**>
^FS
Manual Data Input (M) with Switches
^FD
<code No.> <No. of divisions> <parity data>,
<error correction level> M,
<character mode 1> <data character string 1>,
<character mode 2> <data character string 2>,
< : > < : >,
<character mode n> <data character string n**>
^FS
n** up to 200 in mixed mode
ZPL Commands
^BQ
124
Example QR Code, mixed mode with manual data input:
<mixed mode identifier> D (mixed)
<code No.> M (code number)
<No. of divisions> D (divisions)
<parity data> M (0x0C)
<error correction level> L (high-density level)

<input mode> M (manual input)
<character mode> N (numeric data)

<data character string> 0123456789
<character mode> A (alphanumeric data)

<data character string> 12AABB
<character mode> B (8-bit byte data)

0006 (number of bytes)
<data character string> qrcode
GENERATED LABEL
^XA
^FO,20,20^BQ,2,10
^FDD03048F,LM,N0123456789,A12AABB,B0006qrcode^FS
^XZ
ZPL II CODE
125
ZPL Commands
^BQ
Example This is an example of QR Code, mixed mode with automatic data input:
^XA
^FO20,20^BQ,2,10
^FDD03040C,LA,012345678912AABBqrcode^FS
^XZ
<mixed mode identifier> D (mixed)
<code No.> M (code number)
<No. of divisions> D (divisions)
<parity data> M (0x0C)
<error correction level> L (high-density level)
<input mode> A (automatic input)
<data character string> 012345678912AABBqrcode
For proper functionality, when encoding Kanji characters in ^CI28-30 (Unicode) be sure
the JIS.DAT table is loaded on the printer and specified.
Example This is a Unicode example:
ZPL Commands
^BR
126
^BR
RSS (Reduced Space Symbology) Bar Code
Description The ^BR command is bar code types for space-constrained identification from
EAN International and the Uniform Code Council, Inc.
Format ^BRa,b,c,d,e,f
Parameters Details
N = Normal
R = Rotated
I = Inverted
B = Bottom-up
Default Value: R
b = symbology type in
the RSS-14 family
Accepted Values:
1 = RSS14
2 = RSS14 Truncated
3 = RSS14 Stacked
4 = RSS14 Stacked Omnidirectional
5 = RSS Limited
6 = RSS Expanded
7 = UPC-A
8 = UPC-E
9 = EAN-13
10 = EAN-8
11 = UCC/EAN-128 and CC-A/B
12 = UCC/EAN-128 and CC-C
Default Value: 1
c = magnification factor Accepted Values: 1 to 10
Default Value:
24 dot = 6, 12 dot is 3, 8 dot and lower is 2
12 dot = 6, > 8 dot is 3, 8 dot and less is 2
d = separator height Accepted Values: 1 or 2
Default Value: 1
127
ZPL Commands
^BR
e = bar code height The bar code height only affects the linear portion of the bar
code. Only UCC/EAN and CC-A/B/C.
Accepted Values: 1 to 32000 dots
Default Value: 25
f = the segment width
(RSS expanded only)
Accepted Values: 2 to 22, even numbers only, in segments
per line
Default Value: 22
Example This is an example of Symbology Type 7 - UPC-A:
Example This is an example of Symbology Type 1 - RSS14:
Parameters Details
^XA
^FO10,10^BRN,7,5,2,100
^FD12345678901|this is composite info^FS
^XZ
^XA
^FO10,10^BRN,1,5,2,100
^FD12345678901|this is composite info^FS
^XZ
ZPL Commands
^BS
128
^BS
UPC/EAN Extensions
Description The ^BS command is the two-digit and five-digit add-on used primarily by
publishers to create bar codes for ISBNs (International Standard Book Numbers). These
extensions are handled as separate bar codes.
The ^BS command is designed to be used with the UPC-A bar code (^BU) and the UPC-E bar
code (^B9).
^BS supports a fixed print ratio.
Field data (^FD) is limited to exactly two or five characters. ZPL II automatically
truncates or pads on the left with zeros to achieve the required number of characters.
Format ^BSo,h,f,g
Important If additional information about the UPC/EAN bar code is required, go to
www.aimglobal.org.
Parameters Details
N = normal
dots)
line
Accepted Values:
N = no
Y = yes
Default Value: Y
line above code
Accepted Values:
N = no
Y = yes
Default Value: Y
129
ZPL Commands
^BS
Care should be taken in positioning the UPC/EAN extension with respect to the
UPC-A or UPC-E code to ensure the resulting composite code is within the UPC specification.
Example This is an example of a UPC/EAN Two-digit bar code:
Example This is an example of a UPC/EAN Five-digit bar code:
^XA
^FO100,100^BY3
^BSN,100,Y,N
^FD12^FS
^XZ
UPC/EAN 2-DIGIT BAR CODE CHARACTERS
ZPL II CODE
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
UPC/EAN 2-DIGIT BAR CODE
^XA
^FO100,100^BY3
^BSN,100,Y,N
^FD12345^FS
^XZ
UPC/EAN 5-DIGIT BAR CODE CHARACTERS
ZPL II CODE
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
UPC/EAN 5-DIGIT BAR CODE
ZPL Commands
^BS
130
For UPC codes, with a module width of 2 (default), the field origin offsets for the extension
are:
Additionally, the bar code height for the extension should be 27 dots (0.135 inches) shorter
than that of the primary code. A primary UPC code height of 183 dots (0.900 inches) requires
an extension height of 155 dots (0.765 inches).
Example This is an example of a UPC-A:
This is an example of a UPC-E:

Example This example illustrates how to create a normal UPC-A bar code for the value
7000002198 with an extension equal to 04414:
Supplement Origin
X - Offset
209 Dots
0
Normal
Rotated
Adjustment
Y - Offset
21 Dots
209 Dots
Supplement Origin
X - Offset
122 Dots
0
Normal
Rotated
Adjustment
Y - Offset
21 Dots
122 Dots
^XA
^FO100,100^BY3
^BUN,137
^FD07000002198^FS
^FO400,121
^BSN,117
^FD04414^FS
^XZ
ZPL II CODE UPC-A BAR CODE WITH EXTENSION
131
ZPL Commands
^BT
^BT
TLC39 Bar Code
Description The ^BT bar code is the standard for the TCIF can tag telecommunications
equipment.
The TCIF CLEI code, which is the MicroPDF417 bar code, is always four columns. The
firmware must determine what mode to use based on the number of characters to be encoded.
Format ^BTo,w1,r1,h1,w2,h2
Parameters Details
N = normal
R = rotated
I = inverted
B = bottom up
w1 = width of the Code
39 bar code
Accepted Value (in dots): 1 to 10
Default Value (600 dpi printers): 4
Default Value (200- and 300 dpi printer): 2
r1 = wide to narrow bar
width ratio the Code
39 bar code
Accepted Values: 2.0 to 3.0(increments of 0.1)
Default Value: 2.0
h1 = height of the Code
39 bar code
Accepted Values (in dots): 1 to 9999
Default Value (600 dpi printer): 120
h2 = row height of the
MicroPDF417 bar
code
Default Value (200- and 300 dpi printers): 4
w2 = narrow bar width of
the
MicroPDF417 bar
code
Default Value (200- and 300 dpi printers): 2
ZPL Commands
^BT
132
Example TLC39 Bar Code
This is an example on how to print TLC39 bar code. The callouts identify the key
components and are followed by a detailed description below:
Use the command defaults to get results that are in compliance with TCIF industry standards;
regardless of printhead density.
1 ECI Number. If the seventh character is not a comma, only Code 39 prints. This
means if more than 6 digits are present, Code 39 prints for the first six digits (and no
Micro-PDF symbol is printed).
Must be 6 digits.
Firmware generates invalid character error if the firmware sees anything but
6 digits.
This number is not padded.
2 Serial number. The serial number can contain up to 25 characters and is variable
length. The serial number is stored in the Micro-PDF symbol. If a comma follows
the serial number, then additional data is used below.
If present, must be alphanumeric (letters and numbers, no punctuation).
This value is used if a comma follows the ECI number.
3 Additional data. If present, it is used for things such as a country code.
Data cannot exceed 150 bytes. This includes serial number commas.
Additional data is stored in the Micro-PDF symbol and appended after the
serial number. A comma must exist between each maximum of 25 characters
in the additional fields.
Additional data fields can contain up to 25 alphanumeric characters per field.
The result is:
1 2
3
^XA^FO100,
100^BT^FD123456,
ABCd12345678901234,
5551212,
88899
^FS^XZ
133
ZPL Commands
^BU
^BU
UPC-A Bar Code
Description The ^BU command produces a fixed length, numeric symbology. It is
primarily used in the retail industry for labeling packages. The UPC-A bar code has 11 data
characters. The 6 dot/mm, 12 dot/mm, and 24 dot/mm printheads produce the UPC-A bar code
(UPC/EAN symbologies) at 100 percent size. However, an 8 dot/mm printhead produces the
UPC/EAN symbologies at a magnification factor of 77 percent.
^BU supports a fixed print ratio.
Field data (^FD) is limited to exactly 11 characters. ZPL II automatically truncates or
pads on the left with zeros to achieve required number of characters.
Format ^BUo,h,f,g,e
The font style of the interpretation line depends on the modulus (width of narrow bar) selected
in ^BY:
Important If additional information about the UPC-A bar code is required, go to
www.aimglobal.org.
Parameters Details
N = normal
dots)
line
Accepted Values:
N = no
Y = yes
Default Value: Y
line above code
Accepted Values:
N = no
Y = yes
Default Value: N
N = no
Y = yes
Default Value: Y
ZPL Commands
^BU
134
6 dot/mm printer: a modulus of 2 dots or greater prints with an OCR-B interpretation
line; a modulus of 1 dot prints font A.
line; a modulus of 1 or 2 dots prints font A.
line; a modulus of 1, 2, 3, or 4 dots prints font A.
line; a modulus of 1 to 8 dots prints font A.
Comments The UPC-A bar code uses the Mod 10 check digit scheme for error checking.
For further information on Mod 10, see Mod 10 Check Digit on page 908.
Note Zero is not allowed.
Example This is an example of a UPC-A bar code with extension:
^XA
^FO100,100^BY3
^BUN,137
^FD07000002198^FS
^FO400,121
^BSN,117
^FD04414^FS
^XZ
ZPL II CODE UPC-A BAR CODE WITH EXTENSION
135
ZPL Commands
^BX
^BX
Data Matrix Bar Code
Description The ^BX command creates a two-dimensional matrix symbology made up of
square modules arranged within a perimeter finder pattern.
The ability to create a rectangular Datamatrix bar code is not available as a ZPL coding option.
Format ^BXo,h,s,c,r,f,g,a
Parameters Details
N = normal
h = dimensional height of
individual symbol
elements
Accepted Values: 1 to the width of the label
The individual elements are square this parameter
specifies both module and row height. If this parameter is
zero (or not given), the h parameter (bar height) in ^BY is
used as the approximate symbol height.
s = quality level Accepted Values: 0, 50, 80, 100, 140, 200
Default Value: 0
Quality refers to the amount of data that is added to the
symbol for error correction. The AIM specification refers
to it as the ECC value. ECC 50, ECC 80, ECC 100, and
ECC 140 use convolution encoding; ECC 200 uses Reed-
Solomon encoding. For new applications, ECC 200 is
recommended. ECC 000-140 should be used only in
closed applications where a single party controls both the
production and reading of the symbols and is responsible
for overall system performance.
ZPL Commands
^BX
136
c = columns to encode Accepted Values: 9 to 49
Odd values only for quality 0 to 140 (10 to 144); even
values only for quality 200.
Odd values only for quality 0 to 140 (10 to 144); even
values only for quality 200. The number of rows and
columns in the symbol is automatically determined. You
might want to force the number of rows and columns to a
larger value to achieve uniform symbol size. In the
current implementation, quality 0 to 140 symbols are
square, so the larger of the rows or columns supplied are
used to force a symbol to that size. If you attempt to force
the data into too small of a symbol, no symbol is printed.
If a value greater than 49 is entered, the rows or columns
value is set to zero and the size is determined normally. If
an even value is entered, it generates INVALID-P (invalid
parameter). If a value less than 9 but not 0, or if the data is
too large for the forced size, no symbol prints; if ^CV is
active, INVALID-L prints.
r = rows to encode Accepted Values: 9 to 49
f = format ID (0 to 6)
not used with quality
set at 200
Accepted Values:
1 = field data is numeric + space (0..9,) No \&
2 = field data is uppercase alphanumeric + space
(A..Z,) No \&
3 = field data is uppercase alphanumeric + space,
period, comma, dash, and slash (0..9,A..Z,.-/)
4 = field data is upper-case alphanumeric + space
(0..9,A..Z,) no \&
5 = field data is full 128 ASCII 7-bit set
6 = field data is full 256 ISO 8-bit set
Default Value: 6
Parameters Details
137
ZPL Commands
^BX
g = escape sequence
control character
Accepted Values: any character
Default Value: ~ (tilde)
This parameter is used only if quality 200 is specified. It
is the escape character for embedding special control
sequences within the field data.
Important A value must always be specified when using the
escape sequence control character. If no value is entered, the
command is ignored.
The g parmeter will continue to be underscore (_) for
anyone with firmware version: V60.13.0.12,
V60.13.0.12Z, V60.13.0.12B, V60.13.0.12ZB, or later.
a = aspect ratio
The a parameter is only
supported in V60.16.5Z
and V53.16.5Z or later.
Accepted Values:
1 = square
2 = rectangular
Default Value: 1
Table 10 Maximum Field Sizes
Example This is an example of a square Data Matrix bar code:
Parameters Details
0
50
80
100
140
596
457
402
300
144
452
333
293
218
105
394
291
256
190
91
413
305
268
200
96
310
228
201
150
72
271
200
176
131
63
ECC
LEVEL ID = 1 ID = 2 ID = 3 ID = 4 ID = 5 ID = 6
Maximum Field Sizes
^XA
^FO100,100
^BXN,10,200
^FDZEBRA TECHNOLOGIES CORPORATION
333 CORPORATE WOODS PARKWAY
VERNON HILLS, IL
60061-3109^FS
^XZ
ZPL II CODE DATA MATRIX BAR CODE
ZPL Commands
^BX
138
Effects of ^BY on ^BX
w = module width (no effect)
r = ratio (no effect)
h = height of symbol
If the dimensions of individual symbol elements are not specified in the ^BD command,
the height of symbol value is divided by the required rows/columns, rounded, limited to a
minimum value of one, and used as the dimensions of individual symbol elements.
Field Data (^FD) for ^BX
Quality 000 to 140
The \& and || can be used to insert carriage returns, line feeds, and the backslash, similar to
the PDF417. Other characters in the control character range can be inserted only by using
^FH. Field data is limited to 596 characters for quality 0 to 140. Excess field data causes
no symbol to print; if ^CV is active, INVALID-L prints. The field data must correspond to
a user-specified format ID or no symbol prints; if ^CV is active, INVALID-C prints.
The maximum field sizes for quality 0 to 140 symbols are shown in the table in the g
parameter.
Quality 200
If more than 3072 bytes are supplied as field data, it is truncated to 3072 bytes. This limits
the maximum size of a numeric Data Matrix symbol to less than the 3116 numeric
characters that the specification would allow. The maximum alphanumeric capacity is
2335 and the maximum 8-bit byte capacity is 1556.
If ^FH is used, field hexadecimal processing takes place before the escape sequence
processing described below.
The underscore is the default escape sequence control character for quality 200 field data.
A different escape sequence control character can be selected by using parameter g in the
^BX command.
Example This is an example of a rectangle Data Matrix bar code:
^XA
^FO100,100
^BXN,10,200,,,,,2
^FDZEBRA TECHNOLOGIES CORPORATION
333 CORPORATE WOODS PARKWAY
^FS
^XZ
ZPL II CODE DATA MATRIX BAR CODE
139
ZPL Commands
^BX
The information that follows applies to firmware version: V60.13.0.12, V60.13.0.12Z,
V60.13.0.12B, V60.13.0.12ZB, or later. The input string escape sequences can be embedded
in quality 200 field data using the ASCII 95 underscore character ( _ ) or the character entered
in parameter g:
_X is the shift character for control characters (e.g., _@=NUL,_G=BEL,_0 is PAD)
_1 to _3 for FNC characters 1 to 3 (explicit FNC4, upper shift, is not allowed)
FNC2 (Structured Append) must be followed by nine digits, composed of three-digit
numbers with values between 1 and 254, that represent the symbol sequence and file
identifier (for example, symbol 3 of 7 with file ID 1001 is represented by
_2214001001)
5NNN is code page NNN where NNN is a three-digit code page value (for example, Code
Page 9 is represented by _5009)
_dNNN creates ASCII decimal value NNN for a code word (must be three digits)
_ in data is encoded by __ (two underscores)
The information that follows applies to all other versions of firmware. The input string escape
sequences can be embedded in quality 200 field data using the ASCII 7E tilde character (~) or
the character entered in parameter g:
~X is the shift character for control characters (e.g., ~@=NUL,~G=BEL,~0 is PAD)
~1 to ~3 for FNC characters 1 to 3 (explicit FNC4, upper shift, is not allowed)
FNC2 (Structured Append) must be followed by nine digits, composed of three-digit
numbers with values between 1 and 254, that represent the symbol sequence and file
identifier (for example, symbol 3 of 7 with file ID 1001 is represented by
~2214001001)
5NNN is code page NNN where NNN is a three-digit code page value (for example, Code
Page 9 is represented by ~5009)
~dNNN creates ASCII decimal value NNN for a code word (must be three digits)
~ in data is encoded by a ~ (tilde)
ZPL Commands
^BY
140
^BY
Bar Code Field Default
Description The ^BY command is used to change the default values for the module width
(in dots), the wide bar to narrow bar width ratio and the bar code height (in dots). It can be
used as often as necessary within a label format.
Format ^BYw,r,h
For parameter r, the actual ratio generated is a function of the number of dots in parameter w,
module width. See Table 11 on page 141.
Parameters Details
w = module width (in
dots)
Initial Value at power-up: 2
r = wide bar to narrow
bar width ratio
Accepted Values: 2.0 to 3.0, in 0.1 increments
This parameter has no effect on fixed-ratio bar codes.
Default Value: 3.0
dots)
Example Set module width (w) to 9 and the ratio (r) to 2.4. The width of the narrow bar is
9 dots wide and the wide bar is 9 by 2.4, or 21.6 dots. However, since the printer rounds out
to the nearest dot, the wide bar is actually printed at 22 dots.
This produces a bar code with a ratio of 2.44 (22 divided by 9). This ratio is as close to 2.4 as
possible, since only full dots are printed.
141
ZPL Commands
^BY
Module width and height (w and h) can be changed at anytime with the ^BY command,
regardless of the symbology selected.
Comments Once a ^BY command is entered into a label format, it stays in effect until
another ^BY command is encountered.
Table 11 Shows module width ratios in dots
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
3.0
2:1 2:1 2:1 2:1 2:1 2:1 2:1 2:1 2:1 2:1
2:1 2:1 2:1 2:1 2:1 2:1 2:1 2:1 2:1 2.1:1
2:1 2:1 2:1 2:1 2.2:1 2.16:1 2.1:1 2.12:1 2.1:1 2.2:1
2:1 2:1 2.3:1 2.25:1 2.2:1 2.16:1 2.28:1 2.25:1 2.2:1 2.3:1
2:1 2:1 2.3:1 2.25:1 2.4:1 2.3:1 2.28:1 2.37:1 2.3:1 2.4:1
2:1 2.5:1 2.3:1 2.5:1 2.4:1 2.5:1 2.4:1 2.5:1 2.4:1 2.5:1
2:1 2.5:1 2.3:1 2.5:1 2.6:1 2.5:1 2.57:1 2.5:1 2.5:1 2.6:1
2:1 2.5:1 2.6:1 2.5:1 2.6:1 2.6:1 2.57:1 2.65:1 2.6:1 2.7:1
2:1 2.5:1 2.6:1 2.75:1 2.8:1 2.6:1 2.7:1 2.75:1 2.7:1 2.8:1
2:1 2.5:1 2.6:1 2.75:1 2.8:1 2.8:1 2.85:1 2.87:1 2.8:1 2.9:1
3:1 3:1 3:1 3:1 3:1 3:1 3:1 3:1 3:1 3:1
Module Width in Dots (w)
Ratio
Selected
(r)
ZPL Commands
^BZ
142
^BZ
POSTAL Bar Code
Description The POSTAL bar code is used to automate the handling of mail. POSTAL
codes use a series of tall and short bars to represent the digits.
^BZ supports a print ratio of 2.0:1 to 3.0:1.
Field data (^FD) is limited to the width (or length, if rotated) of the label and by the
bar code specification.
Format ^BZo,h,f,g,t
Important If additional information about the POSTAL and PLANET bar code is required,
go to www.aimglobal.org, or contact the United States Postal Service http://pe.usps.gov. If
additional information about the INTELLIGENT MAIL bar code is required, see:
http://ribbs.usps.gov/OneCodeSolution.
Parameters Details
N = normal
dots)
line
Accepted Values:
N = no
Y = yes
Default Value: N
line above code
Accepted Values:
N = no
Y = yes
Default Value: N
t = Postal code type Accepted Values:
0 = Postnet bar code
1 = Plant Bar Code
2 = Reserved
3 = USPS Intelligent Mail bar code
Default Value: 0
143
ZPL Commands
^BZ
Example This is an example of a POSTNET bar code:
Example This is an example of a USPS Intelligent Mail bar code:
^XA
^FO100,100^BY3
^BZN,40,Y,N
^FD12345^FS
^XZ
POSTNET BAR CODE CHARACTERS
ZPL II CODE
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
POSTNET BAR CODE
^XA
^FO100,040^BZ,40,,,3
^FD00123123456123456789^FS
^XZ
ZPL II CODE USPS INTELLIGENT MAIL BAR CODE
ZPL Commands
^CC ~CC
144
^CC ~CC
Change Caret
Description The ^CC command is used to change the format command prefix. The default
prefix is the caret (^).
Format ^CCx or ~CCx
Parameters Details
x = caret character
change
Accepted Values: any ASCII character
Default Value: a parameter is required. If a parameter is not
entered, the next character received is the new prefix
character.
Example This is an example of how to change the format prefix to / from a ::
^XA
^CC/
/XZ
The forward slash (/) is set at the new prefix. Note the /XZ ending tag uses the new
designated prefix character (/).
Example This is an example of how to change the format prefix from ~ to a /:
~CC/
/XA/JUS/XZ
145
ZPL Commands
^CD ~CD
^CD ~CD
Change Delimiter
Description The ^CD and ~CD commands are used to change the delimiter character. This
character is used to separate parameter values associated with several ZPL II commands. The
default delimiter is a comma (,).
Format ^CDa or ~CDa
Parameters Details
a = delimiter character
change
entered, the next character received is the new prefix
character.
Example This shows how to change the character delimiter to a semi-colon (;):
^XA
^FO10,10
^GB10,10,3
^XZ
^XA
^CD;
^FO10;10
^GB10;10;3
^XZ
To save, the JUS command is required. Here is an example using JUS:
~CD;
^XA^JUS^XZ
ZPL Commands
^CF
146
^CF
Change Alphanumeric Default Font
Description The ^CF command sets the default font used in your printer. You can use the
^CF command to simplify your programs.
Format ^CFf,h,w
Parameter f specifies the default font for every alphanumeric field. Parameter h is the default
height for every alphanumeric field, and parameter w is the default width value for every
alphanumeric field.
The default alphanumeric font is A. If you do not change the alphanumeric default font and do
not use any alphanumeric field command (ÂF) or enter an invalid font value, any data you
specify prints in font A.
Defining only the height or width forces the magnification to be proportional to the parameter
defined. If neither value is defined, the last ^CF values given or the default ^CF values for
height and width are used.
Comments Any font in the printer, including downloaded fonts, EPROM stored fonts, and
fonts A through Z and 0 to 9, can also be selected with ^CW.
Parameters Details
f = specified default font Accepted Values: A through Z and 0 to 9
Initial Value at power-up: A
h = individual character
height (in dots)
w = individual character
width (in dots)
Initial Value at power-up: 5 or last permanent saved value
Example This is an example of ^CF code and the result of the code:
^XA
^CF0,89
^FO20,50
^FDA GUIDE TO^FS
^FO20,150
^FDTHE ZPL II^FS
^FO20,250
^FDPROGRAMMING^FS
^FO20,350
^FDLANGUAGE^FS
^XZ
147
ZPL Commands
^CI
^CI
Change International Font/Encoding
Description Zebra printers can print fonts using international character sets: U.S.A.1,
U.S.A.2, UK, Holland, Denmark/Norway, Sweden/Finland, Germany, France 1, France 2,
Italy, Spain, and several other sets, including the Unicode character set.
The ^CI command enables you to call up the international character set you want to use for
printing. You can mix character sets on a label.
A character within a font can be remapped to a different numerical position.
Format ^CIa,s1,d1,s2,d2,...
In x.14 version of firmware and later, this command allows character remapping when
parameter a = 0-13.
ZPL Commands
^CI
148
Parameters Details
a = desired character set
(continued)
Accepted values 0 - 12 are Zebra Code Page 850 with
specific character replacements. For details, see International
Character Sets on page 150 and/or Zebra Code Page 850
on page 882.
Accepted Values:
0 = Single Byte Encoding - U.S.A. 1 Character Set
1 = Single Byte Encoding - U.S.A. 2 Character Set
2 = Single Byte Encoding - U.K. Character Set
3 = Single Byte Encoding - Holland Character Set
4 = Single Byte Encoding - Denmark/Norway Character
Set
5 = Single Byte Encoding - Sweden/Finland Character
Set
6 = Single Byte Encoding - Germany Character Set
7 = Single Byte Encoding - France 1 Character Set
8 = Single Byte Encoding - France 2 Character Set
9 = Single Byte Encoding - Italy Character Set
10 = Single Byte Encoding - Spain Character Set
11 = Single Byte Encoding - Miscellaneous Character
Set
12 = Single Byte Encoding - Japan (ASCII with Yen
symbol) Character Set
13 = Zebra Code Page 850 (see page 882)
14 = Double Byte Asian Encodings *
15 = Shift-JIS **
16 = EUC-JP and EUC-CN *
17 = Deprecated - UCS-2 Big Endian ****
18 to 23 = Reserved
24 = Single Byte Asian Encodings *
25 = Reserved
26 = Multibyte Asian Encodings with ASCII
Transparency * and ***
27 = Zebra Code Page 1252 (see page 888)
These parameters are only valid when parameter a = 1 - 13
149
ZPL Commands
^CI
* The encoding is controlled by the conversion table (*.DAT). The correct table must be
present for the conversion to function. The table generated by ZTools is the TrueType fonts
internal encoding (Unicode).
** Shift-JIS encoding converts Shift-JIS to JIS and then looks up the JIS conversion in
JIS.DAT. This table must be present for Shift-JIS to function.
*** Supports ASCII transparency for Asian encodings. 7F and less are treated as single byte
characters. 80 to FE is treated as the first byte of a 2 byte character 8000 to FEFF in the
encoding table for Unicode.
a = desired character set
(continued)
Values 28 to 30 are only
supported in firmware
version V60.14.x,
V50.14.x, or later.
28 = Unicode (UTF-8 encoding) - Unicode Character
Set
29 = Unicode (UTF-16 Big-Endian encoding) - Unicode
Character Set
30 = Unicode (UTF-16 Little-Endian encoding) -
Unicode Character Set
31 = Zebra Code Page 1250 (see page 884) is supported
for scalable fonts, such as Font 0, or a downloaded
TrueType font. Bitmapped fonts (including fonts A-
H) do not fully support Zebra Code Page 1250.
This value is supported only on Zebra G-Series
printers.
s1 = source 1 (character
output image)
Accepted Values: decimals 0 to 255
d1 = destination 1
(character input)
s2 = source 2 (character
output image)
d2 = destination 2
(character input)
= continuation of
pattern
Up to 256 source and destination pairs can be entered in this
command.
80 to FF could mean quad byte in GB18030. The ^CI26 command can also be used to
support the GB 18030 and Big5 HKSCS encodings. The GB 18030 uses the GB18030.DAT
encoding table and BIG5 HKSCS uses the BIG5HK.DAT encoding table.
**** The ^CI17 command has been deprecated, along with the ^F8 and ^F16 commands
that are required for the ^CI17 command to function. The recommended replacement is the
^CI28-30 commands.
Parameters Details
ZPL Commands
^CI
150
The font selected determines the shape and resolution of the printed symbol.
International Character Sets
We recommend that a ^CI command (or Unicode BOM) is included at the beginning of each
ZPL script. This is important when ZPL scripts with different encodings are being sent to a
single printer. To assist in the interleaving of encoding schemes, the printer maintains two
encoding states (^CI0 - 28 and ^CI29 - 30). It automatically acknowledges when it should
switch encoding states, allowing it to distinguish between encodings, and maintains a ^CI
for each, but endianess is shared.
Example This example remaps the Euro symbol (21) decimal to the dollar sign value (36)
decimal. When the dollar sign character is sent to the printer, the Euro symbol prints:
^XA
^CI0,21,36
^FO100,200Â0N50,50^FD$0123^FS
^XZ
151
ZPL Commands
^CI
Comments The space character cannot be remapped for any font.
Note ^CI 13 = US keyboard
ZPL Commands
^CM
152
^CM
Change Memory Letter Designation
Description The ^CM command allows you to reassign a letter designation to the printers
memory devices. If a format already exists, you can reassign the memory device to the
corresponding letter without forcing, altering, or recreating the format itself.
Using this command affects every subsequent command that refers to specific memory
locations.
Format ^CMa,b,c,d
Comments If two or more parameters specify the same letter designator, all letter
designators are set to their default values.
It is recommended that after entering the ^CM command, ^JUS is entered to save changes to
EEPROM. Any duplicate parameters entered reset the letter designations back to the default.
If any of the parameters are out of specification, the command is ignored.
Parameters Details
a = memory alias for B: Accepted Values: B:, E:,R:, A:, and NONE
Default Value: B:
b = memory alias for E: Accepted Values: B:, E:,R:, A:, and NONE
Default Value: E:
c = memory alias for R: Accepted Values: B:, E:,R:, A:, and NONE
Default Value: R:
d = memory alias for A: Accepted Values: B:, E:,R:, A:, and NONE
Default Value: A:
Example This example designates letter E: to point to the B: memory device, and the
letter B: to point to the E: memory device.
^XA
^CME,B,R,A
^JUS
^XZ
153
ZPL Commands
^CO
^CO
Cache On
Description The ^CO command is used to change the size of the character cache. By
definition, a character cache (referred to as cache) is a portion of the DRAM reserved for
storing scalable characters. All printers have a default 40K cache that is always turned on. The
maximum single character size that can be stored, without changing the size of the cache, is
450 dots by 450 dots.
There are two types of fonts used in Zebra printers: bitmapped and scalable. Letters, numbers,
and symbols in a bitmapped font have a fixed size (for example: 10 points, 12 points, 14
points). By comparison, scalable fonts are not fixed in size.
Because their size is fixed, bitmapped fonts can be moved quickly to the label. In contrast,
scalable fonts are much slower because each character is built on an as-needed basis before it
is moved to the label. By storing scaled characters in a cache, they can be recalled at a much
faster speed.
The number of characters that can be stored in the cache depends on two factors: the size of the
cache (memory) and the size of the character (in points) being saved. The larger the point size,
the more space in the cache it uses. The default cache stores every scalable character that is
requested for use on a label. If the same character, with the same rotation and size is used
again, it is quickly retrieved from cache.
It is possible that after a while the print cache could become full. Once the cache is full, space
for new characters is obtained by eliminating an existing character from the print cache.
Existing characters are eliminated by determining how often they have been used. This is done
automatically. For example, a 28-point Q that was used only once would be a good candidate
for elimination from the cache.
Maximum size of a single print cache character is 1500 dots by 1500 dots. This would require
a cache of 274K.
When the cache is too small for the desired style, smaller characters might appear but larger
characters do not. If possible, increase the size of the cache.
Format ^COa,b,c
Note If you have firmware x.12 or greater this command is not required because the printer
firmware automatically expands the size of the character cache as needed.
ZPL Commands
^CO
154
Print Cache Performance
For printing large characters, memory added to the cache by the ^CO command is not
physically added to the 22K cache already in the printer. In the second example above, the
resulting 100K cache is actually two separate blocks of memory, 22K and 78K.
Because large characters need contiguous blocks of memory, a character requiring a cache of
90K would not be completely stored because neither portion of the 100K cache is big enough.
Therefore, if large characters are needed, the ^CO command should reflect the actual size of
the cache you need.
Increasing the size of the cache improves the performance in printing scalable fonts. However,
the performance decreases if the size of the cache becomes large and contains too many
characters. The performance gained is lost because of the time involved searching the cache
for each character.
Comments The cache can be resized as often as needed. Any characters in the cache when
it is resized are lost. Memory used for the cache reduces the space available for label bitmaps,
graphic, and fonts.
Some Asian fonts require an internal working buffer that is much larger than the normal cache.
Since most fonts do not require this larger buffer, it is now a selectable configuration option.
Printing with the Asian fonts greatly reduces the printer memory available for labels, graphics,
fonts, formats, and label bitmaps.
Parameters Details
a = cache on Accepted Values:
N = no
Y = yes
Default Value: Y
b = amount of additional
memory to be added
to cache (in K)
Default Value: 40
c = cache type Accepted Values:
0 = cache buffer (normal fonts)
1 = internal buffer (recommended for Asian fonts)
Default Value: 0
Example To resize the print cache to 62K, assuming a 22K existing cache:
^COY,40
To resize the print cache to 100K, assuming a 22K existing cache:
^COY,78
155
ZPL Commands
^CT ~CT
^CT ~CT
Change Tilde
Description The ^CT and ~CT commands are used to change the control command prefix.
The default prefix is the tilde (~).
Format ^CTa or ~CTa
Parameters Details
a = change control
command character
entered, the next character received is the new control
command character.
Example This is an example of how to change the control command prefix from a ^ to a +:
^XA
^CT+
^XZ
+HS
ZPL Commands
^CV
156
^CV
Code Validation
Description The ^CV command acts as a switch to turn the code validation function on and
off. When this command is turned on, all bar code data is checked for these error conditions:
character not in character set
check-digit incorrect
data field too long (too many characters)
data field too short (too few characters)
parameter string contains incorrect data or missing parameter
When invalid data is detected, an error message and code is printed in reverse image in place
of the bar code. The message reads INVALID - X where X is one of these error codes:
C = character not in character set
E = check-digit incorrect
L = data field too long
S = data field too short
P = parameter string contains incorrect data
(occurs only on select bar codes)
Once turned on, the ^CV command remains active from format to format until turned off by
another ^CV command or the printer is turned off. The command is not permanently saved.
Format ^CVa
Parameters Details
a = code validation Accepted Values:
N = no
Y = yes
Default Value: N
157
ZPL Commands
^CV
Comments If more than one error exists, the first error detected is the one displayed.
The ^CV command tests the integrity of the data encoded into the bar code. It is not used for
(or to be confused with) testing the scan-integrity of an image or bar code.
Example The examples below show the error labels ^CVY generates when incorrect field
data is entered. Compare the letter following INVALID to the listing on the previous page.
^XA
^CVY
^FO50,50
^BEN,100,Y,N
^FD97823456 890^FS
^XZ
^XA
^CVY
^FO50,50
^BEN,100,Y,N
^FD9782345678907^FS
^XZ
^XA
^CVY
^FO50,50
^BEN,100,Y,N
^FD97823456789081^FS
^XZ
^XA
^CVY
^FO50,50
^BEN,100,Y,N
^FD97823456789^FS
^XZ
^XA
^CVY
^FO50,50
^BQN2,3
^FDHM,BQRCODE-22^FS
^XZ
ZPL Commands
^CW
158
^CW
Font Identifier
Description All built-in fonts are referenced using a one-character identifier. The ^CW
command assigns a single alphanumeric character to a font stored in DRAM, memory card,
EPROM, or Flash.
If the assigned character is the same as that of a built-in font, the downloaded font is used in
place of the built-in font. The new font is printed on the label wherever the format calls for the
built-in font. If used in place of a built-in font, the change is in effect only until power is turned
off.
If the assigned character is different, the downloaded font is used as an additional font. The
assignment remains in effect until a new command is issued or the printer is turned off.
Format ^CWa,d:o.x
Parameters Details
a = letter of existing font
to be substituted, or
new font to be added
Accepted Values: A through Z and 0 to 9
Default Value: a one-character entry is required
d = device to store font in
(optional)
Accepted Values: R:, E:, B:, and A:
Default Value: R:
o = name of the
downloaded font to
be substituted for the
built-in, or as an
additional font
Accepted Values: any name up to 8 characters
Default Value: if a name is not specified, UNKNOWN is used
x = extension
V50.14.x, or later.
Accepted Values:
.FNT = Font
.TTE = TrueType Extension
159
ZPL Commands
^CW
Example These examples show how to use:
MYFONT.FNT stored in DRAM whenever a format calls for Font A:
^XA
^CWA,R:MYFONT.FNT
^XZ
MYFONT.FNT stored in DRAM additionally as Font Q:
^XA
^CWQ,R:MYFONT.FNT
^XZ
NEWFONT.FNT stored in DRAM whenever a format calls for font F:
^XA
^CWF,R:NEWFONT.FNT
^XZ
Label Listing Before Assignment Label Listing After Assignment
ZPL Commands
~DB
160
~DB
Download Bitmap Font
Description The ~DB command sets the printer to receive a downloaded bitmap font and
defines native cell size, baseline, space size, and copyright.
This command consists of two portions, a ZPL II command defining the font and a structured
data segment that defines each character of the font.
Format ~DBd:o.x,a,h,w,base,space,#char,,data
Parameters Details
d = drive to store font Accepted Values: R:, E:, B:, and A:
Default Value: R:
o = name of font Accepted Values: 1 to 8 alphanumeric characters
x = extension Fixed Value: .FNT
a = orientation of native
font
Fixed Value: normal
h = maximum height of
cell (in dots)
Default Value: a value must be specified
w = maximum width of
cell (in dots)
base = dots from top of
cell to character
baseline
space = width of space
or
non-existent
characters
#char = number of
characters in font
Accepted Values: 1 to 256 (must match the characters being
downloaded)
161
ZPL Commands
~DB
= copyright holder Accepted Values: 1 to 63 alphanumeric characters
data = structured
ASCII data that
defines each
character in the font
The # symbol signifies character code parameters, which are
separated with periods. The character code is from 1 to 4
characters to allow for large international character sets to be
downloaded to the printer.
The data structure is:
#xxxx.h.w.x.y.i.data
#xxxx = character code
h = bitmap height (in dot rows)
w = bitmap width (in dot rows)
x = x-offset (in dots)
y = y-offset (in dots)
i = typesetting motion displacement (width, including
inter character gap of a particular character in the font)
data = hexadecimal bitmap description
Example This is an example of how to use the ~DB command. It shows the first two
characters of a font being downloaded to DRAM.
~DBR:TIMES.FNT,N,5,24,3,10,2,ZEBRA 1992,
#0025.5.16.2.5.18.
OOFF
OOFF
FFOO
FFOO
FFFF
#0037.4.24.3.6.26.
OOFFOO
OFOOFO
OFOOFO
OOFFOO
Parameters Details
ZPL Commands
~DE
162
~DE
Download Encoding
Description The standard encoding for TrueType Windows fonts is always Unicode. The
ZPL II field data must be converted from some other encoding to Unicode that the Zebra
printer understands. The required translation tables are provided with font packs. Some tables
can be downloaded from www.zebra.com.
Format ~DEd:o.x,s,data
Comments For more information on ZTools or ZebraNet Bridge, see the program
documentation included with the software.
For assistance with editing or adding mappings to .DAT tables, ZebraNet Bridge includes a
.DAT table editor in the font wizard.
Encoding scheme for the data sent to the printer is the second four character and the encoding
scheme for the font is the first four characters throughout the .DAT file. The data must be
ordered by the second four characters (the encoding table).
Parameters Details
d = location of table Accepted Values: R:, E:, B:, and A:
Default Value: R:
o = name of table Accepted Values: any valid name, up to 8 characters
x = extension Fixed Value: .DAT
s = table size Accepted Values: the number of memory bytes required to
hold the Zebra downloadable format of the font
Default Value: if an incorrect value or no value is entered, the
command is ignored
data = data string Accepted Values: a string of ASCII hexadecimal values
Default Value: if no data is entered, the command is ignored
Example This is an example of how to download the required translation table:
~DER:JIS.DAT,27848,300021213001...
(27848 two-digit hexadecimal values)
163
ZPL Commands
~DE
Data must have 0041, 0042, 0043, and 0044 in order. Multiple pairs can be on the same line.
Example This is an example of a .DAT table. The table below the example identifies the
elements:
1 Input stream with 0041 will be mapped to
0031. The printer prints "1".
~DEE:EXAMPLE.DAT,16,
00310041
00320042
00330043
00340044
1
2
3
4
ZPL Commands
^DF
164
^DF
Download Format
Description The ^DF command saves ZPL II format commands as text strings to be later
merged using ^XF with variable data. The format to be stored might contain field number
(^FN) commands to be referenced when recalled.
While use of stored formats reduces transmission time, no formatting time is savedthis
command saves ZPL II as text strings formatted at print time.
Enter the ^DF stored format command immediately after the ^XA command, then enter the
format commands to be saved.
Format ^DFd:o.x
For a complete example of the ^DF and ^XF command, see ^DF and ^XF Download
format and recall format on page 45.
Parameters Details
d = device to store image Accepted Values: R:, E:, B:, and A:
Default Value: R:
o = image name Accepted Values: 1 to 8 alphanumeric characters
x = extension Fixed Value: .ZPL
Example This example is generated using the ^XF command to recall this format:
^XA
^DFR:STOREFMT.ZPL^FS
^FO25,25
ÂD,36,20^FN1^FS
^FO165,25
ÂD,36,20^FN2^FS
^FO25,75
ÂB,22,14^FDBUILT BY^FS
^FO25,125
ÂE,28,15^FN1
^XZ
^XA
^XFR:STOREFMT.ZPL^FS
^FN1^FDZEBRA^FS
^XZ
165
ZPL Commands
~DG
~DG
Download Graphics
Description The ~DG command downloads an ASCII Hex representation of a graphic
image. If .GRF is not the specified file extension, .GRF is automatically appended.
For more saving and loading options when downloading files, see ~DY on page 172.
Format ~DGd:o.x,t,w,data
This is the key for the examples that follow:
x = width of the graphic in millimeters
y = height of the graphic in millimeters
z = dots/mm = print density of the printer being programmed
8 = bits/byte
Parameters Details
Default Value: R:
x = extension Fixed Value: .GRF
t = total number of bytes
in graphic
See the formula in the examples below.
w = number of bytes per
row
See the formula in the examples below.
data = ASCII
hexadecimal string
defining image
The data string defines the image and is an ASCII
hexadecimal representation of the image. Each character
represents a horizontal nibble of four dots.
ZPL Commands
~DG
166
Examples These are some example related to the ~DG command:
To determine the t parameter use this formula:
To determine the correct t parameter for a graphic 8 mm wide, 16 mm high, and a print
density of 8 dots/mm, use this formula:
Raise any portion of a byte to the next whole byte.
To determine the w parameter (the width in terms of bytes per row) use this formula:
To determine the correct w parameter for a graphic 8 mm wide and a print density of 8
dots/mm, use this formula:
Raise any portion of a byte to the next whole byte.
Parameter w is the first value in the t calculation.
The data parameter is a string of hexadecimal numbers sent as a representation of the graphic
image. Each hexadecimal character represents a horizontal nibble of four dots. For example,
if the first four dots of the graphic image are white and the next four black, the dot-by-dot
binary code is 00001111. The hexadecimal representation of this binary value is 0F. The
entire graphic image is coded in this way, and the complete graphic image is sent as one
continuous string of hexadecimal values.
xz
8
------ yz totalbytes =

8 128 1024 =
t 1024 =

w 8 =

w 8 =
167
ZPL Commands
~DG
Comments Do not use spaces or periods when naming your graphics. Always use different
names for different graphics.
If two graphics with the same name are sent to the printer, the first graphic is erased and
replaced by the second graphic.
This is an example of using the ~DG command to load a checkerboard pattern into DRAM. The
name used to store the graphic is SAMPLE.GRF:
~DGR:SAMPLE.GRF,00080,010,
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
8000FFFF0000FFFF0001
FFFF0000FFFF0000FFFF
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
^XA
^F020,20^XGR:SAMPLE.GRF,1,1^FS
^XZ
ZPL Commands
~DN
168
~DN
Abort Download Graphic
Description After decoding and printing the number of bytes in parameter t of the ~DG
command, the printer returns to normal Print Mode. Graphics Mode can be aborted and normal
printer operation resumed by using the ~DN command.
Format ~DN
Comments If you need to stop a graphic from downloading, you should abort the
transmission from the host device. To clear the ~DG command, however, you must send a ~DN
command.
169
ZPL Commands
~DS
~DS
Download Intellifont (Scalable Font)
Description The ~DS command is used to set the printer to receive a downloadable
scalable font and defines the size of the font in bytes.
The ~DS command, and its associated parameters, is the result of converting a vendor-
supplied font for use on a Zebra printer. To convert this font use the ZTools utility.
Format ~DSd:o.x,s,data
Comments Downloaded scalable fonts are not checked for integrity. If they are corrupt,
they cause unpredictable results at the printer.
Parameters Details
Default Value: R:
s = size of font in bytes Fixed Value: this number is generated by ZTools and should
not be changed
data = ASCII
hexadecimal string
that defines font
Fixed Value: this number is generated by ZTools and should
not be changed
Example This example shows the first three lines of a scalable font that was converted
using the ZTools program and is ready to be downloaded to the printer. If necessary, the
destination and object name can be changed.
~DSB:CGTIMES.FNT,37080,
OOFFOOFFOOFFOOFF
FFOAECB28FFFOOFF
If you are using a TrueType font use these commands: ~DT, ~DU, and ~DY. To determine
when to use the noted commands, see ~DT on page 170, ~DU on page 171, and ~DY
on page 172.
ZPL Commands
~DT
170
~DT
Download Bounded TrueType Font
Description Use ZTools to convert a TrueType font to a Zebra-downloadable format that
has less than 256 characters in it. To convert a font that has more than 256 characters, see ~DU
on page 171. ZTools creates a downloadable file that includes a ~DT command. For
information on converting and downloading Intellifont information, see ~DS on page 169.
Format ~DTd:o.x,s,data
Parameters Details
d = font location Accepted Values: R:, E:, B:, and A:
Default Value: R:
o = font name Accepted Values: any valid TrueType name, up to 8 characters
s = font size Accepted Values: the number of memory bytes required to
hold the Zebra-downloadable format of the font
command is ignored
data = data string Accepted Values: a string of ASCII hexadecimal values (two
hexadecimal digits/byte). The total number of two-digit
values must match parameter s.
Example This is an example of how to download a true type font:
~DTR:FONT,52010,00AF01B0C65E...
171
ZPL Commands
~DU
~DU
Download Unbounded TrueType Font
Description Some international fonts, such as Asian fonts, have more than
256 printable characters. These fonts are supported as large TrueType fonts and are
downloaded to the printer with the ~DU command. Use ZTools to convert the large TrueType
fonts to a Zebra-downloadable format.
Format ~DUd:o.x,s,data
For similar commands, see ~DS on page 169, ~DT on page 170, and ~DY on page 172.
Parameters Details
d = font location Accepted Values: R:, E:, B:, and A:
Default Value: R:
o = font name Accepted Values: 1 to 8 alphanumeric characters
s = font size Accepted Values: the number of memory bytes required to
hold the Zebra-downloadable format of the font
hexadecimal digits/byte). The total number of two-digit
values must match parameter s.
Example This is an example of how to download an unbounded true type font:
~DUR:KANJI,86753,60CA017B0CE7...
ZPL Commands
~DY
172
~DY
Download Objects
Description The ~DY command downloads to the printer graphic objects or fonts in any
supported format. This command can be used in place of ~DG for more saving and loading
options. ~DY is the preferred command to download TrueType fonts on printers with firmware
later than X.13. It is faster than ~DU. The ~DY command also supports downloading wireless
certificate files.
Format ~DYd:f,b,x,t,w,data
Note When using certificate files, your printer supports:
Using Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM) formatted certificate files.
Using the client certificate and private key as two files, each downloaded separately.
Using exportable PAC files for EAP-FAST.
Zebra recommends using Linear style memory devices for storing larger
objects.
Parameters Details
d = file location
.NRD and .PAC files
reside on E: in firmware
versions V60.15.x,
V50.15.x, or later.
Default Value: R:
f = file name Accepted Values: 1 to 8 alphanumeric characters
b = format downloaded
in data field
.TTE and .TTF are only
versions V60.14.x,
V50.14.x, or later.
Accepted Values:
A = uncompressed (ZB64, ASCII)
B = uncompressed (.TTE, .TTF, binary)
C = AR-compressed (used only by Zebras BAR-ONE

v5)
P = portable network graphic (.PNG) - ZB64 encoded
173
ZPL Commands
~DY
x = extension of stored
file
.TTE and .OTF are only
versions V60.14.x,
V50.14.x, or later.
.NRD and .PAC are only
versions V60.15.x,
V50.15.x, or later.
Accepted Values:
B = bitmap
E = TrueType Extension (.TTE)
G = raw bitmap (.GRF)
P = store as compressed (.PNG)
T = TrueType (.TTF) or OpenType (.OTF)
X = Paintbrush (.PCX)
NRD = Non Readable File (.NRD)
PAC = Protected Access Credential (.PAC)
C = User defined menu file (WML)
F = User defined webpage file (HTM)
H = Printer feedback file (GET)
Default Value: a value other than the accepted values defaults
to .GRF
t = total number of bytes
in file
firmware versions
V60.14.x, V50.14.x, or
later.
Accepted Values:
.BMP
This parameter refers to the actual size of the file, not
the amount of disk space.
.GRF images: the size after decompression into memory
.PCX
.PNG images:
.TTF
.TTE
Parameters Details
ZPL Commands
~DY
174
w = total number of bytes
per row
V50.14.x, or later.
.NRD and .PAC files are
version V60.15.x,
V50.15.x, or later.
Accepted Values:
.GRF images: number of bytes per row
.PNG images: value ignored
.TTF images: value ignored
.TTE images: value ignored
.NRD images: value ignored
.PAC images: value ignored
data = data ASCII hexadecimal encoding, ZB64, or binary data,
depending on b.
A, P = ASCII hexadecimal or ZB64
B, C = binary
When binary data is sent, all control prefixes and flow control
characters are ignored until the total number of bytes needed
for the graphic format is received.
Note When transmitting fonts or graphics, the ~DY command and the binary content can be
sent as two separate data streams. In cases where the ~DY command and data content are sent
separately, the connection to the printer must be maintained until both the command and data
content have been sent. If the command and data content are sent separately, the data light on
the printer will remain lit until it receives all the data called for in the ~DY command. The
download will be considered complete when the number of bytes called out in the ~DY
command have been received.
For best results, graphic files must be monochrome (black and white) or dithered.
Example This is an example of how to download a binary TrueType Font file of Size bytes
using the name fontfile.ttf and storing it to permanent flash memory on the printer:
~DYE:FONTFILE.TTF,B,T,SIZE,,
Parameters Details
175
ZPL Commands
~DY
Comments For more information on ZB64 encoding and compression, see
ZB64 Encoding and Compression on page 911.
Examples These examples show:
that when the ÎM command is used with the ^FO command, the ÎM command moves
the logo.png file from a storage area to the 0,0 position on the label. This is the ZPL
code:
^XA
^FO0,0ÎMR:LOGO.PNG^FS
^XZ
that when the ÎL command is used at the beginning of a label format, it loads a stored
image (logo.png) of a format and merges it with additional data. It is automatically
positioned at the 0,0 position of the label and does not require the ^FO command. This is
the ZPL code:
^XA
ÎLR:LOGO.PNG
^XZ
These are some important things to know about this command in firmware version V60.14.x,
V50.14.x, or later:
ZebraNet Bridge can be used to download fonts and graphics with this command.
OpenType tables are only supported when downloading the font with this command
OpenType fonts (.OTF) are supported if they are downloaded as a TrueType font. In
the printer .OTF fonts have the .TTF extension.
ZPL Commands
~EG
176
~EG
Erase Download Graphics
See ÎD on page 235.
177
ZPL Commands
^FB
^FB
Field Block
Description The ^FB command allows you to print text into a defined block type format.
This command formats an ^FD or ^SN string into a block of text using the origin, font, and
rotation specified for the text string. The ^FB command also contains an automatic word-wrap
function.
Format ^FBa,b,c,d,e
Parameters Details
a = width of text block
line (in dots)
Accepted Values: 0 to the width of the label
Default Value: 0
If the value is less than font width or not specified, text
does not print.
b = maximum number of
lines in text block
Default Value: 1
Text exceeding the maximum number of lines overwrites
the last line. Changing the font size automatically
increases or decreases the size of the block.
c = add or delete space
between lines (in
dots)
Accepted Values: -9999 to 9999
Default Value: 0
Numbers are considered to be positive unless preceded by
a minus sign. Positive values add space; negative values
delete space.
d = text justification Accepted Values:
L = left
C = center
R = right
J = justified
Default Value: L
If J is used the last line is left-justified.
e = hanging indent (in
dots) of the second
and remaining lines
Default Value: 0
ZPL Commands
^FB
178
Comments
This scheme can be used to facilitate special functions:
\& = carriage return/line feed
$*) = soft hyphen (word break with a dash)
\\ = backslash ($
Item 1: ^CI13 must be selected to print a backslash (\).
Item 2: If a soft hyphen escape sequence is placed near the end of a line, the hyphen is printed.
If it is not placed near the end of the line, it is ignored.
(*) = any alphanumeric character
If a word is too long to print on one line by itself (and no soft hyphen is specified), a
hyphen is automatically placed in the word at the right edge of the block. The remainder
of the word is on the next line. The position of the hyphen depends on word length, not a
syllable boundary. Use a soft hyphen within a word to control where the hyphenation
occurs.
Maximum data-string length is 3K, including control characters, carriage returns, and line
feeds.
Normal carriage returns, line feeds, and word spaces at line breaks are discarded.
When using ^FT (Field Typeset), ^FT uses the baseline origin of the last possible line of
text. Increasing the font size causes the text block to increase in size from bottom to top.
This could cause a label to print past its top margin.
When using ^FO (Field Origin), increasing the font size causes the text block to increase
in size from top to bottom.
^FS terminates an ^FB command. Each block requires its own ^FB command.
Example These are examples of how the ^FB command affects field data.
^XA
^CF0,30,30^FO25,50
^FB250,4,,
^FDFD command that IS
preceded by an FB command.^FS
^XZ
^XA
^CF0,30,30^FO25,50
^FDFD command that IS NOT
preceded by an FB command.^FS
^XZ
179
ZPL Commands
^FB
While the ^FB command has a text justification parameter that defines the justification of the
text within the block, it also interacts with the justification of ^FO and ^FT that define the
justification of the origin.
The ^FB command does not support soft hyphens as a potential line break point. However,
soft hyphen characters are always printed as if they were a hyphen.
The ^FB command does not support complex text. For complex text support, use ^TB.
ZPL Commands
^FC
180
^FC
Field Clock
Description The ^FC command is used to set the clock-indicators (delimiters) and the
clock mode for use with the Real-Time Clock hardware. This command must be included
within each label field command string each time the Real-Time Clock values are required
within the field.
Format ^FCa,b,c
Comments The ^FC command is ignored if the Real Time Clock hardware is not present.
As of V60.13.0.10, (^SN) functions with (^FC) capabilities.
For more details on the Real Time Clock, see Real Time Clock on page 923.
Parameters Details
a = primary clock
indicator character
Default Value: %
b = secondary clock
indicator character
Default Value: nonethis value cannot be the same as a or c
c = third clock indicator
character
Default Value: nonethis value cannot be the same as a or b
Example Entering these ZPL commands sets the primary clock indicator to %, the
secondary clock indicator to {, and the third clock indicator to #. The results are printed on a
label with Primary, Secondary, and Third as field data.
^XA
^FO10,100Â0N,50,50
^FC%,{,#
^FDPrimary: %m/%d/%y^FS
^FO10,200Â0N,50,50
^FC%,{,#
^FDSecondary: {m/{d/{y^FS
^FO10,300Â0N,50,50
^FC%,{,#
^FDThird: #m/#d/#y^FS
^XZ
181
ZPL Commands
^FD
^FD
Field Data
Description The ^FD command defines the data string for the field. The field data can be
any printable character except those used as command prefixes (^ and ~).
Format ^FDa
Comments The ^ and ~ characters can be printed by changing the prefix characterssee
^CD ~CD on page 145 and ^CT ~CT on page 155. The new prefix characters cannot be
printed.
Characters with codes above 127, or the ^ and ~ characters, can be printed using the ^FH and
^FD commands.
^CI13 must be selected to print a backslash (\).
For information on using soft hyphens, see Comments on the ^FB command on page 178.
Parameters Details
a = data to be printed Accepted Values: any data string up to 3072 bytes
Default Value: nonea string of characters must be entered
ZPL Commands
^FH
182
^FH
Field Hexadecimal Indicator
Description The ^FH command allows you to enter the hexadecimal value for any
character directly into the ^FD statement. The ^FH command must precede each ^FD
command that uses hexadecimals in its field.
Within the ^FD statement, the hexadecimal indicator must precede each hexadecimal value.
The default hexadecimal indicator is _ (underscore). There must be a minimum of two
characters designated to follow the underscore. The a parameter can be added when a
different hexadecimal indicator is needed.
This command can be used with any of the commands that have field data (that is ^FD, ^FV
(Field Variable), and ^SN (Serialized Data)).
Valid hexadecimal characters are:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F a b c d e f
Format ^FHa
Parameters Details
a = hexadecimal
indicator
Accepted Values: any character except current format and
control prefix (^ and ~ by default)
Default Value: _ (underscore)
Example This is an example of how to enter a hexadecimal value directly into a ^FD
statement: This is an example for ascii data using ^CI0.
183
ZPL Commands
^FH
Examples These are examples of how ^FH works with UTF-8 and UTF-16BE:
UTF-8
UTF-16BE
^XA
^CI28
^LL500
^FO100,100
ÂA,20,20
^FH^FDU+00A1 in UTF8 = _C2_A1^FS
^XZ
^XA
^CI29
^LL500
^FO100,100
ÂA,20,20
^FH^FDU+00A1 in UTF16BE = _00_A1^FS
^XZ
ZPL Commands
^FL
184
^FL
Font Linking
Description The ^FL command provides the ability to link any TrueType font, including
private character fonts, to associated fonts. If the base font does not have a glyph for the
required character, the printer looks to the linked fonts for the glyph. The font links are user-
definable.
The font linking remains until the link is broken or the printer is turned off. To permanently
save the font linking, use the ^JUS command.
Format ^FL<ext>,<base>,<link>
This command is available only for printers with firmware versions V60.14.x, V50.14.x, or
later.
Note For assistance in setting up the font links, please use the font wizard in
ZebraNet Bridge.
Parameters Details
<ext> This is the fully-qualified filename of the extension. This file
name does not accept wildcards.
The supported extensions for this parameter are: .TTF and
.TTE. The format for this parameter is the memory device
followed by the font name with the extension, as follows:
E:SWISS721.TTF
<base> This is the filename of the base font(s) to which <ext> is
associated. This can be partially or fully wild carded; all files
that match the wildcard specification will have this extension
associated with it.
The filename does not have to match a file that is currently
defined on the printer. A specification of *.TTF results in all
*.TTF font files loaded on the printer currently or in the
future to be associated with the specified <ext> font
extension.
<link> This is an indicator that determines if the extension is to be
linked with the base, or unlinked from the base, as follows:
Accepted Values:
0 = <ext> is to be unlinked (disassociated) from the
file(s) specified in <base>
1 = <ext> is to be linked (associated) with the file(s)
specified by <base>
Default Value: must be an accepted value or it is ignored
185
ZPL Commands
^FL
Comments A font can have up to five fonts linked to it. The printer resident font, 0.FNT is
always the last font in the list of font links, but is not included in the five link maximum. It can
also be placed anywhere in the font links list.
The default glyph prints when a glyph cannot be found in any of the fonts in the link list. The
advanced layout command ^PA determines if the default glyph is a space character or the
default glyph of the base font, which is typically a hollow box.
The list of font links can be printed by using the ^LF command or retrieved with the ^HT
command.
Font Linking
In the font linking example, this code is sent down to link the ANMDJ.TTF font to
SWISS721.TTF font:
^XA
^FLE:ANMDJ.TTF,E:SWISS721.TTF,1^FS
^XZ
When the label reprints, the Asian characters are printed using the ANMDJ.TTF font,
rather than the SWISS721.TTF font.
Examples These examples show the code and output for no font linking and for font
linking:
No Font Linking
In the no font linking example, the Swiss721 font does not have the Asian glyphs, which
is why Asian glyphs do not print.
ZPL Commands
^FL
186
187
ZPL Commands
^FM
^FM
Multiple Field Origin Locations
Description The ^FM command allows you to control the placement of bar code symbols.
It designates field locations for the PDF417 (^B7) and MicroPDF417 (^BF) bar codes when
the structured append capabilities are used. This allows printing multiple bar codes from the
same set of text information.
The structured append capability is a way of extending the text printing capacity of both bar
codes. If a string extends beyond what the data limitations of the bar code are, it can be printed
as a series: 1 of 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3. Scanners read the information and reconcile it into the
original, unsegmented text.
The ^FM command triggers multiple bar code printing on the same label with ^B7 and ^BF
only. When used with any other commands, it is ignored.
Format ^FMx1,y1,x2,y2,...
Parameters Details
x1 = x-axis location of
first symbol (in dots)
Accepted Values:
0 to 32000
e = exclude this bar code from printing
y1 = y-axis location of
first symbol (in dots)
Accepted Values:
0 to 32000
x2 = x-axis location of
second symbol (in
dots)
Accepted Values:
0 to 32000
y2 = y-axis location of
second symbol (in
dots)
Accepted Values:
0 to 32000
= continuation of X,Y
pairs
Maximum number of pairs: 60
ZPL Commands
^FM
188
Example This example shows you how to generate three bar codes with the text Zebra
Technologies Corporation strives to be would need to be repeated seven times, which
includes 2870 characters of data (including spaces) between ^FD and ^FS:
1 The ellipse is not part of the code. It indicates that the text needs to be
repeated seven times, as mentioned in the example description.
^XA
^FM100,100,100,600,100,1200
^BY2,3
^B7N,5,5,9,83,N
specialty demand labeling
in a timely manner
^FS^XZ
1
189
ZPL Commands
^FM
Comments Subsequent bar codes print once the data limitations of the previous bar code
have been exceeded. For example, bar code 2 of 3 prints once 1 of 3 has reached the maximum
amount of data it can hold. Specifying three fields does not ensure that three bar codes print;
enough field data to fill three bar code fields has to be provided.
The number of the x,y pairs can exceed the number of bar codes generated. However, if too
few are designated, no symbols print.
Example This example assumes a maximum of three bar codes, with bar code 2 of 3
omitted:
1 The ellipse is not part of the code. It indicates that the text needs to be
repeated seven times, as mentioned in the example description.
^XA
^FM100,100,e,e,100,1200
^BY2,3
^B7N,5,5,9,83,N
specialty demand labeling
in a timely manner
^FS^XZ
1
ZPL Commands
^FN
190
^FN
Field Number
Description The ^FN command numbers the data fields. This command is used in both
^DF (Store Format) and ^XF (Recall Format) commands.
In a stored format, use the ^FN command where you would normally use the ^FD (Field
Data) command. In recalling the stored format, use ^FN in conjunction with the ^FD
command.
The optional "a" parameter can be used with the KDU Plus to cause prompts to be displayed
on the KDU unit. Also, when the Print on Label link is selected on the Directory page of
ZebraLink enabled printers the field prompt displays.
The number of fields and data that can be stored is dependent in the available printer memory.
Format ^FN#"a"
* This parameter is only available on printers with firmware V50.13.2, V53.15.5Z,
V60.13.0.1, or later.For a complete example of the ^DF and ^XF command, see ^DF and ^XF
Download format and recall format on page 45.
Comments
The same ^FN value can be stored with several different fields.
If a label format contains a field with ^FN and ^FD, the data in that field prints for any
other field containing the same ^FN value.
For the "a" parameter to function as a prompt the characters used in the "a" parameter
must be surrounded by double quotes (see example).
Note The maximum number of ^FN commands that can be used depends on the amount of
data that is placed in the fields on the label. It is recommended to use 400 or fewer fields.
Parameters Details
# = number to be
assigned to the field
Default Value: 0
"a" = optional
parameter*
Accepted Values: 255 alphanumeric characters maximum
(a-z,A-Z,1-9 and space)
Default Value: optional parameter
Example The ^FN1Name would result in Name being used as the prompt
on the KDU unit.
191
ZPL Commands
^FO
^FO
Field Origin
Description The ^FO command sets a field origin, relative to the label home (^LH)
position.
Format ^FOx,y,z
Comments If the value entered for the x or y parameter is too high, it could position the
field origin completely off the label.
Parameters Details
x = x-axis location (in
dots)
Default Value: 0
y = y-axis location (in
dots)
Default Value: 0
z = justification
The z parameter is only
versions V60.14.x,
V50.14.x, or later.
Accepted Values:
0 = left justification
1 = right justification
2 = auto justification (script dependent)
Default Value: last accepted ^FW value or ^FW default
This command interacts with the field direction parameter of ^FP and with the rotation
parameter of Â. For output and examples, see Field Interactions on page 917.
The auto justification option might cause unexpected results if variable fields or bidirectional
text are used with ^FO. For the best results with bidirectional text and/or variable fields, use
either the left of right justification option.
ZPL Commands
^FP
192
^FP
Field Parameter
Description The ^FP command allows vertical and reverse formatting of the font field,
commonly used for printing Asian fonts.
Format ^FPd,g
.
Parameters Details
d = direction Accepted Values:
H = horizontal printing (left to right)
V = vertical printing (top to bottom)
R = reverse printing (right to left)
Default Value: H
g = additional
inter-character gap
(in dots)
Default Value: 0 if no value is entered
Example This is an example of how to implement reverse and vertical print:
For vertical and reverse printing directions, combining semantic clusters are used to place
characters.
This command interacts with the justification parameters of ^FO and ^FT and with the
rotation parameter of Â. For output and examples, see Field Interactions on page 917.
193
ZPL Commands
^FR
^FR
Field Reverse Print
Description The ^FR command allows a field to appear as white over black or black over
white. When printing a field and the ^FR command has been used, the color of the output is
the reverse of its background.
Format ^FR
Comments The ^FR command applies to only one field and has to be specified each time.
When multiple ^FR commands are going to be used, it might be more convenient to use the
^LR command.
Example In this example, the ^GB command creates areas of black allowing the printing to
appear white:
^XA
^PR1
^FO100,100
^GB70,70,70,,3^FS
^FO200,100
^GB70,70,70,,3^FS
^FO300,100
^GB70,70,70,,3^FS
^FO400,100
^GB70,70,70,,3^FS
^FO107,110^CF0,70,93
^FR^FDREVERSE^FS
^XZ
ZPL Commands
^FS
194
^FS
Field Separator
Description The ^FS command denotes the end of the field definition. Alternatively, ^FS
command can also be issued as a single ASCII control code SI (Control-O, hexadecimal 0F).
Format ^FS
195
ZPL Commands
^FT
^FT
Field Typeset
Description The ^FT command sets the field position, relative to the home position of the
label designated by the ^LH command. The typesetting origin of the field is fixed with respect
to the contents of the field and does not change with rotation.
Format ^FTx,y,z
Table 12 Typeset Justification
Note The ^FT command is capable of concantination of fields.
Parameters Details
x = x-axis location (in
dots)
Default Value: position after last formatted text field
y = y-axis location (in
dots)
Default Value: position after last formatted text field
z = justification
The z parameter is only
version V60.14.x,
V50.14.x, or later.
Accepted Values:
Default Value: last accepted ^FW value or ^FW default
The auto justification option may cause unexpected results if
variable fields or bidirectional text are used with ^FT. For
best results with bidirectional text and/or variable fields, use
either the left of right justification options.
L
e
f
t

J
u
s
t
i
f
i
e
d
Text For examples, see Field Interactions
on page 917.
Bar Codes Origin is base of bar code, at left edge
Graphic Boxes Origin is bottom-left corner of the box
Images Origin is bottom-left corner of the image area
R
i
g
h
t
J
u
s
t
i
f
i
e
d
Text For examples, see Field Interactions
on page 917.
Bar Codes Origin is base of bar code, at right edge
Graphic Boxes Origin is bottom-right corner of the box
Images Origin is bottom-right corner of the image area
ZPL Commands
^FT
196
Example This is an example of the ^FT command and concatenation:
When a coordinate is missing, the position following the last formatted field is assumed. This
remembering simplifies field positioning with respect to other fields. Once the first field is
positioned, other fields follow automatically.
There are several instances where using the ^FT command without specifying x and y
parameters is not recommended:
when positioning the first field in a label format
at any time with the ^FN (Field Number) command
following an ^SN (Serialization Data) command
variable data
bidirectional text
The right typeset justified is available only for printers with firmware version V60.14.x,
V50.14.x, or later.
This command interacts with the field direction parameters of ^FP and with the rotation
parameter of Â. For output and code examples, see Field Interactions on page 917
197
ZPL Commands
^FV
^FV
Field Variable
Description ^FV replaces the ^FD (field data) command in a label format when the field is
variable.
Format ^FVa
Comments ^FV fields are always cleared after the label is printed. ^FD fields are not
cleared.
Parameters Details
a = variable field data to
be printed
Accepted Values: 0 to 3072 byte string
Example This is an example of how to use the ^MC and ^FV command:
^XA
^FO40,40
^GB300,203,8^FS
^FO55,60^CF0,25
^FVVARIABLE DATA #1^FS
^FO80,150
^FDFIXED DATA^FS
^MCN
^XZ
^XA
^FO55,60
^FVVARIABLE DATA #2^FS
^MCY
^XZ
^CF0,25
ZPL Commands
^FW
198
^FW
Field Orientation
Description The ^FW command sets the default orientation for all command fields that
have an orientation (rotation) parameter and sets the default justification for all commands
with a justification parameter. Fields can be rotated 0, 90, 180, or 270 degrees clockwise by
using this command. Justification can be left, right, or auto.
The ^FW command affects only fields that follow it. Once you have issued a ^FW command,
the setting is retained until you turn off the printer or send a new ^FW command to the printer.
Format ^FWr,z
Parameters Details
r = rotate field Accepted Values:
N = normal
R = rotated 90 degrees
B = bottom-up 270 degrees, read from bottom up
Initial Value at Power-up: N
z = justification
The z parameter is
available only with printers
with firmware version
V60.14.x, V50.14.x, or
later.
Accepted Values:
Default Value: auto for ^TB and left for all other commands
199
ZPL Commands
^FW
Comments ^FW affects only the orientation in commands where the rotation parameter has
not been specifically set. If a command has a specific rotation parameter, that value is used.
Example This example shows how ^FW rotation works in conjunction with ^FO. In this
example, note that:
the fields using A0N print the field in normal rotation
the fields with no rotation indicated (A0) follow the rotation used in the ^FW
command (^FWR).
^FW affects only the justification in commands where the parameter has not been set. If a
command has a specific justification parameter that value is used .
^XA
^FWR
^FO150,90Â0N,25,20^FDZebra Technologies^FS
^FO115,75Â0,25,20^FD0123456789^FS
^FO150,115Â0N,25,20^FD333 Corporate Woods
Parkway^FS
^FO400,75Â0,25,20^FDXXXXXXXXX^FS
^XZ
ZPL Commands
^FX
200
^FX
Comment
Description The ^FX command is useful when you want to add non-printing informational
comments or statements within a label format. Any data after the ^FX command up to the next
caret (^) or tilde (~) command does not have any effect on the label format. Therefore, you
should avoid using the caret (^) or tilde (~) commands within the ^FX statement.
Format ^FXc
Comments Correct usage of the ^FX command includes following it with the ^FS
command.
Parameters Details
c = non printing
comment
Creates a non-printable comment.
Example This is an example of how to use the ^FX command effectively:
^XA
^LH100,100^FS
^FXSHIPPING LABEL^FS
^FO10,10^GB470,280,4^FS
^FO10,190^GB470,4,4^FS
^FO10,80^GB240,2,2^FS
^FO250,10^GB2,100,2^FS
^FO250,110^GB226,2,2^FS
^FO250,60^GB226,2,2^FS
^FO156,190^GB2,95,2^FS
^FO312,190^GB2,95,2^FS
^XZ
201
ZPL Commands
^GB
^GB
Graphic Box
Description The ^GB command is used to draw boxes and lines as part of a label format.
Boxes and lines are used to highlight important information, divide labels into distinct areas,
or to improve the appearance of a label. The same format command is used for drawing either
boxes or lines.
Format ^GBw,h,t,c,r
For the w and h parameters, keep in mind that printers have a default of 6, 8, 12, or
24 dots/millimeter. This comes out to 153, 203, 300, or 600 dots per inch. To determine the
values for w and h, calculate the dimensions in millimeters and multiply by 6, 8, 12, or 24.
If the width and height are not specified, you get a solid box with its width and height as
specified by value t.
The roundness-index is used to determine a rounding-radius for each box. Formula:
rounding-radius = (rounding-index / 8) * (shorter side / 2)
where the shorter side is the lesser of the width and height (after adjusting for minimum and
default values).
Parameters Details
w = box width (in dots) Accepted Values: value of t to 32000
Default Value: value used for thickness (t) or 1
h = box height (in dots) Accepted Values: value of t to 32000
t = border thickness (in
dots)
Default Value: 1
c = line color Accepted Values:
B = black
W = white
Default Value: B
r = degree of corner-
rounding
Accepted Values: 0 (no rounding) to 8 (heaviest rounding)
Default Value: 0
ZPL Commands
^GB
202
Examples Here are a few examples of graphic boxes:
Width: 1.5 inch; Height: 1 inch; Thickness: 10; Color: default; Rounding: default
Width: 0 inch; Height: 1 inch; Thickness: 20; Color: default; Rounding: default:

Width: 1 inch; Height: 0 inch; Thickness: 30; Color: default; Rounding: default
Width: 1.5 inch; Height: 1 inch; Thickness: 10; Color: default; Rounding: 5
^XA
^FO50,50
^GB300,200,10^FS
^XZ
^XA
^FO50,50
^GB0,203,20^FS
^XZ
^XA
^FO50,50
^GB203,0,20^FS
^XZ
^XA
^FO50,50
^GB300,200,10,,5^FS
^XZ
203
ZPL Commands
^GC
^GC
Graphic Circle
Description The ^GC command produces a circle on the printed label. The command
parameters specify the diameter (width) of the circle, outline thickness, and color. Thickness
extends inward from the outline.
Format ^GCd,t,c
Parameters Details
d = circle diameter (in
dots)
Accepted Values: 3 to 4095 (larger values are replaced with
4095)
Default Value: 3
dots)
Default Value: 1
B = black
W = white
Default Value: B
Example This is an example of how to create a circle on the printed label:
^XA
^FO50,50
^GC250,10,B^FS
^XZ
ZPL Commands
^GD
204
^GD
Graphic Diagonal Line
Description The ^GD command produces a straight diagonal line on a label. This can be
used in conjunction with other graphic commands to create a more complex figure.
Format ^GDw,h,t,c,o
Parameters Details
w = box width (in dots) Accepted Values: 3 to 32000
Default Value: value of t (thickness) or 1
h = box height (in dots) Accepted Values: 3 to 32000
Default Value: value of t (thickness) or 1
dots)
Default Value: 1
B = black
W = white
Default Value: B
o = orientation (direction
of the diagonal)
Accepted Values:
R (or /) = right-leaning diagonal
L (or \) = left-leaning diagonal
Default Value: R
Example This is an example of how to create a diagonal line connecting one corner with the
opposite corner of a box on a printed label:
^XA
^FO150,100
^GB350,203,10^FS
^FO155,110
^GD330,183,10,,R^FS
^XZ
205
ZPL Commands
^GE
^GE
Graphic Ellipse
Description The ^GE command produces an ellipse in the label format.
Format ^GEw,h,t,c
Parameters Details
w = ellipse width (in dots) Accepted Values: 3 to 4095 (larger values are replaced with
4095)
h = ellipse height (in
dots)
dots)
Default Value: 1
B = black
W = white
Default Value: B
Example This is an example of how to create a ellipse on a printed label:
^XA
^FO100,100
^GE300,100,10,B^FS
^XZ
ZPL Commands
^GF
206
^GF
Graphic Field
Description The ^GF command allows you to download graphic field data directly into the
printers bitmap storage area. This command follows the conventions for any other field,
meaning a field orientation is included. The graphic field data can be placed at any location
within the bitmap space.
Format ^GFa,b,c,d,data
Parameters Details
a = compression type Accepted Values:
A = ASCII hexadecimal (follows the format for other
download commands)
B = binary (data sent after the c parameter is strictly
binary)
C = compressed binary (data sent after the c parameter
is in compressed binary format. The data is
compressed on the host side using Zebras
compression algorithm. The data is then
decompressed and placed directly into the bitmap.)
Default Value: A
b = binary byte count Accepted Values: 1 to 99999
This is the total number of bytes to be transmitted for the
total image or the total number of bytes that follow
parameter d. For ASCII download, the parameter should
match parameter c. Out-of-range values are set to the
nearest limit.
Default Value: command is ignored if a value is not specified
c = graphic field count Accepted Values: 1 to 99999
This is the total number of bytes comprising the graphic
format (width x height), which is sent as parameter d.
Count divided by bytes per row gives the number of lines
in the image. This number represents the size of the image,
not necessarily the size of the data stream (see d).
207
ZPL Commands
^GF
d = bytes per row Accepted Values: 1 to 99999
This is the number of bytes in the downloaded data that
comprise one row of the image.
data = data Accepted Values:
ASCII hexadecimal data: 00 to FF
A string of ASCII hexadecimal numbers, two digits per
image byte. CR and LF can be inserted as needed for
readability. The number of two-digit number pairs must
match the above count. Any numbers sent after count is
satisfied are ignored. A comma in the data pads the current
line with 00 (white space), minimizing the data sent. ~DN
or any caret or tilde character prematurely aborts the
download.
Binary data: Strictly binary data is sent from the host. All
control prefixes are ignored until the total number of bytes
needed for the graphic format is sent.
Example This example downloads 8,000 total bytes of data and places the graphic data at
location 100,100 of the bitmap. The data sent to the printer is in ASCII form.
^FO100,100^GFA,8000,8000,80,ASCII data
Example This example downloads 8,000 total bytes of data and places the graphic data at
location 100,100 of the bitmap. The data sent to the printer is in binary form.
^FO100,100^GFB,8000,8000,80,Binary data
Parameters Details
ZPL Commands
^GS
208
^GS
Graphic Symbol
Description The ^GS command enables you to generate the registered trademark,
copyright symbol, and other symbols.
Format ^GSo,h,w
Parameters Details
N = normal
R = rotate 90 degrees clockwise
B = bottom-up, 270 degrees
Default Value: N or last ^FW value
h = character height
proportional to width
(in dots)
Default Value: last ^CF value
w = character width
proportional to
height (in dots)
Default Value: last ^CF value
209
ZPL Commands
^GS
Example Use the ^GS command followed by ^FD and the appropriate character (A
through E) within the field data to generate the desired character:
^XA^CFD
^FO50,50
^FDZEBRA PROGRAMMING^FS
^FO50,75
^FDLANGUAGE II (ZPL II )^FS
^FO280,75
^GS^FDC^FS
^XZ
ZPL Commands
~HB
210
~HB
Battery Status
Description When the ~HB command is sent to the printer, a data string is sent back to the
host. The string starts with an <STX> control code sequence and terminates by an
<ETX><CR><LF> control code sequence.
Format ~HB
Parameters: when the printer receives the command, it returns:
<STX>bb.bb,hh.hh,bt<ETX><CR><LF>
Comments This command is used for the power-supply battery of the printer and should
not be confused with the battery backed-up RAM.
Important This command only responds to mobile printers.
<STX> = ASCII start-of-text character
bb.bb = current battery voltage reading to the nearest 1/4 volt
hh.hh = current head voltage reading to the nearest 1/4 volt
bt = battery temperature in Celsius
<ETX> = ASCII end-of-text character
<CR> = ASCII carriage return
<LF> = ASCII line feed character
211
ZPL Commands
~HD
~HD
Head Diagnostic
Description The ~HD command echoes printer status information that includes the power
supply and head temperature using the terminal emulator.
Format ~HD
Example This is an example of the ~HD command:
ZPL Commands
^HF
212
^HF
Host Format
Description The ^HF command sends stored formats to the host.
Format ^HFd,o,x
Parameters Details
d = device to recall
image
Default Value: R:
x = extension Fixed Value: .ZPL
Example This example shows the sequence and results.
Using a terminal emulator, you download this code to the printer:
^XA
^DFB:FILE1.ZPL
^FO100,100Â0,100
^FDTEST^FS
^XZ
Then you send this code to the printer:
^XA
^HFB:FILE1.ZPL
^XZ
The terminal emulator returns this code:
^XA^DFFILE1,
^FO100,100Â0,100^FDTEST^FS
^XZ
213
ZPL Commands
^HG
^HG
Host Graphic
Description The ^HG command is used to upload graphics to the host. The graphic image
can be stored for future use, or it can be downloaded to any Zebra printer.
Format ^HGd:o.x
Comments For more information on uploading graphics, see ^HY on page 232.
Parameters Details
d = device location
of object
Default Value: search priority
o = object name Accepted Values: 1 to 8 alphanumeric characters
x = extension Fixed Value: .GRF
ZPL Commands
^HH
214
^HH
Configuration Label Return
Description The ^HH command echoes printer configuration back to the host, using a
terminal emulator.
Format ^HH
Example This is an example of what is returned to the host when ^XA^HH^XZ is sent to
the printer:
215
ZPL Commands
~HI
~HI
Host Identification
Description The ~HI command is designed to be sent from the host to the Zebra printer to
retrieve information. Upon receipt, the printer responds with information on the model,
software version, dots-per-millimeter setting, memory size, and any detected objects.
Format ~HI
When the printer receives this command, it returns:
XXXXXX,V1.0.0,dpm,000KB,X
XXXXXX = model of Zebra printer
V1.0.0 = version of software
dpm = dots/mm
6, 8, 12, or 24 dots/mm printheads
000KB = memory
512KB = 1/2 MB
1024KB = 1 MB
2048KB = 2 MB
4096KB = 4 MB
8192KB = 8 MB
x = recognizable objects
only options specific to printer are shown (cutter, options, et cetera.)
ZPL Commands
~HM
216
~HM
Host RAM Status
Description Sending ~HM to the printer immediately returns a memory status message to
the host. Use this command whenever you need to know the printers RAM status.
When ~HM is sent to the Zebra printer, a line of data containing information on the total
amount, maximum amount, and available amount of memory is sent back to the host.
Format ~HM
Comments Memory taken up by bitmaps is included in the currently available memory
value (due to ^MCN).
Downloading a graphic image, fonts, or saving a bitmap affects only the amount of RAM. The
total amount of RAM and maximum amount of RAM does not change after the printer is
turned on.
Example This example shows when the ~HM is sent to the printer, a line of data containing
three numbers are sent back to the host. Each set of numbers is identified and explained in the
table that follows:
1024,0780,0780
2
1
3
1 The total amount of RAM (in kilobytes) installed in the printer. In
this example, the printer has 1024K RAM installed.
2 The maximum amount of RAM (in kilobytes) available to the
user. In this example, the printer has a maximum of 780K RAM
available.
3 The amount of RAM (in kilobytes) currently available to the user.
In this example, there is 780K of RAM in the printer currently
available to the user.
217
ZPL Commands
~HQ
~HQ
Host Query
Description The ~HQ command group requests that the printer send information back to
the host. This command is only supported on Zebra ZM400/ZM600, S4M (with
v53.15.4Z or later), and G-Series printers.
Format ~HQquery-type
Comments The response to the ~HQ command starts with STX, a CR LF is inserted
between each line, and the response ends with ETX.
Parameter Details
query-type For detailed examples of these parameters, see ~HQ Examples
on page 219.
Accepted Values:
ES = requests the printers status - see Table 13 on page 218
and Table 14 on page 218
HA = hardware address of the internal wired print server
JT = requests a summary of the printers printhead test
results
MA = maintenance alert settings
MI = maintenance information
OD = odometer
PH = printhead life history
PP = printers Plug and Play string
SN = printers serial number
UI = USB product ID and BDC release version
Default Value: must be an accepted value or the command is
ignored
ZPL Commands
~HQ
218
Table 13 Error Flags (~HQES)
X = Value can be any hexadecimal number (0-9, A-F)
Table 14 Warning Flags (~HQES)
Flag
Group 2 Group 1
Error Flags Nibbles 16-9 Nibbles 8-4 Nibble 3 Nibble 2 Nibble 1
No Error 0 00000000 00000 0 0 0
Error Present 1 00000000 00000 X X X
Printhead Thermistor Open 1 00000000 00000 2 X X
Invalid Firmware Configuration 1 00000000 00000 1 X X
Printhead Detection Error 1 00000000 00000 X 8 X
Bad Printhead Element 1 00000000 00000 X 4 X
Motor Over Temperature 1 00000000 00000 X 2 X
Printhead Over Temperature 1 00000000 00000 X 1 X
Cutter Fault 1 00000000 00000 X X 8
Head Open 1 00000000 00000 X X 4
Ribbon Out 1 00000000 00000 X X 2
Media Out 1 00000000 00000 X X 1
Flag
Group 2 Group 1
Warning Flags Nibbles 16-9 Nibbles 8-2 Nibble 1
No Error 0 00000000 0000000 0
Error Present 1 00000000 0000000 X
Replace Printhead 1 00000000 0000000 4
Clean Printhead 1 00000000 0000000 2
Need to Calibrate Media 1 00000000 0000000 1
219
ZPL Commands
~HQ
~HQ Examples
This section provides detail examples of all the available parameters.
This illustration identifies the printer status definitions:
Example This example shows how to request the printers status.
1. To request the printers status, type ~HQES.
The printer responds with data similar to this:
PRINTER STATUS
ERRORS: 1 00000000 00000005
WARNINGS: 1 00000000 00000002
In this example, the Printer Status resolves to these conditions:
The cover/printhead is open (value = 4).
Media is out or not loaded into the printer (value = 1).
The printhead needs to be cleaned (value = 2).
Error nibble 1 is equal to 5 when the error status values are added together (4 + 1).
1 Flag
2 Nibble 16-9
3 Nibble 8-4
4 Nibble 3
5 Nibble 2
6 Nibble 1
PRINTER STATUS
ERRORS: 1 00000000 00000005
WARNINGS: 1 00000000 00000002
1
2
3
4
5
6
ZPL Commands
~HQ
220
Example This example shows how the printer responds when the printer receives the
~HQES command:
1. To see how the printer responds, type ~HQES.
PRINTER STATUS
ERRORS: 1 00000000 0000000B
WARNINGS: 0 00000000 00000000
In this example, the printer status resolves to the following conditions:
The cutter has a fault (value = 8).
Ribbon is out or not loaded into the printer (value = 2).
Error byte 1 is equal to B when the error status values are added together
(8 + 2 + 1 = hexadecimal B).
Example This is an example of how to retrieve the hardware address of the internal wired
print server.
1. To get the hardware address of the internal wired print server, type ~HQHA.
MAC ADDRESS
00:07:4d:2c:e0:7a
Example This is an example of how to request a summary of the printers printhead test
results.
The ^JT command is used to initiate printhead testing, set the testing interval, and set the
element range to be tested. For more details see, ^JT on page 267.
1. To request a summary of the printers printhead test, type ~HQJT.
PRINT HEAD TEST RESULTS
0,A,0000,0000,0000
When the printer has printed enough labels to trigger a printhead test, the initial data
changes.
1. To request a summary of the printers printhead test, type ~HQJT.
PRINT HEAD TEST RESULTS:
0,A,0015,0367,0000
221
ZPL Commands
~HQ
This illustration identifies the printhead test field definitions:
1 Element failure
2 Manual (M) or automatic (A) range
3 First test element
4 Last test element
5 Failure count
Example This is an example of how to use the maintenance alert query for the ~HQ
command.
1. To get the current settings, type ~HQMA.
~HQMA
MAINTENANCE ALERT SETTINGS
HEAD REPLACEMENT INTERVAL: 1 km
HEAD REPLACEMENT FREQUENCY: 0 M
HEAD CLEANING INTERVAL: 0 M
HEAD CLEANING FREQUENCY: 0 M
PRINT REPLACEMENT ALERT: NO
PRINT CLEANING ALERT: NO
UNITS: C
Example This is an example of how to use the maintenance information query for the ~HQ
command. Note that the message is controlled by the ^MI command.
1. To get the current settings, type ~HQMI.
MAINTENANCE ALERT MESSAGES
CLEAN: PLEASE CLEAN PRINT HEAD
REPLACE: PLEASE REPLACE PRINT HEAD
0,A,0000,0000,0000
1 2 3 4 5
ZPL Commands
~HQ
222
Example This is an example of how to use the odometer query for the ~HQ command. Note
that the units of measure are controlled by the ^MA command. Also, if the "Early Warning
Maintenance State" is turned "ON" the printer response would also list LAST CLEANED
and CURRENT PRINTHEAD LIFE counters.
1. To get the current settings, type ~HQOD.
PRINT METERS
TOTAL NONRESETTABLE: 8560 "
USER RESETTABLE CNTR1: 9 "
USER RESETTABLE CNTR2: 8560 "
The units of measure are set to inches.
2. To change the units of measure to centimeters, type:
^XA^MA,,,,C
^XZ
The units of measure are set to centimeters.
3. To check the settings, type ~HQOD.
PRINT METERS
TOTAL NONRESETTABLE: 21744 cm
USER RESETTABLE CNTR1: 24 cm
USER RESETTABLE CNTR2: 21744 cm
Example This is an example of how to use the printhead life query for the ~HQ command.
Note that the units of measure are controlled by the ^MA command.
1. To get the current settings, type ~HQPH.
1 The current life of the print head.
2 Line items 2 through 10 (the example only shows 2 through
3) tracks the measurement for each time the print head is
changed.
LAST CLEANED: 257 "
HEAD LIFE HISTORY
# DISTANCE
1: 257 "
2: 1489 "
3: 7070 "
1
2
223
ZPL Commands
~HQ
Example This is an example of how to request the printers Plug and Play string.
1. To request the printers Plug and Play string, type ~HQPP.
PLUG AND PLAY MESSAGES
MFG: Zebra Technologies
CMD: ZPL
MDL: GX420t
Example This is an example of how to retrieve the printers serial number.
1. To get the printers serial number, type ~HQSN.
SERIAL NUMBER
41A06440023
Example This is an example of how to retrieve the printers USB product ID and BCD
release version
1. To get the printers USB product ID and BCD release version, type ~HQUI.
USB INFORMATION
PID: 0085
RELEASE VERSION: 15.01
ZPL Commands
~HS
224
~HS
Host Status Return
Description When the host sends ~HS to the printer, the printer sends three data strings
back. Each string starts with an <STX> control code and is terminated by an
<ETX><CR><LF> control code sequence. To avoid confusion, the host prints each string on a
separate line.
String 1 <STX>aaa,b,c,dddd,eee,f,g,h,iii,j,k,l<ETX><CR><LF>
* This string specifies the printers baud rate, number of data bits, number of stop bits, parity
setting, and type of handshaking. This value is a three-digit decimal representation of an eight-
bit binary number. To evaluate this parameter, first convert the decimal number to a binary
number.
Note When a ~HS command is sent, the printer will not send a response to the host if the
printer is in one of these conditions:
MEDIA OUT
RIBBON OUT
HEAD OPEN
REWINDER FULL
HEAD OVER-TEMPERATURE
aaa = communication (interface) settings*
b = paper out flag (1 = paper out)
c = pause flag (1 = pause active)
dddd = label length (value in number of dots)
eee = number of formats in receive buffer
f = buffer full flag (1 = receive buffer full)
g = communications diagnostic mode flag (1 = diagnostic mode active)
h = partial format flag (1 = partial format in progress)
iii = unused (always 000)
j = corrupt RAM flag (1 = configuration data lost)
k = temperature range (1 = under temperature)
l = temperature range (1 = over temperature)
225
ZPL Commands
~HS
The nine-digit binary number is read according to this table:

String 2 <STX>mmm,n,o,p,q,r,s,t,uuuuuuuu,v,www<ETX><CR><LF>
* This string specifies the printers media type, sensor profile status, and communication
diagnostics status. As in String 1, this is a three-digit decimal representation of an eight-bit
binary number. First, convert the decimal number to a binary number.
** These values are only supported on the Zebra ZM400/ZM600 printer.
mmm = function settings*
n = unused
o = head up flag (1 = head in up position)
p = ribbon out flag (1 = ribbon out)
q = thermal transfer mode flag (1 = Thermal Transfer Mode selected)
r = Print Mode
0 = Rewind
1 = Peel-Off
2 = Tear-Off
3 = Cutter
4 = Applicator
5 = Delayed cut
6 = Reserved **
7 = Reserved **
s = print width mode
t = label waiting flag (1 = label waiting in Peel-off Mode)
uuuuuu
uu
= labels remaining in batch
v = format while printing flag (always 1)
www = number of graphic images stored in memory
a a a a a = Baud
a
a
a
a
= Handshake
0 = Xon/Xoff
1 = DTR
0 000 = 110
0 001 = 300
0 010 = 600
0 011 = 1200
0 100 = 2400
0 101 = 4800
0 110 = 9600
0 111 = 19200
1 000 = 28800
1 001 = 38400
1 010 = 57600
1 011 = 14400
(available only on certain printer models)
= Parity Odd/Even
0 = Odd
1 = Even
= Disable/Enable
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
= Stop Bits
0 = 2 Bits
1 = 1 Bit
= Data Bits
0 = 7 Bits
1 = 8 Bits
7 8 2 1 0
6
5
4
3
aaa = a a a a a a a a a
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ZPL Commands
~HS
226
The eight-digit binary number is read according to this table:
String 3 <STX>xxxx,y<ETX><CR><LF>
xxxx = password
y = 0 (static RAM not installed)
1 (static RAM installed)
m7
m6
m5
m4 m3 m2 m1 = Unused
m0
= Media Type
0 = Die-Cut
1 = Continuous
= Sensor Profile
0 = Off
= Communications Diagnostics
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
= Print Mode
0 = Direct Thermal
1 = Thermal Transfer
mmm = m7 m6 m5 m4 m3 m2 m1 m0
227
ZPL Commands
^HT
^HT
Host Linked Fonts List
Description The ^HT command receives the complete list of font links over a
communication port.
This command is available only for printers with firmware version V60.14.x, V50.14.x, or
later.
Example The SWISS.721.TTF is the base font, ANMDJ.TTF is the first linked font, and
MSGOTHIC.TTF is the second linked font:
This is the code that was used to establish the font links:
^XA
^FLE:MSGOTHIC.TTF,E:SWISS721.TTF,1^FS
^XZ
ZPL II CODE DATA RETURNED
^XA
^HT
^XZ
LIST OF FONT LINKS
E:SWISS721.TTF
E:ANMDJ.TTF
E:MSGOTHIC.TTF
ZPL Commands
~HU
228
~HU
Return ZebraNet Alert Configuration
Description This command returns the table of configured ZebraNet Alert settings to the
host.
Format ~HU
The first line indicates that condition B (ribbon out) is routed to destination C (e-mail address).
The next two characters, Y and Y, indicate that the condition set and condition clear options
have been set to yes.
The following entry is the destination that the Alert e-mail should be sent to; in this example it
is admin@company.com.
The last figure seen in the first line is 0, which is the port number.
Each line shows the settings for a different Alert condition as defined in the ^SX command.
Example If the ~HU command is sent to the printer with existing Alert messages set to go
to e-mail and SNMP traps, the data returned would look something like the information
below. See ^SX on page 343 for complete information on the individual parameter settings.
B,C,Y,Y,ADMIN@COMPANY.COM,0
J,F,Y,Y,,0
C,F,Y,Y,,0
D,F,Y,Y,,0
E,F,Y,N,,0
F,F,Y,N,,0
H,C,Y,N,ADMIN@COMPANY.COM,0
N,C,Y,Y,ADMIN@COMPANY.COM,0
O,C,Y,Y,ADMIN@COMPANY.COM,0
P,C,Y,Y,ADMIN@COMPANY.COM,0
Important If there are no ^SX (alerts) set, the printer will not respond to the ~HU
command.
229
ZPL Commands
^HV
^HV
Host Verification
Description This command is used to return data from specified fields, along with an
optional ASCII header, to the host computer. The command can be used with any field that has
been assigned a number with the ^RT command or the ^FN and ^RF commands.
Format ^HV#,n,h
Parameters Details
# = field number
specified with
another command
The value assigned to this parameter should be the same as
the one used in another command.
Default Value: 0
n = number of bytes to be
returned
Default Value: 64
h = header Header to be returned with the data.
Accepted Values: 0 to 3072 bytes
Default Value: no header
ZPL Commands
^HW
230
^HW
Host Directory List
Description ^HW is used to transmit a directory listing of objects in a specific memory area
(storage device) back to the host device. This command returns a formatted ASCII string of
object names to the host.
Each object is listed on a line and has a fixed length. The total length of a line is also fixed.
Each line listing an object begins with the asterisk (*) followed by a blank space. There are
eight spaces for the object name, followed by a period and three spaces for the extension. The
extension is followed by two blank spaces, six spaces for the object size, two blank spaces, and
three spaces for option flags (reserved for future use). The format looks like this:
<STX><CR><LF>
DIR R: <CR><LF>
*Name.ext(2sp.)(6 obj. sz.)(2sp.)(3 option flags)
*Name.ext(2sp.)(6 obj. sz.)(2sp.)(3 option flags)
<CR><LF>
-xxxxxxx bytes free
<CR><LF>
<ETX>
<STX> = start of text
<CR><LR> = carriage return/line feed
<ETX> = end on text
The command might be used in a stand-alone file to be issued to the printer at any time. The
printer returns the directory listing as soon as possible, based on other tasks it might be
performing when the command is received.
This command, like all ^ (caret) commands, is processed in the order that it is received by the
printer.
Format ^HWd:o.x
Parameters Details
d = location to retrieve
object listing
Accepted Values: R:, E:, B:, A:and Z:
Default Value: R:
Default Value: asterisk (*). A question mark (?) can also be
used.
231
ZPL Commands
^HW
x = extension Accepted Values: any extension conforming to Zebra
conventions
Default Value: asterisk (*). A question mark (?) can also be
used.
f = format
The f parameter is only
version V60.16.0Z and
V53.16.0Z or later.
Accepted Values:
c = column format
d = default format
Default Value: d
Example Listed is an example of the ^HW command to retrieve from information R:
^XA
^HWR:*.*
^XZ
Example The printer returned this information as the Host Directory Listing:-DIR
R:*.*
*R:ARIALN1.FNT 49140
*R:ARIALN.FNT 49140
*R:ZEBRA.GRF 8420
-794292 bytes free R:RAM
Parameters Details
ZPL Commands
^HY
232
^HY
Upload Graphics
Description The ^HY command is an extension of the ^HG command. ^HY is used to
upload graphic objects from the printer in any supported format.
Format ^HYd:o.x
Comments The image is uploaded in the form of a ~DY command. The data field of the
returned ~DY command is always encoded in the ZB64 format.
Parameters Details
d = location of object Accepted Values: R:, E:, B:, and A:
Default Value: an object name must be specified
x = extension Accepted Values:
G = .GRF (raw bitmap format)
P = .PNG (compressed bitmap format)
Default Value: format of stored image
233
ZPL Commands
^HZ
^HZ
Display Description Information
Description The ^HZ command is used for returning printer description information in
XML format. The printer returns information on format parameters, object directories,
individual object data, and print status information.
Format ^HZb
Format ^HZO,d:o.x,l
Parameters Details
b = display description to
return
Accepted Values:
a = display all information
f = display printer format setting information
l = display object directory listing information
o = display individual object data information
r = display printer status information
Default Value: if the value is missing or invalid, the command
is ignored
Parameters Details
d = location of stored
object
Default Value: R:
o = object name Accepted Values: 1 to 8, or 1 to 16 alphanumeric characters
based on parameter l.
Default Value: if a name is not specified, UNKNOWN is used.
ZPL Commands
^HZ
234
x = extension Supported extensions for objects (parameter o) include:
.FNT font
.GRF graphic
.PNG compressed graphic
.ZPL stored format
.DAT encoding table
.ZOB downloadable object
.STO Alert data file
l = long filename support Accepted Values:
Y = Yes
If Y, the object data stores the filename as 16
characters. The data is only compatible with
firmware version V60.13.0.5, or later.
N = No
If N, the object data stores the filename as 8
characters. The data is forward and backward
compatible with all versions of firmware.
Default Value: N
Example This example shows the object data information for the object SAMPLE.GRF
located on R:.
^XA
^HZO,R:SAMPLE.GRF
^XZ
Parameters Details
235
ZPL Commands
ÎD
ÎD
Object Delete
Description The ÎD command deletes objects, graphics, fonts, and stored formats from
storage areas. Objects can be deleted selectively or in groups. This command can be used
within a printing format to delete objects before saving new ones, or in a stand-alone format to
delete objects.
The image name and extension support the use of the asterisk (*) as a wild card. This allows
you to easily delete a selected groups of objects.
Format ÎDd:o.x
Parameters Details
object
Default Value: R:
o = object name Accepted Values: any 1 to 8 character name
conventions
Default Value: .GRF
Example To delete stored formats from DRAM:
^XA
ÎDR:*.ZPL^FS
^XZ
Example To delete formats and images named SAMPLE from DRAM, regardless of the
extension:
XA
ÎDR:SAMPLE.*^FS
^XZ
ZPL Commands
ÎD
236

Comments When an object is deleted from R:, the object can no longer be used and
memory is available for storage. This applies only to R:memory. With the other memory types
(A:, B:, E:) the deleted object is no longer available. The memory space recovers when an
automatic defragmentation or initiallization occurs.
The ÎD command also frees up the uncompressed version of the object in DRAM.
If the name is specified as *.ZOB, all downloaded bar code fonts (or other objects) are
deleted.
If the named downloadable object cannot be found in the R:, E:, B:, and A: device, the
ÎD command is ignored.
Example To delete the image SAMPLE1.GRF prior to storing SAMPLE2.GRF:
^XA
^FO25,25ÂD,18,10
^FDDelete^FS
^FO25,45ÂD,18,10
^FDthen Save^FS
ÎDR:SAMPLE1.GRF^FS
ÎSR:SAMPLE2.GRF^FS^XZ
Example In this the * is a wild card, indicating that all objects with the .GRF extension are
deleted:
^XA
ÎDR:*.GRF^FS
^XZ
237
ZPL Commands
ÎL
ÎL
Image Load
Description The ÎL command is used at the beginning of a label format to load a stored
image of a format and merge it with additional data. The image is always positioned at
^FO0,0.
Using this technique to overlay the image of constant information with variable data greatly
increases the throughput of the label format.
Format ÎLd:o.x
Important See ÎS on page 240.
Parameters Details
object
Default Value: R:
x = extension Fixed Value: .GRF, .PNG
ZPL Commands
ÎL
238
Example This example recalls the stored image SAMPLE2.GRF from DRAM and
overlays it with the additional data. The graphic was stored using the ÎS command. For the
stored label format, see the ÎS on page 240 command.
^XA
ÎLR:SAMPLE2.GRF^FS
^CFD,36,20
^FO15,210
^FD900123^FS
^FO218,210
^FDLINE 12^FS
^FO15,360ÂD
^FDZEBRA THERMAL^FS
^FO15,400ÂD
^FDTRANSFER PRINTER^FS
^FO15,540
^FD54321^FS
^FO220,530
^FDZ58643^FS
^FO15,670Â0,27,18
^FDTesting Stored Graphic^FS
^FO15,700Â0,27,18
^FDLabel Formats!!^FS
^XZ
239
ZPL Commands
ÎM
ÎM
Image Move
Description The ÎM command performs a direct move of an image from storage area into
the bitmap. The command is identical to the ^XG command (Recall Graphic), except there are
no sizing parameters.
Format ÎMd:o.x
Comments By using the ^FO command, the graphic image can be positioned anywhere on
the label.
The difference between ÎM and ^XG: ÎM does not have magnification, and therefore might
require less formatting time. However, to take advantage of this, the image must be at a 8-, 16-,
or 32-bit boundary.
Parameters Details
object
x = extension Fixed Value: .GRF, .PNG
Example This example moves the image SAMPLE.GRF from DRAM and prints it in
several locations in its original size.
^XA
^FO100,100ÎMR:SAMPLE.GRF^FS
^XZ
ZPL Commands
ÎS
240
ÎS
Image Save
Description The ÎS command is used within a label format to save that format as a
graphic image, rather than as a ZPL II script. It is typically used toward the end of a script. The
saved image can later be recalled with virtually no formatting time and overlaid with variable
data to form a complete label.
Using this technique to overlay the image of constant information with the variable data
greatly increases the throughput of the label format.
\
Format ÎSd:o.x,p
Important See ÎL on page 237.
Parameters Details
object
Default Value: R:
x = extension Accepted Values: .GRF or .PNG
Default Value: .GRF
p = print image after
storing
Accepted Values:
N = no
Y = yes
Default Value: Y
241
ZPL Commands
ÎS
Example This is an example of using the ÎS command to save a label format to DRAM.
The name used to store the graphic is SAMPLE2.GRF.
^XA
^LH10,15^FWN^BY3,3,85^CFD,36
^GB430,750,4^FS
^FO10,170^GB200,144,2^FS
^FO10,318^GB410,174,2^FS
^FO212,170^GB206,144,2^FS
^FO10,498^GB200,120,2^FSR
^FO212,498^GB209,120,2^FS
^FO4,150^GB422,10,10^FS
^FO135,20Â0,70,60
^FDZEBRA^FS
^FO80,100Â0,40,30
^FDTECHNOLOGIES CORP^FS
^FO15,180
^FDARTICLE#^FS
^FO218,180
^FDLOCATION^FS
^FO15,328
^FDDESCRIPTION^FS
^FO15,508
^FDREQ.NO.^FS
^FO220,508
^FDWORK NUMBER^FS
^FO15,630ÂD,36,20
^FDCOMMENTS:^FS
ÎSR:SAMPLE2.GRF,Y
^XZ
^CFD,18,10^FS
ZPL Commands
~JA
242
~JA
Cancel All
Description The ~JA command cancels all format commands in the buffer. It also cancels
any batches that are printing.
The printer stops after the current label is finished printing. All internal buffers are cleared of
data and the DATA LED turn off.
Submitting this command to the printer scans the buffer and deletes only the data before the
~JA in the input buffer it does not scan the remainder of the buffer for additional ~JA
commands.
Format ~JA
243
ZPL Commands
^JB
^JB
Initialize Flash Memory
Description The ^JB command is used to initialize various types of Flash memory
available in the Zebra printers.
Format ^JBa
Parameters Details
a = device to initialize Acceptable Values:
A = Option Flash memory
B = Flash card (PCMCIA)
E = internal Flash memory
Default Value: a device must be specified
Example This is an example of initializing the different types of flash memory:
^JBA initializes initial Compact Flash memory when installed in the printer.
^JBB initializes the optional Flash card when installed in the printer.
^JBE initializes the optional Flash memory when installed in the printer.
Note Initializing memory can take several minutes. Be sure to allow sufficient time for the
initialization to complete before power cycling the printer.
ZPL Commands
~JB
244
~JB
Reset Optional Memory
Description The ~JB command is used for these conditions:
The ~JB command must be sent to the printer if the battery supplying power to the battery
powered memory card fails and is replaced. A bad battery shows a battery dead condition
on the Printer Configuration Label.
The ~JB command can also be used to intentionally clear (reinitialize) the B: memory
card. The card must not be write protected.
Format ~JB
Comments If the battery is replaced and this command is not sent to the printer, the
memory card cannot function.
245
ZPL Commands
~JC
~JC
Set Media Sensor Calibration
Description The ~JC command is used to force a label length measurement and adjust the
media and ribbon sensor values.
Format ~JC
Comments In Continuous Mode, only the media and ribbon sensors are calibrated.
This command is ignored on the HC100 printer.
ZPL Commands
~JD
246
~JD
Enable Communications Diagnostics
Description The ~JD command initiates Diagnostic Mode, which produces an ASCII
printout (using current label length and full width of printer) of all characters received by the
printer. This printout includes the ASCII characters, the hexadecimal value, and any
communication errors.
Format ~JD
247
ZPL Commands
~JE
~JE
Disable Diagnostics
Description The ~JE command cancels Diagnostic Mode and returns the printer to normal
label printing.
Format ~JE
ZPL Commands
~JF
248
~JF
Set Battery Condition
Description There are two low battery voltage levels sensed by the PA/PT400 printers.
When battery voltage goes below the first level, the green LED begins flashing as a warning
but printing continues. When this warning occurs, it is recommended to recharge the battery.
As printing continues, a second low voltage level is reached. At this point, both green and
orange LEDs flash as a warning, and printing automatically pauses.
When pause on low voltage is active (~JFY) and the battery voltage level falls below the
second low voltage level, printing pauses and an error condition is displayed as an indication
that the printer should be plugged into the battery charger. By pressing FEED, printing
continues on a label-by-label basis, but there is a high risk of losing label format information
due to the continued decrease of battery voltage.
When pause on low voltage is not active (~JFN), and the battery voltage level falls below the
second low voltage level, printing continues and the orange LED remains off. If the battery
voltage continues to decrease, label information could be lost and cause the printer to stop
operating. This option should be selected only when the printer is connected to the Car Battery
Adapter. From time to time the printer might sense that battery voltage is below the first low
voltage level, but due to the continuous recharging of the car battery, further loss of battery
voltage is not a concern and printing continues.
If this option is not selected when using the Car Battery Adapter, you might need to press
FEED to take the printer out of Pause Mode and print each label.
Format ~JFp
Parameters Details
p = pause on low voltage Accepted Values: Y (pause on low voltage) or N (do not
pause)
N is suggested when the printer is powered by the Car
Battery Adapter.
Default Value: Y
249
ZPL Commands
~JG
~JG
Graphing Sensor Calibration
Description The ~JG command prints a graph (media sensor profile) of the sensor values.
Format ~JG
Comments The HC100 printer does not perform a calibration, but does print a sensor
profile label.
Example Sending the ~JG command to a printer configured for thermal transfer produces
a series of labels resembling this image:
GENERATED LABELS
ZPL Commands
^JH
250
^JH
Early Warning Settings
Description The ^JH command configures the early warning messages that appear on the
LCD. This command is supported on the Zebra XiIII, PAX4, ZM400/ZM600, and
S4M printers.
Format ^JHa,b,c,d,e,f,g,h,i,j
Important These are parameter and printer specific things to be aware of:
Parameters a through e are only supported on the Zebra XiIIIPlus and PAX series
printers. The remaining parameters are supported on Zebra XiIII, PAX4,
ZM400/ZM600, and S4M printers.
On G-Series printers, the f parameter must be enabled for the ^MA driven system to
work.
Parameter Details
a = early warning
media
Accepted Values:
E = enable
D = disable
Default Value: D
b = labels per roll Accepted Values: 100 to 9999
Default Value: 900
c = media replaced Accepted Values:
Y = yes
N = no
Default Value: N
d = ribbon length The accepted values for the XiIII series printers are 100M through
450M. PAX4 printers allow for values up to 900M.
Accepted Values:
0 = 100M 10 = 600M
1 = 150M 11 = 650M
2 = 200M 12 = 700M
3 = 250M 13 = 750M
4 = 300M 14 = 800M
5 = 350M 15 = 850M
6 = 400M 16 = 900M
7 = 450M
8 = 500M
9 = 550M
Default Value: 7
251
ZPL Commands
^JH
Comments To permanently save the changes to the ^JH command, send ^XA^JUS^XZ.
e = ribbon replaced Accepted Values:
Y = yes
N = no
Default Value: N
f = early warning
maintenance
Accepted Values:
E = enabled
D = disabled
Default Value: D
g = head cleaning
interval
Accepted value exceptions: accepted values for XiIII printer are
100M through 450M; accepted values for 600 dpi XiIII printers
are 100M through 150M; accepted values for PAX4 series printers
can accept values up to 900M by increments of 50M; accepted
values for ZM400/ZM600 and S4M printers are 0M through
450M.
Accepted Values:
0 = 100M 11 = 650M
1 = 150M (default for 96XiIII) 12 = 700M
2 = 200M 13 = 750M
3 = 250M 14 = 800M
4 = 300M 15 = 850M
5 = 350M 16 = 900M
6 = 400M
7 = 450M (default for all except 96XiIII)
8 = 500M
9 = 550M
10= 600M
Default Value: see above
h = head clean Accepted Values:
N = No
Y = Yes
Default Value: N
i = head life
threshold
Accepted Values:
0 0 in or off
100-3500000 in
Default Value: 1000000
j = head replaced Accepted Values:
N = no
Y = yes
Default Value: N
Parameter Details
ZPL Commands
^JI
252
^JI
Start ZBI (Zebra BASIC Interpreter)
Description ^JI works much like the ~JI command. Both commands are sent to the
printer to initialize the Zebra BASIC Interpreter.
In interactive mode, ^JI can be sent through one of the communication ports (serial, parallel,
or Ethernet) to initialize the printer to receive ZBI commands. This command can be sent from
one of the Zebra software utilities, such as ZTools, or from a terminal emulation program.
When the command is received, the printer responds by sending a ZBI header back to the
console, along with the program version number. This indicates that the interpreter is active.
Format ^JId:o.x,b,c,d
* This parameter is only available on printers with firmware V60.12.0.x or earlier.
Identifies features that are available in printers with firmware version V60.16.2Z, V53.16.2Z,
or later.
Parameters Details
d = location of
program to run
after initialization
Acceptable Values: R:, E:, B:, and A:
Default Value: location must be specified
o = name of program
to run after
initialization
Accepted Values: any valid program name
Default Value: name must be specified
x = extension of
program to run
after initialization
.BAE is only supported
in firmware version
V60.16.2Z or later
Fixed Value: .BAS, .BAE
b = console control Accepted Values:
Y = console on
N = console off
Default Value: Y
c = echoing control Accepted Values:
Y = echo on
N = echo off
Default Value: Y
d = memory allocation
for ZBI *
Accepted Values: 20K to 1024K
Default Value: 50K
253
ZPL Commands
^JI
Comments When the printer is turned on, it can receive ZPL II commands and label
formats. However, for the printer to recognize ZBI commands and programs, it must be
initialized using ^JI or ~JI.
Only one ZBI interpreter can be active in the printer at a time. If a second ^JI or ~JI
command is received while the interpreter is running, the command is ignored.
The interpreter is deactivated by entering one of two commands:
ZPL at the ZBI prompt
~JQ at an active ZPL port
ZPL Commands
~JI
254
~JI
Start ZBI (Zebra BASIC Interpreter)
Description ~JI works much like the ^JI command. Both commands are sent to the
printer to initialize the Zebra BASIC Interpreter.
In interactive mode, ~JI can be sent through one of the communication ports (serial, parallel,
or Ethernet) to initialize the printer to receive ZBI commands. This command can be sent from
one of the Zebra software utilities, such as ZTools, or from a standard PC program, such as
Hyper terminal.
When the command is received, the printer responds by sending a ZBI header back to the
console, along with the program version number. This indicates that the interpreter is active.
Format ~JI
Comments While receiving commands, the printer echoes the received characters back to
the source. This can be toggled on and off with the ZBI ECHO command.
When the printer is turned on, it can receive ZPL II commands and label formats. However, for
the printer to recognize ZBI commands and formats, it must be initialized using ^JI or ~JI.
Only one ZBI interpreter can be active in the printer at a time. If a second ~JI or ^JI
command is received while the interpreter is running, the command is ignored.
The interpreter is deactivated by entering one of these commands:
ZPL at the ZBI prompt
~JQ at an active ZPL port
or later.
255
ZPL Commands
^JJ
^JJ
Set Auxiliary Port
Description The ^JJ command allows you to control an online verifier or applicator
device.
Format ^JJa,b,c,d,e,f
Parameters Details
a = operational mode for
auxiliary port
Accepted Values:
0 = off
1 = reprint on errorthe printer stops on a label with a
verification error. When PAUSE is pressed, the
label reprints (if ^JZ is set to reprint). If a bar code
is near the upper edge of a label, the label feeds out
far enough for the bar code to be verified and then
backfeeds to allow the next label to be printed and
verified.
2 = maximum throughputthe printer stops when a
verification error is detected. The printer starts
printing the next label while the verifier is still
checking the previous label. This mode provides
maximum throughput, but does not allow the
printer to stop immediately on a label with a
verification error.
Default Value: 0
b = application mode Accepted Values:
0 = off
1 = End Print signal normally high, and low only when
the printer is moving the label forward.
2 = End Print signal normally low, and high only when
the printer is moving the label forward.
3 = End Print signal normally high, and low for 20 ms
when a label has been printed and positioned.
4 = End Print signal normally low, and high for 20 ms
when a label has been printed and positioned.
Default Value: 0
c = application mode
start signal print
Accepted Values:
p = Pulse Mode Start Print signal must be de-asserted
before it can be asserted for the next label.
l = Level Mode Start Print signal does not need to be
de-asserted to print the next label. As long as the
Start Print signal is low and a label is formatted, a
label prints.
Default Value: 0
ZPL Commands
^JJ
256
d = application label
error mode
Accepted Values:
e = error modethe printer asserts the Service
Required signal (svce_req - pin 10) on the
application port, enters into Pause Mode, and
displays an error message on the LCD.
f = Feed Modea blank label prints when the web is
not found where expected to sync the printer to the
media.
Default Value: f
e = reprint mode Accepted Values:
e = enabledthe last label reprints after the signal is
asserted. If a label is canceled, the label to be
reprinted is also canceled. This mode consumes
more memory because the last printed label is not
released until it reprints.
d = disabledprinter ignores the Reprint signal.
Default Value: d
f = ribbon low mode Accepted Values:
e = enabled printer warning issued when ribbon low.
d = disabled printer warning not issued when ribbon
low.
Default Value: e
Parameters Details
257
ZPL Commands
~JL
~JL
Set Label Length
Description The ~JL command is used to set the label length. Depending on the size of the
label, the printer feeds one or more blank labels.
Format ~JL
ZPL Commands
^JM
258
^JM
Set Dots per Millimeter
Description The ^JM command lowers the density of the print24 dots/mm becomes 12,
12 dots/mm becomes 6, 8 dots/mm becomes 4, and 6 dots/mm becomes 3. ^JM also affects the
field origin (^FO) placement on the label (see example below).
When sent to the printer, the ^JM command doubles the format size of the label. Depending on
the printhead, normal dot-per-millimeter capabilities for a Zebra printer are 12 dots/mm (304
dots/inch), 8 dots/mm (203 dots/inch) or 6 dots/mm (153 dots/inch).
This command must be entered before the first ^FS command in a format. The effects of ^JM
are persistent.
Format ^JMn
Comments If ^JMB is used, the UPS MaxiCode bar code becomes out of specification.
Parameters Details
n = set dots per
millimeter
Accepted Values:
A = 24 dots/mm, 12 dots/mm, 8 dots/mm or 6 dots/mm
B = 12 dots/mm, 6 dots/mm, 4 dots/mm or 3 dots/mm
Default Value: A
Example This example of the affects of alternating the dots per millimeter:
^XA
^JMA^FS
^FO100,100
^B2N,50,Y,N,N
^FD1234567890^FS
^XZ
^XA
^JMB^FS
^FO100,100
^B2N,50,Y,N,N
^FD1234567890^FS
^XZ
259
ZPL Commands
~JN
~JN
Head Test Fatal
Description The ~JN command turns on the head test option. When activated, ~JN causes
the printer to halt when a head test failure is encountered.
Once an error is encountered the printer remains in error mode until the head test is turned off
(~JO) or power is cycled.
Format ~JN
Comments If the communications buffer is full, the printer is not able to receive data. In
this condition, the ~JO command is not received by the printer.
ZPL Commands
~JO
260
~JO
Head Test Non-Fatal
Description The ~JO command turns off the head test option. ~JO is the default printhead
test condition and overrides a failure of printhead element status check. This state is changed
when the printer receives a ~JN (Head Test Fatal) command. The printhead test does not
produce an error when ~JO is active.
Format ~JO
261
ZPL Commands
~JP
~JP
Pause and Cancel Format
Description The ~JP command clears the format currently being processed and places the
printer into Pause Mode.
The command clears the next format that would print, or the oldest format from the buffer.
Each subsequent ~JP command clears the next buffered format until the buffer is empty. The
DATA indicator turns off when the buffer is empty and no data is being transmitted.
Issuing the ~JP command is identical to using CANCEL on the printer, but the printer does
not have to be in Pause Mode first.
Format ~JP
ZPL Commands
~JQ
262
~JQ
Terminate Zebra BASIC Interpreter
Description The ~JQ command is used when Zebra BASIC Interpreter is active. Sending
~JQ to the printer terminates the ZBI session.
Format ~JQ
Comments Entering ZPL at the command prompt also terminates a ZBI session.
or later.
263
ZPL Commands
~JR
~JR
Power On Reset
Description The ~JR command resets all of the printers internal software, performs a
power-on self-test (POST), clears the buffer and DRAM, and resets communication
parameters and default values. Issuing a ~JR command performs the same function as a
manual power-on reset.
Format ~JR
ZPL Commands
^JS
264
^JS
Sensor Select
Format ^JSa
Note This command is ignored on Zebra ZM400/ZM600 printers.This command is only
for use with the Z series and S4M printers (with the exception of the ZM400/ZM600).
Parameters Details
a = sensor selection Accepted Values:
A = auto select
R = reflective sensor
T = transmissive sensor
Default Value: Z series = A and the S4M = R
265
ZPL Commands
~JS
~JS
Change Backfeed Sequence
Description The ~JS command is used to control the backfeed sequence. This command
can be used on printers with or without built-in cutters.
These are the primary applications:
to allow programming of the rest point of the cut edge of continuous media.
provide immediate backfeed after peel-off when the printer is used in a print/apply
application configuration.
This command stays in effect only until the printer is turned off, a new ~JS command is sent,
or the setting is changed on the control panel. When a ~JS command is encountered, it
overrides the current control panel setting for the Backfeed Sequence.
The most common way of eliminating backfeed is to operate in Rewind Mode. Rewind Mode
does not backfeed at all. After a label prints, the leading edge of the next label is placed at the
print line. This eliminates the need to backfeed and does not introduce a non printable area at
the leading edge or bottom of the label. It also does not allow the label to be taken from the
printer because it is not fed out from under the printhead.
Running in another mode with backfeed turned off allows the label to be removed and
eliminates the time-reduction of the backfeed sequence.
Format ~JSb
Comments When using a specific value, the difference between the value entered and 100
percent is calculated before the next label is printed. For example, a value of 40 means 40
percent of the backfeed takes place after the label is cut or removed. The remaining 60 percent
takes place before the next label is printed.
Parameters Details
b = backfeed order in
relation to printing
Accepted Values:
A = 100 percent backfeed after printing and cutting
B = 0 percent backfeed after printing and cutting, and
100 percent before printing the next label
N = normal 90 percent backfeed after label is printed
O = off turn backfeed off completely
10 to 90 = percentage value
The value entered must be a multiple of 10. Values not
divisible by 10 are rounded to the nearest acceptable
value. For example, ~JS55 is accepted as 50 percent
backfeed.
Default Value: N
ZPL Commands
~JS
266
The value for this command is also reflected in the Backfeed parameter on the printer
configuration label.
For ~JSN the Backfeed parameter is listed as DEFAULT
For ~JSA or 100% the Backfeed parameter is listed as AFTER
For ~JSB or 0% the Backfeed parameter is listed as BEFORE
For ~JS10 10% of the backfeed takes place after the label is cut or removed. The
remaining 90% takes place before the next label is printed.
267
ZPL Commands
^JT
^JT
Head Test Interval
Description The ^JT command allows you to change the printhead test interval from every
100 labels to any desired interval. With the ^JT command, the printer is allowed to run the
test after printing a label. When a parameter is defined, the printer runs the test after printing a
set amount of labels.
The printers default head test state is off. Parameters for running the printhead test are defined
by the user.
Format ^JT####,a,b,c
Comments The ^JT command supports testing a range of print elements. The printer
automatically selects the test range by tracking which elements have been used since the
previous test.
^JT also turns on Automatic Mode to specify the first and last elements for the head test. This
makes it possible to select any specific area of the label or the entire print width.
If the last element selected is greater than the print width selected, the test stops at the selected
print width.
Whenever the head test command is received, a head test is performed on the next label unless
the count is set to 0 (zero).
Parameters Details
#### = four-digit
number of labels
printed between head
tests
If a value greater than 9999 is entered, it is ignored.
Default Value: 0000 (off)
a = manually select range
of elements to test
Accepted Values:
N = no
Y = yes
Initial Value at Power-up: N
b = first element to check
when parameter a is
Y
Initial Value at Power-up: 0
c = last element to check
when parameter a is
Y
ZPL Commands
^JU
268
^JU
Configuration Update
Description The ^JU command sets the active configuration for the printer.
Format ^JUa
Parameters Details
a = active configuration Accepted Values:
F = reload factory settings
N = reload factory network settings
These values are lost at power-off if not saved with ^JUS.
R = recall last saved settings
S = save current settings
These values are used at power-on.
269
ZPL Commands
^JW
^JW
Set Ribbon Tension
Description ^JW sets the ribbon tension for the printer it is sent to.
Format ^JWt
Comments ^JW is used only for PAX series printers.
Parameters Details
t = tension Accepted Values:
L = low
M = medium
H = high
ZPL Commands
~JX
270
~JX
Cancel Current Partially Input Format
Description The ~JX command cancels a format currently being sent to the printer. It does
not affect any formats currently being printed, or any subsequent formats that might be sent.
Format ~JX
271
ZPL Commands
^JZ
^JZ
Reprint After Error
Description The ^JZ command reprints a partially printed label caused by a Ribbon
Out, Media Out, or Head Open error condition. The label is reprinted as soon as the
error condition is corrected.
This command remains active until another ^JZ command is sent to the printer or the printer
is turned off.
Format ^JZa
Comments ^JZ sets the error mode for the printer. If ^JZ changes, only labels printed
after the change are affected.
If the parameter is missing or incorrect, the command is ignored.
Parameters Details
a = reprint after error Accepted Values:
N = no
Y = yes
Initial Value at Power-up: Y
ZPL Commands
~KB
272
~KB
Kill Battery (Battery Discharge Mode)
Description To maintain performance of the rechargeable battery in the portable printers,
the battery must be fully discharged and recharged regularly. The ~KB command places the
printer in battery discharge mode. This allows the battery to be drained without actually
printing.
Format ~KB
Comments While the printer is in Discharge Mode, the green power LED flashes in groups
of three flashes.
Discharge Mode might be terminated by sending a printing format to the printer or by pressing
either of the control panel keys.
If the battery charger is plugged into the printer, the battery is automatically recharged once the
discharge process is completed.
273
ZPL Commands
^KD
^KD
Select Date and Time Format (for Real Time Clock)
Description The ^KD command selects the format that the Real-Time Clocks date and
time information presents as on a configuration label. This is also displayed on the Printer Idle
LCD control panel display, and displayed while setting the date and time.
Format ^KDa
Comments If the Real-Time Clock hardware is not present, Display Mode is set to 0
(Version Number).
If Display Mode is set to 0 (Version Number) and the Real-Time Clock hardware is present,
the date and time format on the configuration label is presented in format 1.
If Display Mode is set to 0 (Version Number) and the Real-Time Clock hardware is present,
the date and time format on the control panel display is presented in format 1.
For more details on select date and time format for the Real Time Clock, see Real Time Clock
on page 923.
Parameters Details
a = value of date and
time format
Accepted Values:
0 = normal, displays Version Number of firmware
1 = MM/DD/YY (24-hour clock)
2 = MM/DD/YY (12-hour clock)
3 = DD/MM/YY (24-hour clock)
4 = DD/MM/YY (12-hour clock)
Default Value: 0
ZPL Commands
^KL
274
^KL
Define Language
Description The ^KL command selects the language displayed on the control panel.
Format ^KLa
* These values are only supported on Zebra ZM400/ZM600 printer.
Parameters Details
a = language Accepted Values:
1 = English
2 = Spanish
3 = French
4 = German
5 = Italian
6 = Norwegian
7 = Portuguese
8 = Swedish
9 = Danish
10 = Spanish2
11 = Dutch
12 = Finnish
13 = Japanese
14 = Korean *
15 = Simplified Chinese *
16 = Traditional Chinese *
Default Value: 1
275
ZPL Commands
^KN
^KN
Define Printer Name
Description The printers network name and description can be set using the ^KN
command. ^KN is designed to make your Zebra printer easy for users to identify. The name the
administrator designates is listed on the configuration label and on the Web page generated by
the printer.
Format ^KNa,b
Parameters Details
a = printer name Accepted Values: up to 16 alphanumeric characters
Default Value: if a value is not entered, the parameter is
ignored
If more than 16 characters are entered, only the first 16 are
used.
b = printer description Accepted Values: up to 35 alphanumeric characters
Default Value: if a value is not entered, the parameter is
ignored
If more than 35 characters are entered, only the first 35 are
used.
ZPL Commands
^KN
276
Example This is an example of how to change the printers network name an description:
This shows how a configuration looks before using this command and after using this
command:
^XA
^KNZebra1,desk_printer
^XZ
Before using this command: After using this command:
277
ZPL Commands
^KP
^KP
Define Password
Description The ^KP command is used to define the password that must be entered to
access the control panel switches and LCD Setup Mode.
Format ^KPa,b
Comments If you forget your password, the printer can be returned to a default Setup Mode
and the default password 1234 is valid again. Caution should be used, however this also
sets the printer configuration values back to their defaults.
To return the printer to the default factory settings using ZPL, send this:
^XA
^JUF
^XZ
To return the printer to the default factory settings using the control panel keys, see your
printers User Guide for the procedure.
Parameters Details
a = mandatory four-digit
password
Accepted Values: any four-digit numeric sequence
Default Value: 1234
b = password level Accepted Values: 1, 2, 3, 4
Default Value: 3
Example This is an example of how to set a new control panel password:
^XA
^KP5678
^XZ
ZPL Commands
^LF
278
^LF
List Font Links
Description The ^LF command prints out a list of the linked fonts.
later.
Example This example shows that SWISS721.TTF is the based font. ANMDJ.TTF is the
first linked font, and MSGOTHIC.TTF is the second linked extension:
This is the code that established the font links:
^XA
^FLE:MSGOTHIC.TTF,E:SWISS721.TTF,1^FS
^XZ
^XA
^LF
^XZ
279
ZPL Commands
^LH
^LH
Label Home
Description The ^LH command sets the label home position.
The default home position of a label is the upper-left corner (position 0,0 along the x and y
axis). This is the axis reference point for labels. Any area below and to the right of this point is
available for printing. The ^LH command changes this reference point. For instance, when
working with preprinted labels, use this command to move the reference point below the
preprinted area.
This command affects only fields that come after it. It is recommended to use ^LH as one of
the first commands in the label format.
Format ^LHx,y
Depending on the printhead used in your printer, use one of these when figuring the values for
x and y:
6 dots = 1 mm, 152 dots = 1 inch
11.8 dots = 1 mm, 300 dots = 1 inch
Comments To be compatible with existing printers, this command must come before the
first ^FS (Field Separator) command. Once you have issued an ^LH command, the setting is
retained until you turn off the printer or send a new ^LH command to the printer.
Parameters Details
x = x-axis position (in
dots)
Initial Value at Power-up: 0 or last permanently saved value
y = y-axis position (in
dots)
Initial Value at Power-up: 0 or last permanently saved value
ZPL Commands
^LL
280
^LL
Label Length
Description The ^LL command defines the length of the label. This command is necessary
when using continuous media (media not divided into separate labels by gaps, spaces, notches,
slots, or holes).
To affect the current label and be compatible with existing printers, ^LL must come before the
first ^FS (Field Separator) command. Once you have issued ^LL, the setting is retained until
you turn off the printer or send a new ^LL command.
Format ^LLy
Comments These formulas can be used to determine the value of y:
Values for y depend on the memory size. If the entered value for y exceeds the acceptable
limits, the bottom of the label is cut off. The label also shifts down from top to bottom.
If multiple ^LL commands are issued in the same label format, the last ^LL command affects
the next label unless it is prior to the first ^FS.
Parameters Details
y = y-axis position (in
dots)
Accepted Values: 1 to 32000, not to exceed the maximum
label size.
While the printer accepts any value for this parameter, the
amount of memory installed determines the maximum
length of the label.
Default Value: typically set through the LCD (if applicable),
or to the maximum label length capability of the printer.
For 6 dot/mm printheads... Label length in inches x 152.4 (dots/inch) = y
281
ZPL Commands
^LR
^LR
Label Reverse Print
Description The ^LR command reverses the printing of all fields in the label format. It
allows a field to appear as white over black or black over white.
Using the ^LR is identical to placing an ^FR command in all current and subsequent fields.
Format ^LRa
Comments The ^LR setting remains active unless turned off by ^LRN or the printer is
turned off.
Only fields following this command are affected.
Parameters Details
a = reverse print all fields Accepted Values:
N = no
Y = yes
Initial Value at Power-up: N or last permanently saved value
Example This is an example that shows printing white over black and black over white.
The ^GB command is used to create the black background.
Note ^GB needs to be used together with ^LR.
^XA^LRY
^FO100,50
^GB195,203,195^FS
^FO180,110^CFG
^FDLABEL^FS
^FO130,170
^FDREVERSE^FS
^XZ
ZPL Commands
^LS
282
^LS
Label Shift
Description The ^LS command allows for compatibility with Z-130 printer formats that
are set for less than full label width. It is used to shift all field positions to the left so the same
commands used on a Z-130 or Z-220 Printer can be used on other Zebra printers.
To determine the value for the ^LS command, use this formula:
Z-130 and Z-220 values for ^LHx + ^FOx
(distance from edge of label) = printer value for ^LSa
If the print position is less than 0, set ^LS to 0.
Format ^LSa
Comments When entering positive values, it is not necessary to use the + sign. The value is
assumed to be positive unless preceded by a negative sign (-).
To be compatible with existing Zebra printers, this command must come before the first ^FS
(Field Separator) command. Once you have issued an ^LS command, the setting is retained
until you turn off the printer or send a new ^LS command to the printer.
Important The ability to save the ^LS command depends on the version of firmware.
Parameters Details
a = shift left value (in
dots)
Accepted Values: -9999 to 9999
283
ZPL Commands
^LT
^LT
Label Top
Description The ^LT command moves the entire label format a maximum of
120 dot rows up or down from its current position, in relation to the top edge of the label. A
negative value moves the format towards the top of the label; a positive value moves the
format away from the top of the label.
This command can be used to fine-tune the position of the finished label without having to
change any of the existing parameters.
Format ^LTx
Comments The Accepted Value range for x might be smaller depending on the printer
platform.
The ^LT command does not change the media rest position.
Important For some printer models, it is possible to request a negative value large enough
to cause the media to backup into the printer and become unthreaded from the platen. This
condition can result in a printer error or unpredictable results.
Parameters Details
x = label top (in dot
rows)
Accepted Values:
-120 to 120
0 to 120 (on the HC100)
Default Value: a value must be specified or the command is
ignored
ZPL Commands
^MA
284
^MA
Set Maintenance Alerts
Description The ^MA command controls how the printer issues printed maintenance alerts.
Maintenance alerts are labels that print with a warning that indicates the printhead needs to be
cleaned or changed. This command is only supported on Zebra ZM400/ZM600, S4M
(with v53.15.5Z or later), and G-Series printers.
Description
Format ^MAtype,print,printlabel_threshold,frequency,units
Parameters Details
type = type of alert Accepted Values:
R = head replacement
C = head cleaning
Default Value: This parameter must be specified as R or C for
print, printlabel_threshold, and frequency to be
saved. However, units will always be set.
print = determines
if the alert prints
a label
Accepted Values:
Y = print a label
N = do not print label
Default Value: N
printlabel
threshold=
distance where
the first alert
occurs
Accepted Values:
R = head replacement (unit of measurement for head is km
with a range of 0 to 150 km)
C = clean head (unit of measurement is 1 meter = 39.37
inches with a range of 0 to 2000 meters. The range for
G-Series printers is 100 to 2000 meters.)
0 = off (when set to 0, the selected alert is disabled;
otherwise it is enabled.
Default Value: R = 50 km (1,968,500 inches) and C = 0 (off).
285
ZPL Commands
^MA
For details resetting the units of measure, see the ~HQ examples on page 219.
Comments Any values outside the specified range are ignored.
The intent of this command is to cause a label to print when the defined threshold is reached.
frequency =
distance before
reissuing the
alert
The unit of measurement is in meters. The range is 0 to 2000. The
range for G-Series printers is 0 or 5 to 2000 meters.When set to 0,
the alert label is only printed on power-up or when the printer is
reset.
Default Value: 0 (print on power-up).
units = odometer
and printhead
maintenance
commands
The units parameter reports units of the odometer and printhead
maintenance commands, as follows: ~HQOD,~HQPH,~WQOD,
~WQPH.
Accepted Values:
C = centimeters (displays as: cm)
I = inches (displays as: )
M = meters (displays as: M)
Default Value: I
Example This example sets the printed head cleaning message to print after five meters
and to repeat every one meter after that until a ~ROC command is issued.
The Early Warning Maintenance setting must be ON.To enable the maintenance alert system
on the G-Series printer the ^JH command is used; on other Zebra printers the front panel
can also be used.
1. To set ^MA to print out a label flagging the need to clean the head, type:
^XA^MAC,Y,5,1^XZ
When the threshold is met a label will print indicating that the head needs to be clean.
2. For this example, the message on the label looks like this:
Parameters Details
ZPL Commands
^MC
286
^MC
Map Clear
Description In normal operation, the bitmap is cleared after the format has been printed.
The ^MC command is used to retain the current bitmap. This applies to current and subsequent
labels until cleared with ^MCY.
Format ^MCa
Comments The ^MC command retains the image of the current label after formatting. It
appears in the background of the next label printed.
Important To produce a label template, ^MC must be used with ^FV.
Parameters Details
a = map clear Accepted Values: Y (clear bitmap) or N (do not clear bitmap)
Initial Value at Power-up: Y
287
ZPL Commands
^MD
^MD
Media Darkness
Description The ^MD command adjusts the darkness relative to the current darkness
setting.
Format ^MDa
Comments The ~SD command value, if applicable, is added to the ^MD command.
Parameters Details
a = media darkness level Accepted Values: -30 to 30, depending on current value
If no value is entered, this command is ignored.
Example These examples show setting the printer to different darkness levels:
If the current value (value on configuration label) is 16, entering the command ^MD-9
decreases the value to 7.
If the current value (value on configuration label) is 1, entering the command ^MD15
increases the value to 16.
If the current value (value on configuration label) is 25, entering the command ^MD10
increases only the value to 30, which is the maximum value allowed.
Each ^MD command is treated separately in relation to the current value as printed on the
configuration label.
Important The darkness setting range for the XiIIIPlus is 0 to 30 in increments of 0.1.
The firmware is setup so that the ^MD and ~SD commands (ZPL darkness commands)
accepts that range of settings.
Example These are examples of the XiIIIPlus Darkness Setting:
^MD8.3
~SD8.3
Example For example, this is what would happen if two ^MD commands were received:
Assume the current value is 15. An ^MD-6 command is received that changes the current
value to 9. Another command, ^MD2, is received. The current value changes to 17.
The two ^MD commands are treated individually in relation to the current value of 15.
ZPL Commands
^MF
288
^MF
Media Feed
Description The ^MF command dictates what happens to the media at power-up and at
head-close after the error clears.
Format ^MFp,h
* This value is only supported on Zebra XiIIIPlus, PAX, ZM400/ZM600, and S4M printers.
Comments It is important to remember that if you choose the N setting, the printer
assumes that the media and its position relative to the printhead are the same as before power
was turned off or the printhead was opened. Use the ^JU command to save changes.
Parameters Details
p = feed action at power-
up
Accepted Values:
F = feed to the first web after sensor
C = (see ~JC on page 245 definition)
L = (see ~JL on page 257 definition)
N = no media feed
S = short calibration *
Default Value: C
h = feed action after
closing printhead
Accepted Values:
F = feed to the first web after sensor
C = (see ~JC on page 245 definition)
L = (see ~JL on page 257 definition)
N = no media feed
S = short calibration *
Default Value: C
289
ZPL Commands
^MI
^MI
Set Maintenance Information Message
Description The ^MI command controls the content of maintenance alert messages, which
are reminders printed by the printer to instruct the operator to clean or replace the printhead.
This command is only supported on Zebra ZM400/ZM600, S4M (with v53.15.4Z or
later), and G-Series printers.
Format ^MItype,message
Parameters Details
type = identifies the
type of alert
Accepted Values:
R = head replacement
C = head cleaning
Default Value: R
message = message
that prints on the
label when a
maintenance
alert occurs
The maximum length of each message is 63 characters. All
characters following the comma and preceding the next tilde (~)
or carat (^) define the message string. Commas (,) are not
allowed in the message.
Default Value:
HEAD CLEANING = please clean printhead
HEAD REPLACEMENT = please replace printhead
Example This example sets the printhead (head) replacement warning message. Printing of
this message is controlled by the ^MA command.
1. To customize the text of this label, type something like this:
^XA^MIR,PRINT HEAD NEEDS REPLACEMENT - CALL EXT 1000^XZ
The label prints whatever you program it to say.
2. For this example, the message on the label looks like this:
ZPL Commands
^ML
290
^ML
Maximum Label Length
Description The ^ML command lets you adjust the maximum label length.
Format ^MLa
Comments For calibration to work properly, you must set the maximum label length equal
to or greater than your actual label length.
Parameters Details
a = maximum label
length (in dot rows)
Accepted Values: 0 to maximum length of label
Default Value: last permanently saved value
291
ZPL Commands
^MM
^MM
Print Mode
Description The ^MM command determines the action the printer takes after a label or
group of labels has printed.
Format ^MMa,b
* These values are only supported on the Zebra ZM400/ZM600 printer.
This list identifies the different modes of operation:
Tear-off after printing, the label advances so the web is over the tear bar. The label,
with liner attached, can be torn off manually.
Parameters Details
a = desired mode Accepted Values:
T = Tear-off
P = Peel-off (not available on S-300)
R = Rewind (depends on printer model)
A = Applicator (depends on printer model)
C = Cutter (depends on printer model)
D = Delayed cutter
F = RFID
L = Reserved *
U = Reserved *
Default Value:
The values available for parameter a depend on the
printer being used and whether it supports the option.
For RFID printers:
A = R110PAX4 print engines
F = other RFID printers
b = prepeel select Accepted Values:
N = no
Y = yes
Default Value: N
The command is ignored if parameters are missing or
invalid. The current value of the command remains
unchanged.
ZPL Commands
^MM
292
Peel-off after printing, the label moves forward and activates a Label Available Sensor.
Printing stops until the label is manually removed from the printer.
Power Peel liner automatically rewinds using an optional internal rewind spindle.
Value Peel liner feeds down the front of the printer and is manually removed.
Prepeel after each label is manually removed, the printer feeds the next label forward to
prepeel a small portion of the label away from the liner material. The printer then
backfeeds and prints the label. The prepeel feature assists in the proper peel operation of
some media types.
Rewind the label and backing are rewound on an (optional) external rewind device.
The next label is positioned under the printhead (no backfeed motion).
Applicator when used with an application device, the label move far enough forward to
be removed by the applicator and applied to an item.
Cutter after printing, the media feeds forward and is automatically cut into
predetermined lengths.
Delayed cutter When the printer is in the Delayed Cut PRINT MODE, it will cut the
label when it receives the ~JK (Delayed Cut) command. To activate the ~JK command,
the printer's PRINT MODE must be set to Delayed Cut and there must be a label waiting
to be cut. When the printer is not in the Delayed Cut PRINT MODE, the printer will not
cut the label when it receives the ~JK command.
The Delayed Cut feature can be activated:
through PRINT MODE on the printers control panel
with a ^MMD command
RFID increases throughput time when printing batches of RFID labels by eliminating
backfeed between labels.
Comments Be sure to select the appropriate value for the print mode being used to avoid
unexpected results.
Note Send ~JK in a separate file - it cannot be sent at the end of a set of commands.
293
ZPL Commands
^MN
^MN
Media Tracking
Description The ^MN command relays to the printer what type of media is being used
(continuous or non-continuous) for purposes of tracking.
This bulleted list shows the types of media associated with this command:
Continuous Media this media has no physical characteristic (such as a web, notch,
perforation, black mark) to separate labels. Label length is determined by the ^LL
command.
Non-continuous Media this media has some type of physical characteristic (such as web,
notch, perforation, black mark) to separate the labels.
Format ^MNa
* provides the same result.
** This parameter is supported only on Zebra G-Series printers.
Comments This command is ignored on the HC100 printer.
Parameters Details
a = media being used Accepted Values:
N = continuous media
Y = non-continuous media web sensing *
W = non-continuous media web sensing *
M = non-continuous media mark sensing
A = auto-detects the type of media during calibration**
Default Value: a value must be entered or the command is
ignored
ZPL Commands
^MP
294
^MP
Mode Protection
Description The ^MP command is used to disable the various mode functions on the
control panel. Once disabled, the settings for the particular mode function can no longer be
changed and the LED associated with the function does not light.
Because this command has only one parameter, each mode must be disabled with an individual
^MP command.
Format ^MPa
Parameters Details
a = mode to protect Accepted Values:
D = disable Darkness Mode
P = disable Position Mode
C = disable Calibration Mode
E = enable all modes
S = disable all mode saves (modes can be adjusted but
values are not saved)
W = disable Pause
F = disable Feed
X = disable Cancel
M = disable menu changes
ignored
295
ZPL Commands
^MP
Example This example shows the ZPL code that disables modes D and C. It also shows the
effects on the configuration label before and after the ZPL code is sent:
^XA
^MPD
^MPC
^XZ
Before
After
ZPL Commands
^MT
296
^MT
Media Type
Description The ^MT command selects the type of media being used in the printer.
These are the choices for this command:
Thermal Transfer Media this media uses a high-carbon black or colored ribbon. The
ink on the ribbon is bonded to the media.
Direct Thermal Media this media is heat sensitive and requires no ribbon.
Format ^MTa
Parameters Details
a = media type used Accepted Values:
T = thermal transfer media
D = direct thermal media
ignored
297
ZPL Commands
^MU
^MU
Set Units of Measurement
Description The ^MU command sets the units of measurement the printer uses. ^MU works
on a field-by-field basis. Once the mode of units is set, it carries over from field to field until a
new mode of units is entered.
^MU also allows for printing at lower resolutions 600 dpi printers are capable of printing at
300, 200, and 150 dpi; 300 dpi printers are capable of printing at 150 dpi.
Format ^MUa,b,c
Parameters Details
a = units Accepted Values:
D = dots
I = inches
M = millimeters
Default Value: D
b = format base in dots
per inch
Accepted Values: 150, 200, 300
ignored
c = desired dots-per-inch
conversion
Accepted Values: 300, 600
ignored
Example This is an example of Setting Units:
Assume 8 dot/millimeter (203 dot/inch) printer.
Field based on dots:
^MUd^FO100,100^GB1024,128,128^FS
Field based on millimeters:
^MUm^FO12.5,12.5^GB128,16,16^FS
Field based on inches:
^MUi^FO.493,.493^GB5.044,.631,.631^FS
ZPL Commands
^MU
298
Comments This command should appear at the beginning of the label format to be in
proper ZPL II format.
To turn the conversion off, enter matching values for parameter b and c.
Example This is an example of Converting dpi Values.
Convert a 150 dpi format to a 300 dpi format with a base in dots:
^MUd,150,300
^MUd,150,600
^MUd,200,600
To reset the conversion factor to the original format, enter matching values for
parameters b and c:
^MUd,150,150
^MUd,200,200
^MUd,300,300
^MUd,600,600
299
ZPL Commands
^MW
^MW
Modify Head Cold Warning
Description The ^MW command allows you to set the head cold warning indicator based on
the operating environment.
Format ^MWa
Parameters Details
a = enable head cold
warning
Accepted Values:
Y = enable head cold warning
N = disable head cold warning
Important When a parameter is not given, the instruction is ignored.
ZPL Commands
^NC
300
^NC
Select the Primary Network Device
Description The ^NC command selects the wired or wireless print server as the primary
network device. This command is supported only on Zebra ZM400/ZM600 printers.
The ZM400 and ZM600 printers support the simultaneous installation of an internal, external,
and a wireless print server. Even though all three print servers may be installed, only one is
connected to the network and is the active print server. Table 1 outlines priorities and identifies
which device becomes the active print server when multiple print servers are installed.
Format ^NCa
Table 1 Effect of Primary Network Setting on Active Print Server
If the
Primary
Network is
set to:
Installed and Connected to
a Live Ethernet Network Then, the Active
Print Server will be:
Internal External Wireless*
Wired
X X X Internal
X X External
X Wireless
Wireless
X X X Wireless
X X Internal
X External
* NOTE: A wireless option board must have an active radio that can properly associate to an access point.
Parameters Details
a = primary network
device
Accepted Values:
1 = wired primary
2 = wireless primary
Default Value: 1
must be an accepted value or it is ignored
301
ZPL Commands
~NC
~NC
Network Connect
Description The ~NC command is used to connect a particular printer to a network by
calling up the printers network ID number.
Format ~NC###
Comments Use this command at the beginning of any label format to specify which printer
on the network is going to be used. Once the printer is established, it continues to be used until
it is changed by another ~NC command. This command must be included in the label format to
wake up the printer.
The commands ^MW, ~NC, ^NI, ~NR, and ~NT are used only with RS-422/485 printer
communications.
Parameters Details
### = network ID
number assigned
(must be a three-digit
entry)
Default Value: 000 (none)
ZPL Commands
^ND
302
^ND
Change Network Settings
Description The ^ND command changes the network settings on Zebra ZM400/ZM600
and S4M printers running V53.15.xZ or later.
For the external wired print server settings, the ^ND command is the same as the ^NS
command. For the wireless print server settings, the ^ND command is the same as the ^WI
command. This command is only supported on Zebra ZM400/ZM600 and S4M printers
running V53.15.xZ or later.
Format ^NDa,b,c,d,e,f,g,h,i,j
Parameters Details
a = the device that is
being modified
Accepted Values:
1 = external wired
2 = internal wired
3 = wireless
b = IP resolution Accepted Values:
A = All
B = BOOTP
C = DHCP and BOOTP
D = DHCP
G = Gleaning only (Not recommended when the Wireless
Print Server or Wireless Plus Print Server is installed.)
R = RARP
P = Permanent
Default Value: A
c = IP address Accepted Values: Any properly formatted IP address in the
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx format.
d = subnet mask Accepted Values: Any properly formatted subnet mask in the
e = default gateway Accepted Values: Any properly formatted gateway in the
f = WINS server
address
Accepted Values: Any properly formatted WINS server in the
g = connection
timeout checking
Accepted Values:
Y = yes
N = no
Default Value: Y
h = timeout value Time, in seconds, before the connection times out.
Default Value: 300
303
ZPL Commands
^ND
i = ARP broadcast
interval
Time, in minutes, that the broadcast is sent to update the devices
ARP cache.
Default Value: 0 (no ARP sent)
j = base raw port
number
The port number that the printer should use for its RAW data.
Default Value: 9100
Parameters Details
ZPL Commands
^NI
304
^NI
Network ID Number
Description The ^NI command is used to assign a network ID number to the printer. This
must be done before the printer can be used in a network.
Format ^NI###
Comments The last network ID number set is the one recognized by the system.
The commands ~NC, ^NI, ~NR, and ~NT are used only with RS-485 printer
communications.
Parameters Details
### = network ID
number assigned
(must be a three-digit
entry)
Default Value: 000 (none)
305
ZPL Commands
~NR
~NR
Set All Network Printers Transparent
Description The ~NR command sets all printers in the network to be transparent, regardless
of ID or current mode.
Format ~NR
Comments The commands ~NC, ^NI, ~NR, and ~NT are used only with RS-485 printer
communications.
ZPL Commands
^NS
306
^NS
Change Wired Networking Settings
Description Use this command to change the wired print server network settings.
Format ^NSa,b,c,d,e,f,g,h,i
The following table identifies the parameters for this format.
Parameters Details
a = IP resolution Accepted Values:
A = ALL
B = BOOTP
C = DHCP AND BOOTP
D = DHCP
G = GLEANING ONLY
R = RARP
P = PERMANENT
Default Value: A
Use of GLEANING ONLY is not recommended when the
Wireless Print Server or Wireless Plus Print Server is
installed.
b = IP address Accepted Values: Any properly formatted IP address in the
c = subnet mask Accepted Values: Any properly formatted subnet mask in the
d = default gateway Accepted Values: Any properly formatted gateway in the
e = WINS server address Accepted Values: Any properly formatted WINS server in the
f = connection timeout
checking
Accepted Values:
Y = Yes
N = No
Default Value: Y
g = timeout value Time, in seconds, before the connection times out.
Default Value: 300
307
ZPL Commands
^NS
Comments For the ZM400 and ZM600 printers, Zebra recommends that you use the ^ND
command instead of the ^NS command.
h = ARP broadcast
interval
Time, in minutes, that the broadcast is sent to update the
devices ARP cache.
i = base raw port number The port number that the printer should use for its RAW data.
Default Value: 9100
Example
^XA
^NSa,192.168.0.1,255.255.255.0,192.168.0.2
^XZ
Parameters Details
ZPL Commands
~NT
308
~NT
Set Currently Connected Printer Transparent
Description The ~NT command sets the currently connected network printer to be
transparent.
Format ~NT
Comments With Z Series
printers, the ~NT command functions the same as the ~NR

command. All Z Series printers on a network receive the transmission.
The commands ~NC, ^NI, ~NR, and ~NT are used only with RS-485 printer
communications.
309
ZPL Commands
^PA
^PA
Advanced Text Properties
Description The ^PA command is used to configure advanced text layout features.
Format ^PAa,b,c,d
later.
Parameters Details
a = default glyph This determines whether the default glyph is a space character
or the default glyph of the base font, which is typically a
hollow box.
Accepted Values:
0 = off (space as default glyph)
1 = on (default glyph of font is used, often a hollow
box, but depends on the font.)
Default Value: 0
b = bidirectional text
layout
This determines whether the bidirectional text layout is turned
on or off.
Accepted Values:
0 = off
1 = on
Default Value: 0
c = character shaping This determines whether character shaping is turned on or off.
Accepted Values:
0 = off
1 = on
Default Value: 0
d = OpenType table
support
This determines whether the OpenType support is turned on
or off.
Accepted Values:
0 = off
1 = on
Default Value: 0
ZPL Commands
^PF
310
^PF
Slew Given Number of Dot Rows
Description The ^PF command causes the printer to slew labels (move labels at a high
speed without printing) a specified number of dot rows from the bottom of the label. This
allows faster printing when the bottom portion of a label is blank.
Format ^PF#
Parameters Details
# = number of dots rows
to slew
ignored
311
ZPL Commands
^PH ~PH
^PH ~PH
Slew to Home Position
Description The ^PH or ~PH command causes the printer to feed one blank label.
The ~PH command feeds one label after the format currently being printed is done or when the
printer is placed in pause.
The ^PH command feeds one blank label after the current format prints.
Format ^PH or ~PH
ZPL Commands
^PM
312
^PM
Printing Mirror Image of Label
Description The ^PM command prints the entire printable area of the label as a mirror
image. This command flips the image from left to right.
Format ^PMa
Comments If the parameter is missing or invalid, the command is ignored. Once entered,
the ^PM command remains active until ^PMN is received or the printer is turned off.
Parameters Details
a = print mirror image of
entire label
Accepted Values:
N = no
Y = yes
Default Value: N
Example This is an example of printing a mirror image on a label:
^XA^PMY
^FO100,100
^CFG
^FDMIRROR^FS
^FO100,160
^FDIMAGE^FS
^XZ
313
ZPL Commands
^PO
^PO
Print Orientation
Description The ^PO command inverts the label format 180 degrees. The label appears to
be printed upside down. If the original label contains commands such as ^LL, ^LS, ^LT and
^PF, the inverted label output is affected differently.
Format ^POa
The ^POI command inverts the x, y coordinates. All image placement is relative to these
inverted coordinates. Therefore, a different ^LH (Label Home) can be used to move the print
back onto the label.
Comments If multiple ^PO commands are issued in the same label format, only the last
command sent to the printer is used.
Once the ^PO command is sent, the setting is retained until another ^PO command is received
or the printer is turned off.
The N value for the a parameter is not supported on the HC100 printer.
Parameters Details
a = invert label
180 degrees
Accepted Values:
N = normal
I = invert
Default Value: N
Example This is an example of printing a label at 180 degrees:
^XA^CFD
^POI
^LH330,10
^FO50,50
^FDZEBRA TECHNOLOGIES^FS
^FO50,75
^FDVernon Hills, IL^FS
^XZ
ZPL Commands
^PP ~PP
314
^PP ~PP
Programmable Pause
Description The ~PP command stops printing after the current label is complete (if one is
printing) and places the printer in Pause Mode.
The ^PP command is not immediate. Therefore, several labels might print before a pause is
performed. This command pauses the printer after the current format prints.
The operation is identical to pressing PAUSE on the control panel of the printer. The printer
remains paused until PAUSE is pressed or a ~PS (Print Start) command is sent to the printer.
Format ^PP or ~PP
315
ZPL Commands
^PQ
^PQ
Print Quantity
Description The ^PQ command gives control over several printing operations. It controls
the number of labels to print, the number of labels printed before printer pauses, and the
number of replications of each serial number.
Format ^PQq,p,r,o
If the o parameter is set to Y, the printer cuts but does not pause, and the printer does not pause
after every group count of labels has been printed. With the o parameter set to N (default), the
printer pauses after every group count of labels has been printed.
Parameters Details
q = total quantity of
labels to print
Accepted Value: 1 to 99,999,999
Default Value: 1
p = pause and cut value
(labels between
pauses)
Accepted Value: 1 to 99,999,999
Default Value: 0 (no pause)
r = replicates of each
serial number
Accepted Value: 0 to 99,999,999 replicates
Default Value: 0 (no replicates)
o = override pause count Accepted Values:
N = no
Y = yes
Default Value: N
Example This example shows the control over print operations:
^PQ50,10,1,Y: This example prints a total of 50 labels with one replicate of each serial
number. It prints the total quantity in groups of 10, but does not pause after every group.
^PQ50,10,1,N: This example prints a total of 50 labels with one replicate of each serial
number. It prints the total quantity in groups of 10, pausing after every group.
ZPL Commands
^PR
316
^PR
Print Rate
Description The ^PR command determines the media and slew speed (feeding a blank
label) during printing.
The printer operates with the selected speeds until the setting is reissued or the printer is turned
off.
The print speed is application-specific. Because print quality is affected by media, ribbon,
printing speeds, and printer operating modes, it is very important to run tests for your
applications.
Format ^PRp,s,b
Important Some models go to default print speed when power is turned off.
Note To set the print rate to 1 inch per second the 600 dpi XiIIIPlus accepts a ^PR1
command.
Parameters Details
p = print speed Accepted Values:
A or 2 = 50.8 mm/sec. (2 inches/sec.)
B or 3 = 76.2 mm/sec. (3 inches/sec.)
C or 4 = 101.6 mm/sec. (4 inches/sec.)
5 = 127 mm/sec.(5 inches/sec.)
D or 6 = 152.4 mm/sec. (6 inches/sec.)
E or 8 = 203.2 mm/sec. (8 inches/sec.)
9 = 220.5 mm/sec. 9 inches/sec.)
11 = 269.5 mm/sec.(11 inches/sec.)
Default Value: A
317
ZPL Commands
^PR
Comments The speed setting for p, s, and b is dependent on the limitations of the printer.
If a particular printer is limited to a rate of 6 ips (inches per second), a value of 12 can be
entered but the printer performs only at a 6 ips rate. See your printers User Guide for specifics
on performance.
s = slew speed Accepted Values:
5 = 127 mm/sec. 5 inches/sec.)
9 = 220.5 mm/sec. (9 inches/sec.)
10 = 245 mm/sec. (10 inches/sec.)
Default Value: D
b = backfeed speed Accepted Values:
10 = 245 mm/sec. 10 inches/sec.)
Default Value: A
Parameters Details
ZPL Commands
~PR
318
~PR
Applicator Reprint
Description The ~PR command is supported only by the PAX and PAX2 series printers. If
the ~PR command is enabled (see ^JJ on page 255), the last label printed reprints, similar to
the applicator asserting the Reprint signal on the applicator port.
Format ~PR
Comments Pressing PREVIOUS on the control panel also causes the last label to reprint.
319
ZPL Commands
~PS
~PS
Print Start
Description The ~PS command causes a printer in Pause Mode to resume printing. The
operation is identical to pressing PAUSE on the control panel of the printer when the printer is
already in Pause Mode.
Format ~PS
ZPL Commands
^PW
320
^PW
Print Width
Description The ^PW command allows you to set the print width.
Format ^PWa
Parameters Details
a = label width (in dots) Accepted Values: 2, to the width of the label
If the value exceeds the width of the label, the width is set
to the labels maximum size.
321
ZPL Commands
~RO
~RO
Reset Advanced Counter
Description The ~RO command resets the advanced counters used by the printer to monitor
label generation in inches, centimeters, and number of labels. These resettable counters are
available and can be reset.
Format ~ROc
* These values are only supported on Zebra ZM400/ZM600, S4M, and G-Series
printers.
Parameters Details
c = counter number Accepted Values:
1 = reset counter 1
2 = reset counter 2
R = reset head replaced counter *
R resets the head cleaned counter and the head
replaced counter.
C = reset head cleaned counter *
Default Value: a value must be specified or the command is
ignored
Example This example shows how the counter portion of the printer configuration label
looks when counter 1 is reset by sending ~RO1:
Before
After
ZPL Commands
^SC
322
^SC
Set Serial Communications
Description The ^SC command allows you to change the serial communications
parameters you are using.
Format ^SCa,b,c,d,e,f
* This value is not supported on Zebra ZM400/ZM600 and S4M printers.
** This parameter is supported only on Zebra G-Series printers. Using the DTR/DSR
XON/XOFF mode will cause the printer to respond to either DTR/DSR or XON/XOFF,
depending on which method is first received from the host device.
Comments If any of the parameters are missing, out of specification, not supported by a
particular printer, or have a ZPL-override DIP switch set, the command is ignored.
A ^JUS command causes the changes in Communications Mode to persist through power-up
and software resets.
Parameters Details
a = baud rate Accepted Values: 110*; 300; 600; 1200; 2400; 4800;
9600; 14400; 19200; 28800; 38400; or 57600;
115200
Default Value: must be specified or the parameter is ignored
b = word length (in data
bits)
Accepted Values: 7 or 8
Default Value: must be specified
c = parity Accepted Values: N (none), E (even), or O (odd)
d = stop bits Accepted Values: 1 or 2
e = protocol mode Accepted Values:
X = XON/XOFF
D = DTR/DSR
R = RTS
M = DTR/DSR XON/XOFF **
f = Zebra protocol Accepted Values:
A = ACK/NAK
N = none
Z = Zebra
323
ZPL Commands
~SD
~SD
Set Darkness
Description The ~SD command allows you to set the darkness of printing. ~SD is the
equivalent of the darkness setting parameter on the control panel display.
Format ~SD##
Comments The ^MD command value, if applicable, is added to the ~SD command.
Parameters Details
## = desired darkness
setting (two-digit
number)
Important The darkness setting range for the XiIIIPlus is 0 to 30 in increments of 0.1.
The firmware is setup so that the ^MD and ~SD commands (ZPL darkness commands)
accepts that range of settings.
Example These are examples of the XiIIIPlus Darkness Setting:
^MD8.3
~SD8.3
ZPL Commands
^SE
324
^SE
Select Encoding Table
Description The ^SE command is used to select the desired ZPL or ZPL II encoding table.
Format ^SEd:o.x
The encoding tables are provided with the font card or downloaded in flash with the font. The
table appears as XXXXXXX.DAT in a directory label printed by the ZPL commands.
The most active encoding table is indicated by the * on the directory label.
Parameters Details
d = location of encoding
table
Default Value: R:
o = name of encoding
table
Accepted Value: 1 to 8 alphanumeric characters
Example
^XA^WD*:*.*^XZ
325
ZPL Commands
^SF
^SF
Serialization Field (with a Standard ^FD String)
Description The ^SF command allows you to serialize a standard ^FD string. Strings are
serialized from the last character in the backing store with regard to the alignment of the mask
and increment strings. The maximum size of the mask and increment string is 3K combined.
For combining semantic clusters that do not get incremented, the mask character % needs to be
added to the increment string.
Format ^SFa,b
Parameters Details
a = mask string The mask string sets the serialization scheme. The length of
the string mask defines the number of combining semantic
clusters in the current ^FD string to be serialized. The mask is
aligned to the combining semantic clusters in the ^FD string
starting with the last in the backing store position.
Mask String placeholders:
D or d Decimal numeric 09
H or h Hexadecimal 09 plus a-f or A-F
O or o Octal 07
A or a Alphabetic AZ or az
N or n Alphanumeric 09 plus AZ or az
% Ignore character or skip
b = increment string The increment string is the value to be added to the field on
each label. The default value is equivalent to a decimal value
of one. The string is composed of any combining semantic
clusters defined in the serial string. Invalid combining
semantic clusters are assumed to be equal to a value of zero in
that combining semantic clusters position.
The increment value for alphabetic strings start with A or a
as the zero placeholder. This means to increment an
alphabetic combining semantic cluster by one, a value of B
or b must be in the increment string.
ZPL Commands
^SF
326
This mask has the first combining semantic clusters as alphanumeric (nn = 12) and the last
digit as uppercase alphabetic (A). The decimal value of the increment number is equivalent to
5 (F). The number of labels generated depends on the number specified by the ^PQ command.
In a similar instance, the ^FD string could be replaced with either of the ^FD strings below to
generate a series of label, determined by ^PQ.
Using this ZPL code:
^FDBL0000^SFAAdddd,1
The print sequence on this series of labels is:
BL0000, BL0001,...BL0009, BL0010,...
BL0099, BL0100,...BL9999, BM0000...
Using this ZPL code:
^FDBL00-0^SFAAdd%d,1%1
The print sequence on this series of labels is:
BL00-0, BL01-1, BL02-2,...BL09-9,
BL11-0, BL12-1...
Example This is an example of serializing a ^FD string. The ZPL II code generates three
separate labels as seen in Generated Labels:
^XA
^FO100,100
^CF0,100
^FD12A^SFnnA,F^FS
^PQ3
^XZ
327
ZPL Commands
^SF
Examples These examples show the importance of capitalization and location within the
mask.
In this example, the printer cycles with every two printed labels and alternates between H
(position 18), and then Z (position 36). With n or N, the serial number increments from 0 - 9
and az or AZ (36 positions overall). With each completed cycle, the second cluster (nn)
increments one position (from 00, 01, 02 ) per cycle:
In this example, lower case i increments with a mask string of nnN. Nothing changes because
the first cluster (Z) never triggers the second cluster (zz) to change.
GENERATED LABELS ZPL II CODE
^XA
^FO100,50Â0N,50,50^FDzzZ^SFnnN,I^FS
^PQ10
^XZ
GENERATED LABELS ZPL II CODE
^XA
^FO100,50Â0N,50,50^FDzzZ^SFnnN,i^FS
^PQ10
^XZ
ZPL Commands
^SF
328
Important notes about masking for firmware version V60.14.x, V50.14.x, or later:
A single % masks an entire combining semantic cluster rather than a single code
point.
The mask string and increment string should be aligned at the last code point in their
respective backing stores.
Control and bidirectional characters do not require a mask and are ignored for
serialization purposes.
329
ZPL Commands
^SI
^SI
Set Sensor Intensity
Description The ^SI command is used to change the values for the media sensors, which
are also set during the media calibration process. The media calibration process is described in
your specific printers users guide. This command is only supported on Zebra
ZM400/ZM600 printers.
Format ^SIa,b
Parameters Details
a = indicates the setting
to modify
Accepted Values:
1 = transmissive sensor brightness setting
2 = transmissive sensor baseline setting
Default Value: must be an accepted value or the entire
command is ignored
b = the value to use for
the sensor being
configured
The ranges for this parameter are the same for the accepted
values in parameter a.
Default Value: must be an accepted value or the entire
command is ignored
ZPL Commands
^SL
330
^SL
Set Mode and Language (for Real-Time Clock)
Description The ^SL command is used to specify the Real-Time Clocks mode of
operation and language for printing information.
Format ^SLa,b
Important
Time is read when the image is created. If the image stays in the queue longer than the
specified time the image will be recreated with a new time.
There are incidents when the same time or a larger space of time may be printed on labels.
This is due to the format complexity and print speed.
Parameters Details
a = mode Accepted Values:
S = Start Time Mode. This is the time that is read from
the Real-Time Clock when label formatting begins
(when ^XA is received). The first label has the
same time placed on it as the last label.
T = Time Now Mode. This is the time that is read from
the Real-Time Clock when the label to be printed is
placed in print queue. Time Now is similar to a
serialized time or date field.
Numeric Value = With the Enhanced Real Time
Clock (V60.13.0.10 or later) a time accuracy
tolerance can be specified. Range = 1 to 999
seconds, 0 = one second tolerance
Example: SL30,1 = Accuracy tolerance of 30 seconds
and use English.
Default Value: S
331
ZPL Commands
^SL
* These values are only supported on Zebra ZM400/ZM600 printers.
Comments These are some comments to be aware of:
The ^SL command must be placed before the first ^FO command.
As of V60.13.0.10 all supported printers have Enhanced Real Time Clock capabilities the
RTC will not print time fields that are more than sixty seconds old, rather it will update the
time prior to printing (^SLT or ^SL60). To control time with increments other than sixty
seconds the ^SL command can be used with a numeric value (^SL30).
^SLS can keep times longer than sixty seconds.
For more details on set mode and language with the Real-Time Clock, see Real Time Clock
on page 923.
b = language
Value 13 is only supported
in firmware versions
V60.14.x, V50.14.x, or
later.
Accepted Values:
1 = English
2 = Spanish
3 = French
4 = German
5 = Italian
6 = Norwegian
7 = Portuguese
8 = Swedish
9 = Danish
10 = Spanish 2
11 = Dutch
12 = Finnish
13 = Japanese
14 = Korean *
15 = Simplified Chinese *
16 = Traditional Chinese *
Default Value: the language selected with ^KL or the control
panel
Parameters Details
ZPL Commands
^SN
332
^SN
Serialization Data
Description The ^SN command allows the printer to index data fields by a selected
increment or decrement value, making the data fields increase or decrease by a specified value
each time a label is printed. This can be performed on 100 to 150 fields in a given format and
can be performed on both alphanumeric and bar code fields. A maximum of 12 of the right-
most integers are subject to indexing. The first integer found when scanning from the end of
the backing store towards the beginning starts the indexing portion of the data field.
If the backing store of the alphanumeric field to be indexed ends with an alpha character, the
data is scanned, character by character, from the end of the backing store until a numeric
character is encountered. Serialization takes place using the value of the first number found.
Format ^SNv,n,z
Parameters Details
v = starting value Accepted Values: 12-digits maximum for the portion to be
indexed
Default Value: 1
n = increment or
decrement value
Accepted Values: 12-digit maximum
Default Value: 1
To indicate a decrement value, precede the value with a
minus () sign.
z = add leading zeros (if
needed)
Accepted Values:
N = no
Y = yes
Default Value: N
Example This example shows incrementing by a specified value:
^XA
^FO260,110
^CFG
^SN001,1,Y^FS
^PQ3
^XZ
Note: The ZPL II code above will generate
three separate labels, seen to the right.
333
ZPL Commands
^SN
Comments Incrementing and decrementing takes place for each serial-numbered field
when all replicates for each serial number have been printed, as specified in parameter r of the
^PQ (print quality) command.
If, during the course of printing serialized labels, the printer runs out of either paper or ribbon,
the first label printed (after the media or ribbon has been replaced and calibration completed)
has the same serial number as the partial label printed before the out condition occurred. This
is done in case the last label before the out condition did not fully print. This is controlled by
the ^JZ command.
Using Leading Zeros
In the ^SN command, the z parameter determines if leading zeros are printed or suppressed.
Depending on which value is used (Y = print leading zeros; N = do not print leading zeros),
the printer either prints or suppresses the leading zeros.
The default value for this parameter is N (do not print leading zeros).
Print Leading Zeros
The starting value consists of the first number working backwards in the backing store
consecutive sequence of digits. The width (number of digits in the sequence) is determined by
scanning from right to left until the first non-digit (space or alpha character) is encountered. To
create a specific width, manually place leading zeros as necessary.
Suppressing Leading Zeros
The starting value consists of the first number working backwards in the backing store
consecutive sequence of digits, including any leading spaces. The width (number of digits in
the sequence) is determined by scanning from right to left until the first alpha character (except
a space) is encountered. To create a specific width, manually place leading spaces or zeros as
necessary. Suppressed zeros are replaced by spaces. During the serialization process, when the
entire number contains all zeros, the last zero is not suppressed.
The ^SN command replaces the Field Data (^FD) command within a label formatting
program.
ZPL Commands
^SO
334
^SO
Set Offset (for Real-Time Clock)
Description The ^SO command is used to set the secondary and the tertiary offset from the
primary Real-Time Clock.
Format ^SOa,b,c,d,e,f,g
For more detail on set offset, see Real Time Clock on page 923.
Note For each label only one SO2 command can be used. If more than one offset is
required, SO3 must be used.
Parameters Details
a = clock set Accepted Values:
2 = secondary
3 = third
Default Value: value must be specified
b = months offset Accepted Values: 32000 to 32000
Default Value: 0
c = days offset Accepted Values: 32000 to 32000
Default Value: 0
d = years offset Accepted Values: 32000 to 32000
Default Value: 0
e = hours offset Accepted Values: 32000 to 32000
Default Value: 0
f = minutes offset Accepted Values: 32000 to 32000
Default Value: 0
g = seconds offset Accepted Values: 32000 to 32000
Default Value: 0
335
ZPL Commands
^SP
^SP
Start Print
Description The ^SP command allows a label to start printing at a specified point before
the entire label has been completely formatted. On extremely complex labels, this command
can increase the overall throughput of the print.
The command works as follows: Specify the dot row at which the ^SP command is to begin.
This creates a label segment. Once the ^SP command is processed, all information in that
segment prints. During the printing process, all of the commands after the ^SP continue to be
received and processed by the printer.
If the segment after the ^SP command (or the remainder of the label) is ready for printing,
media motion does not stop. If the next segment is not ready, the printer stops mid-label and
wait for the next segment to be completed. Precise positioning of the ^SP command requires a
trial-and-error process, as it depends primarily on print speed and label complexity.
The ^SP command can be effectively used to determine the worst possible print quality. You
can determine whether using the ^SP command is appropriate for the particular application by
using this procedure.
If you send the label format up to the first ^SP command and then wait for printing to stop
before sending the next segment, the printed label is a sample of the worst possible print
quality. It drops any field that is out of order.
If the procedure above is used, the end of the label format must be:
^SP#^FS
Comments ^SPa
Parameters Details
a = dot row to start
printing
Default Value: 0
ZPL Commands
^SP
336
Example In this example, a label 800 dot rows in length uses ^SP500. Segment 1 prints
while commands in Segment 2 are being received and formatted.
Label Segment 2
Label Segment 1
Dot position 800
Dot position 500
Dot position 0
337
ZPL Commands
^SQ
^SQ
Halt ZebraNet Alert
Description The ^SQ command is used to stop the ZebraNet Alert option.
Format ^SQa,b,c
Parameters Details
a = condition type Accepted Values:
A = paper out
B = ribbon out
C = printhead over-temp
D = printhead under-temp
E = head open
F = power supply over-temp
G = ribbon-in warning (Direct Thermal Mode)
H = rewind full
I = cut error
J = printer paused
K = PQ job completed
L = label ready
M = head element out
N = ZBI (Zebra BASIC Interpreter) runtime error
O = ZBI (Zebra BASIC Interpreter) forced error
Q = clean printhead
R = media low
S = ribbon low
T = replace head
U = battery low
V = RFID error (in RFID printers only)
W = all errors (in RFID printers only)
* = all errors (in non-RFID printers)
ZPL Commands
^SQ
338
b = destination Accepted Values:
A = serial port
B = parallel port
C = e-mail address
D = TCP/IP
E = UDP/IP
F = SNMP trap
* = wild card to stop alerts for all destinations
c = halt messages Accepted Values:
Y = halt messages
N = start messages
Default Value: Y
Parameters Details
339
ZPL Commands
^SR
^SR
Set Printhead Resistance
Description The ^SR command allows you to set the printhead resistance.
Format ^SR####
Comments To avoid damaging the printhead, this value should be less than or equal to the
value shown on the printhead being used. Setting a higher value could damage the printhead.
Parameters Details
#### = resistance value
(four-digit numeric
value)
Accepted Value: 0488 to 1175
Note New printer models automatically set head resistance.
ZPL Commands
^SS
340
^SS
Set Media Sensors
Description The ^SS command is used to change the values for media, web, ribbon, and
label length set during the media calibration process. The media calibration process is
described in your specific printers users guide.
Format ^SSw,m,r,l,m2,r2,a,b,c
Parameters Details
w = web (three-digit
value)
Default Value: value shown on the media sensor profile or
configuration label
m = media (three-digit
value)
configuration label
r = ribbon (three-digit
value)
configuration label
l = label length (in dots,
four-digit value)
Default Value: value calculated in the calibration process
m2 = intensity of media
LED (three-digit
value)
r2 = intensity of ribbon
LED (three-digit
value)
a = mark sensing (three-
digit value)
b = mark media sensing
(three-digit value)
c = mark LED sensing
(three-digit value)
341
ZPL Commands
^SS
The media and sensor profiles produced vary in appearance from printer to printer.
Comments The m2 and r2 parameters have no effect in Stripe
S-300 and S-500 printers.

Maximum values for parameters depend on which printer platform is being used.
Example Below is an example of a media sensor profile. Notice the numbers from 000 to
100 and where the words WEB, MEDIA, and RIBBON appear in relation to those numbers.
Also notice the black vertical spike. This represents where the printer sensed the transition
from media-to-web-to-media.
ZPL Commands
^ST
342
^ST
Set Date and Time (for Real-Time Clock)
Description The ^ST command sets the date and time of the Real-Time Clock.
Format ^STa,b,c,d,e,f,g
For more details on set date and time, see Real Time Clock on page 923.
Parameters Details
a = month Accepted Values: 01 to 12
Default Value: current month
b = day Accepted Values: 01 to 31
Default Value: current day
c = year Accepted Values: 1998 to 2097
Default Value: current year
d = hour Accepted Values: 00 to 23
Default Value: current hour
e = minute Accepted Values: 00 to 59
Default Value: current minute
f = second Accepted Values: 00 to 59
Default Value: current second
g = format Accepted Values:
A = a.m.
P = p.m.
M = 24-hour military
Default Value: M
343
ZPL Commands
^SX
^SX
Set ZebraNet Alert
Description The ^SX command is used to configure the ZebraNet Alert System.
Format ^SXa,b,c,d,e,f
Note The values in this table apply to firmware version V48.12.4 or later.
ZPL Commands
^SX
344
Parameters Details
a = condition type Accepted Values:
A = paper out
B = ribbon out
C = printhead over-temp
D = printhead under-temp
E = head open
F = power supply over-temp
G = ribbon-in warning (Direct Thermal Mode)
H = rewind full
I = cut error
J = printer paused
K = PQ job completed
L = label ready
M = head element out
N = ZBI (Zebra BASIC Interpreter) runtime error
O = ZBI (Zebra BASIC Interpreter) forced error
P = power on
Q = clean printhead
R = media low
S = ribbon low
T = replace head
U = battery low
V = RFID error (in RFID printers only)
W = all errors (in RFID printers only)
* = all errors (in non-RFID printers)
Default Value: if the parameter is missing or invalid, the
command is ignored
b = destination for route
alert
Accepted Values:
A = serial port
B* = parallel port
C = e-mail address
D = TCP/IP
E = UDP/IP
F = SNMP trap
Default Value: if this parameter is missing or invalid, the
command is ignored
* Requires bidirectional communication.
c = enable condition set
alert to this
destination
Accepted Values:
N = no
Y = yes
Default Value: Y or previously configured value
345
ZPL Commands
^SX
Comments In the example above for SNMP Trap, entering 255.255.255.255 broadcasts the
notification to every SNMP manager on the network. To route the device to a single SNMP
manager, enter a specific address (123.45.67.89).
d = enable condition
clear alert to this
destination
Accepted Values:
N = no
Y = yes
Default Value: N or previously configured value
Parameters e and f are sub-options based on destination. If
the sub-options are missing or invalid, these parameters are
ignored.
e = destination setting Accepted Values:
Internet e-mail address (e.g. user@company.com)
IP address (for example, 10.1.2.123)
SNMP trap
IP or IPX addresses
f = port number Accepted Values:
TCP port # (0 to 65535)
UPD port # (0 to 65535)
Example This is an example of the different (b) destinations that you can send for the
condition type (a):
Serial: ^SXA,A,Y,Y
Parallel: ^SXA,B,Y,Y
E-Mail: ^SXA,C,Y,Y,admin@company.com
TCP: ^SXA,D,Y,Y,123.45.67.89,1234
UDP: ^SXA,E,Y,Y,123.45.67.89,1234
SNMP Trap: ^SXA,F,Y,Y,255.255.255.255
Parameters Details
ZPL Commands
^SZ
346
^SZ
Set ZPL
Description The ^SZ command is used to select the programming language used by the
printer. This command gives you the ability to print labels formatted in both ZPL and ZPL II.
This command remains active until another ^SZ command is sent to the printer or the printer
is turned off.
Format ^SZa
Comments If the parameter is missing or invalid, the command is ignored.
Parameters Details
a = ZPL version Accepted Values:
1 = ZPL
2 = ZPL II
Default Value: 2
347
ZPL Commands
~TA
~TA
Tear-off Adjust Position
Description The ~TA command lets you adjust the rest position of the media after a label is
printed, which changes the position at which the label is torn or cut.
Format ~TA###
Comments If the parameter is missing or invalid, the command is ignored.
Important These are some important facts about this command:
For 600 dpi printers, the step size doubles.
If the number of characters is less than 3, the command is ignored.
Parameters Details
### = change in media
rest position
(3-digit value in dot
rows must be used.)
Accepted Values:
120 to 120
0 to 120 (on the HC100)
Default Value: last permanent value saved
ZPL Commands
^TB
348
^TB
Text Blocks
Description The ^TB command prints a text block with defined width and height. The text
block has an automatic word-wrap function. If the text exceeds the block height, the text is
truncated. This command supports complex text layout features.
Format ^TBa,b,c
Comments Facts about the ^TB command:
Justification of ^TB command comes from ^FO, ^FT, or ^FN command. If no
justification is determined then the default is auto justification.
Data between < and > is processed as an escape sequence. This is a list of defined
escape sequences: <<> prints <.
The ^TB command has an automatic word-wrap function. Soft hyphens do not print
and are not used as a line break position.
later.
Note ^TB is the preferred command for printing fields or blocks of text, instead of ^FB.
Parameters Details
a = block rotation Accepted Values:
N = normal
R = rotate 90 degrees clockwise
I = invert 180 degrees
B = read from bottom up-270 degrees
Default Value: whatever was specified by the last Â (which
has the default of ^FW)
b = block width in dots Accepted Values:
1 to the width of the label in dots
Default Value: 1 dot
c = block height in dots Accepted Values:
1 to the length of the label in dots
Default Value: 1 dot
349
ZPL Commands
^TO
^TO
Transfer Object
Description The ^TO command is used to copy an object or group of objects from one
storage device to another. It is similar to the copy function used in PCs.
Source and destination devices must be supplied and must be different and valid for the action
specified. Invalid parameters cause the command to be ignored.
The asterisk (*) can be used as a wild card for object names and extensions. For instance,
ZEBRA.* or *.GRF are acceptable forms for use with the ^TO command.
At least one source parameter (d, o, or x) and one destination parameter (s, o, or x) must be
specified. If only ^TO is entered, the command is ignored.
Format ^TOs:o.x,d:o.x
Comments Parameters o, x, and s support the use of the wild card (*).
If the destination device does not have enough free space to store the object being copied, the
command is canceled.
Parameters Details
s = source device of
stored object
Default Value: if a drive is not specified, all objects are
transferred to the drive set in parameter s
o = stored object name Accepted Values: any existing object conforming to Zebra
conventions
Default Value: if a name is not specified, * is used all
objects are selected
conventions
Default Value: if an extension is not specified, * is used all
extensions are selected
d = destination device of
the stored object
Default Value: a destination must be specified
o = name of the object at
destination
Accepted Values: up to 8 alphanumeric characters
Default Value: if a name is not specified, the name of the
existing object is used
conventions
Default Value: if an extension is not specified, the extension
of the existing object is used
ZPL Commands
^TO
350
Zebra files (Z:*.*) cannot be transferred. These files are copyrighted by
Zebra Technologies.
Transferring Objects
These are some examples of using the ^TO command.
Transferring Multiple Objects
The asterisk (*) can be used to transfer multiple object files (except *.FNT) from DRAM to
the Memory Card. For example, assume you have several object files that contain logos. These
files are named LOGO1.GRF, LOGO2.GRF, and LOGO3.GRF.
To transfer all these files to the memory card using the name NEW instead of LOGO, place an
asterisk after the names NEW and LOGO in the transfer command. This copies all files
beginning with LOGO in one command.
^XA
^TOR:LOGO*.GRF,B:NEW*.GRF
^XZ
During a multiple transfer, if a file is too big to be stored on the memory card, that file is
skipped. All remaining files attempt to be transferred. All files that can be stored within the
space limitations are transferred, while other files are ignored.
Example To copy the object ZLOGO.GRF from DRAM to an optional Memory Card
and rename it ZLOGO1.GRF, write the following format:
^XA
^TOR:ZLOGO.GRF,B:ZLOGO1.GRF
^XZ
Example To copy the object SAMPLE.GRF from an optional Memory Card to DRAM
and keep the same name, write this format:
^XA
^TOB:SAMPLE.GRF,R:SAMPLE.GRF
^XZ
351
ZPL Commands
~WC
~WC
Print Configuration Label
Description The ~WC command is used to generate a printer configuration label. The
printer configuration label contains information about the printer setup, such as sensor type,
network ID, ZPL mode, firmware version, and descriptive data on the R:, E:, B:, and A:
devices.
Format ~WC
Comments This command works only when the printer is idle.

ZPL Commands
^WD
352
^WD
Print Directory Label
Description The ^WD command is used to print a label listing bar codes, objects stored in
DRAM, or fonts.
For bar codes, the list shows the name of the bar code. For fonts, the list shows the name of the
font, the number to use with Â command, and size. For objects stored in DRAM, the list
shows the name of the object, extension, size, and option flags. All lists are enclosed in a
double-line box.
Format ^WDd:o.x
Parameters Details
d = source device
optional
Accepted Values: R:, E:, B:, A: and Z:
Default Value: R:
o = object name
optional
Accepted Values: 1 to 8 alphanumeric characters
Default Value: *
The use of a ? (question mark) is also allowed.
x = extension optional
.TTF and .TTE are only
version V60.14.x,
V50.14.x, or later.
Accepted Values: any extension conforming to Zebra
conventions
.FNT = font
.BAR = bar code
.ZPL = stored ZPL format
.GRF = GRF graphic
.CO = memory cache
.DAT = font encoding
.BAS = ZBI encrypted program
.BAE = ZBI encrypted program
.STO = data storage
.PNG = PNG graphic
* = all objects
.TTE = True Type Extension
Default Value: *
The use of a ? (question mark) is also allowed.
Example To print a label listing all objects in DRAM, enter:
^XA
^WDR:*.*
^XZ
353
ZPL Commands
^WD
Example To print a label listing all resident bar codes, enter:
^XA
^WDZ:*.BAR
^XZ
Example To print a label listing all resident fonts, enter:
^XA
^WDZ:*.FNT
^XZ
ZPL Commands
~WQ
354
~WQ
Write Query
Description The ~WQ command triggers the printer to print a label with odometer,
maintenance or alert, and printhead history information. This command is only supported on
Zebra ZM400/ZM600, S4M (with v53.15.5Z or later), and G-Series printers.
Format ~WQquery-type
Parameter Details
query-type For detailed examples of these parameters, see ~WQ Examples
on page 356.
Accepted Values:
ES = requests the printers status. For details see, Table 2
on page 355 and Table 3 on page 355.
HA = hardware address of the internal wired print server
JT = requests a summary of the printers printhead test
results
MA = maintenance alert settings
MI = maintenance information
OD = odometer
PH = printhead life history
PP = printers Plug and Play string
SN = printers serial number
UI = printers USB product ID and BCD release version
Default Value: must be an accepted value or the command is
ignored
355
ZPL Commands
~WQ
Table 2 Error Flags (~WQES)
Table 3 Warning Flags (~WQES)
Flag
Group 2 Group 1
Error Flags Nibbles 16-9 Nibbles 8-4 Nibble 3 Nibble 2 Nibble 1
No Error 0 00000000 00000 0 0 0
Error Present 1 00000000 00000 X X X
Printhead Thermistor Open 1 00000000 00000 2 X X
Invalid Firmware Configuration 1 00000000 00000 1 X X
Printhead Detection Error 1 00000000 00000 X 8 X
Bad Printhead Element 1 00000000 00000 X 4 X
Motor Over Temperature 1 00000000 00000 X 2 X
Printhead Over Temperature 1 00000000 00000 X 1 X
Cutter Fault 1 00000000 00000 X X 8
Head Open 1 00000000 00000 X X 4
Ribbon Out 1 00000000 00000 X X 2
Media Out 1 00000000 00000 X X 1
Flag
Group 2 Group 1
Warning Flags Nibbles 16-9 Nibbles 8-2 Nibble 1
No Error 0 00000000 0000000 0
Error Present 1 00000000 0000000 X
Replace Printhead 1 00000000 0000000 4
Clean Printhead 1 00000000 0000000 2
Need to Calibrate Media 1 00000000 0000000 1
ZPL Commands
~WQ
356
~WQ Examples
This section provides detailed examples of all the available parameters.
This illustration identifies the printer status definitions:
1. To request the printers status, type ~WQES.
A label similar to this prints out:
In this example, the Printer Status resolves to these conditions:
The cover/printhead is open (value = 4).
The printhead needs to be cleaned (value = 2).
Error nibble 1 is equal to 5 when the error status values are added together (4+1).
1 Flag
2 Nibble 16-9
3 Nibble 8-4
4 Nibble 3
5 Nibble 2
6 Nibble 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
357
ZPL Commands
~WQ
1. To request the printers status, type ~WQES.
In the example shown above, the Printer Status resolves to the following conditions:
The cutter has a fault. (value = 8).
Ribbon is out or not loaded into the printer (value = 2).
Error byte 1 is equal to B when the error status values are added together
(8 + 2 + 1 = hexadecimal B).
Example This is an example of how to print the hardware address of the internal wired
print server.
1. To print the hardware address of the internal wired print server, type ~WQHA:
Example This is an example of how to print a summary of the printers printhead test
results.
The ^JT command is used to initiate printhead testing, set the testing interval, and set the
element range to be tested. For more details see, ^JT on page 267.
1. To request a summary of the printers printhead test, type ~WQJT.
When the printer has printed enough labels to trigger a printhead test, the initial data
changes.
2. To request a summary of the printers printhead test, type ~WQJT.
ZPL Commands
~WQ
358
This illustration identifies the printhead test field definitions:
1 Element failure
2 Manual (M) or automatic (A) range
3 First test element
4 Last test element
5 Failure count
Example This is an example of how to print the maintenance alert query for the ~WQ
command.
1. To get the current settings, type ~WQMA:
1 2 3 4 5
359
ZPL Commands
~WQ
Example This is an example of how to use the odometer query for the ~WQ command. Note
that the units of measure are controlled by the ^MA command. Also, if the "Early Warning
Maintenance State" is turned "ON" the printer response would also list LAST CLEANED
and CURRENT PRINTHEAD LIFE counters.
1. To get the current settings, type ~WQOD:
The units of measure are set to inches.
2. To change the units of measure to centimeters, type:
^XA^MA,,,,C
^XZ
The units of measure are set to centimeters.
3. To check the settings, type ~WQOD.
Example This is an example of how to print the maintenance information query for the
~WQ command. Note that the message is controlled by the ^MI command.
1. To get the current settings, type ~WQMI:
ZPL Commands
~WQ
360
Example This is an example of how to print the printhead life query for the ~WQ command.
Note that the units of measure are controlled by the ^MA command.
1. To get the current settings, type ~WQPH:
1 The current life of the print head.
2 Line items 2 through 10 (the example only shows 2 through
3) tracks the measurement for each time the print head is
changed.
Example This is an example of how to print the printers Plug and Play string.
1. To print the printers Plug and Play string, type ~WQPP.
Example This is an example of how to print the printers serial number.
1. To get the printers serial number, type ~WQSN:
Example This is an example of how to print the printers USB product ID and BCD release
version.
1. To print the printers USB product ID and BCD release version, type ~WQUI.
1
2
361
ZPL Commands
^XA
^XA
Start Format
Description The ^XA command is used at the beginning of ZPL II code. It is the opening
bracket and indicates the start of a new label format. This command is substituted with a single
ASCII control character STX.
Format ^XA
Comments Valid ZPL II format requires that label formats should start with the ^XA
command and end with the ^XZ command.
ZPL Commands
^XB
362
^XB
Suppress Backfeed
Description The ^XB command suppresses forward feed of media to tear-off position
depending on the current printer mode. Because no forward feed occurs, a backfeed before
printing of the next label is not necessary; this improves throughput. When printing a batch of
labels, the last label should not contain this command.
Format ^XB
^XB in the Tear-off Mode
Normal Operation: backfeed, print, and feed to rest
^XB Operation: print (Rewind Mode)
^XB in Peel-off Mode
Normal Operation: backfeed, print, and feed to rest
^XB Operation: print (Rewind Mode)
Note To prevent jamming in cutter mode, ^XB suppresses backfeed and cutting.
363
ZPL Commands
^XF
^XF
Recall Format
Description The ^XF command recalls a stored format to be merged with variable data.
There can be multiple ^XF commands in one format, and they can be located anywhere within
the code.
When recalling a stored format and merging data using the ^FN (Field Number) function, the
calling format must contain the ^FN command to merge the data properly.
While using stored formats reduces transmission time, no formatting time is saved. The ZPL II
format being recalled is saved as text strings that need to be formatted at print time.
Format ^XFd:o.x
For a complete example of the ^DF and ^XF command, see ^DF and ^XF Download
format and recall format on page 45.
Parameters Details
d = source device of
stored image
Default Value: search priority (R:, E:, B:, and A:)
o = name of stored image Accepted Values: 1 to 8 alphanumeric characters
x = extension l Fixed Value: .ZPL
ZPL Commands
^XG
364
^XG
Recall Graphic
Description The ^XG command is used to recall one or more graphic images for printing.
This command is used in a label format to merge graphics, such as company logos and piece
parts, with text data to form a complete label.
An image can be recalled and resized as many times as needed in each format. Other images
and data might be added to the format.
Format ^XGd:o.x,mx,my
Parameters Details
d = source device of
stored image
Default Value: search priority (R:, E:, B:, and A:)
o = name of stored image Accepted Values: 1 to 8 alphanumeric characters
x = extension l Fixed Value: .GRF
mx = magnification
factor on the x-axis
Default Value: 1
my = magnification
factor on the y-axis
Default Value: 1
Example This is an example of using the ^XG command to recall the image
SAMPLE.GRF from DRAM and print it in five different sizes in five different locations on
the same label:
^XA
^FO100,100^XGR:SAMPLE.GRF,1,1^FS
^XZ
365
ZPL Commands
^XS
^XS
Set Dynamic Media Calibration
Description The ^XS command controls whether dynamic media calibration is performed
to compensate for variations in label length, position, transmissivity, and/or reflectance after a
printer is powered-up or the printer has been opened (for example to change or check the
media). This command is only supported on Zebra G-Series printers.
Format ^XSlength,threshold
Parameters Details
length = dynamic
length calibration
Accepted Values:
Y = enable
N = disable
Default Value: Y
threshold =
dynamic threshold
calibration
Accepted Values:
Y = enable
N = disable
Default Value: Y
ZPL Commands
^XZ
366
^XZ
End Format
Description The ^XZ command is the ending (closing) bracket. It indicates the end of a
label format. When this command is received, a label prints. This command can also be issued
as a single ASCII control character ETX.
Format ^XZ
Comments Label formats must start with the ^XA command and end with the ^XZ
command to be in valid ZPL II format.
367
ZPL Commands
^ZZ
^ZZ
Printer Sleep
Description The ^ZZ command places the printer in an idle or shutdown mode.
Format ^ZZt,b
Comments The ^ZZ command is only valid on the PA400 and PT400 battery-powered
printers.
Parameters Details
t = number of second
(idle time) prior to
shutdown
Accepted Values: 0 to 999999 setting 0 disables
automatic shutdown
Default Value: last permanently saved value or 0
b = label status at
shutdown
Accepted Values:
Y = indicates to shutdown when labels are still queued
N = indicates all labels must be printed before shutting
down
Default Value: N
ZPL Commands
^ZZ
368

Notes ____________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
3
ZPL RFID Commands
This section contains the ZPL II commands for RFID-specific applications.
For more information about the RFID commands, refer to the RFID Programming Guide. A
copy is available on the User CD provided with your printer and online at
http://www.zebra.com/manuals.

ZPL RFID Commands
RFID Command Overview
370
RFID Command Overview
In addition to reading or encoding RFID tags, the RFID ZPL commands also provide for RFID
exception handling, such as setting the number of read/write retries before declaring a
transponder defective (set with ^RR, ^RT, and ^WT) or setting the number of labels that will
be attempted if an error occurs (set with ^RS).
For example, if an RFID label fails to program correctly or if the transponder cannot be
detected, the printer ejects the label and prints VOID across it. The printer will try to print
another label with the same data and format for the number of RFID labels specified by the
^RS command. If the problem persists, the printer follows the error handling instructions
specified by the ^RS command: the printer may remove the problematic format from the print
queue and proceed with the next format (if one exists in the buffer), or it may place the printer
in Pause or Error mode.
Important Consider the following before using any command in this section:
Before using a particular command, verify that it is compatible with your printer and
firmware version. See Table 4 on page 371.
If a parameter in the following tables is designated as not applicable for a particular
printer, any value entered for the parameter will be ignored, but the place holder for the
field is required.

ZPL RFID Commands
Printer and Firmware Compatibility
371
P
r
i
n
t
e
r

a
n
d

F
i
r
m
w
a
r
e

C
o
m
p
a
t
i
b
i
l
i
t
y
T
a
b
l
e
4

s
h
o
w
s

w
h
i
c
h

R
F
I
D

Z
P
L

c
o
m
m
a
n
d
s

y
o
u

c
a
n

u
s
e

w
i
t
h

d
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t

p
r
i
n
t
e
r
s

a
n
d

f
i
r
m
w
a
r
e

v
e
r
s
i
o
n
s
.
T
a
b
l
e

4

S
u
p
p
o
r
t
e
d

C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s

B
a
s
e
d

o
n

P
r
i
n
t
e
r

a
n
d

F
i
r
m
w
a
r
e
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
U
H
F

P
r
i
n
t
e
r
s
H
F

P
r
i
n
t
e
r
s
R 1 1 0 X i
a n d R 1 7 0 X i
R 1 1 0 P A X 4
R 4 M p l u s
R 1 1 0 X i H F
R 2 8 4 4 - Z
F
i
r
m
w
a
r
e

F
i
r
m
w
a
r
e
R 6 0 . 1 3 . X
R 6 0 . 1 5 . X
R 6 2 . 1 3 . X
R 6 3 . 1 3 . X
S P 9 9 4 X
S P 9 9 9 X
S P 1 0 2 7 X
S P 1 0 5 6 X
S P 1 0 8 2 X
a l l
a l l
^
H
L

o
r

~
H
L

o
n
p
a
g
e
3
7
3

R
e
t
u
r
n

R
F
I
D

D
a
t
a

L
o
g

t
o

H
o
s
t
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
^
H
R

o
n
p
a
g
e
3
7
4
C
a
l
i
b
r
a
t
e

R
F
I
D

T
r
a
n
s
p
o
n
d
e
r

P
o
s
i
t
i
o
n
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
^
R
A

o
n
p
a
g
e
3
7
6
R
e
a
d

A
F
I

o
r

D
S
F
I
D

B
y
t
e
^
R
B

o
n
p
a
g
e
3
7
8
D
e
f
i
n
e

E
P
C

D
a
t
a

S
t
r
u
c
t
u
r
e
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
^
R
E

o
n
p
a
g
e
3
8
0
E
n
a
b
l
e
/
D
i
s
a
b
l
e

E
.
A
.
S
.

B
i
t
*
*
^
R
F

o
n
p
a
g
e
3
8
1
R
e
a
d

o
r

W
r
i
t
e

R
F
I
D

F
o
r
m
a
t
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
^
R
I

o
n
p
a
g
e
3
8
4
G
e
t

R
F
I
D

T
a
g

I
D
*

(
R
6
0
.
1
3
.
0
.
1
3
Z
D
o
r

l
a
t
e
r
)
*
*

(
R
6
2
.
1
3
.
0
.
1
3
Z
C
o
r

l
a
t
e
r
)
*

(
R
6
3
.
1
3
.
0
.
1
1
Z
o
r

l
a
t
e
r
)
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
^
R
M

o
n
p
a
g
e
3
8
5
E
n
a
b
l
e

R
F
I
D

M
o
t
i
o
n
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
^
R
N

o
n
p
a
g
e
3
8
6
D
e
t
e
c
t

M
u
l
t
i
p
l
e

R
F
I
D

T
a
g
s

i
n

E
n
c
o
d
i
n
g

F
i
e
l
d
*

(
R
6
0
.
1
3
.
0
.
3
o
r

l
a
t
e
r
)
*
*
*
~
R
O

o
n
p
a
g
e
3
2
1
R
e
s
e
t

A
d
v
a
n
c
e
d

C
o
u
n
t
e
r
s
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
^
R
Q

o
n
p
a
g
e
3
8
7
Q
u
i
c
k

W
r
i
t
e

E
P
C

D
a
t
a

a
n
d

P
a
s
s
w
o
r
d
s
*
(
R
6
0
.
1
5
.
7
Z

o
r
l
a
t
e
r
)
*
(
R
6
2
.
1
5
.
7
Z

o
r
l
a
t
e
r
)
^
R
R

o
n
p
a
g
e
3
8
9
S
p
e
c
i
f
y

R
F
I
D

R
e
t
r
i
e
s

f
o
r

a

B
l
o
c
k
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*

=

S
u
p
p
o
r
t
e
d

=

N
o
t

s
u
p
p
o
r
t
e
d
a
.
U
s
e

t
h
e

^
R
F
,

^
R
M
,

a
n
d

^
R
R

c
o
m
m
a
n
d
s

r
a
t
h
e
r

t
h
a
n

t
h
e

^
R
T

c
o
m
m
a
n
d
.

b
.
U
s
e

t
h
e

^
R
F
,

^
R
M
,

^
R
R
,

a
n
d

^
W
V

c
o
m
m
a
n
d
s

r
a
t
h
e
r

t
h
a
n

t
h
e

^
W
T

c
o
m
m
a
n
d
.
ZPL RFID Commands
372
^
R
S

o
n
p
a
g
e
3
9
0
S
e
t

U
p

R
F
I
D

P
a
r
a
m
e
t
e
r
s
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
^
R
T

o
n
p
a
g
e
3
9
6
R
e
a
d

R
F
I
D

T
a
g
*

a
*

a
*

a
*

a
*

a
*

a
*

a
*

a
*

a
*

a
*
~
R
V

o
n
p
a
g
e
3
9
9
R
e
p
o
r
t

R
F
I
D

E
n
c
o
d
i
n
g

R
e
s
u
l
t
s
*
*
*
*
*
(
S
P
9
9
4
J

o
r

l
a
t
e
r
)
*

(
S
P
9
9
9
C

o
r

l
a
t
e
r
)
*
*
*
^
R
W

o
n
p
a
g
e
4
0
0
S
e
t

R
F
I
D

R
e
a
d

a
n
d

W
r
i
t
e

P
o
w
e
r

L
e
v
e
l
s
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
^
R
Z

o
n
p
a
g
e
4
0
2
S
e
t

R
F
I
D

T
a
g

P
a
s
s
w
o
r
d

a
n
d

L
o
c
k

T
a
g
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
^
W
F

o
n
p
a
g
e
4
0
5
E
n
c
o
d
e

A
F
I

o
r

D
S
F
I
D

B
y
t
e
^
W
T

o
n
p
a
g
e
4
0
7
W
r
i
t
e

(
E
n
c
o
d
e
)

T
a
g
*

b
*

b
*

b
*

b
*

b
*

b
*

b
*

b
*

b
*

b
*
^
W
V

o
n
p
a
g
e
4
0
9
V
e
r
i
f
y

R
F
I
D

E
n
c
o
d
i
n
g

O
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
T
a
b
l
e

4

S
u
p
p
o
r
t
e
d

C
o
m
m
a
n
d
s

B
a
s
e
d

o
n

P
r
i
n
t
e
r

a
n
d

F
i
r
m
w
a
r
e

(
C
o
n
t
i
n
u
e
d
)
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
U
H
F

P
r
i
n
t
e
r
s
H
F

P
r
i
n
t
e
r
s
R 1 1 0 X i
a n d R 1 7 0 X i
R 1 1 0 P A X 4
R 4 M p l u s
R 1 1 0 X i H F
R 2 8 4 4 - Z
F
i
r
m
w
a
r
e

F
i
r
m
w
a
r
e
R 6 0 . 1 3 . X
R 6 0 . 1 5 . X
R 6 2 . 1 3 . X
R 6 3 . 1 3 . X
S P 9 9 4 X
S P 9 9 9 X
S P 1 0 2 7 X
S P 1 0 5 6 X
S P 1 0 8 2 X
a l l
a l l
*

=

S
u
p
p
o
r
t
e
d

=

N
o
t

s
u
p
p
o
r
t
e
d
a
.
U
s
e

t
h
e

^
R
F
,

^
R
M
,

a
n
d

^
R
R

c
o
m
m
a
n
d
s

r
a
t
h
e
r

t
h
a
n

t
h
e

^
R
T

c
o
m
m
a
n
d
.

b
.
U
s
e

t
h
e

^
R
F
,

^
R
M
,

^
R
R
,

a
n
d

^
W
V

c
o
m
m
a
n
d
s

r
a
t
h
e
r

t
h
a
n

t
h
e

^
W
T

c
o
m
m
a
n
d
.
373
ZPL RFID Commands
^HL or ~HL
^HL or ~HL
Return RFID Data Log to Host
Description The printer continually logs RFID data and stores it in the printers RAM. Use
this command to request that the RFID data log be returned to the host computer, to clear the
current data log, and to restart data recording. The data returned show the status of the RFID
read, write, and lock commands and show any resulting error codes.
Format ^HL or ~HL
Comments
Data is shown in the format sent by the ^RFW command (ASCII, Hex, or EPC).
In the log, the data displays in this manner:
C,EEEE,DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
where
C = the RFID operation (R = read, W = write, L = lock)
EEEE = the RFID error code
DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD = data read or written
If the log exceeds 64K (approximately 2000 operations), the data log is cleared
automatically, and data recording restarts. When this happens, the following appears in the
log:
Logfile automatically reset
If the printer loses power, the log is lost. If the log results are important to you, retrieve the
log frequently.
ZPL RFID Commands
^HR
374
^HR
Calibrate RFID Transponder Position
Description Use this command to initiate an RFID transponder calibration for a specific
RFID label. Results are returned to the host computer. This calibration is used to determine the
optimal programming position for RFID media that may not meet the transponder placement
specifications for the printer.
During transponder calibration, the printer feeds the RFID label one-dot row at a time while
taking readings (via the READ TAG command and the WRITE TAG commands) to profile the
RFID transponder. Based on the results, the printer determines the optimal programming
position for the label and returns a results table to the host. The calibrated value is used as the
programming position for the ^RS command, can be overwritten by the ^RS command, and is
saved to nonvolatile memory (the value is saved even if the power is turned off).
This calibration takes into account the print mode, backfeed mode, and tear off position. The
RUN option in the RFID TAG CALIB control panel parameter performs the same
calibration but does not create a results table.
Format ^HRa,b
This table identifies the parameters for this format.
Comments
Based on the recommended transponder placement position for most RFID labels, the
printers default RFID programming position is zero for the R110PAX4. For other RFID
printers, the default programming position is the label length minus 1 mm (0.04 in.).
To return to the default programming position at any time, use the RESTORE option in the
RFID TAG CALIB control panel parameter.
Important If a label format specifies a value for parameter p (read/write position of the
transponder) in the ^RS command, that value will be used for the programming position for
all RFID labels until a new position is specified or until the printer is turned Off (O) and then
back On (I).
Parameters Details
a = start string User text to appear before the results table.
Accepted values: any string less than 65 characters
Default value: start
b = end string User text to appear after the results table.
Accepted values: any string less than 65 characters
Default value: end
375
ZPL RFID Commands
^HR
At the end of calibration, a results table is returned to the host. Each line in the results
table appears as:
Row, Read Result, Write Result
where
Row = the dot row where calibration occurred
Read Result = results of calibration (R = read, = unable to read)
Write Result = results of calibration (W = write, = unable to write)
Example If the following command is sent to the printer:
^XA^HR^XZ
The printer starts the transponder calibration and returns a results table such as the following:
start
position=195
215, ,
214, ,
213, ,
212, ,
211, ,
210, ,W
209,R,
208, ,
207, ,
206, ,W
205,R,
204, ,
203, ,
202, ,W
201,R,W
200,R,W
199,R,W
198,R,W
197,R,W
196,R,W
195,R,W <---****
194,R,W
193,R,W
192,R,W
191,R,W
190,R,W
189,R,
188, ,
187, ,
186, ,
185, ,
.
.
.
end
In this example, the optimal programming position is 195. This is identified at the top of the
table (position=195) and with an the arrow (<---****) in the table.
ZPL RFID Commands
^RA
376
^RA
Read AFI or DSFID Byte
Description Use this command to read the AFI or DSFID byte. The data can be returned to
the host via the ^HV command.
Format ^RA#,f,r,m,b
Important This command is not supported by all printers or firmware. See Printer and
Firmware Compatibility on page 371 for the list of printers and firmware with which you can
use this command.
Parameters Details
# = field number
specified with
another command
The value assigned to this parameter should be the same as
the one used in the ^RT command.
Accepted values: 0 to 9999
Default value: 0
f = format Accepted values:
0 = ASCII
1 = Hexadecimal
Default value: 0
r = number of retries Accepted values: 0 to 10
Default value: 0
m = motion Accepted values:
0 = Feed label after writing.
1 = No Feed after writing. Other ZPL may cause a feed.
Default value: 0
b = type of byte to read Accepted values:
A = AFI byte
D = DSFID byte
Default value: A
Example 1 This example reads the AFI byte in ASCII format and returns AFI Byte:x
to the host. The printer will retry the command five times if necessary. A voided label is
generated if the read is unsuccessful after these retries. The data read will go into the ^FN1
location of the recalled format.
^XA
^FO20,120Â0N,60^FN1^FS
^RA1,0,5,0^FS
^HV1,,AFI Byte:^FS
^XZ
377
ZPL RFID Commands
^RA
Example 2 This example reads the DSFID byte in ASCII format and returns
DSFID Byte:x to the host. The printer will retry the command three times if necessary. A
voided label is generated if the read is unsuccessful after these retries. The data read will go
into the ^FN1 location of the recalled format.
^XA
^FO20,120Â0N,60^FN1^FS
^RA1,0,3,0,D^FS
^HV1,,DSFID Byte:^FS
^XZ
ZPL RFID Commands
^RB
378
^RB
Define EPC Data Structure
Description Use this command to define the structure of EPC data, which can be read from
or written to an RFID transponder. For more information about EPC specifications, refer to the
EPC Global web site. All parameters in this command are persistent and will be used in
subsequent formats if not provided. The values are initially set to the default values.
RFID transponders can have different partitions defined. This command specifies the number
of partitions and how many bits are in each partition.
Format ^RBn,p0,p1,p2, ..., p15
use this command.
Parameters Details
n = total bit size of the
partitions
Specify the number of bits to include in the partitions.
Accepted values: 1 to n, where n is the bit size of the tag.
Default value: 96
p0 ... p15 =
partition sizes
Specify the number of bits to include in the individual
partitions. The partition sizes must add up to the bit size
specified for the previous parameter. The largest individual
partition size is 64 bits.
Default value: 1
Example 1 The following command specifies that there are 96 bits used with three fields.
Fields 1, 2, and 3 contain 10, 26, and 60 bits, respectively.
^RB96,10,26,60
The ZPL code to encode a tag with this format would look like this:
^RFW,E^FD1000.67108000.1122921504606846976^FS
When the tag is being encoded, the tag stores the data in the following way:
Field 1 contains 1000. This value is stored in the first 10 bits
Field 2 contains 67108000. This value is stored in the next 26 bits.
Field 3 contains 1122921504606846976. This value is stored in the remaining
60 bits.
379
ZPL RFID Commands
^RB
Example 2 The following command specifies that there are 64 bits used with eight 8-bit
fields.
^RB64,8,8,8,8,8,8,8,8^FS
^RFW,E^FD1.123.160.200.249.6.1.0^FS
When writing to the tag, each set of data is written in its respective 8-bit field.
Example 3 This example uses the SGTIN-64 standard, which defines 64-bit structure in the
following way:
^XA
^RB64,2,3,14,20,25
^RFW,E^FD0,3,12345,544332,22335221^FS
^XZ
These commands would put
0 in the header
3 as the filter value
12345 as the company prefix
544332 as the item reference
22335221 as the serial number
To read this EPC data and print the results on the label, you would use the following code:
^XA
^RB64,2,3,14,20,25
^FO50,50Â0N,40^FN0^FS
^FN0^RFR,E^FS
^XZ
The resulting label would look like this:
Header Filter Value
Company
Prefix Index
Item Reference Serial Number
SGTIN-64 2 bits 3 bits 14 bits 20 bits 25 bits
10
(binary value)
8
(decimal
capacity)
16,383
(decimal
capacity)
9 to 1,048,575
(decimal
capacity*)
33,554,431
(decimal
capacity)
* Capacity of Item Reference field varies with the length of the company prefix.
0.3.12345.544332.22335221
ZPL RFID Commands
^RE
380
^RE
Enable/Disable E.A.S. Bit
Description Use this command to enable or disable the Electronic Article Surveillance
(E.A.S.) bit that is available in some ISO15693 tags (such as Philips). This command works
only on those ISO15693 transponders and will be ignored if the tag does not support E.A.S.
Format ^REt,r
use this command.
Parameters Details
t = Enable/disable the
E.A.S. bit in the
ISO15693
transponder
Accepted values:
N = Disable E.A.S.
Y = Enable E.A.S.
Default value: N
Default value: 0
Example This example enables the E.A.S. bit in the transponder. It will retry the command
five times if necessary.
^XA
^REy,5
^XZ
381
ZPL RFID Commands
^RF
^RF
Read or Write RFID Format
Description Use this command to read or write to (encode) an RFID tag. When using this
command to read a tag, you may use a field variable to print the tag data on the label or to
return the data to the host.
Format ^RFo,f,b,n,m
Parameters Details
o = operation Specifies the action to be performed.
Accepted Values:
W = write to (encode) the tag
L = write with LOCK (if supported by tag type; Gen 2
tag type does not use this locking function)
R = read the tag
P = read password (Gen 2 tag type only)
Default Value: W
f = format Accepted Values:
A = ASCII
H = Hexadecimal
E = EPC (ensure proper setup with the ^RB command)
Default Value: H
b = starting block
number
For tag types other Gen 2:
Specifies the starting block number.
Accepted Values: 0 to n, where n is the maximum number of
blocks for the tag.
Default Value: 0
For Gen 2 tag type only:
What you specify for this parameter depends on what you
entered for the operation parameter.
When W, L, or R are specified for the operation parameter,
this parameter specifies a 16-bit word block number.
Accepted Values: 0 to n, where n is the maximum number
of blocks for the bank specified in the memory bank
parameter
Default Value: 0
When P is specified for the operation parameter, this
parameter specifies which password to read.
Accepted Values:
K = kill password
A = access password
ZPL RFID Commands
^RF
382
n = number of bytes to
read or write
Specifies the number of bytes to read or write.
For high-frequency (HF) printers:
bytes for the tag.
Default Value: 1
When E is specified for the memory bank parameter, this
value is not required.
bytes for the tag.
Default Value: 1
For all other printers and tag types:
This parameter applies only when the starting block number
is 1.
bytes for the tag. For UCODE EPC 1.19, n is 32.
Default Value: 1
m = memory bank
Note This parameter applies to Gen 2 tags only.
Specifies the Gen 2 memory bank. See the RFID
Programming Guide for more information about Gen 2
memory.
Accepted Values:
E = EPC 96-bit (command automatically performs
operation on Gen 2 bit address 20
h
and accesses
12 bytes of the EPC memory bank)
0 = Reserved
1 = EPC
2 = TID (Tag ID)
3 = User
Default Value: E
Example 1 This example encodes 96-bit data in ASCII format.
^XA
^RS4
^RFw,a^FD00 my data^FS
^XZ
Example 2 This example encodes 64-bit data in hexadecimal format.
^XA
^RS3
^RFW,H^FD1122334455667788^FS
^XZ
Parameters Details
383
ZPL RFID Commands
^RF
Example 3 This example encodes 96-bit EPC data, as specified by the ^RB command.
^XA
^RB96,8,3,3,20,24,38
^RFw,e^FD16,3,5,78742,146165,1234567891^FS
^XZ
Example 4 This example encodes 4 bytes of hexadecimal formatted data, starting in
block 3 of Gen 2 EPC bank 1.
^XA
^RS8
^RFW,H,3,4,1^FD11112222^FS
^XZ
Example 5 This example reads the extended Gen 2 tag ID (TID), which is not read by the
^RI command, and returns the results to the host computer. The results are labeled with the
header 8-byte Tag ID Data.
^XA
^RS8
^RFR,H,0,8,2^FN1^FS^HV1,,8-byte Tag ID Data:^FS
^XZ
ZPL RFID Commands
^RI
384
^RI
Get RFID Tag ID
Description Use this command to get the unique serial number of the tag and return it in
hexadecimal format. The data can be sent back to the host via the ^HV command.
For Gen 2 tag types, this command will return the 32-bit tag ID (TID) for the tag. If your
Gen 2 tag supports TID data beyond 32 bits, see ^RF on page 381 to access the TID memory
bank.
Format ^RI#,s,r,m
Parameters Details
# = number to be
Default value: 0
s = specify data order
Note This parameter applies only to the R110Xi HF
and R2844-Z printers.
Accepted values:
Accepted Values:
0 = Most significant byte first for Tag*It and PicoTag.
Least significant byte first for I*code and
ISO15693.
1 = Reverse the data order
Default value: 0
Default value: 0
0 = Feed label after writing
1 = No Feed after writing (other ZPL commands may
cause a feed)
Default value: 0
Example This example reads a tag ID, prints it on a label, and sends string
Tag ID:xxxxxxxx to the host. The data read will go into the ^FN0 location of the
format. The printer will retry the command five times, if necessary.
^XA
^FO20,120Â0N,60^FN0^FS
^RI0,,5^FS
^HV0,,Tag ID:^FS
^XZ
385
ZPL RFID Commands
^RM
^RM
Enable RFID Motion
Description Use this command to enable or disable RFID motion. By default, labels
automatically print at the end of the format. This command allows you to inhibit the label from
actually moving when it reaches the program position, which is useful for debugging, setup,
and custom applications. This parameter is not persistent (carried over from label to label).
Format ^RMe
use this command.
Parameters Details
e = enable Accepted values:
Y = Yes, move the label
N = No, do not move the label
Default value: Y
ZPL RFID Commands
^RN
386
^RN
Detect Multiple RFID Tags in Encoding Field
Description Use this command to enable or disable detection of multiple RFID tags in the
encoding field. By default, the printer checks for more than one tag in the field before
attempting to read or write. If more than one tag is found, the label over the antenna support is
voided, and the RFID ERR STATUS parameter on the control panel displays
MULTIPLE TAGS. To speed up printing and encoding by up to 200 ms, the check may be
disabled. This parameter is persistent (carried over from label to label).
Format ^RNe
use this command.
Parameters Details
e = enable Accepted Values:
Y = Yes, check for multiple tags
N = No, do not check for multiple tags
Default Value: Y
387
ZPL RFID Commands
^RQ
^RQ
Quick Write EPC Data and Passwords
Description Use this command with an Alien Higgs RFID tag and appropriate firmware to
write the EPC data, access password, and kill password with one command. Doing so reduces
the encoding time.
Format ^RQf,c,o[data]
Important This command is not supported by all RFID tags, printers, or firmware. See
Printer and Firmware Compatibility on page 371 for the list of printers and firmware with
which you can use this command.
Note The access password on the tag to be written to must be 00000000 prior to sending
this command.
Parameters Details
f = format Accepted Values:
A = ASCII
H = Hexadecimal
E = EPC
Default Value: H
c = chip type Accepted Values: 0 (Higgs IC tag)
Default Value: 0
o = option Accepted Values: 0 (write 96-bit EPC)
Default Value: 0
data = the EPC data,
access password, and
kill password
Use the ^FD command to specify the passwords in the
following format:
^FD[EPC],[access],[kill]
where:
EPC = the EPC data in the format specified by the f
parameter. The data should match what would be
programmed with the ^RF command.
access = an optional access password in hexadecimal
format. If this field is left blank, 0x00000000 is
written as the access password.
kill = an optional kill password in hexadecimal format.
If this field is left blank, 0x00000000 is written as
the kill password.
ZPL RFID Commands
^RQ
388
Example 1 This example writes the EPC data to the tag in hexadecimal format. The
unspecified access and kill passwords are written as zeroes (0x00000000).
^XA^RQ^FD112233445566778899001122^XZ
Example 2 This example writes the EPC data to the tag in hexadecimal format. The access
password is written as 0xAAAAAAAA, and the kill password is written as 0xBBBBBBBB.
^XA^RQ^FD112233445566778899001122,AAAAAAAA,BBBBBBBB^XZ
Example 3 This example writes the EPC data to the tag in EPC format. The unspecified
access and kill passwords are written as zeroes (0x00000000).
^XA^RB96,30,30,30,6^RQE^FD1234.5678.9012.12^XZ
Example 4 This example writes the EPC data to the tag in hexadecimal format. The access
password is written as 0xAAAAAAAA, and the unspecified kill password is written as
zeroes (0x00000000).
^XA^RB96,30,30,30,6^RQE^FD1234.5678.9012.12,AAAAAAAA^XZ
389
ZPL RFID Commands
^RR
^RR
Specify RFID Retries for a Block
Description Use this command to change the number of times that the printer attempts to
read or write to a particular block of a single RFID tag. By default, the printer will attempt six
retries. This command is persistent and will be used in subsequent formats if not provided.
Format ^RRn
use this command.
Note This commands function is different than the number of labels parameter in the
^RS command.
Parameters Details
n = number of retries Accepted Values: 0 to 10
Default Value: 0
Examples
Set read block retries to 5
^XA
^FN1^RR5^RFR,H^FS
^HV1^FS
^XZ
Set write block retries to 2
^XA
^RR2^RFW,H^FD1234^FS
^XZ
ZPL RFID Commands
^RS
390
^RS
Set Up RFID Parameters
Description Use this command to set up RFID parameters including tag type, read/write
position of the transponder, and error handling.
Format ^RSt,p,v,n,e,a,c,s
Important Use care when using this command in combination with ^RT or ^RF for
reading tag data. Problems can occur if the data read from the tag is going to be printed on the
label. Any data read from the transponder must be positioned to be printed above the
read/write position. Failure to do this will prevent read data from being printed on the label.
Parameters Details
t = tag type Tells the printer/print engine which tag type you are using. If
you specify a tag type that is not supported by your printer or
firmware, the printer uses the default value. For the supported
tag types and defaults, see Table 5 on page 393.
UHF Printers
0 = None
1 = EPC Class 0
2 = EPC Class 0 Plus
3 = EPC Class 1 64-bit
4 = EPC Class 1 96-bit
5 = UCODE EPC 1.19
6 = Impinj Class 0 Plus
7 = ISO 18000-06A
8 = EPC Class 1, Generation 2 (Gen 2)
9 = ISO 18000-06B
HF Printers
Note Only the R110Xi HF printer (firmware version
R65.X.X) supports the use of letters for this
parameter. All other printers use the numbers.
A or 0 = None
B or 1 = Auto detect (query tag to determine)
C or 2 = Tag*It (Texas Instruments Tagit tags)
D or 3 = I*code (Phillips Icode tags)
E or 4 = Pico Tag (Inside Technologys)
F or 5 = ISO 15693
G or 6 = EPC tag (13.56 MHz)
H or 7 = UID Tag
I or 8 = Mifare UltraLight
391
ZPL RFID Commands
^RS
p = read/write position of
the transponder
Sets the read/write position of the transponder in vertical
(Yaxis) dot rows from the top of the label. Set to 0 (no
movement) if the transponder is already in the effective area
without moving the media.
Important If a label format specifies a value for this
parameter, this value will be used for the programming
position for all labels until a new position is specified
or until the printer is turned off (O) and then back on
(I).
Accepted values: 0 to label length
Default value:
For the R110PAX4 and R2844-Z: 0
For all other supported printers: label length minus
1 mm (1/16 in.)
v = length of void
printout
Sets the length of the void printout in vertical (Yaxis) dot
rows.
Accepted values: 0 to label length
Default value: label length
n = number of labels The number of labels that will be attempted in case of
read/encode failure.
Default value: 3
e = error handling If an error persists after the specified number of labels are
tried, perform this error handling action.
Accepted values:
N = No action (printer drops the label format causing the
error and moves to the next queued label)
P = Place printer in Pause mode (label format stays in
the queue until the user cancels)
E = Place printer in Error mode (label format stays in the
queue until the user cancels)
Default value: N
Note You can set the printer to send an error
message to the host for each failure. To enable or
disable this unsolicited error message, refer to the
^SX and ^SQ ZPL commands. Use V for the
condition type for an RFID error.
Parameters Details
ZPL RFID Commands
^RS
392
a = signals on applicator
Note This parameter does not apply to the R2844-Z.
For the R4Mplus, this parameter applies only to
printers with firmware version SP994X (R4Mplus
European version).
When the value for parameter p (read/write position of the
transponder) is nonzero, this parameter changes the number of
start and stop print signals required for printing.
In Single mode, one start print command is required. In
Double mode, two are required, so the printer will resume
printing only after the second start print command is received.
Accepted values:
S = single signal
D = double signal (For the R110PAX4, Double mode will
work only if the read/write position is changed
from the default of zero.)
Default value: S
c = certify tag with a
pre-read
Not applicable.
s = void print speed
Note This parameter does not apply to the R2844-Z.
For the R4Mplus, this parameter applies only to
European version).
If a label is voided, the speed at which VOID will be
printed across the label.
Accepted values: any valid print speed
Default value: the printers maximum print speed
Parameters Details
393
ZPL RFID Commands
^RS
Supported Tag Types Table 5 shows the tag types supported by different RFID
printers/print engines and firmware versions. Depending on your country or on the firmware
version that you are using, your printer may not support all of the tag types listed. If you
specify an unsupported tag type in the ^RS command, the printer uses the default value. If a
tag type is shown as supported but does not work with your printer, you may need to upgrade
the printers firmware (see http://www.zebra.com/firmware).
Table 5 Supported Tag Types and Default Values
Tag Type
UHF Printers HF Printers
R
6
0
.
1
3
.
X
R
6
2
.
1
3
.
X
R
6
3
.
1
3
.
X
S
P
9
2
0
X
S
P
9
9
4
X
,

S
P
9
9
9
X
,

S
P
1
0
2
7
X
S
P
1
0
5
6
X
R
1
1
0
X
i

H
F
R
2
8
4
4
-
Z
R
1
1
0
X
i
R
1
7
0
X
i
R
1
1
0
P
A
X
4
R
4
M
p
l
u
s
UHF Tag Types and Options
None (no tag type specified) * *
EPC Class 0 * *
EPC Class 0 Plus * *
EPC Class 1 64-bit * * * *
EPC Class 1 96-bit # # # *
UCODE EPC 1.19 * *
*. Requires R60.13.0.13ZD or later.
# # # *
Impinj Class 0 Plus * *
ISO 18000-06A * *
EPC Class 1, Generation 2 (Gen 2) * * * #
ISO 18000-06B * * *
HF Tag Types and Options
Auto-detect the tag type by querying the tag #
Tag*It (Texas Instruments Tagit tags) *
I*code (Phillips Icode tags) *
Pico Tag (Inside Technologys) *
ISO 15693 # *
EPC tag *
UID Tag
Mifare UltraLight *
# = Default value
* = Accepted value
ZPL RFID Commands
^RS
394
Example 1 This example sets the printer to move the media to 800 dots from the top of the
media [or label length minus 800 from the bottom (leading edge) of the media] and voids the
rest of the media in case of an error. The printer will try to print two labels and then will
pause if printing and encoding fail.
^XA
^RS,800,,2,P^FS
^XZ
Figure 1 shows the resulting voided label. Note where the void starts. The media has been
moved 800 dot rows from the top of the label (label length minus 800 dot rows from the
bottom (leading edge) of a label) to bring the transponder into the effective area to read/write
a tag. If the printer fails the operation, the rest of the media is voided.
Figure 1 Sample Void Label, Remainder of Label Voided
Top of label
Start of RFID
operation
800 dot rows
Bottom of label
Label length minus
800 dot rows
395
ZPL RFID Commands
^RS
Example 2 This example sets the printer to move the media to 800 dots from the top of the
media [or label length - 500 from the bottom (leading edge) of the media] and prints VOID
500 dots in vertical length (Y axis) in case of an error.
^XA
^RS,800,500,2,P^FS
^XZ
Figure 2 shows the resulting voided label. Note where the void starts. The media has been
moved 800 dot rows from the top of the label [label length minus 800 dot rows from the
bottom (leading edge) of a label] to bring the transponder into the effective area to read/write
a tag. If the printer fails the operation, an area that is 500 dot rows of the media is voided
instead of the entire rest of the media.
Figure 2 Sample Void Label, 500 Dot Row Area Voided
Top of label
Start of RFID
operation
800 dot rows
Bottom of label
Label length minus
800 dot rows
500 dot rows
ZPL RFID Commands
^RT
396
^RT
Read RFID Tag
Description Use this command to tell the printer to read the current RFID tag data. The data
can be returned to the host via the ^HV command.
Format ^RT#,b,n,f,r,m,s
Note The ^RT command is provided only for backward-compatibility with label formats
that were developed for older Zebra RFID printers. See Printer and Firmware Compatibility
on page 371 for the list of printers and firmware with which you should not use this
command.
Parameters Details
# = number to be
Default value: 0
b = starting block
number
Accepted values: 0 to n, where n is the maximum number of
blocks for the tag.
Default value: 0
n = number of
blocks/bytes to read
Note This parameter does NOT apply to R4Mplus
U.S. version).
For R4Mplus printers with firmware version SP994X
(European version):
This parameter applies only when the starting block number
(parameter b) is 1.
bytes for the tag. For UCODE EPC 1.19, n is 32.
Default value: 1
For all other supported printers:
blocks for the tag type minus the starting block number. For
example, if the tag has 8 blocks (starting with block 0) and
you start with block 6, n can be 2. This would return block 6
and block 7 information.
Default value: 1
f = format Accepted values:
0 = ASCII
1 = Hexadecimal
Default value: 0
397
ZPL RFID Commands
^RT
r = number of retries Changes the number of times that the printer attempts to read
a particular block of a single RFID tag. (Same retry rules as
the ^RR command.)
Default value: 0
m = motion Enables or disables RFID motion for the current field.
Accepted values:
1 = No feed after writing. Other ZPL may cause a feed.
Default value: 0
s = special mode
Note This parameter is used only for the printers
referenced here.
For R4Mplus printers with firmware version SP920X
(U.S. version):
Specify actions for mismatched checksums. For EPC Class 1
(Alien reader) only. Not applicable for EPC class 0.
Default value: 0
Accepted values:
0 = Do not read if mismatched checksum
1 = Read even if mismatched checksum
For R110Xi HF and R2844-Z printers:
Specify data order.
Default value: 0
Accepted values:
0 = least significant byte first
1 = most significant byte first
Example 1 This example reads a tag, prints the data on a label, and sends the string
Tag Data:xxxxxxxx back to the host. The data read will go into the ^FN1 location of
the format. The printer will retry the command five times, if necessary.
^XA
^FO20,120Â0N,60^FN1^FS
^RT1,,,,5^FS
^HV1,,Tag Data:^FS
^XZ
Parameters Details
ZPL RFID Commands
^RT
398
Example 2 This example reads from a tag twice and prints the results on a label.
^XA
^FO20,120Â0N,60^FN1^FS
^FO20,100Â0N,20^FN2^FS
^RT1,7,3,,5^FS
^RT2,3,2,,5^FS
^XZ
The first ^RT command starts at block 7 and reads three blocks of data in ASCII format. The
data read will go into the ^FN1 location of the format. The printer will retry the command
five times, if necessary.
The second ^RT command starts at block 2 and reads two blocks of data in ASCII format.
The data read will go into the ^FN2 location of the format. The printer will retry the
command five times, if necessary.
399
ZPL RFID Commands
~RV
~RV
Report RFID Encoding Results
Description Use this command to tell the printer to send RFID encoding success or failure
results to the host computer after each label format completes.
Format ~RVa
use this command.
Parameters Details
a = enable/disable Enables or disables the results reporting feature.
Accepted Values:
E = Enable
D = Disable
Default Value: D
Example 1 Assume that the following code is sent and that there is no RFID tag in the field.
~RVE
^XA
^RS8,0,,3
^RMY
^RFR,H
^XZ
The printer attempts to program a tag three times and then returns the following to the host:
_-,3_
The minus sign indicates that the programming attempt failed entirely and voided three
labels.
Example 2 Assume that the same code is sent and that the first two attempts at
programming a tag are unsuccessful. The third attempt succeeds.
~RVE
^XA
^RS8,0,,3
^RMY
^RFR,H
^XZ
The printer attempts to program a tag three times and then returns the following to the host:
_+,2_
The plus sign indicates that the programming attempt was successful and voided two labels.
ZPL RFID Commands
^RW
400
^RW
Set RFID Read and Write Power Levels
Description Use this command to set the read and write power levels. This function is
useful when using different tag types or transponders that require different power levels to
obtain the best read and write abilities. If not enough power is applied, the transponder may
not have sufficient power for programming, and tag data will fail to encode. If too much power
is applied, the extra power may disable the tag may or cause data communication errors.
Format ^RWr,w
use this command.
Parameters Details
r = read power Sets the power level to match the desired output as calibrated
in the factory.
Accepted Values:
H = high
M = medium
L = low
Default Value: H
401
ZPL RFID Commands
^RW
w = write power
Note This parameter is ignored on the R110Xi HF
printer because read and write powers cannot be
specified separately. The printer uses the value that
you specified for read power for both the read and
write power settings.
Sets the power level to match the desired output as calibrated
in the factory.
Accepted Values:
H = high
M = medium
L = low
Default Value: H
a = RFID antenna
selection
Note This parameter applies only to the R110Xi HF
printer.
Selects the antenna port that provides the best results for
reading and writing.
Accepted Values:
1 = antenna port 1
2 = antenna port 2
Default Value: 1
Parameters Details
ZPL RFID Commands
^RZ
402
^RZ
Set RFID Tag Password and Lock Tag
Description Use this command to define a password for a tag during writing.
With Gen 2 tags, you can lock a tags memory bank with an access password or define a kill
password that can be used to permanently disable the tag. If you do not set access or kill
passwords for a tag, the tag ignores any read or write commands that try to use these functions.
Format ^RZp,m,l
Note The printer can set a kill password, but the printer cannot kill a tag.
Parameters Details
p = password Sets a password.
For tag types other than Gen 2:
The password is 8 bits. The memory bank and lock style
parameters are ignored. The password must be 2 hexadecimal
characters long.
Accepted Values: 00 to FF (hexadecimal)
Default Value: 00
Gen 2 tags use a 32-bit password and specify the memory
bank and lock style. The password must be 8 hexadecimal
characters long. Use ^RF on page 381 to read the passwords.
Accepted Values: 00000000 to FFFFFFFF (hexadecimal)
Default Value: none
m = memory bank
Accepted Values:
K = kill password
A = access password
E = EPC
T = tag identifier (TID)
U = user
Default Value: none
403
ZPL RFID Commands
^RZ
l = lock style
Accepted Values:
U = unlocked
L = locked
O = permanently unlocked (open)
P = permanently locked (protected)
W = write value (used only for the kill password
memory bank)
Default Value: none
Example 1 On a tag that is not Gen 2, this example encodes 5A as the tag password.
^XA
^RZ5A^FS
^XZ
Example 2 On a Gen 2 tag, this example encodes EPC data
112233445566778899001122 to the tag in Hex format, write protects the tags EPC
data with password 1234ABCD, and leaves the tags access password unlocked.
^XA
^RFW,H^FD112233445566778899001122^FS
^RZ1234ABCD,E,L^FS
^XZ
Example 3 On a Gen 2 tag, this example encodes EPC data
112233445566778899001122 to the tag in Hex format, write protects the tags EPC
data with password 1234ABCD, and makes the tags access password unreadable.
^XA
^RFW,H^FD112233445566778899001122^FS
^RZ1234ABCD,E,L^FS
^RZ1234ABCD,A,L^FS
^XZ
The following code unprotects EPC data 112233445566778899001122 using the
password 1234ABCD, encodes EPC data newdata to the tag in ASCII format, and then
write protects the tags new EPC data. The access password and its lock state are not
changed, so the access password remains unreadable.
^XA
^RZ1234ABCD,E,U^FS
^RFW,A^FDnewdata^FS
^RZ1234ABCD,E,L^FS
^xz
Parameters Details
ZPL RFID Commands
^RZ
404
Example 4 On a Gen 2 tag, this example unlocks the locked access password from the
previous example.
^XA
^RZ1234ABCD,A,U^FS
^XZ
405
ZPL RFID Commands
^WF
^WF
Encode AFI or DSFID Byte
Description Use this command to encode the AFI or DSFID byte to a tag. Error handling is
set by the ^RS command.
Format ^WFr,m,w,f,b
use this command.
Parameters Details
Default value: 0
1 = No Feed after writing. Other ZPL may cause a feed.
Default value: 0
w = write protect Accepted values:
0 = Not write protected
1 = Write protect
Default value: 0
f = data format Accepted values:
0 = ASCII
1 = Hexadecimal
Default value: 0
b = type of byte to read Accepted values:
A = AFI byte
D = DSFID byte
Default value: A
Example 1 This example encodes data R (hex 52) as the AFI byte. The printer will try the
command up to five times, if necessary.
^XA
^WF5^FDR
^XZ
ZPL RFID Commands
^WF
406
Example 2 This example encodes data hex 66 as the AFI byte. The printer will try the
command up to three times, if necessary.
^XA
^WF3,,,1^FD66
^XZ
Example 3 This example encodes data hex 77 as the DSFID byte. The printer will try the
command up to four times, if necessary.
^XA
^WF4,,,1,D^FD77
^XZ
407
ZPL RFID Commands
^WT
^WT
Write (Encode) Tag
Description Use this command to encode the current RFID tag. Check the amount of data
memory available for the tag that you will be using. If you send more data than the memory
can hold, the printer truncates the data.
Format ^WTb,r,m,w,f,v
Note The ^WT command is provided only for backward-compatibility with label formats
that were developed for older Zebra RFID printers. See Printer and Firmware Compatibility
on page 371 for the list of printers and firmware with which you should not use this
command.
Parameters Details
b = block number Specifies the block number to encode. This parameter is tag-
dependent.
For most tags, use block 0.
For EPC Class 0 Plus, block 0 is EPC data, and block 1 is
user data.
For the R4Mplus, this parameter does not apply to printers
with firmware version SP902X. With other versions of
firmware in this printer, you can encode 12 bytes (96 bits)
to block 0, but you can encode only the first byte of block
1.
blocks for the tag.
Default value: 0
r = number of retries Changes the number of times that the printer attempts to
encode a particular block of a single RFID tag. (Same
function as the ^RR command.)
Default value: 0
m = motion Enables or disables RFID motion. (Same function as the ^RM
command.)
Accepted values:
0 = Feed label after writing
1 = No feed after writing (other ZPL may cause a feed)
Default value: 0
w = write protect Accepted values:
0 = Not write protected
1 = Write protected
Default value: 0
ZPL RFID Commands
^WT
408
f = data format Accepted values:
0 = ASCII
1 = Hexadecimal
Default value: 0
For the R110Xi HF:
v = reverse the data order
This parameter is not used in the R2844-Z.
For the R110Xi HF:
Reverses the data order.
Accepted values:
N = Do not reverse the data order (Most significant byte
first for Tag*It and PicoTag. Last significant byte
first for I*code and ISO 15693)
Y = Reverse the data order
Default value: N
For other supported
printers:
v = verify valid data
For other supported printers:
For reliability, some manufacturers encode tags with known
data (such as A5A5). This parameter flags whether the
preprogrammed data is verified. (Same function as the ^WV
command.)
Accepted values:
N = Do not verify
Y = Verify valid data before writing
Default value: N
Example This sample encodes data RFIDRFID and will try writing up to five times, if
necessary.
^XA
^WT,5^FDRFIDRFID^FS
^XZ
Parameters Details
409
ZPL RFID Commands
^WV
^WV
Verify RFID Encoding Operation
Description Use this command to enable or disable the write verify function. When write
verify is enabled, this command verifies the RFID encoding operation to ensure that the tag
about to be programmed contains the hex data A5A5 in the first two bytes. This parameter is
not persistent (carried over from label to label).
Format ^WVe
use this command.
Parameters Details
e = enable Accepted values: Y or N
Default value: N
ZPL RFID Commands
^WV
410

Notes ___________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
4
ZPL Wireless Commands
This section contains new or modified ZPL commands for the Wireless and Wireless Plus print
servers.
^KC
412
^KC
Set Client Identifier (Option 61)
Description The ^KC command allows the print server to have its own client identifier
(CID).
Format ^KCa,b,c,d
* This applies only to the Zebra ZM400/ZM600 printer when it is used with the external ZebraNet 10/100
print server using firmware v1.1.5.
Parameters Details
a = enable or disable Accepted Values:
0 = disable (default)
1 = enabled, use MAC address
2 = enabled, ASCII value
3 = enabled, HEX value
Default Value: 0
b = device Accepted Values:
0 = all devices
1 = wireless
2 = external wired *
3 = internal wired
Default Value: 1
c = prefix (optional) Accepted Values: 11 ASCII characters or 22 hexadecimal
values.
The prefix can be cleared by defaulting the network settings
on the printer.
d = identifier Accepted Values: 60 ASCII characters or 120 hexadecimal
values. Minimum field length is 2 bytes.
The suffix can be cleared by defaulting the network settings
on the printer.
413
^NB
^NB
Search for Wired Print Server during Network Boot
Description Use this command to tell the printer whether to search for a wired print server
at bootup. This command is ignored on the Zebra ZM400/ZM600 printer.
Table 6 identifies which device becomes the active print server under different conditions.
Format ^NBa
Note Only one print server can be installed in the S4M at one time, so this check does not
occur.
Table 6 Results of Check for Wired Print Server
If the Check
for Wired Print
Server is
set to:
Installed and Connected to
a Live Ethernet Network Then, the Active Print
Server will be:
Wired Wireless*
Skip
X X Wireless
X Wired
X Wireless
Check
X X Wired
X Wired
X Wireless
* NOTE: A wireless option board must have an active radio that can properly associate to an access point.
Parameters Details
a = check for wired print
server at boot time
Accepted Values: C (CHECK), S (SKIP CHECK)
Default Value: S
^NN
414
^NN
Set SNMP
Description Use this command to set the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
parameters.
Format ^NNa,b,c,d,e,f
Parameters Details
a = system name Same as printer name.
Accepted Values: Up to 17 alphanumeric characters
b = system contact Any contact information as desired (such as a name or phrase)
c = system location The printers model information.
d = get community name Accepted Values: Up to 19 alphanumeric characters
Default Value: public
e = set community name Accepted Values: Up to 19 alphanumeric characters
f = trap community
name
415
^NP
^NP
Set Primary/Secondary Device
Description Use this command to specify whether to use the printers or the print servers
LAN/WLAN settings at boot time. The default is to use the printers settings.
When the printer is set as the primary device, you can set it up using ZPL commands or
the Wireless Setup Wizard utility, and any wired print server inserted into the printer will
use those settings.
Format ^NPa
Parameters Details
a = device to use as
primary
Accepted Values:
P = PRINTER
M = MPS/PRINTSERVER
Default Value: P
^NT
416
^NT
Set SMTP
Description Use this command to set the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP)
parameters. This allows you to set the e-mail settings for alerts.
Format ^NTa,b
Parameters Details
a = SMTP server address Accepted Values: Any properly formatted server address in
the xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx format
b = print server domain Accepted Values: Any properly formatted print server domain
name. A domain name is one or more labels separated by a
period (dot), and a label consists of letters, numbers, and
hyphens. An example of a domain name is zebra.com
417
^NW
^NW
Set Web Authentication Timeout Value
Description Use this command to set the timeout value for the printer home page. The
printer will prompt for the printer password only the first time that certain screens are accessed
until 1) the web authentication timeout value is reached (default value is 5 minutes) or
2) the printer is reset. At that time, the printer will prompt for the password again.
Format ^NWa
Parameters Details
a = timeout value The timeout value in minutes for an IP address to be
authenticated to the printer web pages.
Accepted Values: 0 (no secure pages can be accessed without
entering the printer password) to 255 minutes
Default Value: 5
^WA
418
^WA
Set Antenna Parameters
Description Use this command to set the values for the receive and transmit antenna.
Format ^WAa,b
Parameters Details
a = receive antenna Accepted Values: D (Diversity), L (Left), R (Right)
Default Value: D
b = transmit antenna Accepted Values: D (Diversity), L (Left), R (Right)
Default Value: D
419
^WE
^WE
Set WEP Mode
Description Use this command to command enable Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) mode
and set WEP values. WEP is a security protocol for wireless local area networks (WLANs).
Be careful to include the exact number of commas required for this command when setting
encryption keys (parameters e through h). A missing or extra comma will cause the keys to be
stored in the wrong slots and can prevent the printer from joining the wireless network.
Format ^WEa,b,c,d,e,f,g,h
Note The ^WE command is provided only for backward-compatibility with printers using
firmware prior to V50.15.x, V53.15.x, or V60.15.x. For these firmware versions and later,
use ^WX on page 430 to set the security type and related parameters.
Parameters Details
a = encryption mode Accepted Values: OFF, 40 (40-bit encryption), 128 (128-bit
encryption)
Default Value: OFF
b = encryption index Tells the printer which encryption key to use.
Accepted Values: 1 (Key 1), 2 (Key 2), 3 (Key 3), 4 (Key 4)
Default Value: 1
c = authentication type Accepted Values: O (Open System), S (Shared Key)
Default Value: O
Note If you enable Shared Key authentication with
Encryption Mode set to OFF, this value resets to
Open.
d = encryption key
storage
Accepted Values: H (Hex key storage), S (string key storage)
Default Value: H
e, f, g, h =
encryption keys
1 through 4
Accepted Values: The actual value for the encryption key
The encryption mode affects what can be entered for the
encryption keys:
For 40-bit, encryption keys can be set to any 5 hex pairs or
any 10 alphanumeric characters.
For 128-bit, encryption keys can be set to any 13 hex pairs
or any 26 alphanumeric characters.
Note When using hex storage, do not add a leading
0x on the WEP key.
^WE
420
Example 1 This example sets encryption to 40-bit, activates encryption key 1, and sets
encryption key 1 to the string 12345.
^WE40,,,,12345
In this example, the Encryption Index, Authentication Type, and Encryption Key Storage
parameters are left blank with commas as placeholders for the fields. The printer uses the
default values for these parameters.
encryption keys 1 and 2 to hex values.
^WE128,2,,H,12345678901234567890123456,98765432109876543
210987654
The value for encryption key 1 is stored and can be activated in the future by the following
command:
^WE128,1
encryption key 4 to a hex value.
^WE128,4,,H,,,,98765432109876543210987654
Values are not required for encryption keys 1 through 3 when setting encryption key 4. In this
example, commas are used as placeholders for the fields for encryption keys 1 through 3.
Any previously stored values for these encryption keys do not change.
Important Make sure that you include the exact number of commas required to get
to the slot for encryption key 4 (parameter h).
421
^WI
^WI
Change Wireless Network Settings
Description Use this command to change the wireless network settings. On Zebra
ZM400/ZM600 and S4M printers running V53.15.xZ or later, Zebra recommends using
^ND on page 302 for these settings.
Format ^WIa,b,c,d,e,f,g,h,i
Parameters Details
a = IP resolution Accepted Values:
A = All
B = BOOTP
C = DHCP and BOOTP
D = DHCP
G = Gleaning only (Not recommended when the
Wireless Print Server or Wireless Plus Print Server
is installed.)
R = RARP
P = Permanent
Default Value: A
b = IP address Accepted Values: Any properly formatted IP address in the
Default Value: 000.000.000.000
c = subnet mask Accepted Values: Any properly formatted subnet mask in the
d = default gateway Accepted Values: Any properly formatted gateway in the
e = WINS server address Accepted Values: Any properly formatted WINS server in the
f = connection timeout
checking
Accepted Values:
Y = yes
N = no
Default Value: Y
g = timeout value Time, in seconds, before the connection times out.
Default Value: 300
^WI
422
h = ARP broadcast
interval
Time, in minutes, that the broadcast is sent to update the
devices ARP cache.
i = base raw port number The port number that the printer should use for its RAW data.
Default Value: 9100
Parameters Details
423
^WL
^WL
Set LEAP Parameters
Description Use this command to enable Cisco
Lightweight Extensible Authentication

Protocol (LEAP) mode and set parameters. LEAP is user authentication method that is
available with some wireless radio cards.
Format ^WLa,b,c
Note The ^WL command is provided only for backward-compatibility with printers using
firmware prior to V50.15.x or V60.15.x. For these firmware versions and later, use ^WX
on page 430 to set the security type and related parameters.
Parameters Details
a = mode Accepted Values: OFF, ON
Default Value: OFF
b = user name Accepted Values: Any 4 to 40 alphanumeric characters
Default Value: user
c = password Accepted Values: Any 4 to 40 alphanumeric characters
Default Value: password
~WL
424
~WL
Print Network Configuration Label
Description Use this command to generate a network configuration label (Figure 3).
Format ~WL
Figure 3 Network Configuration Label
Wireless Plus Print Server
and Internal Wireless Plus Print Server
Other Printers/Print Engines ZM and RZ printers
Wireless Print Server
425
^WP
^WP
Set Wireless Password
Description Use this command to set the four-digit wireless password (not the same as the
general printer password). If the wireless password is 0000, the Wireless and Wireless Plus
print servers run in an unprotected mode, which means that you do not need to enter the
wireless password through the control panel to view or modify wireless settings.
If a wireless password is set, the values for the following parameters will not appear through
the control panel until the wireless password is entered:
MAC Address
ESSID
WLAN Security
WEP Type
WEP Index
Reset Network
Format ^WPa,b
Parameters Details
a = old wireless
password
Default Value: 0000
b = new wireless
password
Default Value: 0000
^WR
426
^WR
Set Transmit Rate
Description Use this command to change the transmission parameters.
Format ^WRa,b,c,d,e
Parameters Details
a = rate 1 Sets the 1 Mb/s transmit rate.
Accepted Values: Y (On), N (Off)
b = rate 2 Sets the 2 Mb/s transmit rate.
c = rate 5.5 Sets the 5.5 Mb/s transmit rate.
d = rate 11 Sets the 11 Mb/s transmit rate.
e = transmit power Accepted Values: 1, 5, 20, 30, 50, 100
427
~WR
~WR
Reset Wireless Radio Card and Print Server
Description Use this command to reinitialize the wireless radio card and the print server
(wired or wireless) when the Wireless or Wireless Plus print server is running. The command
also causes any wireless radio card in the printer to reassociate to the wireless network.
Format ~WR
^WS
428
^WS
Set Wireless Radio Card Values
Description Use this command to set the wireless radio card values for ESSID, Operating
Mode, and Card Preamble.
Format ^WSe,o,p,h,i,j,k
Parameters Details
e = ESSID value Accepted Values: Any value up to 32 characters, including all
ASCII and Extended ASCII characters, including the space
character. When this parameter is left blank, the ESSID is not
changed.
Default Value: 125
o = operating mode Accepted Values:
I = infrastructure
A = adhoc
Default Value: I
p = wireless radio card
preamble
Accepted Values:
L = long
S = short
Default Value: L
h = wireless pulse
This parameter is
version V60.15.x,
V50.15.x, or later.
Adds a pulse to the network traffic generated by the printer.
This pulse is necessary with some network configurations to
keep the printer online.
Accepted Values:
1 = enabled
0 = disabled
Default Value: 1
i = wireless pulse
interval
This parameter is
version V60.15.x,
V50.15.x, or later.
Sets the interval at which the wireless pulse is sent when the
wireless pulse feature is enabled.
Accepted Values: 5 to 300 seconds
Default Value: 15
429
^WS
j = channel mask
This parameter is
version V60.15.x,
V50.15.x, or later.
For commonly used channel masks, see Table 7.
Accepted Values: 4 Hexadecimal digits preceded by 0x
(0x0000 to 0xFFFF)
Default Value: 0x7FF
k = international mode
This parameter is
version V60.15.x,
V50.15.x, or later.
Accepted Values: 0 (Disabled), 1 (Enabled)
Default Value: 0
Table 7 Channel Mask Settings
Region Channel Mask
United States, Canada, Latin America 0x7FF
Europe, Middle East, Africa, other 0x1FFF
Japan 0x3FFF
Parameters Details
^WX
430
^WX
Configure Wireless Securities
Description Use this command to configure the wireless security settings for your printer.
Values entered for this command must match what is configured on your WLAN and must be
supported by the wireless radio card that you are using.
The ^WX command replaces individual ZPL commands for different security types.
Format ^WXa,[zero or more supporting parameters]
This command applies to printers with firmware version V60.15.x, V50.15.x, or later.
Note When using certificate files, your printer supports:
Using Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM) formatted certificate files.
Using the client certificate and private key as two files, each downloaded separately.
Using exportable PAC files for EAP-FAST.
Note The supporting parameters that are required vary based on the security type that you
select. See Supporting Parameters for Different Security Types on page 434 for instructions
for each security type.
431
^WX
Parameters Details
a = security type Enter the two-digit code for the security type that your
WLAN uses. For which supporting parameters (b through n)
to use with the different security types, see Supporting
Parameters for Different Security Types on page 434.
Note Configuring the printer for WPA also allows
the printer to be used in WPA2 environments.
01= No wireless security is active
02= WEP 40-bit
03= WEP 128-bit
04= EAP-TLS
05= EAP-TTLS
06= EAP-FAST
07= PEAP
08= LEAP
09= WPA PSK (Key rotation for WPA2 PSK is
supported in firmware versions V53.15.7Z ,
V60.15.7Z, and later.))
10= WPA EAP-TLS
11= WPA EAP-TTLS
12= WPA EAP-FAST
13= WPA PEAP
14= WPA LEAP
15= Kerberos
Default Value: 01
b = WEP encryption
index*
Specifies which encryption key to use for WEP encryption. A
value must be specified if using WEP 40-bit or WEP 128-bit.
Accepted Values: 1, 2, 3, 4
Default Value: 1
c = WEP authentication
type*
Enables the WEP key authentication type. A value must be
specified if using WEP 40-bit or WEP 128-bit.
Accepted Values: O or S
O = open system
S = shared key
Default Value: O
d = WEP key type* Specifies the format of the WEP key. A value must be
specified if using WEP 40-bit or WEP 128-bit.
Accepted Values: H or S
H = hex key storage
S = string key storage
Default Value: S
* Not used for all security types
^WX
432
e,f,g,h =
WEP encryption keys
1 through 4*
Specifies the actual values of any WEP encryption keys to be
used. A value must be specified for at least one WEP
encryption key if you specify 40-bit or 128-bit WEP
encryption for the security type.
Important Be careful to include the exact number of
commas required for this command when setting
encryption keys (parameters e through h). A missing
or extra comma will cause the keys to be stored in the
wrong slots and can prevent the printer from joining
the wireless network.
The encryption mode affects what can be entered for the
encryption keys:
For 40-bit, encryption keys can be set to any 5 hex pairs
or any 10 alphanumeric characters.
For 128-bit, encryption keys can be set to any 13 hex
pairs or any 26 alphanumeric characters.
Note When using hex storage, do not add a leading
0x on the WEP key.
Accepted Values: The actual value for the encryption key
Default Value: None
i = user ID* Specifies a user ID for security types that require one. A
value must be specified if using the following security
types:
EAP-TTLS
LEAP
WPA LEAP
PEAP
WPA PEAP
WPA EAP-TTLS
Kerberos
Accepted Values: The actual value for the user ID.
Default Value: user
Parameters Details
433
^WX
j = password* Specifies a password for security types that require one. A
value must be specified if using the following security
types:
EAP-TTLS
LEAP
WPA LEAP
PEAP
WPA PEAP
WPA EAP-TTLS
Kerberos
Accepted Values: The actual value for the password.
Default Value: password
k = optional private key
password*
Specifies an optional private key password for security types
that require one. A value must be specified if using the
following security types:
EAP-TLS
EAP-FAST
WPA EAP-TLS
WPA EAP-FAST
Accepted Values: The actual value for the optional private
key.
Default Value: None
l = realm*
Specifies the realm for security types that require it. A value
must be specified if using Kerberos.
Accepted Values: The actual value for the realm.
Default Value: kerberos
m = Key Distribution
Center (KDC)*
Specifies the KDC for security types that require it. A value
must be specified if using Kerberos.
Accepted Values: The actual value for the KDC.
Default Value: krbtgt"
n = Pre-Shared Key
(PSK) value*
Enter the PSK value. This value is calculated and must be the
same for each device on the WLAN. Use ZebraNet Bridge to
generate the PSK value. A value must be specified if using
WPA PSK.
Important Do not enter a pass phrase for this field in
this command. To use a pass phrase, use the ZebraNet
Bridge Enterprise Wireless Setup Wizard.
Accepted Values: a minimum of 64 hexadecimal digits
Default Value: None
Parameters Details
^WX
434
Supporting Parameters for Different Security Types
The supporting parameters required for this command vary based on the security type that you
select. You should not use all of the supporting parameters each time that you use this
command, nor will you use extra commas to separate unused fields. Follow the example and
format for your specific security type in this section, substituting your own wireless network
data.
Security Type 01: No Wireless Security Active
Format ^WX01
Security Type 02: WEP 40-Bit
Format ^WX02,b,c,d,e,f,g,h
Format ^WX03,b,c,d,e,f,g,h
Example This example turns off all wireless securities controlled under this command, but
it does not reset the printers wireless settings to their defaults.
^XA
^WX01
^JUS^XZ
Example This example configures the printer for WEP 40-bit encryption using index
key 1, open authentication, and a hexadecimal WEP key with a value of A1B2C3D4F5.
^XA
^WX02,1,O,H,A1B2C3D4F5,,,
^JUS
^XZ
key 2, open authentication, and four hexadecimal WEP keys.
^XA
^WX03,2,O,H,001122334455667788,112233445566778899,223344
556677889900,334455667788990011
^JUS
^XZ
435
^WX
Security Type 04: EAP-TLS
Format ^WX04,k
Security Type 05: EAP-TTLS
Format ^WX05,i,j
Security Type 06: EAP-FAST
Format ^WX06,i,j,k
Example This example configures the printer for EAP-TLS authentication with an optional
private key password with a value of private.
^XA
^WX04,private
^JUS
^XZ
Example This example configures the printer for EAP-TTLS authentication, including a
user ID of user and a password of password.
^XA
^WX05,user,password
^JUS
^XZ
Example This example configures the printer for EAP-FAST authentication, including a
user ID of user, a password of password, and an optional private key of
private.
^XA
^WX06,user,password,private
^JUS
^XZ
^WX
436
Security Type 07: PEAP
Format ^WX07,i,j
Security Type 08: LEAP
Format ^WX08,i,j
Security Type 09: WPA PSK
Format ^WX09,n
Example This example configures the printer for PEAP authentication, including a user ID
with a value of user and a password with a value of password.
^XA
^WX07,user,password
^JUS
^XZ
Example This example configures the printer for LEAP authentication, including a user ID
^XA
^WX08,user,password
^JUS
^XZ
Note Configuring the printer for WPA also allows the printer to be used in WPA2
environments. Key rotation for WPA2 PSK is supported in firmware version 60.15.7Z and
later and in firmware version 53.15.7Z and later.
Example This example configures the printer for WPA PSK authentication with a PSK
value of all zeroes (64 hexadecimal digits).
^XA
^WX09,00000000...
^JUS
^XZ
437
^WX
Security Type 10: WPA EAP-TLS
Format ^WX10,k
Security Type 11: WPA EAP-TTLS
Format ^WX11,i,j
Security Type 12: WPA EAP-FAST
Format ^WX12,i,j,k
environments.
Example This example configures the printer for WPA EAP-TLS authentication with an
optional private key password with a value of private.
^XA
^WX10,private
^JUS
^XZ
environments.
Example This example configures the printer for WPA EAP-TTLS authentication,
including a user ID with a value of user and a password with a value of password.
^XA
^WX11,user,password
^JUS
^XZ
environments.
Example This example configures the printer for WPA EAP-FAST authentication,
including a user ID of user, a password of password, and an optional private key of
private.
^XA
^WX12,user,password,private
^JUS
^XZ
^WX
438
Security Type 13: WPA PEAP
Format ^WX13,i,j
Security Type 14: WPA LEAP
Format ^WX14,i,j
Security Type 15: Kerberos
Format ^WX15,i,j,l,m
environments.
Example This example configures the printer for WPA PEAP authentication, including a
user ID with a value of user and a password with a value of password.
^XA
^WX13,user,password
^JUS
^XZ
environments.
Example This example configures the printer for WPA LEAP authentication, including a
^XA
^WX14,user,password
^JUS
^XZ
Example This example configures the printer for Kerberos encryption, including a
Kerberos user ID with a value of user, a Kerberos password with a value of
password, a realm of zebra, and a KDC of krbtgt.
^XA
^WX15,user,password,zebra,krbtgt
^JUS
^XZ
5
ZBI Commands
This section explains the Zebra Basic Interpreter, its commands, descriptions, formats, and
parameters.
ZBI Commands
Command and Function Reference Format
440
Command and Function Reference Format
This section describes how commands and functions are presented in this document.
Command/Function NAME
Description This heading has a description of how the command is used, its capabilities,
and its characteristics.
Format The Format section explains how the command is arranged and its parameters. For
example, the AUTONUM command starts the auto-numbering option. The format for the
command is AUTONUM <A>,. The <A> and are parameters of this command and
are replaced with values determined by the user.
For functions, parameters are enclosed within parentheses and separated by commas, such as
EXTRACT$(A$,START$,STOP$).
Numeric parameters are written as a name, while string parameters are written as a name
followed by a dollar sign.
Parameters If a command has parameters that make a command or function more specific,
they are listed under this heading. Still using the AUTONUM example, the <A> parameter is
defined as:
<A> = number used to start the auto-numbering sequence
Return Value (functions only)
The return value is the result of evaluating the function or expression.
Example When a command is best clarified in a programming context, an example of the
ZBI code is provided. Text indicating parameters, exact code to be entered, or data returned
from the host is printed in the Courier font to be easily recognizable.

Comments This section is reserved for notes that are of value to a programmer, warnings of
potential command interactions, or command-specific information that should be taken into
consideration. An example comment could be: This is a program command and must be
preceded by a line number.
Example An example of PRINT code is:
10 PRINT "HELLO WORLD"
RUN
HELLO WORLD
441
ZBI Commands
Introduction to Zebra Basic Interpreter (ZBI)
Function Rules
Functions built into this interpreter can be used in expressions only. The function names are
not case sensitive.
If input parameters exist, they are enclosed in parentheses. If no parameters exist, no
parentheses are used.
Variables referenced in the functions could be substituted by functions or expressions of the
same type. If the function name ends with a $, it returns a string value. Otherwise, it returns a
numeric value.
What is ZBI and why is it for me?
ZBI is an "on-the-printer" programing language that offers many of the functions found in
ANSI BASIC. The ZBI language allows the user to create applications that are run on the
printer to manipulate data streams. By using ZBI, it is possible to have the printer perform the
same functions that a computer or programmable terminal might otherwise be used for.
With the connectivity options available on Zebra printers, you may not need a separate
computer. Simply load a ZBI program on your printers, add them to your network, and let the
printers serve as the gateway for moving data.
Here are some of the applications that can be written using ZBI:
Connect a barcode scanner to the printer. Based on scanned data, reprint tags, verify
printed output, and manage a list of items.
Connect a scale to the printer and print labels, tags, or receipts based on the weight of an
item.
Connect the printer to a PC-based database and send queries from the printer to retrieve or
upload data.
Convert incoming data into the commands that can be used to print a label. This is useful
for replacing other brands of printers with new Zebra units.
Provide fail-over to another printer when the target printer is in an error state.
ZBI Commands
442
Printers, ZBI Keys, & ZBI Versions
Information about ZBI 1.x and ZBI 2.x:
ZBI versions 1.0 through 1.5: ZBI 1.x was available on printers with X.10 or higher
firmware (such as V48.10.x). To determine if the printer supports ZBI version 1, check the
firmware version loaded on the printer. This can be determined by the absence of a Z in the
firmware version number (for example, firmware V60.13.0.12 supports ZBI version 1, while
V60.13.0.12Z does not). The following printers support the ZBI 1.x firmware:
LP/TLP 284x-Z and 384x-Z
S300/S400/S500/S600
Z4000/Z6000
Z4M/Z6M
Z4Mplus/Z6Mplus
105SL
PAX3
XiII
XiIII
ZBI-Developer can be used to create programs for use on printers that support ZBI version
1.x., however, the features that are only available in ZBI v2.x cannot be used with printers
running ZBI v1.x. For example, on-printer debugging advanced file encryption and
commands added in ZBI 2 are not supported in printers running ZBI 1.x. If you do not have a
printer that meets this requirement, contact your reseller.
These printers can be either ZBI-Ready or ZBI-Enabled, depending on whether or not a ZBI
Key file has been loaded on the printer. ZBI Keys can be loaded onto printers during
manufacturing or later purchased at www.zebrasoftware.com. A Downloader Utility/ZBI Key
Manager software utility is available to assist in the task of sending ZBI Keys to printers.
Note Support for ZBI versions 1.0 through 1.5 is limited to syntax checking only.
On-printer debugging is not supported for ZBI versions 1.0 through 1.5.
ZBI versions 2.0 and higher: Printers with firmware versions X.16 or later (for
example, V60.16.x and V53.16.x) can support ZBI version 2.0 and later. The following
printers support the ZBI 2.x firmware:
XiIII Plus
Z4Mplus/Z6Mplus
105SL
S4M
PAX4
ZM400/ZM600
443
ZBI Commands
The ZBI.nrd file is required to be present on the printer for ZBI 2.0 to be enabled. The ZBI
Key is stored on the printers E: memory location with the name ZBI.nrd. The file is persistent.
It cannot be deleted even if the printers memory is initialized. For example, if the ^JB
command is used to initialize the location, the ZBI Key file will not be deleted.
When a printer is ZBI-Ready but not ZBI-Enabled, the firmware version will display a "Z" at
the end of the version string (for example, V60.16.0Z). Additionally, the printers
configuration label will show that the printer is not ZBI-Enabled.
When a printer is ZBI-Enabled, the firmware version will not display a "Z" at the end of the
version string (for example, V60.16.0Z). Additionally, the printers configuration label will
show that the printer is ZBI-Enabled.
Note Each single ZBI Key can only be used once. When multiple printers are to be ZBI-
Enabled multiple Keys will be needed. The ZBI Key cannot retrieved from printer to a host
system.
ZBI Commands
Section Organization
444
Section Organization
The sections in this guide are arranged based on programming topics. A brief description of
the sections is listed below.
Editing Commands This section describes the commands which are used to manipulate
the interpreter and enter programs.
Running and Debugging Outlines the control commands used to run and debug
programs.
Base Types and Expressions Fundamental structure for manipulating strings and
computing numeric and boolean values.
Control and Flow Commands to conditionally execute code and control the flow of the
program
Input and Output Outlines how to communicate with the physical ports, internal ports, and
network.
File System Shows how programs and formats can be saved and recalled
Comma Separated Values Identifies how to load and store comma separated data
Events Explains how to capture and trigger internal events in the printer
Systems Contains miscellaneous systems interface functions
String Functions Handles string manipulation
Math Functions Handles mathematical calculations
Array Functions Describes how to search, resize, and query arrays
Time and Date Functions Functions to access the real time clock option
Set/Get/Do Interface Functions to directly interface with the Set/Get/Do system
Example Programs More examples to give a head start in creating your applications
Writing ZBI Programs
There are two main ways to develop ZBI programs. The preferred method is to use the
ZBI-Developer application. ZBI-Developer allows you to create and test programs before a
printer is even turned on. In addition, many features of this program allow for quicker program
creation and more meaningful debugging. ZBI-Developer can be downloaded from the Zebra
web site.
An alternate method for developing a program is through a direct connection to the printer
using a terminal emulation program.
445
ZBI Commands
Editing Commands
Editing Commands
This section details the Editing Commands. This section describes the commands which are
used to manipulate the interpreter and enter programs. These commands are used while
controlling the ZBI environment from a console connection. Here is a quick list of these
commands:
NEW Clears out the program and variables currently in memory
REM and ! Comment commands
LIST Lists the program currently in memory
AUTONUM Automatically generates the next line number
RENUM Renumbers the program currently in memory
ECHO Controls whether characters received on the console are echoed back
If you are using ZBI-Developer, the commands that will be most useful are AUTONUM and
REM/!.
The following example shows the use of Editing commands from within a console connection.
Preview:
NEW
AUTONUM 10,5
10 REM "Hello World" Application
15 PRINT "Hello World" ! comment...
20
LIST
10 REM "Hello World" Application
15 PRINT "Hello World"
NEW
LIST
Preview when viewed in ZBI-Developer
AUTONUM 10,5
REM "Hello World" Application
PRINT "Hello World" ! comment...
A blank line
stops
AUTONUM
Entered
automatically
when
AUTONUM is
used
ZBI Commands
Editing Commands
446
NEW
Description This command clears the interpreters memory, including the line buffer and
variables, but not any open ports. Use this command when creating code to restart the coding
process or before resending a program from a file to the interpreter.
Format NEW
Parameters N/A
Comments This is an interactive command that takes effect as soon as it is received by the
printer.
Example This is an example of how to use the NEW command:
RUN
Hello World
LIST
NEW
LIST
447
ZBI Commands
Editing Commands
REM
Description A numbered remark line starts with REM and includes text in any form after it.
This line is ignored by the interpreter.
Format REM <comment>
Parameters The comment string can contain any character and is terminated by a carriage
return.
Comments Remarks are used for program description and are included as a separate
program line. To append a comment to the end of a program line, use the exclamation mark
(!).
A useful method to keep comments in a stored file (but not in the printer) is to always start the
REM line with the number 1. When all of the lines are sent to the printer, only the last REM
line will stay resident in the printer. This will require less RAM for large programs.
Example This is an example of how to use the REM command:
10 REM COMMAND LINES 20-100 PRINT A LABEL
Example This is an example of how to re-use the REM command:
1 REM MYPROGRAM COPYRIGHT ME Inc. 2008
1 REM While debugging a port may be left open
5 CLOSE ALL
1 REM Open the ports this program will use
10 OPEN #0: NAME: "SER" ! Restart the console
ZBI Commands
Editing Commands
448
! (EXCLAMATION MARK)
Description The exclamation mark is the marker for adding comments to the end of
numbered programming lines. Any text following the ! is ignored when the line or command is
processed.
Format !<comment>
Parameters The comment string can contain any character and is terminated by the carriage
return.
Comments None
Example This is an example of how to use the ! (comments) command:
10 LET A=10 ! Indicates number of labels to print
449
ZBI Commands
Editing Commands
LIST
Description This command lists the program lines currently in memory.
Format
LIST
LIST <A>
LIST <A>-
Parameters
default = lists all lines in memory
<A> = line to start listing the program
 = line to stop listing the program. If not specified, only the line at <A> will print.
Comments The output of the LIST command may not match exactly what was entered. It is
based on how the program lines are stored in memory. Notice that the last comment line the
REM is entered in lower case characters. When it is listed, the REM is displayed in uppercase.
This is an interactive command that takes effect as soon as it is received by the printer.
Example This is an example of how to use the LIST command:
1 REM MYPROGRAM COPYRIGHT ME Inc. 2008
1 REM While debugging a port may be left open
5 CLOSE ALL
1 rem Open the ports this program will use
20 PRINT #0: "Hello World"
LIST
5 CLOSE ALL
20 PRINT #0: "Hello World"
LIST 1
LIST 5-10
5 CLOSE ALL
ZBI Commands
Editing Commands
450
AUTONUM
Description This command automatically generates sequential program line numbers.
Format AUTONUM <A>,
Parameters
A = the number used to start the auto-numbering sequence
B = the automatic increment between the new line numbers
The three lines are automatically started with the AUTONUM parameters; in this case, the first
line starts with 10 and each subsequent line increments by 5.
Comments This feature is disabled by overwriting the current line number and entering the
desired interactive mode commands, or leaving the line blank.
Use of the SUB command allows for GOTO and GOSUB statements that do not require line
numbers in your program.
Example This example shows specifying the starting line number in the increment between
new line number. Type the following at the prompt:
AUTONUM 10,5
SUB START
PRINT "HELLO WORLD"
GOTO START
LIST
Will produce:
AUTONUM 10,5
10 SUB START
15 PRINT "HELLO WORLD"
20 GOTO START
451
ZBI Commands
Editing Commands
RENUM
Description This command renumbers the lines of the program being edited. RENUM can
reorganize code when line numbers become over- or under-spaced. The line references
following GOTO and GOSUB statements are renumbered if they are constant numeric values.
Renumbering does not occur if the line numbers are outside of the range limits of 1 to 10000.
Format RENUM <A>,
Parameters
<A> = the number to start the renumbering sequence
 = the automatic increment between the new line numbers
printer.
Example This is an example of how to use the RENUM command:
LIST
13 LET A=6
15 LET B=10
17 GOTO 13
RENUM 10,5
LIST
10 LET A=6
15 LET B=10
20 GOTO 10
Note The target of the GOTO command changes from 13 to 10 to reflect the renumbering.
ZBI Commands
Editing Commands
452
ECHO
Description When Console Mode is enabled, this command controls whether the printer
echoes the characters back to the communications port. If ECHO ON is entered, keystroke
results return to the screen. If ECHO OFF is entered, keystroke results do not return to the
screen.
Format
ECHO ON
ECHO OFF
Parameters
<ON/OFF> = toggles the ECHO command on or off
Example N/A
Comments This can be an interactive command that takes effect as soon as it is received by
the printer, or a program command that is preceded by a line number.
453
ZBI Commands
Running and Debugging Commands
The following commands were written before the development of the ZBI-Developer
application. With that application, and when using ZBI version 1, the following commands are
essentially obsolete. However, for those who started developing ZBI applications before
ZBI-Developer, the following reference will be helpful.
RUN Starts executing the program currently in memory at the first line of the program
CTRL-C Sends an end-of-transmission character, ETX , to the console to terminate the ZBI
program currently running.
RESTART Starts executing the program currently in memory where it was last stopped
STEP Executes one line of the program in memory where it was last stopped
DEBUG This mode controls whether or not the TRACE and BREAK commands are
processed
TRACE Shows which lines have been executed and which variables have been changed
BREAK Stops the currently running program
ADDBREAK Adds a break to an existing line
DELBREAK Deletes an existing break
ZPL Terminates and exits the ZBI environment.
ZBI Commands
454
This example shows many of the Running and Debug Commands in practice.
Example Preview:
10 PRINT "TEN"
20 PRINT "TWENTY"
30 PRINT "THIRTY"
RUN
TEN
TWENTY
THIRTY
STEP
TEN
RESTART
TWENTY
THIRTY
ADDBREAK 20
RUN
TEN
<Program Break> on line: 20
DEBUG ON
TRACE ON
RESTART
<TRACE> 20
TWENTY
<TRACE> 30
THIRTY
Runs the whole program
ZBI Program
Runs one line
Completes running the
program where STEP left
off
Adds a
breakpoint on line
20
Turn Trace
On
455
ZBI Commands
RUN
Description This command executes the current program, starting with the lowest line
number. The interpreter will continue to execute the program lines in order unless a control
statement directs the flow to a different point. When a higher line number does not exist or the
END command is processed, the RUN command will stop.
Format RUN
Parameters N/A
Comments Ports that are open when the application is activated will remain open after the
application has terminated. Variables also remain after the application has terminated.
To execute programs when the printer is powered on, use the ^JI command in the
Autoexec.zpl file.
Example This is an example of how to use the RUN command:
10 PRINT "ZBI"
20 PRINT "Programming"
RUN
ZBI
Programming
15 END
RUN
ZBI
ZBI Commands
456
CTRL-C
Description Sending an end-of-transmission character, ETX (3 in hex), to the console (port
0) terminates the ZBI program currently running.
Format N/A
Parameters N/A
Example N/A
Comments In most terminal programs, you terminate the program using the Ctrl-C key
sequence. Another method is to store an ETX character in a file and have the terminal program
send the file to the console port.
Note It is not recommended to use RESTART after using a CTRL-C because a command
may have been prematurely interrupted. Restarting will have an undefined result.
457
ZBI Commands
RESTART
Description If a program was halted by a break point or the BREAK command, the
RESTART command can be used to reactivate the program at the point it stopped. RESTART
functions similar to RUN, except the program attempts to restart from the point where it was
last terminated. It also works in conjunction with the STEP command, picking up where the
STEP command ended.
Format RESTART
Parameters N/A
Example An example of the RESTART command:
10 PRINT "TEN"
20 PRINT "TWENTY"
30 PRINT "THIRTY"
RUN
TEN
TWENTY
THIRTY
STEP
TEN
RESTART
TWENTY
THIRTY
ADDBREAK 20
RUN
TEN
<Program Break> on line: 20
DEBUG ON
TRACE ON
RESTART
<TRACE> 20
TWENTY
<TRACE> 30
THIRTY
ZBI Commands
458
Comments If the program has not been run or has finished, RESTART runs the program
from the beginning.
459
ZBI Commands
STEP
Description If a program was stopped by a BREAK command, STEP attempts to execute
the program one line from where it last ended. If the program has not been run or has been
completed, this executes the lowest numbered line.
Format STEP
Parameters N/A
printer.
Example This is an example of how to use the STEP command:
20 Print "TWENTY"
STEP
Hello World
STEP
TWENTY
ZBI Commands
460
DEBUG
Description DEBUG enables and disables the TRACE and BREAK commands.
Format
DEBUG ON
DEBUG OFF
Parameters
ON = turns the debug mode on enabling the TRACE and BREAK commands to be
processed.
OFF = turns the debug mode off. This disables the TRACE mode and causes BREAK
commands to be ignored.
Comments This command has no effect on the processing of break points in ZBI-
Developer. It is recommended that you avoid using the DEBUG command when writing
programs in the ZBI-Developer environment, instead use the Debug capabilities of ZBI-
Developer.
Example See TRACE on page 461 and BREAK on page 462.
461
ZBI Commands
TRACE
Description This command enables you to debug an application by outputting the executed
line numbers and changed variables to the console.
Format
TRACE ON
TRACE OFF
Parameters
<ON/OFF> = controls whether TRACE is active (ON) or disabled (OFF).
If DEBUG is activated and the TRACE command is on, trace details are displayed. When
any variables are changed, the new value displays as follows:
<TRACE> Variable = New Value
Every line processed has its line number printed as follows:
<TRACE> Line Number
It is recommended that you avoid using the TRACE command when writing programs in the
ZBI-Developer environment, instead use the Debug capabilities of ZBI-Developer.
Example An example of TRACE command in use:
10 LET A=5
20 GOTO 40
30 PRINT "Error"
40 PRINT A
DEBUG ON
TRACE ON
RUN
<TRACE> 10
<TRACE> A=5
<TRACE> 20
<TRACE> 40
5
ZBI Commands
462
BREAK
Description This command allows you to stop the program when the program reaches this
line.
Format BREAK
Parameters N/A
Comments This command is available only when the DEBUG function has been activated.
When DEBUG is on, BREAK halts processing. RUN starts the program from the beginning.
RESTART allows the program to continue from where it left off.
When using ZBI-Developer, this command will interfere with the debugging operations built
into the application.
This is a program command that must be preceded by a line number.
Example An example of BREAK command in use:
10 LET A=5
20 BREAK
30 PRINT A
DEBUG ON
TRACE ON
RUN
<TRACE> 10
<TRACE> A=5
<TRACE> 20
<USER BREAK>
463
ZBI Commands
ADDBREAK
Format ADDBREAK <A>
Parameters
A = the line number to break on. If the number specified is not in the program, the program
will not break.
When DEBUG is on, BREAK halts processing. RUN starts the program from the beginning.
RESTART allows the program to continue from where it left off.
This is the command used internally by ZBI-Developer when the user right-clicks over a
program line and adds a Breakpoint via the "Toggle Breakpoint" selection.
It is the recommended method for setting breakpoints in ZBI.
A maximum of 16 breakpoints can be set in an application.
Description This command allows you to stop the program when the program reaches a
specified line.
Example An example of the ADDBREAK command.
10 LET A=5
20 PRINT A
ADDBREAK 20
RUN
<PROGRAM BREAK> ON LINE:20
RESTART
5
ZBI Commands
464
DELBREAK
Format DELBREAK <A>
Parameters A = the line number from which to remove the break. If 0 is specified, all break
points will be removed. If the number specified is not a breakpoint, the command will have no
effect.
Description This command allows you to remove existing breakpoints.
Example An example of the DELBREAK command:
10 LET A=5
20 PRINT A
ADDBREAK 20
DEBUG ON
TRACE ON
RUN
<TRACE> 10
<TRACE> A=5
<PROGRAM BREAK> ON LINE:20
RESTART
<TRACE> 20
5
DELBREAK 20
RUN
<TRACE> 10
<TRACE> A=5
<TRACE> 20
5
465
ZBI Commands
When DEBUG is on, BREAK halts processing, RUN starts the program from the beginning, and
RESTART allows the program to continue where it left off.
This is the command used internally by ZBI-Developer when the user right-clicks over a
program line and removes a Breakpoint via the "Toggle Breakpoint" selection.
A maximum of 16 breakpoints can be set in an application.
ZBI Commands
466
ZPL
Description This command terminates and exits the ZBI environment.
Format ZPL
Parameters N/A
printer.
Example An example of the ZPL command.
ZPL
ZBI TERMINATED
467
ZBI Commands
Base Types and Expressions
There are two base types in the ZBI language. These types are Integers and Strings. Integers
are whole numbers that contain no fractional part. The range of values for integers is:
-2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647
Strings are character arrays. The string length is only limited by the amount of memory in the
system (version 2.0 and higher). Each character can have a value between 0 and 255 (version
2.0 and higher).
The use of control characters (0-31) may be difficult to debug based on the handling of control
characters in different communications programs. In addition the ETX (3) will terminate a ZBI
application when it is received on the console port. Use the CHR$ function when control
characters must be placed into strings.
Variable Names
To distinguish strings from integers, string variable names must end in a $. Variable names
must start with a letter and can include any sequence of letters, digits, and underscores.
Function and command names must not be used as a variable name. Variable names are not
case sensitive and are converted to uppercase by the interpreter.
A common mistake is to use a command or function name as a variable. To avoid using these
reserved words, ZBI-Developer can be a useful resource. Reserved words are highlighted
making it easier to spot this occurrence and thus, saving debugging time.
Valid variable names:
I, J, K, VARNAME, VARSTR$, MYSTR$,MY_STR9$
Invalid Names:
STR$ = Reserved word
ORD = Reserved word
VAL = Reserved word
W# = Invalid character (# )
9THSTR = Variable can not start with a number
Note In ZBI version 1.4 and lower, there was a string length limit of 255 characters.
ZBI Commands
468
Variable Declarations
ZBI will allow storage of up to 255 variables. If more variables are needed, consider using
arrays to store data. The base array will take up one of the 255 variable slots, but it can be
declared to allow for many indices.
Variables can be declared explicitly or implicitly. If a variable has not been used before, it will
be declared when used. The default value for an integer will be zero and the default value of a
string will be an empty string.
Explicit:
DECLARE INTEGER <variable_name>
DECLARE STRING <variable_name$>
If the variable existed before the DECLARE statement, it will be defaulted.
Implicit:
LET <variable_name> = INTEGER EXPRESSION
LET <variable_name$> = STRING EXPRESSION
The Interpreter is limited to 255 variables. If more variables are required, consider using
arrays.
Constants
Integers are represented simply by numbers, such as 5, -10, 10000. Do not use commas in
integer constants. Strings are enclosed by quotes. If a quote is required in the string, use double
quotes, such as Look here-><- would result in the string Look here-><-.
Arrays
An array is a collection of string or integer values used by a program. Array indices are
accessed through parentheses. Array indices start at 1 and end at the length of an array (for
example, MyArray(3) returns the value in the third location of the variable array). One- and
two-dimensional arrays are allowed. Two-dimensional arrays are referenced with two indices
in parentheses, separated by a comma.
Arrays must be allocated through the use of the DECLARE command. Arrays can be re-
dimensioned by using DECLARE, however, this will replace the original array.
Array size is limited only by the size of the memory available.
Format
DECLARE STRING <ARRAYNAME$>(<SIZE>)
DECLARE STRING <ARRAYNAME$>(<ROWS>,<COLUMNS>)
DECLARE NUMERIC <ARRAYNAME>(<SIZE>)
DECLARE NUMERIC <ARRAYNAME>(<ROWS>,<COLUMNS>)
469
ZBI Commands
Parameters
<SIZE> = number of entries in a single dimension array
<ROWS> = number of rows in a two dimensional array
<COLUMNS> = number of columns in a two dimensional array

Comments If you attempt to access an array outside of its allocated bounds, an error will
occur.
Example An example of ARRAY code is:
10 DECLARE STRING INARRAY$(3)
20 FOR I = 1 TO 3
30 PRINT "Name "; I; ": ";
40 INPUT INARRAY$(I)
50 NEXT I
60 PRINT INARRAY$(1); ", "; INARRAY$(2); ", and ";
INARRAY$(3);
70 PRINT " went to the park"
RUN
Name 1: Jim
Name 2: Jose
Name 3: Jack
Jim, Jose, and Jack went to the park
ZBI Commands
470
Assignment
All lines must start with a command. In order to assign a value to a variable, use the LET
command. Multiple variables can be placed before the =. The variable types must match the
expression type.
The right side of the assignment is always calculated completely before the assignment is
made. This allows a variable to be the target and source of the assignment.
When a value is assigned to a string variable with a sub-string qualifier, it replaces the value of
the sub-string qualifier. The length of the value of the string variable may change as a result of
this replacement.
Example An ASSIGNMENT example:
10 LET A=5
20 LET B$="HELLO"
30 LET B$(5:5)=B$
471
ZBI Commands
Numeric Expressions
A base numerical expression can be either a constant, variable, or another numerical
expression enclosed in parentheses. The five types used (addition, subtraction, multiplication,
division, and exponentiation) are listed below. When evaluating an expression exceeding the
maximum or minimum values at any point creates an undefined result. (maximum value:
2,147,487,647; minimum value: -2,147,483,648)
Floating point is not supported.
When using division, the number is always rounded down. For example, 5/2=2. Use MOD to
determine the remainder.
Format
1. + (addition) Addition expressions use this format:
<A>+
5+2 result = 7
VAL ("25") +2 result =27
2. (subtraction) Subtraction expressions use this format:
<A>-
5-2 result = 3
VAL ("25") -2 result =23
3. * (multiplication) Multiplication expressions use this format:
<A>*
5*2 result = 10
VAL ("25") *2 result =50
4. / (division) Division expressions use this format:
<A>/
5/2 result = 2
VAL ("25") /2 result =12
5. ^ (exponentiation) Exponentiation expressions use this format:
<A>^
5^2 result = 25
VAL ("25") ^2 result =625
ZBI Commands
472
Order of Precedence
In mathematics, the order of precedence describes the sequence that items in an expression are
processed. All expressions have a predefined order of precedence.
The order of precedence is listed below:
The * and / have the same precedence, and the + and - have the same precedence. Items with
the same order of precedence are processed from left to right.
For example, this expression 5+(8+2)/5 is processed as 8+2=10, followed by 10/5=2, then 5+2
to give a result of 7.
Functions and parenthetical expressions always have the highest order of precedence, meaning
that they are processed first.
Functions
Parenthetical Expressions ()
^
* and /
+ and -
473
ZBI Commands
String Concatenation (&)
The basic string expression may be either a constant or a variable, and concatenation (&) is
supported. Using the concatenation operator (&) adds the second string to the first string.
<A$> & <B$>
Sub-strings
Description Using a sub-string operator on a string allows a specific portion of the string to
be accessed. This portion may be the target of an assignment operation or a reference to a
portion of the string. To determine the coordinates of the string portion to be used, count the
characters from the beginning to the end of the string, including spaces.
Format
LET <STRVAR$>(<A>:)=<C$>
LET <C$> = <STRVAR$>(<A>:)
Parameters
<A> = the position of the first character in the desired string
 = the position of the last character in the desired string.
<STRVAR$> = base string variable
If the A parameter is less than 1, it is automatically assigned a value of 1. Because the
string is calculated starting with 1, the A parameter cannot be less than 1.
If B is greater than the length of the string, it is replaced with the length of the string.
If A is greater than B, a NULL string (""), which points to the location of the smaller of A
or the end of the string, is returned. This is used when adding a string in the middle of
another string without removing a character.
Example This is an example of how to use the STRING CONCATENATION (&)
command:
10 LET A$= "ZBI-"
20 LET B$= "Programming"
30 LET C$= A$ & B$
40 PRINT C$
RUN
ZBI-Programming
ZBI Commands
474
The best way to think of assignment to a sub-string is as follows: an assignment is like
selecting a word, and pasting over the selection with the new string.
Example This is an example of a sub-string reference:
LET A$="Zebra Quality Printers"
LET B$=A$(1:13)
PRINT B$
Zebra Quality
Example This is an example of a sub-string assignment.
LET A$= "1234"
LET A$(2:3)= "55" ! A$ NOW = 1554
LET A$(2:3)= "" ! A$ NOW = 14
LET A$= "1234"
LET A$(2:3)= A$(1:2) ! A$ NOW = 1124
LET A$= "1234"
LET A$(2:1)= "5" ! A$ NOW = 15234
475
ZBI Commands
Boolean Expressions
Description A Boolean expression holds 0 (zero) as false and non-zero as true.
Formats
<STRING EXPRESSION> <BOOLEAN COMPARE> <STRING EXPRESSION>
<NUMERIC EXPRESSION> <BOOLEAN COMPARE> <NUMERIC EXPRESSION>
NOT(<BOOLEAN EXPRESSION>)
Parameters
<STRING EXPRESSION> = a string variable, string constant or any combination with
concatenation
<NUMERIC EXPRESSION> = any mathematical operation
Comments A numeric expression cannot be compared to a string expression.
Numeric expressions can substitute a Boolean expression where a value of 0 (zero) represents
false and a non-zero value represents true.
Base Boolean expressions:
1. < (less than)
2. <= (less than or equal to)
3. > (greater than)
Expression Result
1< 2 true
2<2 false
2<1 false
Expression Result
1<=2 true
2<=2 true
2<=1 false
Expression Result
1> 2 false
2>2 false
2>1 true
ZBI Commands
476
4. >= (greater than or equal to)
5. = (equal to)
6. <> (not equal to)
Expression Result
1>=2 false
2>=2 true
2>=1 true
Expression Result
1=2 false
2=2 true
"A"="AA" false
"A"="A" true
Expression Result
1<>2 true
2<>2 false
"A"<>"AA" true
"A"<>"A" false
477
ZBI Commands
Combined Boolean Expressions
AND, OR, and NOT can be used in conjunction with base Boolean expressions to recreate
expanded Boolean expressions.
1. NOT Negate the target expression.
2. AND Both expressions must be true for a true result.
3. OR If either expression is true, the result will be true.
Order of Precedence
The order of precedence is listed below:
Expression Result
NOT 1=2 true
NOT 1=1 false
Expression Result
1=2 AND 1=2 false
2=2 AND 1=2 false
1=2 AND 2=2 false
2=2 AND 2=2 true
Expression Result
1=2 OR 1=2 false
1=2 OR 2=2 true
2=2 OR 1=2 true
2=2 OR 2=2 true
Expressions and Functions
Parenthetical expressions ()
<, <=, <>, =, =>, >
NOT, AND, OR
ZBI Commands
Control and Flow
478
Control and Flow
This section outlines the commands to conditionally execute code and control the flow of the
program. Here is a quick list of these commands:
IF Statements Executes or skips a sequence of statements, depending on the value of a
Boolean expression.
DO Loops Repeats instructions based on the results of a comparison.
FOR Loops A control flow statement which allows code to be executed iteratively.
GOTO/GOSUB Causes an unconditional jump or transfer of control from one point in a
program to another.
SUB Allows you to substitute names instead of actual line numbers as the target of
GOSUBs and GOTOs.
EXIT Used to exit the DO and FOR loops.
END Terminates any program currently running.
479
ZBI Commands
Control and Flow
IF Statements
Description If the value of the <Boolean expression> in an IF statement is true
and a program line follows the keyword THEN, this program line is executed. If the value of
the Boolean expression is false and a program line follows the keyword ELSE, this program
line is executed. If ELSE is not present, then execution continues in sequence, with the line
following the END IF statement.
Nesting of blocks is permitted, subject to the same nesting constraints as DO-LOOPs (no
overlapping blocks).
ELSE IF statements are treated as an ELSE line followed by an IF line, with the exception
that the ELSE IF shares the END IF line of the original IF statement.
Format
IF <Boolean expression> THEN
~~BODY~~
[ELSE IF <Boolean expression> THEN
~~BODY~~]*
[ELSE
~~BODY~~]
END IF
Parameters N/A
Example This is an example of how to use the IF statement command:
10 IF A$="0" THEN
20 PRINT "ZBI IS FUN"
30 ELSE IF A$="1" THEN
40 PRINT "ZBI IS EASY"
50 ELSE IF TIME=1 THEN
60 PRINT "It is one second past midnight"
70 ELSE
80 PRINT "X=0"
90 END IF
ZBI Commands
Control and Flow
480
DO Loops
Description Processing of the loop is controlled by a <WHILE/UNTIL> expression
located on the DO or LOOP line.
Processing a WHILE statement is the same on either the DO or LOOP lines. The Boolean
expression is evaluated and if the statement is true, the LOOP continues at the line after the DO
statement. Otherwise, the line after the corresponding LOOP is the next line to be processed.
Processing an UNTIL statement is the same on either the DO or LOOP lines. The Boolean
expression is evaluated and if the statement is false, the LOOP continues at the line after the
DO statement. Otherwise, the line after the corresponding LOOP is the next to be processed.
If <WHILE/UNTIL> is on the LOOP line, the BODY of the loop is executed before the
Boolean expression is evaluated.
If neither the DO or LOOP line has a <WHILE/UNTIL> statement, the loop continues
indefinitely.
Some notes about DO-LOOPs:
can be nested
cannot overlap
have two formats
Format
DO [<WHILE/UNTIL> <Boolean expression>]
~~BODY~~
LOOP [<WHILE/UNTIL> <Boolean expression>]
Comments This is a program command that is preceded by a line number.
Example This is an example of how to use the DO-LOOP command with the conditional
on the DO line:
10 DO WHILE A$="70"
20 INPUT A$
30 LOOP
Example This is an example of how to use the DO UNTIL LOOP command with
conditional on the LOOP line:
10 DO
20 INPUT A$
30 LOOP UNTIL A$="EXIT"
481
ZBI Commands
Control and Flow
FOR Loops
Description FOR loops are an easy way to iterate through a range of values and run a body
of code for each value iterated.
Format
FOR = <A> TO [STEP <C>]
~~BODY~~
NEXT 
Parameters
 = indicates a numeric variable is used. increments each time through the
FOR-LOOP.
<A> = the value assigned to the first time through the loop
 = the last value through the loop
<C> = (Optional) the amount increments each time through the loop
Values of I for the following situations:
Comments FOR loops can be nested but cannot overlap. Variables cannot be reused by the
nested loops.
Statement Result
FOR I=1 TO 10 {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10}
FOR I=10 TO 1 {10, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1}
FOR I=1 TO 10 STEP 2 {1, 3, 5, 7, 9}
FOR I=10 TO 1 STEP 2 {10, 8, 6, 4, 2}
FOR I=10 TO 1 STEP 2 { } FOR LOOP skipped
Example This is an example of how to use the FOR LOOP command:
10 FOR X=1 TO 10 STEP 1
20 PRINT X; ":ZBI IS FUN"
30 NEXT X
ZBI Commands
Control and Flow
482
GOTO/GOSUB
Description GOSUB is followed by a line number. The program will attempt to process the
line the GOSUB command points to rather than the next line of the program. Upon executing
the GOSUB statement, the interpreter continues running at the line number specified following
GOSUB. If the line number referenced does not exist, an error will occur.
Before executing the next line, the GOSUB command stores the line number of the GOSUB
line. When the RETURN statement is called, the program moves back to the next line
following the GOSUB.
Executing a RETURN statement without a corresponding GOSUB statement causes an error.
GOSUB statements can be nested.
GOTO works the same way as GOSUB except that no return address will be stored.
Format
GOSUB <A>
RETURN
GOTO <A>
Parameters <A> = the program location executed immediately after the GOTO or
GOSUB.
Comments These are program commands and must be preceded by line numbers.
Example This is an example of how to use the GOSUB command:
10 PRINT "Call Subroutine"
20 GOSUB 1000
30 PRINT "Returned from Subroutine"
40 END
1000 PRINT "In Subroutine"
1010 RETURN
Example This is an example of how to use the GOTO command:
10 PRINT "Prepare to Jump!"
20 GOTO 1000
30 PRINT "Jump Missed..."
1000 PRINT "Jump Successful"
1010 END
483
ZBI Commands
Control and Flow
SUB
Format 10 SUB <A>
Parameters <A> = the integer variable to use as a target for the GOTO/GOSUB
Comments <A> is a numeric variable. If this variable is changed in the program, any
GOSUB/GOTO to this variable may fail.
Description This command allows you to use names instead of actual line numbers as the
target of GOSUBs and GOTOs. AUTONUM can be used at the beginning of a file and there is no
need to compute the line number where the jump will go.
Example This is an example of how to use the SUB command:
AUTONUM 1,1
GOSUB INITCOMM
DO
GOSUB GETINPUT
GOSUB PROCESSINPUT
LOOP
SUB INITCOMM
OPEN #1:NAME "SER"
RETURN
SUB GETINPUT
INPUT #1: A$
RETURN
SUB PROCESSINPUT
PRINT A$
RETURN
ZBI Commands
Control and Flow
484
EXIT
Description This command is used to exit the DO and FOR loops.
Format
EXIT DO
EXIT FOR
Parameters The specified loop type is exited. For the DO command, the program will
continue execution on the line following the next LOOP. Likewise for the FOR command, the
program will continue on the line after the next NEXT command.
Example N/A
Comments This is a program command that is preceded by a line number. To be explicit and
reduce errors, it is recommended to use GOTO instead of EXIT.
485
ZBI Commands
Control and Flow
END
Description The END command terminates any program currently running. When the END
command is received, the interpreter returns to interpreting commands (>).
Format END
Parameters N/A
Comments This is a program command and is preceded by a line number.
Example This is an example of how to use the END command:
10 PRINT "THIS PROGRAM WILL TERMINATE"
20 PRINT "WHEN THE END COMMAND IS RECEIVED"
30 END
40 PRINT "THIS SHOULD NOT PRINT"
RUN
THIS PROGRAM WILL TERMINATE
WHEN THE END COMMAND IS RECEIVED
ZBI Commands
Input and Output
486
Input and Output
This section oulines how to communicate with physical ports, internal ports, and the network.
ZBI allows access to the physical and network connections in the printer. Most ports are, by
default, connected to the ZPL processor. When a port is opened in ZBI, the port will be
disconnected from ZPL and connected into the interpreter. Depending on the type of
connection, there are two methods you may use to start the connection. For the static
connections, the OPEN command should be used. These are the connections that you open
when starting your program and leave open for the duration of your program. For dynamic
connections, servers and clients are set up following the "Sockets" model. On servers, the
actual connections are started upon successful calls to ACCEPT. Below are the available
connections that can be made and the preferred accessors.
Available Ports
Port/Connection ZBI Name Preferred Access Commands/Functions
Serial "SER" OPEN, CLOSE
Parallel "PAR" OPEN, CLOSE
USB "USB" OPEN, CLOSE
ZPL parser "ZPL" OPEN, CLOSE
TCP Server "TCP",
"TCPX"
SERVERSOCKET, SERVERCLOSE, ACCEPT,
CLOSE
TCP Client "TCP" CLIENTSOCKET, CLOSE
UDP Server "UDP" SERVERSOCKET, SERVERCLOSE, ACCEPT,
CLOSE
UDP Client "UDP" CLIENTSOCKET, CLOSE
Email Sender "EML" OPEN, CLOSE
Bluetooth "BLU" OPEN, CLOSE
Note: TCPx will not work on PS2 or PS100 print servers.
487
ZBI Commands
Input and Output
Creating Connections
Here is a quick list of the commands in this section:
OPEN Opens a port for transmitting and receiving data.
CLOSE Closes specific ports that are in use.
DATAREADY Determines if there is data received on a specified port.
SERVERSOCKET Opens a listening socket for incoming UDP packets or TCP connections.
SERVERCLOSE Closes a listening server socket.
CLIENTSOCKET Creates an outgoing TCP connection or sets up UDP transmissions.
ACCEPT Accepts incoming TCP or UDP connections and assigns a channel for the
connection.
ZBI Commands
Input and Output
488
OPEN
Description This command is used to open a port for transmitting and receiving data.
Format OPEN #<CHANNEL>: NAME <PORT$>
Parameters
<CHANNEL> = a number to use as a handle to the port for all future communications
Default Value: a port must be specified
<PORT$> = port name to open. See Available Ports on page 486.
The port being opened no longer allows data to pass directly into its buffer, it disconnects, and
the interpreter now controls the data flow.
Data already in the buffer stays in the buffer.
Example This is an example of how to use the OPEN command:
10 OPEN #1: NAME "ZPL"
489
ZBI Commands
Input and Output
CLOSE
Description This command is implemented to close specific ports that are in use. If a port is
open on a channel and the CLOSE command is entered, the port closes and returns to
communicating with the ZPL buffer.
Format
CLOSE #<A>
CLOSE ALL
Parameters
<A> = Numeric value of port to close
All = closes all open ports and network connections
Note CLOSE ALL will close the console.
Example This example shows the closing of channel 1:
10 CLOSE #1
ZBI Commands
Input and Output
490
DATAREADY
Description This function is used to determine if there is data received on a specified port.
Format DATAREADY (A)
Parameters A = the port to check
Returns 1 if there is data, 0 if there is no data.
Comments If this command follows the INPUT command, it may return 1 if the line
received was ended with a CRLF. In this case, INBYTE can be used to take the LF out of the
buffer.
Example This is an example of how to check if there is a data on a port:
10 PRINT DATAREADY(0)
RUN
The result, assuming no data is waiting, is:
0
491
ZBI Commands
Input and Output
SERVERSOCKET
Format SERVERSOCKET (TYPE$,PORT)
Parameters
TYPE$ = listens for any of the following communication protocols:
"TCP" = TCP must be 9100
"TCPX" = TCP any open port
"UDP" = UDP any open port
Returns NUMERIC = returns the handle of the server upon success.
Comments When using TCPX, care needs to be taken not to use a port that is already open
on the printer. No error message will be returned until the ACCEPT function is called.
Description This function opens a listening socket for incoming UDP packets or TCP
connections. It must be used in conjunction with the ACCEPT function.
Example See the examples for TCP Server on page 508 and UDP Server on page 510.
ZBI Commands
Input and Output
492
SERVERCLOSE
Format SERVERCLOSE(SOCKET)
Parameters
SOCKET = the socket handle returned from a successful SERVERSOCKET invocation.
Returns Returns a 0 if the socket was already closed or a 1 if the socket was closed
successfully.
Description This function closes a listening server socket created by SERVERSOCKET.
Example This example shows how to close a listening server socket.
10 LET SERVER_HANDLE = SERVERSOCKET("TCPX", 19100)
20 LET SCERR = SERVERCLOSE(SERVER_HANDLE)
493
ZBI Commands
Input and Output
CLIENTSOCKET
Format CLIENTSOCKET (TYPE$, IPADDR$, PORT)
Parameters
TYPE$ = set to "UDP" or "TCP".
IPADDR$ = connects to this address.
PORT = connects to this IP port.
Returns The port number assigned to the connection.
Comments Multiple communications connections can be made up to the maximum of 10.
Each protocol may have a different limit based on the support of the print server used. Test the
worst case situation based on your applications needs or use ONERROR to recover from failed
connection attempts.
Description This function creates an outgoing TCP connection or sets up UDP
transmissions. Once set up for UDP, packets can be sent by printing to the socket. Packets are
sent when the size limit is met or a EOT character is written.
ZBI Commands
Input and Output
494
ACCEPT
Format ACCEPT (SERVER, CLIENT_INFO$)
Parameters
SERVER = the handle returned by the SERVERSOCKET call.
CLIENT_INFO$ = string variable will have the connecting clients IP address and port
separated by a space when using UDP.
Returns The channel number to use to communicate with the client.
Comments It is best to poll this function at regular intervals. When there is no connection
waiting, this function will trigger an error. Follow this function with the ON ERROR command
to divert to a section of code that handles an unsuccessful connection.
ACCEPT can be called before closing a previous connection. This allows for processing
multiple incoming streams of data. There are limits on the number of simultaneous incoming
connections based on the print server model on the printer.
Connection closure can be detected when any input or output command to the port triggers an
error. These commands should be followed by an ON ERROR statement to send the program
into a recovery state and to shutdown the connection cleanly.
Description This function will accept incoming TCP or UDP connections and assign a
channel for the connection. SERVERSOCKET must be used to set up the listening socket
before ACCEPT can be used.
495
ZBI Commands
Input and Output
Reading and Writing
This manual has detailed various functions to read and write to all of the ports. The following
section gives an overview of the commands, functions, and when each should be used.
To start, it is important to understand the term "blocking". In communications code, a function
or command is "blocking" if it waits for all of the requested data to be received before it
returns.
INPUT (blocking) Reads one line into each string specified.
PRINT (blocking) Simple method to write specified expressions out.
OUTBYTE (blocking) Writes one byte out.
INBYTE (blocking) Reads in one byte.
READ (non-blocking) Reads in all available data up to the maximum amount specified.
WRITE (non-blocking) Writes out as much data as possible up to a maximum specified
amount.
SEARCHTO$ (blocking) Reads in data (does not keep) until a search parameter is found.
Non-matching data can be redirected to another port.
ZBI Commands
Input and Output
496
INPUT
Description If the variable is numeric and the value entered cannot be converted to a
number, it writes as 0. This operation scans the data from left to right, shifting any number into
the variable. It ignores any non-numeric character except the return character, which
terminates the input, or Ctrl-C (^C) which terminates the program. The variable can be in
string or numeric form.
Format
INPUT [<CHANNEL>:] <A$> [,<B$>]*
INPUT [<CHANNEL>:] <A>[,]*
If the [<channel>:] is omitted, the default port, 0, will be used.
Parameters
<CHANNEL> = read data from this port. Default = 0.
<A,B,...,N> = variables to write.
When using multiple variables as targets, a corresponding number of lines are read. String
and numeric variables can be intermixed.
In this example, a host status prints to the console after submitting the host status request ~HS
to the ZPL port.
The Input/Output command of the ZBI interpreter is limited to the communications ports. File
I/O is not supported.
INPUT ends processing a line with a CR or LF. This leads to a tricky situation. There are many
ways different systems end a line: CR, CRLF, LF. If the ZBI program only uses INPUT, the
next execution of the INPUT command will remove the extra LF or CR, in case of LFCR.
However, if the program instead uses INBYTE, DATAREADY or the other commands, the
extra LF will show up on the port. Heres a simple workaround to explicitly look for the CRLF
that is in use:
SEARCHTO(<PORT>,CHR$(13)&CHR$(10),<INSTRING$>)
Example This is an example of how to use the INPUT command:
20 PRINT #1: "~HS"
30 FOR I = 1 TO 3
40 INPUT #1: A$
50 PRINT A$
60 NEXT I
Note The INPUT command does not accept control characters or the delete character. If
these characters need to be processed, please use the READ command.
497
ZBI Commands
Input and Output
If an invalid port is specified, Error: Invalid port is returned.
Example This shows the input command reading in multiple lines.
10 INPUT A$,B,C,D$,E$
Five lines would be read in: 3 strings and 2 numbers.
ZBI Commands
Input and Output
498
PRINT
Description This command sends data to the printer to be printed.
Format PRINT [CHANNEL:] <expression> [,or; <expression>]* [;]
Parameters
<CHANNEL> = write data to this port
<expression> = the value to write
The expression can be either a string or a numeric expression.
Using a , to separate expressions adds a space between them.
Using a ; to separate expressions does not put a space between them.
Using a ; at the end of a line ends the print statement without adding a new line (CR/LF).
Example This is an example of how to use the PRINT command:
10 LET A$ = "This is an example"
20 LET B$ = "of the PRINT Command."
30 PRINT A$, B$ ! adds a space between expressions
40 PRINT A$; B$ ! no space added
RUN
The result is:
This is an example of the PRINT Command.
This is an exampleof the PRINT Command.
499
ZBI Commands
Input and Output
OUTBYTE
Description This command outputs a byte to a port.
Format
OUTBYTE [<CHANNEL>:] <A>
OUTBYTE [<CHANNEL>:] <A$>
Parameters
<CHANNEL> = sends the byte to this port. Default = 0.
<A> = This is a numeric expression.
Accepted Values: 0 through 255. If it is not within that range, it is truncated.
<A$> = This is the string expression. The first character is used. In the case of a NULL
string, 0 is sent.
Example This is an example of how to use the OUTBYTE command:
LET A$="Hello"
OUTBYTE A$
This would only print the H character to the console.
OUTBYTE 4
This would print the control character EOT to the console. See an ASCII table for a list of
the control characters.
ZBI Commands
Input and Output
500
INBYTE
Description This command forces the interpreter to pause until data is available. Use the
DATAREADY function to determine if there is data on the port.
Format
INBYTE [<CHANNEL>:] <A>
INBYTE [<CHANNEL>:] <A$>
Parameters
<CHANNEL> = reads from this port. Default = 0.
<A> = integer value is set to the byte received.
<A$> = A single byte string is created with the byte received.The first character is used.
In the case of a NULL string, 0 is sent.
In this example, the interpreter pauses until the data is entered, then continues processing. This
command enters all bytes in a string or integer, including control codes.
Comments INBYTE will block until a byte is received on the specified port. This can be an
interactive command that takes effect as soon as it is received by the printer, or a program
command that is preceded by a line number.
Example This is an example of how to use the INBYTE to create an echo program:
10 INBYTE A$ !Takes one byte (char) from port #0
20 PRINT A$ !Prints the character to the console
30 GOTO 10
501
ZBI Commands
Input and Output
READ
Format READ (<CHANNEL>, <A>, <MAXBYTES>)
Parameters
<A$> = the string where the data will be placed
<MAXBYTES> = the maximum number of bytes to read
Returns The number of bytes read.
Description This is a non-blocking input function. It will read in all of the bytes available
on the specified port.
Example This is an example of the READ command:
1 CLOSE ALL
2 LET INPORT = CLIENTSOCKET("TCP","192.168.0.1",9100)
3 ON ERROR GOTO RECOVERY
4 LET WATERMARK = 5000
5 DO WHILE 1
6 IF LEN(DATA$) < WATERMARK THEN
7 LET BYTESREAD = READ(INPORT,DATA$,500)
9 END IF
10 IF (LEN(DATA$) > 0) THEN
11 LET BYTES_WRITTEN = WRITE(INPORT,DATA$,LEN(DATA$))
13 LET DATA$(1,BYTES_WRITTEN) = ""
14 END IF
15 IF BYTESREAD = 0 AND BYTESWRITTEN = 0 THEN
16 SLEEP 1 ! DON'T BOMBARD IF IDLE
17 END IF
18 LOOP
19 SUB RECOVERY
20 CLOSE #INPORT
ZBI Commands
Input and Output
502
WRITE
Format WRITE (<CHANNEL>, <A>, <BYTES>)
Parameters
<A$> = the string to write out.
<MAXBYTES> = The number of bytes to write
Returns The number of bytes written.
Description This is a non-blocking output function. It will write as many bytes as the
output buffer can hold.
Example This is an example of WRITE command:
1 CLOSE ALL
4 LET WATERMARK = 5000
5 DO WHILE 1
6 IF LEN(DATA$) < WATERMARK THEN
7 LET BYTESREAD = READ(INPORT,DATA$,500)
9 END IF
10 IF (LEN(DATA$) > 0) THEN
11 LET BYTES_WRITTEN = WRITE(INPORT,DATA$,LEN(DATA$))
13 LET DATA$(1,BYTES_WRITTEN) = ""
14 END IF
15 IF BYTESREAD = 0 AND BYTESWRITTEN = 0 THEN
16 SLEEP 1 ! DON'T BOMBARD IF IDLE
17 END IF
18 LOOP
19 SUB RECOVERY
20 CLOSE #INPORT
503
ZBI Commands
Input and Output
SEARCHTO$
Description This function performs a search until a specified string is found. The string the
search yields is displayed.
Format
SEARCHTO$(A,B$)
SEARCHTO$(A,B$,C)
SEARCHTO$(A$,B$)
SEARCHTO$(A$,B$,C$)
Parameters
A = port number (0 to 9) to which requested data is sent
A$ = string to search for B$
B$ = string variable or string array. If B$ is an array, this command searches for all
non-null strings in the B$ array.
C = a port in which the input is directed until B$ is found
C$ = a string in which the characters in A$ are directed until B$ is found
Returns The string found.
Example This example shows how to use SEARCHTO to find a string on a port:
10 OPEN #1: NAME "SER"
20 LET A$ = SEARCHTO$(1,"^XA")
30 PRINT "FOUND:", A$
Example This example shows how to search for an array of strings:
20 DECLARE STRING FIND$(3)
30 LET FIND$(1) = "ONE"
40 LET FIND$(2) = "TWO"
50 LET FIND$(3) = "THREE"
60 LET A$ = SEARCHTO$(1,FIND$)
ZBI Commands
Input and Output
504
Comments SEARCHTO will block (wait) until the search string is found. If you want to be
able to run other code while doing something similar, consider using READ with POS.
When using SEARCHTO with ports, it will block (wait) until the search string is found. If you
want to be able to run other code while doing something similar, consider using READ to place
data into a string. That string can be passed to SEARCHTO for processing.
Example This example shows unused data routed to a port.
10 OPEN #1: NAME "PAR"
30 DECLARE STRING FIND$(3)
40 LET FIND$(1) = "ONE"
50 LET FIND$(2) = "TWO"
60 LET FIND$(3) = "THREE"
70 LET A$ = SEARCHTO$(1,FIND$,2)
Example This example shows how to use SEARCHTO to find a string within a string and
direct the unused part of the string to another string:
10 LET A$ = "The faster you go, the shorter you are - Einstein"
20 LET B$ = SEARCHTO$(A$,"you", C$)
30 PRINT "FOUND:", B$
40 PRINT "DISCARDED:", C$
505
ZBI Commands
Input and Output
Port Usage Examples
Before diving into the syntax of all the commands, lets look at some simple applications using
the different features of the communications systems in ZBI.
Physical Ports (Serial, Parallel, USB)
Though the types of devices interacting with the printer's ports may vary greatly, internal to the
printer, the ports are all handled in the same way. These ports are opened with the ZBI OPEN
command and closed with the ZBI CLOSE command. When one of these ports is opened, it is
disconnected from the ZPL parser and any data in the buffer will be redirected to the ZBI
environment.
Example In the following example, "SER" could be replaced by "PAR" or "USB"
depending on the application.
10 CLOSE ALL
20 LET INPORT = 1
30 OPEN #INPORT: NAME "SER"
40 PRINT #INPORT: "Enter your name:";
50 INPUT #INPORT: YOURNAME$
60 PRINT #INPORT: "You entered: "; YOURNAME$
70 CLOSE #INPORT
ZBI Commands
Input and Output
506
ZPL Parser
To make a ZBI program print, it is necessary to create a connection from the program to the
ZPL parser on the printer. The connection will function in the same way as a connection to a
physical port, except that the connection will not automatically terminate. The ZPL parser in
the printer can handle many incoming connections simultaneously. For example, a ZBI
program could take control of the serial port and send label formats to the ZPL parser, while
the parallel port (unopened by ZBI) could also be used to send label formats directly into the
parser.
Another use of ZBI is to check printer status, while another application prints to another port.
Note The ZPL parser will lock onto one port once a format is started (via the ^XA
command). So, in some cases, is it desirable to start and stop your communications to ZPL in
one continuous sequence.
Example Here is how that can be done:
20 PRINT #1: "~HS"
30 FOR I = 1 TO 3
40 INPUT #1: A$
50 PRINT A$
60 NEXT I
507
ZBI Commands
Input and Output
TCP Client
There are two methods for making a TCP connection to another server. The first method uses
the OPEN command while the second method uses the CLIENTSOCKET method.
CLIENTSOCKET is the preferred method.
Example The following example demonstrates this method:
10 CLOSE ALL
40 LET OUTSTR$ = "REQUESTING SERVER NAME";
50 DO WHILE (LEN(OUTSTR$) > 0)
60 LET BYTES_WRITTEN = WRITE(INPORT,OUTSTR$,LEN(OUTSTR$))
80 LET OUTSTR$ = OUTSTR$(1+BYTES_WRITTEN:LEN(OUTSTR$))
90 LOOP
100 INPUT #INPORT: YOURNAME$
110 PRINT #INPORT: "Server returned: "; YOURNAME$
120 CLOSE #INPORT
130 SUB RECOVERY
140 END
ZBI Commands
Input and Output
508
TCP Server
Setting up a listening server in the printer can be accomplished with the SERVERSOCKET
function. To connect to incoming TCP sessions, use the ACCEPT function.
When starting the application, call SERVERSOCKET. This function will create a handle for
this listening server. Check for incoming connections at regular intervals with the ACCEPT
function. If there are no pending sessions, the ACCEPT function will return with an error.
Handle the error using the ON ERROR command and continue looking for other sessions later.
Depending on how the program is set up, it is possible to handle one or more sessions at a
time. If the program is configured to allow only one session, the other connections will remain
pending until they are shut down by the requesting client or the ZBI program connects them.
Example Here is an example of the SERVERSOCKET and ACCEPT commands:
10 CLOSE ALL
20 LET SERVER_HANDLE = SERVERSOCKET("TCPX",19100)
30 REM There are no connections yet we are just listening
for them
40 REM Lets loop until we get a connection
50 SLEEP 1
60 LET INPORT = ACCEPT(SERVER_HANDLE,CLIENT_INFO$)
70 ON ERROR GOTO 50
80 PRINT #INPORT: "You have successfully connected!"
90 PRINT #INPORT: "Login:";
100 INPUT #INPORT: LOGIN$
110 PRINT #INPORT: "Password:";
120 INPUT #INPORT: PASSWORD$
130 REM We will not be nice and reject the connection
130 PRINT #INPORT: "Login failed"
140 CLOSE #INPORT
150 GOTO 60 ! Go look for the next connection
160 END
509
ZBI Commands
Input and Output
UDP Client
There are also two methods for making a UDP connection to another server. The first method
uses the OPEN command, while the second method uses the CLIENTSOCKET method. UDP
is a one way communication medium, thus, you can only use output commands. Because UDP
is connectionless, the output will be queued up until an EOT character is written or the
maximum packet size is exceeded. Once the EOT character is written, the packet is formatted
and sent.
With UDP, it is important to be careful about understanding what the network being used will
support.
In many cases, there will be a limit to the size of the packet that can be used, typically between
1000 and 1500 bytes, but some networks cut this down into the 500 to 600 byte range. To be
safe, keep your packets less than 500 bytes.
UDP does not guarantee transmission. See UDP specifications for more details.
Example Since CLIENTSOCKET is the preferred method, an example is shown below.
10 CLOSE ALL
20 LET INPORT = CLIENTSOCKET("UDP","192.168.0.1",22222)
30 LET EOT$ = CHR$(4)
40 PRINT #INPORT: "Packet #"; I; EOT$;
50 LET I = I + 1
60 SLEEP 1
70 GOTO 40
ZBI Commands
Input and Output
510
UDP Server
Setting up a listening server in the printer can be accomplished with the SERVERSOCKET
function. Then, to connect to incoming UDP packets, use the function ACCEPT. When starting
your application, call SERVERSOCKET. This function will create a handle for this listening
server. Check for incoming packets at a regular interval with the ACCEPT function. If there are
no pending sessions, the ACCEPT function will return with an error. Just handle the error using
the ON ERROR command and continue looking for other sessions later. You will need to call
ACCEPT for each incoming packet. When the accept is successful, all of the data will be
available. Call READ with a MAX string size of 2000 and you will have the whole packet in
your string. Close the port and wait for the next packet. You can only read in data using a UDP
server.
Example Here is an example of how to set up to receive UDP messages:
10 CLOSE ALL
20 LET ZPLPORT = 1
35 OPEN #ZPLPORT: NAME "ZPL"
40 LET SERVER_HANDLE = SERVERSOCKET("UDP",33333)
50 REM There are no connections yet: listening
60 REM Lets loop until we get a connection
70 SLEEP 1
80 LET INPORT = ACCEPT(SERVER_HANDLE,CLIENT_INFO$)
90 ON ERROR GOTO 70
100 LET PACKET_SIZE = READ(INPORT,PACKET$,2000)
110 PRINT #ZPLPORT: "^XA^FO100,100Â0N,40,40^FDPACKET FROM:";
115 PRINT #ZPLPORT: CLIENT_INFO$; "^FS"
120 PRINT #ZPLPORT: "^FO100,150Â0N,40,40^FDPACKET SIZE:";
125 PRINT #ZPLPORT: PACKET_SIZE; "^FS"
130 PRINT #ZPLPORT: "^FO100,200Â0N,40,40^FDPACKET DATA:";
135 PRINT #ZPLPORT: PACKET$; "^FS^XZ"
140 CLOSE #INPORT
150 GOTO 60 ! go look for the next connection
160 END
511
ZBI Commands
Input and Output
E-mail
ZBI can be used to enhance the printers ability to send status via e-mail messages. The
process is simple: open the email port "EML", send the recipient list, send the header, and send
the body of the message.
The printer can only process a limited number of outgoing email messages at one time. For
this reason, error handling should be used when opening the connection to wait for the printer
to be ready to send the message. The EOT character is important for delimiting sections of the
email message. If it is left out, the message will not be sent properly.
Before the following code will work, the email settings for the print server must be set up.
Consult the print server manual to learn how to configure the unit.
Example Here is an example of how to send e-mails:
1 REM EOT$ this is used to denote end of transmission
5 LET EOT$ = CHR$(4)
1 REM Open a connection to the e-mail port and if it errors
1 REM try again until complete
10 OPEN #1: NAME "EML"
15 ON ERROR GOTO 10
1 REM Specify address to send message to then end signal end
1 REM of recipients with EOT$
1 REM To send to multiple addressees separate addressees by
1 REM space
20 PRINT #1: "youraddress@yourdomain.com";EOT$;
1 REM Fill in the message information
30 PRINT #1: "From: HAL"
40 PRINT #1: "To: Dave"
50 PRINT #1: "Subject: A message from HAL"
60 PRINT #1: ""
70 PRINT #1: "Dave, I am sorry I can not let you do that."
80 PRINT #1: i
1 REM Terminate message
90 PRINT #1: "";EOT$
1 REM You must close the port, each open port is only good
1 REM for sending one message
100 CLOSE #1
ZBI Commands
File System
512
File System
This section shows how programs and formats can be saved and recalled. Heres a quick list of
these commands:
STORE Saves the program currently in memory as the specified file name.
LOAD Transfers a program file previously stored in the printers memory and opens it in the
ZBI Program Memory.
DIR With no filter included, prompts the printer to list all of the ZBI programs residing in all
printer memory locations.
DELETE Removes a specified file from the printers memory.
513
ZBI Commands
File System
Runtime Access
The following example is a method to store runtime data in the printer memory. The file
system in the printer is limited to writing one file at a time. Since only one component of the
printer can have write access to the file system, the ZPL parser is the component with this
access. For ZBI to use the ZPL parser as a gateway into printer memory, the ZPL comment
command (^FX) is used.
Example Here is an example:
AUTONUM 1,1
REM ******* TEST FOR SUBROUTINES **********************
LET ZPLPORT = 1 OPEN #ZPLPORT: NAME "ZPL"
LET SIZE = 5
LET FILENAME$ = "R:TESTSYS.ZPL"
DECLARE STRING DATAIN$(SIZE)
LET DATAIN$(1) = "ONE"
LET DATAIN$(2) = "TWO"
LET DATAIN$(3) = "THREE"
LET DATAIN$(4) = "FOUR"
LET DATAIN$(5) = "FIVE"
GOSUB STOREDATA
GOSUB GETDATA
FOR I = 1 TO SIZE
IF DATAIN$(I) <> DATAOUT$(I) THEN
PRINT #ZPLPORT: "^XA^FO100,100Â0N,50,50^FDERROR:";
PRINT #ZPLPORT: DATAOUT$(I);"^XZ"
END IF
NEXT I
END
REM **** SUBROUTINE STOREDATA **************************
REM INPUT: ZPLPORT, DATAIN$, SIZE, FILENAME$ ***********
SUB STOREDATA
PRINT #ZPLPORT: "^XA^DF" & FILENAME$ & "^FS"
PRINT #ZPLPORT: "^FX"; SIZE; "^FS"
FOR I = 1 TO SIZE
ZBI Commands
File System
514
PRINT #ZPLPORT: "^FX" & DATAIN$(I) & "^FS"
NEXT I
PRINT #ZPLPORT: "^XZ"
RETURN
REM **** SUBROUTINE GETDATA - **************************
REM INPUT: ZPLPORT, FILENAME$ **************************
REM ** OUTPUT: DECLARES AND FILLS DATAOUT$ AND FILLS SIZE
SUB GETDATA
PRINT #ZPLPORT: "^XA^HF" & FILENAME$ & "^XZ"
SLEEP 1
LET RESULT$ = ""
FOR J = 1 TO 25
LET A = READ(ZPLPORT,TEMP$,5000)
LET RESULT$ = RESULT$ & TEMP$
IF POS(RESULT$,"^XZ") <> 0 THEN
EXIT FOR
END IF
SLEEP 1
NEXT J
LET RESULT$(1:POS(RESULT$,"^FX")+2) = ""
LET SIZE = VAL(EXTRACT$(RESULT$,"","^"))
DECLARE STRING DATAOUT$(SIZE)
FOR I = 1 TO SIZE
LET RESULT$(1:POS(RESULT$,"^FX")+2) = ""
LET DATAOUT$(I) = EXTRACT$(RESULT$,"","^")
NEXT I
LET RESULT$ = ""
LET TEMP$ = ""
RETURN
515
ZBI Commands
File System
STORE
Description This command saves the program currently in memory as the specified file
name. The format listed below is used.
Format STORE <filename$>
Parameters <filename$> = the name of the file to be stored. Drive location and file
name must be in quotation marks.
Comments For a file name to be valid, it must conform to the 8.3 Rule: each file must have
no more than eight characters in the file name and have a three-character extension. Here the
extension is always .BAS (for example, MAXIMUM8.BAS).
The ZBI-Developer IDE will take care of this for you with the SEND TO option on your
program.
Example This is an example of how to use the STORE command:
STORE "E:PROGRAM1.BAS"
ZBI Commands
File System
516
LOAD
Description This command transfers a program file previously stored in the printers
memory and opens it in the ZBI Program Memory.
If the program file does not exist, the ZBI Program Memory is cleared and no program is
opened.
Format LOAD <filename$>
Parameters <filename$> = the file name to be loaded into memory. Drive location and
file name must be in quotation marks. If the drive location is not specified, all drives will be
searched.
printer.
Example Here are examples of how to use the LOAD command:
LOAD "PROGRAM1.BAS"
LOAD "E:PROGRAM1.BAS"
517
ZBI Commands
File System
DIR
Description This command, with no filter included, prompts the printer to list all of the ZBI
programs residing in all printer memory locations.
Including a filter signals the printer to limit the search; including a drive location signals the
printer to search in only one location.
Asterisks (*) are used as wild cards. A wild card (*) finds every incidence of a particular
request. The example here, DIR "B:*.BAS", signals the printer to search for every file
with a .BAS extension in B: memory.
Format DIR [<filter$>]
Parameters [<filter$>] = the name of the file to be accessed (optional). Drive location
and file name must be in quotation marks.
Default = "*:*.bas"
Example N/A
printer.
Important Quotes must be around what you are doing. This shows you how to use the
wildcard (*) to search for all .BAS files in B: memory:
DIR "B:*.BAS"
Quotes surrounding action
memory
file type
wildcard
ZBI Commands
File System
518
DELETE
Description This command removes a specified file from the printers memory.
Format DELETE <filename$>
Parameters <filename$> = the name of the file to be deleted. Drive location and
filename must be in quotation marks.

printer.
Example This is an example of deleting a specified file from printer memory:
DELETE "E:PROGRAM1.BAS"
519
ZBI Commands
Comma Separated Values (CSV)
Accessing Comma Separated Value (CSV) and Text File Functions
This section describes the functions to access CSV files and ASCII plain-text files. Here is a
quick list of these commands:
CSVLOAD Loads the contents of a CSV file in a two dimensional string array.
CSVSTORE Stores the contents of a two dimensional string array in a CSV file.
TXTLOAD Loads the contents of an ASCII plain-text file into a string variable.
TXTSTORE Stores the contents of a string variable in an ASCII plain text file.
ZBI Commands
520
CSVLOAD
Format
CSVLOAD(DEST$, FILENAME$)
CSVLOAD(DEST$, FILENAME$, DELIM$)
Parameters
DEST$ = two dimensional array that will hold the rows and columns from the CSV file
specified by the FILENAME$ variable. If there is not enough room in DEST$, or if it has
the wrong size, it will be changed to fit the data from the file. The data originally in
DEST$ will be overwritten.
FILENAME$ = name of the file to load. Drive location and file name must be in quotation
marks. The file extension must be either ".CSV" or ".TXT".
DELIM$ = optional delimiter that is used in the CSV file instead of a comma. If DELIM$
is not provided a comma will be used by default. The delimiter must be a single character
that is not a quote, carriage return, or newline.
Returns The number of elements in each row of the CSV file. The function will return 0 if
errors were detected in the CSV file, or if the file could not be read.
Description This function will load the delimited values from a CSV file, defined by
FILENAME$, and store them in the two-dimensional array, DEST$.
Example This example shows how to print the values in a CSV file with a comma
delimiter.
10 DECLARE STRING CSVDB$(1,2)
20 LET FILENAME$ = "E:RECORDS.CSV"
30 LET NUMOFCOLS = CSVLOAD(CSVDB$, FILENAME$)
40 LET NUMOFROWS = ROWSIZE(CSVDB$)
100 FOR I = 1 TO NUMOFROWS STEP 1
110 FOR J = 1 TO NUMOFCOLS STEP 1
120 PRINT CSVDB$(I, J), " ";
200 NEXT J
210 PRINT ""
300 NEXT I
521
ZBI Commands
Comments The maximum CSV file size supported will vary based upon available RAM
within the printer.
CSV File Information
The file format should follow the rules in IETF RFC 4180: http://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc4180
The maximum number of columns per row in a CSV file is 256.
Each row must be 2048 characters or less including the delimiter. The carriage return/line feed
(CRLF) does not count toward the limit.
Each row in the CSV file must have the same number of elements. If there are any missing
elements in the CSV file (indicated by two adjacent commas or a comma at the end of a row),
they will be represented as empty strings.
If an element in the CSV file contains a quote, it should be represented as two quotes.
Additionally, if an element contains a quote, a new line, a carriage return, or the delimiter
character, the element must be within quotes. For example, a value that is used to store a
measurement in feet and inches (4' 5") must be formatted as "4' 5""" within the CSV file.
Example This example shows how to print the values in a CSV file that uses a '|' as a
delimiter.
20 LET FILENAME$ = "E:EMPLOYEE.CSV"
30 LET NUMOFCOLS = CSVLOAD(CSVDB$, FILENAME$, "|")
200 NEXT J
210 PRINT ""
300 NEXT I
ZBI Commands
522
CSVSTORE
Format
CSVSTORE(SRC$, FILENAME$)
CSVSTORE(SRC$, FILENAME$, DELIM$)
Parameters
SRC$ = two dimensional array of strings to be written to a CSV file.
FILENAME$ = name of the file to store the array contents. Drive location and file name
must be in quotation marks. The file extension must be either ".CSV" or ".TXT".
DELIM$ = optional delimiter that is used in the CSV file instead of a comma. If DELIM$
is not provided a comma will be used by default. The delimiter must be a single character
that is not a quote, carriage return, or newline.
Returns A 0 if there were no errors. A 1 is returned if SRC$ is not a string array, if the file
could not be written, or if SRC$ contains errors that prevent the file from being stored.
Comments The elements of the array should follow the rules in IETF RFC 4180:
http://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc4180
There is no limit on the number of columns per row when storing to a CSV file. However, a
file stored with rows that exceed the column limit imposed by CSVLOAD will not be loaded by
the CSVLOAD function.
There is no limit on the size of a row when stored to a CSV file. However, a file stored with
rows that exceed the size limit imposed by CSVLOAD will not be loaded by the CSVLOAD
function.
Description This function will store the values of a two dimensional array into a CSV file
on the file system. Each element within the array is treated as a single value within the CSV
file.
Example This example shows how to convert a comma delimited CSV file into a "^"
delimited TXT file and print the contents.
20 LET NUMOFCOLS = CSVLOAD(CSVDB$, "E:RECORDS.CSV")
30 LET CSVERROR = CSVSTORE(CSVDB$, "E:NEWREC.TXT", "^")
40 LET NUMOFCOLS = CSVLOAD(CSVDB$, "E:NEWREC.TXT", "^")
200 NEXT J
210 PRINT ""
300 NEXT I
523
ZBI Commands
TXTLOAD
Format TXTLOAD(DEST$, FILENAME$)
Parameters
DEST$ = string to store the contents of FILENAME$.
FILENAME$ = name of the file to read. Drive location and file name must be in quotation
Returns The number of bytes read from the file. The function will return 0 if the file could
not be read.
Comments The data originally in DEST$ will be overwritten upon completion of this
function.
Description This function will read the contents of an ASCII text file into a ZBI string
variable.
Example This example shows how to print out the contents of a file.
10 LET TXTSIZE = TXTLOAD(TXTDATA$, "E:MYDATA.TXT")
20 PRINT STR$(TXTSIZE), "bytes:", TXTDATA$
ZBI Commands
524
TXTSTORE
Format TXTSTORE(SRC$, FILENAME$)
Parameters
SRC$ = string to store to FILENAME$.
FILENAME$ = name of the file to store. Drive location and file name must be in quotation
Returns Returns a 0 if there were no errors, otherwise a 1 is returned.
Description This function will store the contents of a ZBI string in an ASCII text file.
Example This example shows how to append a text file.
10 LET TXTSIZE = TXTLOAD(TXTDATA$, "E:MYDATA.TXT")
11 REM Append a date/time stamp to the file
20 LET TXTDATA$ = TXTDATA$ & " " & DATE$ & " " & TIME$
30 LET TXTSIZE = TXTSTORE(TXTDATA$, "E:MYDATA.TXT")
40 PRINT TXTDATA$
525
ZBI Commands
Events
Events
This section explains how to capture and trigger internal events in the printer. Heres a quick
list of these commands:
Available Events A table that correlates a ZBI event with an identification number.
ZBI Key Names Details the names of each printers front panel buttons, ZBI names, and
ZBI event ID.
REGISTEREVENT Sets up the HANDLEEVENT function to receive notification when the
specified event has occurred.
UNREGISTEREVENT Allows events that are currently set to be captured by the program to
no longer be captured.
HANDLEEVENT Once events have been registered, this function is used to see what events
have occurred.
TRIGGEREVENT Allows for front panel buttons to be triggered programatically.
There are certain events in the printer that a ZBI 2.0 program can receive. To do this, the
program first registers for the event. On a regular basis, call a function to handle events. When
an event occurs that the program is registered for, the function will return the events
identification number.
ZBI Commands
Events
526
Available Events
ZBI
Event ID
ZBI Event
1 menu key
2 pause key
3 feed key
4 cancel key
5 up arrow key
6 plus key
7 minus key
8 enter key
9 setup exit key
10 select key
11 cancel all event
12 config label
13 timer1
14 timer2
15 timer3
16 timer4
17 timer5
18 spare unused
19 previous key
20 next save key
21 calibrate key
22 paper out set
23 paper out clear
24 ribbon out set
25 ribbon out clear
26 head too hot set
27 head too hot clear
28 head cold set
29 head cold clear
30 head open set
31 head open clear
32 supply too hot set
33 supply too hot clear
34 ribbon in set
35 ribbon in clear
36 rewind full set
37 rewind full clear
38 cutter jammed set
39 cutter jammed clear
527
ZBI Commands
Events
40 paused set
41 paused clear
42 pq completed set
43 pq completed clear
44 label ready set
45 label ready clear
46 head element bad set
47 head element bad clear
48 basic runtime set
49 basic runtime clear
50 basic forced set
51 basic forced clear
52 power on set
53 power on clear
54 clean printhead set
55 clean printhead clear
56 media low set
57 media low clear
58 ribbon low set
59 ribbon low clear
60 replace head set
61 replace head clear
62 battery low set
63 battery low clear
64 rfid error set
65 rfid error clear
66 any messages set
67 any messages clear
68 auto baud
69 factory default
70 networking default
71 networking factory
72 print width
73 darkness adjust
74 calibrate
75 scroll key
ZBI
Event ID
ZBI Event
ZBI Commands
Events
528
ZBI Key Names
This section details the names to use for each printers front panel buttons when creating
ZBI 2.0 programs to capture the buttons.
XiIIIPlus/PAX4
105SL
Front Panel Key
ZBI
Event ID
ZBI Name
Left Oval 7 minus key
Right Oval 6 plus key
Previous 19 previous key
Next/Save 20 next save key
Setup/Exit 9 setup exit key
Pause 2 pause key
Feed 3 feed key
Cancel 4 cancel key
Calibrate 21 calibrate key
Front Panel Key
ZBI
Event ID
ZBI Name
Minus 7 minus key
Plus 6 plus key
Previous 19 previous key
Next/Save 20 next save key
Pause 2 pause key
Feed 3 feed key
Cancel 4 cancel key
Calibrate 21 calibrate key
529
ZBI Commands
Events
ZM400/ZM600/Z4Mplus/Z6Mplus
S4M
GX420
Front Panel Key
ZBI
Event ID
ZBI Name
Feed 3 feed key
Pause 2 pause key
Cancel 4 cancel key
Select 10 select key
Plus (+) 6 plus key
Minus (-) 7 minus key
Front Panel Key
ZBI
Event ID
ZBI Name
Menu 1 menu key
Enter 8 enter key
Cancel 4 cancel key
Feed 3 feed key
Pause 2 pause key
Left Arrow 4 cancel key
Right Arrow 3 feed key
Up Arrow 5 up arrow key
Down Arrow 2 pause key
Front Panel Key
ZBI
Event ID
ZBI Name
Feed key 3 Feed key
Select key 10 Select key
Scroll key 75 Scroll key
ZBI Commands
Events
530
REGISTEREVENT
Format
REGISTEREVENT(X)
REGISTEREVENT(X,Y)
REGISTEREVENT(X,Y,Z)
Parameters
(X) = This is the ID of the event being registered for.
(Y) = If Y=1: the event happens once; If Y=0: the event stays registered for the duration
of the program, or until it is unregistered.
(Z) = For System Events: if Z=0, the event will still be handled by the printer. If Z=1,
then only ZBI will receive the event.
For Timer Events: this is the timer interval in mSec. If the interval is less than 0 or greater
than 1,000,000,000, it is set to 1000.
Returns The ID of the successfully registered event. If an event was not successfully
registered, a -1 is returned.
Description This function will set up the HANDLEEVENT function to receive notification
when the specified event has occurred. Events can be registered for one time or until the
program is exited.
Important If an event occurs twice or more before the HANDLEEVENT function is called,
only one event will be received.
531
ZBI Commands
Events
Comments None
Example Here is an example of how to use the REGISTEREVENT command:
1 REM This example shows how to override the functionality of the feed
1 REM key
1 REM using the event system. After all why waste a label when you
1 REM could put
1 REM valuable information there
AUTONUM 1,1
CLOSE ALL
LET ZPLPORT = 1
OPEN #ZPLPORT: NAME "ZPL"
LET FEEDKEY = 3
LET TMP = REGISTEREVENT(FEEDKEY, 0, 1)
DO WHILE 1 = 1
LET EVT = HANDLEEVENT()
IF EVT = FEEDKEY THEN
GOSUB PRINTINFO
END IF
SLEEP 1
LOOP
REM **** SUBROUTINE PRINTINFO *** expects ZPLPORT *******
SUB PRINTINFO
PRINT #ZPLPORT: "^XA"
PRINT #ZPLPORT: "^FO30,30Â0N,50,50^FDZebra Technologies^FS"
PRINT #ZPLPORT: "^FO30,85Â0N,35,35^FDwww.zebra.com^FS"
PRINT #ZPLPORT: "^FO30,125Â0N,35,35^FDsupport.zebra.com^FS"
PRINT #ZPLPORT: "^FO30,165Â0N,35,35^FDFW Version: "
PRINT #ZPLPORT: GETVAR$("appl.name") & "^FS"
PRINT #ZPLPORT: "^FO30,205Â0N,35,35^FDPrinter Unique ID:"
PRINT #ZPLPORT: GETVAR$("device.unique_id") & "^FS"
PRINT #ZPLPORT: "^FO30,245Â0N,35,35^FDActive Network: "
PRINT #ZPLPORT: GETVAR$("ip.active_network") & "^FS"
PRINT #ZPLPORT: "^FO30,285Â0N,35,35^FDZBI Memory Usage: "
PRINT #ZPLPORT: GETVAR$("zbi.start_info.memory_alloc") & "^FS"
PRINT #ZPLPORT: "^FO30,325Â0N,35,35^FDOdometer: "
PRINT #ZPLPORT: GETVAR$("odometer.total_print_length") & "^FS"
ZBI Commands
Events
532
UNREGISTEREVENT
Format UNREGISTEREVENT(X)
Parameters (X) = the ID of the event to stop
Returns 0 if the event is a valid event to unregister. A -1 if the event does not exist.
Comments None
Description This function allows events that are currently set to be captured by the
program to no longer be captured. Once called events will return to the normal method of
processing if the REGISTEREVENT function Z parameter was set to 1.
Example Here is an example of how to use the UNREGISTEREVENT command:
AUTONUM 1,1
LET OUTSTR$ = "Processing"
LET LOOPCTR = 200
LET TIMER5 = 17
LET TMP = REGISTEREVENT(TIMER5, 0, 1000)
DO WHILE LOOPCTR > 0
IF EVT = TIMER5 THEN
LET A = SETVAR("device.frontpanel.line2",OUTSTR$)
LET OUTSTR$ = OUTSTR$ & "."
IF LEN(OUTSTR$) >16 THEN
END IF
END IF
LET LOOPCTR = LOOPCTR - 1
SLEEP 1
LOOP
LET TMP = UNREGISTEREVENT(TIMER5)
LET A = SETVAR("device.frontpanel.line2","")
END
533
ZBI Commands
Events
HANDLEEVENT
Format HANDLEEVENT()
Parameters N/A
Returns The ID of the event that occurred. One event at a time will be returned through this
function. The order of the events are based on priority. The priority is based on the ID number
of the event, with the exception of the timer events, which have the highest priority.
Description Once events have been registered, this function is used to see what events
have occurred.
Example Here are examples of how to use the HANDLEEVENT command:
1 REM This example shows how to override the feed key functionality
1 REM using the event system. Why waste a label when you could put
1 REM valuable information there
AUTONUM 1,1
CLOSE ALL
LET ZPLPORT = 1
LET FEEDKEY = 3
DO WHILE 1 = 1
GOSUB PRINTINFO
END IF
SLEEP 1
LOOP
REM ******** SUBROUTINE PRINTINFO ***
REM *** expects ZPLPORT *************
SUB PRINTINFO
PRINT #ZPLPORT: "^XA"
PRINT #ZPLPORT: "^FO30,30Â0N,50,50";
PRINT #ZPLPORT: "^FDZebra Technologies^FS"
ZBI Commands
Events
534
Comments None
PRINT #ZPLPORT: "^FDwww.zebra.com^FS"
PRINT #ZPLPORT: "^FDsupport.zebra.com^FS"
PRINT #ZPLPORT: "^FDFW Version: ";
PRINT #ZPLPORT: GETVAR$("appl.name") & "^FS"
PRINT #ZPLPORT: "^FDPrinter Unique ID:";
PRINT #ZPLPORT: GETVAR$("device.unique_id") & "^FS"
PRINT #ZPLPORT: "^FDActive Network: ";
PRINT #ZPLPORT: GETVAR$("ip.active_network") & "^FS"
PRINT #ZPLPORT: "^FDZBI Memory Usage: ";
PRINT #ZPLPORT: GETVAR$("zbi.start_info.memory_alloc") & "^FS"
PRINT #ZPLPORT: "^FDOdometer: ";
PRINT #ZPLPORT: GETVAR$("odometer.total_print_length") & "^FS"
535
ZBI Commands
Events
TRIGGEREVENT
Format TRIGGEREVENT(X)
Parameters
X = the ID of the event from the possible event list to TRIGGER.
See the following printer tables for events that can be triggered by this command:
XiIIIPlus/PAX4 on page 528
105SL on page 528
ZM400/ZM600/Z4Mplus/Z6Mplus on page 529
S4M on page 529
Returns Always returns 0.
Comments None
Description This function allows for front panel buttons to be triggered programatically.
Example Here are examples of how to use the TRIGGEREVENT command:
1 REM THIS IS AN EXAMPLE OF HOW TO TRIGGER AN EVENT
AUTONUM 1,1
LET PAUSEKEY = 2
DO WHILE 1 = 1
LET A = TRIGGEREVENT(PAUSEKEY)
LET A = SETVAR("device.frontpanel.line2",str$(A))
SLEEP 2
LOOP
ZBI Commands
Systems
536
Systems
This section contain miscellaneous systems interface functions. Heres a quick list of these
commands:
ISERROR Returns a non-zero value if there is an internal error set in the printer.
ISWARNING Returns a non-zero value if there is an internal warning set in the printer.
SLEEP Specifies the time that the interpreter pauses.
SETERR Sends a message to the printer to set the error flag.
CLRERR Sends a message to the printer to clear the error flag.
ON ERROR Prevents a program from halting in the event of an error.
537
ZBI Commands
Systems
ISERROR
Description This function returns a non-zero value if there is an internal error set in the
printer. Otherwise, the numeral returned will 0.
Format ISERROR
Parameters N/A
Returns 0 for no errors; 1 if there is an error.
Comments None
Example Here is an example of the ISERROR command.
10 PRINT ISERROR
RUN
0
ZBI Commands
Systems
538
ISWARNING
Description This function returns a non-zero value if there is an internal warning set in the
printer. Otherwise, the numeral returned will 0.
Format ISWARNING
Parameters N/A
Returns 0 for no errors; 1 if there is an error.
Comments None
Example Here is an example of the ISWARNING command.
10 PRINT ISWARNING
RUN
0
539
ZBI Commands
Systems
SLEEP
Description This command specifies the time that the interpreter pauses. This command
could be sent to the printer after sending a label format to be printed. The interpreter pauses in
its processing for the amount of time specified.
Format SLEEP <A>
Parameters <A> = the time in seconds (0 to 500) the interpreter pauses.
Comments If a timer is needed, use the Event system. The timer will allow for processing
other items, where SLEEP will stop execution of any ZBI commands for the specified SLEEP
period.
This is a program command and must be preceded by a line number.
Example This is an example of how to use the SLEEP command:
10 SLEEP 450
ZBI Commands
Systems
540
SETERR
Description This command sends a message to the printer to set the error flag. A logical
interpreter flag is triggered in the printer. This error is referenced as a BASIC Forced Error.
Format SETERR
Parameters N/A
Comments This is a program command and must be preceded by a line number.
Example An example of the SETERR and CLRERR commands.
AUTONUM 1,1
OPEN #1:NAME "ZPL"
PRINT #1: "^XA^SXO,A,Y,Y^XZ"
CLOSE #1
FOR I=1 TO 10
SLEEP 5
IF MOD(I,2)=1 THEN
SETERR
ELSE
CLRERR
ENDIF
NEXT I
541
ZBI Commands
Systems
CLRERR
Description This command sends a message to the printer to clear the error flag. A logical
interpreter flag is cleared in the printer. This error is referenced as a BASIC Forced Error.
Format 10 CLRERR
Parameters N/A
Comments This is a program command that is preceded by a line number.
Example See SETERR on page 540.
ZBI Commands
Systems
542
ON ERROR
Description The ON ERROR command can be used to prevent a program from halting in
the event of an error. If an error occurs in a previous line during program execution, the ON
ERROR statement calls the GOTO or GOSUB statement and allows the program to continue.
Format
ON ERROR GOTO <A>
ON ERROR GOSUB <A>
Parameters <A> = the destination location in the program should an error be triggered on
the previous line.
Comments
If there is no error, this line is ignored.
This is a program command that is preceded by a line number.
Example This is an example of how to use the ON ERROR command:
30 LET A = B/C
40 ON ERROR GOTO 100
...
100 PRINT "DIVIDE BY ZERO OCCURRED"
110 LET A = 0
120 GOTO 50
...
Example See TCP Server on page 508 or UDP Server on page 510.
543
ZBI Commands
Systems
Applicator Functions
The printer applicator port option can be controlled in part or completely by ZBI 2. When ZBI
takes control of a pin, the printers built-in applicator functionality will not have access to that
pin. This function will allow the printer to perform some of the functionality that a
programmable logic controller (PLC) could.
AUXPORT_STEALPIN Takes control of a pin and allows ZBI to perform other actions on
the pin.
AUXPORT_SETPIN Sets the output level on an applicator pin.
AUXPORT_GETPIN Retrieves the state of the applicator pin.
AUXPORT_RELEASEPIN Returns a pin controlled by ZBI to normal printer operation.
ZBI Commands
Systems
544
AUXPORT_STEALPIN
Format AUXPORT_STEALPIN(X)
Parameters X = perform action on this applicator port pin.
Returns This function returns -1 upon failure and 0 upon success.
Description This function will take control of a pin and allow ZBI to perform other actions
on the pin.
545
ZBI Commands
Systems
Comments If this pin is not controlled via ZBI (power pin), this function will return -1.
Example This is an example of the AUXPORT_STEALPIN command:
1 REM Demo applicator to show control of applicator pins
1 REM on the printer
1 REM The application is to create a light pole with an
1 REM external feed button
AUTONUM 1,1
LET RED = 9
LET YELLOW = 10
LET GREEN = 11
LET BUTTON = 4
LET FEED_KEY = 3
LET TMP = AUXPORT_STEALPIN(RED)
LET TMP = AUXPORT_STEALPIN(YELLOW)
LET TMP = AUXPORT_STEALPIN(GREEN)
LET TMP = AUXPORT_STEALPIN(BUTTON)
DO WHILE 1 = 1
SLEEP 1
IF ISERROR = 1 THEN
LET TMP = AUXPORT_SETPIN(RED,1)
LET TMP = AUXPORT_SETPIN(YELLOW,0)
LET TMP = AUXPORT_SETPIN(GREEN,0)
ELSE IF ISWARNING = 1 THEN
ELSE
END IF
IF AUXPORT_GETPIN(BUTTON) = 1 THEN
LET A = TRIGGEREVENT(FEED_KEY)
END IF
LOOP
ZBI Commands
Systems
546
AUXPORT_SETPIN
Format AUXPORT_SETPIN(X,Y)
Parameters
X = perform action on this applicator port pin.
Y = The value to set on the pin (1 = high, 0 = low).
Comments If this pin is not controlled via ZBI (power pin), this function will return -1. See
AUXPORT_STEALPIN on page 544.
Description This function sets the output level on an applicator pin.
Example See AUXPORT_STEALPIN on page 544.
547
ZBI Commands
Systems
AUXPORT_GETPIN
Format AUXPORT_GETPIN(X)
Returns This function returns 1 if pin is in high state, 0 in low state, and -1 upon failure.
Description This function will retrieve the state of the applicator pin.
Example See AUXPORT_STEALPIN on page 544.
ZBI Commands
Systems
548
AUXPORT_RELEASEPIN
Format AUXPORT_RELEASEPIN(X)
Description This function returns a pin controlled by ZBI to normal printer operation.
Example This is an example of the AUXPORT_RELEASEPIN command:
90 LET TMP = AUXPORT_RELEASEPIN(X)
549
ZBI Commands
String Functions
String Functions
This section identifies how to handle string manipulation. Here is a quick list of these
commands:
LCASE$ Converts a string to all lowercase characters.
CHR$ Takes a value between 0 and 255 and puts that value into a string.
LTRIM$ Removes leading spaces from a string.
REPEAT$ Creates multiple copies of a string combined into a new string.
RTRIM$ Returns a string with trailing spaces removed
SPLIT Splits a string into sub-strings
SPLITCOUNT Returns the number of sub-strings that would be returned by the SPLIT
function.
UCASE$ Converts a string to all uppercase characters
EXTRACT$ Searches for a string based on a starting and ending string.
ORD Returns the ASCII value of the first character of string A$.
POS Returns the location of the first occurrence of a search string in the target string.
LEN Returns the length of a string.
ZBI Commands
String Functions
550
LCASE$
Description This function will convert a string to all lowercase characters.
Format LCASE$ (A$)
Parameters (A$) = the string that will be converted
Returns The characters in A$ converted to lowercase.
Comments This will only work on non-accented Latin characters, A-Z.
Example This is an example of how to use the LCASE$ command.
10 LET B$=LCASE$ ("Hello World")
20 PRINT B$
RUN
hello world
551
ZBI Commands
String Functions
CHR$
Description This function takes a value between 0 and 255 and puts that value into a string.
Format CHR$(VAL)
Parameters (VAL)= The numeric value of the string character.
Returns A single character string containing the value entered.
Comments None
Example This is an example of how to use the CHR$ command to easily put control
characters into strings:
10 LET NULL$=CHR$(0)
20 LET STX$=CHR$(2)
30 LET ETX$=CHR$(3)
40 LET EOT$=CHR$(4)
ZBI Commands
String Functions
552
LTRIM$
Description This function removes leading spaces from a string.
Format LTRIM$(A$)
Parameters (A$) = the string to convert.
Returns The string in A$ with no spaces.
Comments None
Example This is an example of how to use the LTRIM$(A$)command:
10 LET A$=" Hello"
20 PRINT LTRIM$(A$)
RUN
Hello
553
ZBI Commands
String Functions
REPEAT$
Description This function creates multiple copies of a string combined into a new string.
Format REPEAT$(A$,M)
Parameters
A$ = the base string to duplicate
M = the number of times to duplicate A$
Returns A string containing M copies of A$. Note: When M=0, an empty string is returned.
Comments None
Example This is an example of how to use the REPEAT$(A$,M)command:
10 PRINT REPEAT$("Hello",3)
RUN
HelloHelloHello
ZBI Commands
String Functions
554
RTRIM$
Description This function returns a string with trailing spaces removed.
Format RTRIM$(A$)
Parameters (A$) = the base string
Returns A$ with trailing spaces removed.
Comments None
Example This is an example of how to use the RTRIM$(A$)command:
10 LET A$="Hello "
20 LET B$="World"
30 PRINT A$ & B$
40 PRINT RTRIM$(A$)& B$
RUN
Hello World
HelloWorld
555
ZBI Commands
String Functions
SPLIT
Format
SPLIT(DEST$,SOURCE$,DELIMITER$)
SPLIT(DEST$,SOURCE$,DELIMITER$,MAXCOUNT)
Parameters
DEST$ = the array to populate with the sub-strings created by the split
SOURCE$ = the string that will be searched for the provided delimiter
DELIMITER$ = the delimiter string (may be more than one character) to search for
MAXCOUNT = the maximum number of sub-strings the string should be split into. A
negative value will return every sub-string created by the split. A value of zero will return
empty strings in the array. If not specified, the limit will be the maximum size of the array.
Returns The number of sub-strings placed into the DEST$ array. If the number of sub-
strings is less than the size of DEST$, the remaining elements of the array will be set to empty
strings.
Description This function allows a string to be split into sub-strings
Example This is an example of how to use the SPLIT command:
1 REM Example - This example show how the SPLIT and SPLITCOUNT
1 REM commands can be
1 REM used to merge a comma separated variable string(CSV)
1 REM into a stored format
AUTONUM 1,1
SLEEP 10
DECLARE STRING TESTDATA$(5)
REM data format = <Format Name>,<VAR 1>,<VAR 2>,...,<VAR N>
LET TESTDATA$(1) = "E:PRICETAG.ZPL,FRED'S OATS,$1.25,C:126789:325,123456789"
LET ZPLPORT = 2
FOR T = 1 TO 5
LET DATA$ = TESTDATA$(T)
GOSUB CSVPRINTER
NEXT T
END
ZBI Commands
String Functions
556
REM ******* Subroutine CSVPRINTER, expects DATA$ and ZPLPORT ****************
SUB CSVPRINTER
LET CNT = SPLITCOUNT(DATA$, ",")
DECLARE STRING SPLITSTRING$(CNT)
ON ERROR GOTO RECOVERY
LET CNT = SPLIT(SPLITSTRING$,DATA$,",")
PRINT #ZPLPORT: "^XA^XF";SPLITSTRING$(1);"^FS"
IF CNT >= 2 THEN
FOR I = 2 TO CNT
PRINT #ZPLPORT: "^FN";I-1;"^FD";SPLITSTRING$(I);"^FS"
NEXT I
END IF
SUB RECOVERY
RETURN
Example This is an example of how to use the SPLIT command:
1 REM Example - Shows how the SPLIT and SPLITCOUNT commands can be used to
1 REM merge a comma separated variable string(CSV) into a stored format
AUTONUM 1,1
SLEEP 10
DECLARE STRING TESTDATA$(5)
REM data format = <Format Name>,<VAR 1>,<VAR 2>,...,<VAR N>
LET F$="E:PRICETAG.ZPL"
LET TESTDATA$(1) = F$&",FRED'S ROLLED OATS,$1.25,C:123456789:325,123456789"
LET ZPLPORT = 2
FOR T = 1 TO 5
LET DATA$ = TESTDATA$(T)
GOSUB CSVPRINTER
NEXT T
END
REM ******* Subroutine CSVPRINTER, expects DATA$ and ZPLPORT *****************
SUB CSVPRINTER
LET CNT = SPLITCOUNT(DATA$, ",")
DECLARE STRING SPLITSTRING$(CNT)
ON ERROR GOTO RECOVERY
LET CNT = SPLIT(SPLITSTRING$,DATA$,",")
PRINT #ZPLPORT: "^XA^XF";SPLITSTRING$(1);"^FS"
IF CNT >= 2 THEN
FOR I = 2 TO CNT
PRINT #ZPLPORT: "^FN";I-1;"^FD";SPLITSTRING$(I);"^FS"
NEXT I
END IF
SUB RECOVERY
RETURN
557
ZBI Commands
String Functions
Comments If the delimiter is an empty string, or does not appear in the SOURCE$ string,
the first entry of the array will be the source string and all other elements will be empty strings.
When the SPLIT function encounters a delimiter at the beginning or end of the source string,
or two delimiters in a row, it populates the corresponding array element with an empty string.
If MAXCOUNT is larger than the number of returned sub-strings (N), the last MAXCOUNT - N
array elements will be empty strings. If MAXCOUNT is larger than the destination array or is
negative, the size of the array will be used as the MAXCOUNT. Therefore, the smallest value
among the value of MAXCOUNT, the size of the return array, or the number of sub-strings found
determines the maximum number of sub-strings that will be returned.
If MAXCOUNT is less than the number of delimiters in a string the last string in the array will
hold the end of the string starting from where the last delimiter was found. For example, if
SOURCE$ = "one,two,three,four,five", DELIMITER$ = ",", and MAXCOUNT = 2, the output
would be two strings: "one" and "two,three,four,five".
If a two dimensional array is provided for DEST$, the array will be filled linearly. For
example, an array that is 2 x 3 (for example, DELCARE STRING MYARRAY$(2,3)) will be
filled from (0,0), then (0,1) up to (2,3).
ZBI Commands
String Functions
558
SPLITCOUNT
Format SPLITCOUNT(SOURCE$, DELIMITER$)
Parameters
SOURCE$ = the string that will be searched for the provided delimiter.
DELIMITER$ =5
Returns The number of sub-strings that would be returned by the SPLITCOUNT function.
Comments None
Description This function returns the number of sub-strings that would be returned by the
SPLIT function.
Example This function shows how to determine the number of sub-strings that the
SPLITCOUNT command would produce
10 LET CNT = SPLITCOUNT("ONE,,,FOUR,FIVE,,SEVEN,", ",")
20 PRINT "Number of sub-strings returned is", STR$(CNT)
RUN
Number of sub-strings returned is 8
559
ZBI Commands
String Functions
UCASE$
Description This function converts a string to all uppercase characters.
Format UCASE$(A$)
Parameters A$ = the base string to convert
Returns A$ converted to uppercase.
Comments This will only convert non-accented Latin characters, a-z.
Example This is an example of how to use the UCASE$(A$)command:
10 LET A$="Zebra Technologies"
20 PRINT UCASE$(A$)
RUN
ZEBRA TECHNOLOGIES
Example This is an example of how to capitalize a line.
10 LET A$="The Cow jUmped Over THE Moon."
20 LET A$=LCASE$(A$)
30 LET A$(1:1)=UCASE$(A$(1:1))
40 PRINT A$
RUN
The cow jumped over the moon.
ZBI Commands
String Functions
560
EXTRACT$
Description This function searches for a string based on a starting and ending string. When
these two strings are found, the string between them is returned.
Format
EXTRACT$ (CHANNEL, START$, STOP$)
EXTRACT$ (A$, START$, STOP$)
Parameters
CHANNEL = extracts data from this channel
A$ = the source string
START$ = Once this string is found, the extract pulls characters immediately following.
STOP$ = the extraction stops when this string is found
Important If the EXTRACT$ command encounters a carriage return line feed before
encountering the beginning character or the ending character, it returns null.
Example This example shows how to extract the word Technologies from this string:
Zebra,Technologies,Corporation.
This is what the program looks like to accomplish this:
10 LET A$ = "Zebra,Technologies,Corporation,"
20 LET DATA$ = EXTRACT$(A$,",",",")
Example This example shows how the EXTRACT$ command works from an open port:
20 LET DATA$ = EXTRACT$(1,",",",")
Notice how the quotes are used to show a literal character, in this case a comma.
Example This example shows how the start and stop points are variable; a variable name is
used instead of the literal:
10 LET B$ = ","
20 LET A$ = "Zebra,Technologies,Corporation"
30 LET DATA$ = EXTRACT$(A$,B$,B$)
40 PRINT DATA$
RUN
Technologies
561
ZBI Commands
String Functions
Comments EXTRACT$ reads in and discards data until the start criteria is met. Then, all
data is returned up to the stop criteria.
Example This example shows how an empty string can be used to extract from the start of
the input string to the end string:
10 LET IN$ = "BLAH BLAH <END>"
20 LET B$ = EXTRACT$(IN$, "", "<END>")
30 PRINT B$
RUN
BLAH BLAH
Example This example will use an empty string to extract to the end of a line:
10 LET IN$ = "BLAH <START> THE DATA"
20 LET B$ = EXTRACT$(IN$, "<START>", "")
30 PRINT B$
RUN
THE DATA
ZBI Commands
String Functions
562
ORD
Description This function returns the ASCII value of the first character of string A$.
Format ORD(A$)
Parameters A$ = Input string: only the first character will be used.
Returns The ASCII value of the first character.
Comments None
Example This is an example of how to use the ORD(A$)command:
10 LET A$="ABC"
20 PRINT ORD(A$)
RUN
65
563
ZBI Commands
String Functions
POS
Description This function returns the location of the first occurrence of a search string in the
target string. It can be assigned an index.
Format
POS(A$,B$)
POS(A$,B$,M)
Parameters
A$ = the target string to search
B$ = the search string to find in A$
M = The index to start looking for B$. If omitted, the search will start at the beginning of
the string. M must be greater than zero.
Returns The location of the string. If the string is not found, this will return 0.
Comments None
Example This is an example of how to use the POS command:
10 LET A$="Hello World"
20 LET B$="o"
30 PRINT POS(A$,B$)
40 PRINT POS(A$,B$,1)
50 PRINT POS(A$,B$,6)
RUN
5
5
8
ZBI Commands
String Functions
564
LEN
Description This function returns the length of a string.
Format LEN(A$)
Parameters A$ = the target string from which to determine the length.
Returns The length of the string.
Comments None
Example This example identifies the length of a string. Hello World is 11 characters, as
follows:
10 LET A$="Hello World"
20 PRINT LEN(A$)
RUN
11
565
ZBI Commands
Math Functions
Math Functions
This section identifies how to handle mathematical calculations. Here is a quick list of these
commands:
STR$ Converts a number to a string.
MAX Returns the greater value between two numbers.
MIN Returns the smaller value of two numbers.
MAXNUM returns the largest number permitted by this machine.
MOD Computes the remainder from division.
VAL Evaluates the number represented by a string.
INTTOHEX$ Takes a numeric value and converts it into a hexadecimal string.
HEXTOINT Converts hexadecimal strings to integers.
ZBI Commands
Math Functions
566
STR$
Description This function converts a number to a string.
Format STR$(X)
Parameters X = the number to convert to a string
Returns A string representing X.
Comments None
Example This is an example of how to use the STR$(X)command:
10 LET A=53
20 PRINT STR$(A)
RUN
53
567
ZBI Commands
Math Functions
MAX
Description This function returns the greater value between two numbers.
Format MAX(X,Y)
Parameters
X = the first number to compare
Y = the second number to compare
Returns The greater of X or Y.
Comments None
Example This is an example of how to use the MAX(X,Y)command:
10 LET A=-2
20 LET B=1
30 PRINT MAX(A,B)
RUN
1
ZBI Commands
Math Functions
568
MIN
Description This function returns the smaller value of two numbers.
Format MIN(X,Y)
Parameters
X = the first number to compare
Y = the second number to compare
Returns The smaller of X or Y.
Comments None
Example This is an example of how to use the MIN(X,Y)command:
10 LET A=-2
20 LET B=0
30 PRINT MIN(A,B)
RUN
-2
569
ZBI Commands
Math Functions
MAXNUM
Description This function returns the largest number permitted by this machine:
2,147,483,647.
Format MAXNUM
Parameters N/A
Returns The largest number that the NUMERIC type can handle (2,147,483,647).
Comments None
Example This is an example of how to use the MAXNUM command:
10 PRINT MAXNUM
RUN
2147483647
ZBI Commands
Math Functions
570
MOD
Description This function computes the remainder from division. (This is known as the
modulus.)
Format MOD(X,Y)
Parameters
X = the value to be modulated (numerator).
Y = the base number or divisor (denominator).
Returns The remainder of the division (X/Y).
Comments None
Example This is an example of how to use the MOD(X,Y)command:
10 PRINT MOD(25,10)
20 PRINT MOD(2,1)
30 PRINT MOD(3,2)
40 PRINT MOD(9,2)
50 PRINT MOD(-2,9)
60 PRINT MOD(2,0)
RUN
5
0
1
1
-2
ERROR OCCURRED ON LINE 60:DIVIDE BY ZERO
571
ZBI Commands
Math Functions
VAL
Description This function evaluates the number represented by a string.
Format VAL(A$)
Parameters A$ = This is the input string to pull the number from. Non-numbers are
ignored.
Returns The numeric representation of the string.
Comments None
Example This is an example of how to use the VAL(A$)command:
10 LET A$="123"
20 LET C=VAL(A$)
30 PRINT C
RUN
123
PRINT VAL("321A123")
321123
ZBI Commands
Math Functions
572
INTTOHEX$
Format INTTOHEX$(A)
Parameters A = The numeric value to convert.
Returns A string representing the integer in hex.
Comments Negative values will be returned as 0.
Description This function will take a numeric value and convert it into a hexadecimal
string. The range of values for integers is:
-2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647
Example These print statements show the output of the INTTOHEX$ function given
different values.
PRINT INTTOHEX$(1)
1
PRINT INTTOHEX$(10)
A
PRINT INTTOHEX$(16)
10
PRINT INTTOHEX$(20)
14
PRINT INTTOHEX$(30)
1E
PRINT INTTOHEX$(100)
64
PRINT INTTOHEX$(123124)
1EOF4
PRINT INTTOHEX$(-5)
0
PRINT INTTOHEX$(-99)
0
573
ZBI Commands
Math Functions
HEXTOINT
Format HEXTOINT(A$)
Parameters A$ = The hex string to convert.
Returns A integer string computed from the hexadecimal string.
Comments Negative values will be returned as 0.
Description This function will convert hexadecimal strings to integers.
Example These print statements show the output of the INTTOHEX function given
different values.
PRINT HEXTOINT("0")
0
PRINT HEXTOINT("A")
10
PRINT HEXTOINT("a")
10
PRINT HEXTOINT("1A")
26
PRINT HEXTOINT("10")
16
PRINT HEXTOINT("AaAa")
43690
PRINT HEXTOINT("AAAA")
43690
PRINT HEXTOINT("-1")
0
PRINT HEXTOINT("-A")
0
ZBI Commands
Array Functions
574
Array Functions
This section describes the functions to search, resize, and query arrays.
REDIM Changes the size of an array.
INSERTROW Inserts a new row into an existing array.
DELROW Deletes a new row from an existing array
ROWSIZE Returns the number of rows in an array.
COLUMNSIZE Returns the number of columns in an array.
FIND Searches a string array for an occurrence of a sub-string.
575
ZBI Commands
Array Functions
REDIM
Format
REDIM <ARRAYNAME>(<SIZE>)
REDIM <ARRAYNAME>(<ROWS>,<COLUMNS>)
REDIM <ARRAYNAME$>(<SIZE>)
REDIM <ARRAYNAME$>(<ROWS>,<COLUMNS>)
Parameters
<SIZE> = new number of entries in a single dimension array.
<ROWS> = new number of rows in a two dimensional array.
<COLUMNS> = new number of columns in a two dimensional array.
Comments The REDIM must have the same number of dimensions as the original
declaration of the array.
If the array has two dimensions, the second array bound cannot change. It must have the same
value as the original declaration.
If REDIM makes an array smaller, elements (or rows, for a two dimensional array) at the end of
the array are discarded.
Description This command will change the dimensions of an array.
Example This example shows how to change a one dimensional numeric array.
10 DECLARE NUMERIC SCORES(3)
20 LET SCORES(1) = 85
50 REDIM SCORES(2) ! Discard the last one
Example This example shows how to change a two dimensional string array.
10 DECLARE STRING NAMEAGES$(3,2)
20 LET NAMEAGES$(1,1) = "Abraham"
30 LET NAMEAGES$(1,2) = "Lincoln"
40 LET NAMEAGES$(2,1) = "Dwight"
50 LET NAMEAGES$(2,2) = "Eisenhower"
60 LET NAMEAGES$(3,1) = "Theodore"
70 LET NAMEAGES$(3,2) = "Roosevelt"
80 REDIM NAMEAGES$(5,2) ! Make room for more
ZBI Commands
Array Functions
576
If REDIM makes an array larger, elements (or rows) are added at the end of the array, and
initialized as they would be with a DECLARE.
This can be an interactive command that takes effect as soon as it is received by the printer, or
a program command that is preceded by a line number.
577
ZBI Commands
Array Functions
INSERTROW
Format INSERTROW (<ARRAYNAME>, <INDEX>)
Parameters
<ARRAYNAME> = array where the row will be inserted
<INDEX> = index of the row in the array that the new row will be inserted before
Comments Inserting a row increases the size of the array by one row, and moves all the
rows from INDEX to the end of the array up one row, leaving an empty row at position
INDEX.
INDEX cannot be any larger the number of rows in the array plus one. If the number of rows
plus one is provided, the new row will be added to the end of the array.
Description This command will insert a new row into an existing array.
Example This example shows how to insert a row into the middle of an array.
50 INSERTROW(SCORES, 2)
Example This example shows how to add a row into the end of an array.
50 INSERTROW(SCORES, 4)
ZBI Commands
Array Functions
578
DELROW
Format DELROW (<ARRAYNAME>, <INDEX>)
Parameters
<ARRAYNAME> = the array where the row will be deleted
<INDEX> = index of the row to delete from the array
Comments This decreases the size of A by one row, and moves all the rows from INDEX to
the end of the array down by one, overwriting the row at position INDEX.
INDEX cannot be any larger the number of rows in the array.
If the array only has one row, that row may not be deleted.
Description This command will delete a row from an existing array.
Example This example shows how to delete a row from the middle of an array.
70 DELROW(SCORES, 4) ! Remove the low score
579
ZBI Commands
Array Functions
ROWSIZE
Format
ROWSIZE(A)
ROWSIZE(A$)
Parameters
A = integer array to query for the number of rows.
A$ = string array to query for the number of rows.
Returns Returns a 0 if the variable is not an array. Returns the number of elements in the
array if the array has only one dimension. Returns the size of the first dimension if the array
has two dimensions.
Description This function will return the number of rows in an array.
Example This example shows how to determine the number of elements in a one
dimensional string array.
10 DECLARE STRING NAMES$(3)
20 LET NAMES$(1) = "Fred"
30 LET NAMES$(2) = "Wilma"
40 LET NAMES$(3) = "Barney"
50 REDIM NAMES$(4) ! Make room for Betty
60 LET NAMES$(4) = "Betty"
70 LET NUMOFNAMES = ROWSIZE(NAMES$)
80 PRINT NUMOFNAMES
Example This example shows how to determine the number of rows in a two dimensional
numeric array.
10 DECLARE NUMERIC SQROFTWOLOOKUP(3,2)
20 LET SQROFTWOLOOKUP (1,1) = 1
80 LET NUMOFSQRS = ROWSIZE(SQROFTWOLOOKUP)
90 PRINT NUMOFSQRS
ZBI Commands
Array Functions
580
COLUMNSIZE
Format
COLUMNSIZE(A)
COLUMNSIZE(A$)
Parameters
A = integer array to query for the number of columns.
A$ = string array to query for the number of columns.
Returns A 0 if the variable is not an array. Returns 1 if the array has only one dimension.
Returns the size of the second dimension if the array has two dimensions.
Description This function will return the number of columns in an array.
Example This example shows how to determine the number of elements in a one
dimensional string array.
50 REDIM NAMES$(4) ! Make room for Betty
70 LET NUMOFCOLS = COLUMNSIZE(NAMES$)
80 PRINT NUMOFCOLS
Example This example shows how to determine the number of columns in a two
dimensional numeric array.
10 DECLARE NUMERIC SQROFTWOLOOKUP(3,2)
80 LET COLCNT = COLUMNSIZE(SQROFTWOLOOKUP)
90 PRINT COLCNT
581
ZBI Commands
Array Functions
FIND
Format
FIND(A$, B$)
FIND(A$, B$, START)
FIND(A$, COLUMN, B$)
FIND(A$, COLUMN, B$, START)
Parameters
A$ = string array to search for B$.
B$ = string to search for within A$.
START = index within a single dimensional array, or row for a two dimensional array, to
start the search.
COLUMN = column to isolate search to in a two dimensional array. This must be supplied
if A$ is a two dimensional array.
Returns Returns a 0 if B$ is not found or if there was an error. Otherwise, returns the index
that contains the first occurrence of the string B$ (the element index for one dimensional
arrays, the row for two dimensional arrays).
Description This function will find an element of a string array that contains an identified
search string.
Example This example shows how to find a string in a one dimensional array.
60 LET BARNEYIX = FIND(NAMES$, "Bar")
70 PRINT "Found Barney in element "; STR$(BARNEYIX)
ZBI Commands
Array Functions
582
Comments COLUMN must be greater than 0.
If START is given, it must be greater than 0.
Example This example shows how to find a string that occurs more than once in a two
dimensional array.
10 DECLARE STRING CLOTHING$(5,2)
20 LET TYPECOL = 1
30 LET MATERIALCOL = 2
40 LET CLOTHING$(1,1) = "Gloves"
50 LET CLOTHING$(1,2) = "Knit"
60 LET CLOTHING$(2,1) = "Pants"
70 LET CLOTHING$(2,2) = "Cotton"
80 LET CLOTHING$(3,1) = "Gloves"
90 LET CLOTHING$(3,2) = "Leather"
100 LET CLOTHING$(4,2) = "Shirts"
110 LET CLOTHING$(4,2) = "Polyester"
120 LET CLOTHING$(5,2) = "Pants"
130 LET CLOTHING$(5,2) = "Denim"
140 LET GLOVEIX = 1
150 DO
160 LET GLOVEIX = FIND(CLOTHING$, TYPECOL, "Gloves", GLOVEIX)
170 IF NOT GLOVEIX = 0 THEN
180 PRINT CLOTHING$(GLOVEIX, MATERIALCOL), "gloves are available"
190 LET GLOVEIX = GLOVEIX + 1
200 END IF
210 LOOP WHILE NOT GLOVEIX = 0
583
ZBI Commands
Time and Date Functions
This section describes the functions to access the real time clock option. Here is a quick list of
these commands:
DATE$ Returns the date as a string
TIME$ Returns the current time in a string.
DATE Gets the current date as a number.
TIME Gets the current time as a number.
ZBI Commands
584
DATE$
Description This function returns the date as a string.
Format DATE$
Parameters N/A
Returns The current date in string form YYYYMMDD. If the Real-Time Clock is not installed,
an empty string is returned.
Comments None
Example This is an example of how to use the DATE$ command:
10 PRINT DATE$
RUN
The result, assuming the date is January 1, 2003 is:
20030101
Example This is another example of the DATE$ command used with the sub-string
operator to get the day of the month:
10 LET A$=DATE$(7:8)
20 IF A$ <> DATE$(7:8)
30 LET A$=DATE$(7:8)
40 IF A$="01"
50 PRINT "IT IS THE FIRST OF THE MONTH"
60 END IF
70 END IF
80 SLEEP 100
90 GOTO 20
585
ZBI Commands
TIME$
Description This function returns the current time in a string.
Format TIME$
Parameters N/A
Returns This function returns the time of day in format HH:MM:SS
(hours:minutes:seconds). If the Real-Time Clock is not installed, an empty string is returned.
Comments None
Example This is an example of how to use the TIME$command:
10 PRINT TIME$
RUN
10:00:00
ZBI Commands
586
DATE
Description This function gets the current date as a number.
Format DATE
Parameters N/A
Returns This function returns the current date in YYYYDDD format, where YYYY is the year
and DDD is the number of days since the beginning of the year. If the Real-Time Clock is not
installed, 0 is returned.
Comments None
Example This example assumes the current date is January 1, 2003:
10 PRINT DATE
RUN
2003001
587
ZBI Commands
TIME
Description This function gets the current time as a number.
Format TIME
Parameters N/A
Returns This function returns the time past midnight (2400h) in seconds. If the Real-Time
Clock is not installed, 0 is returned.
Comments None
This is an example of how to use the TIME command [assuming the time is one minute past
midnight]:
Example
10 PRINT TIME
RUN
60
ZBI Commands
Set/Get/Do Interactions
588
The printers Set/Get/Do data can be directly accessed via ZBI. For a complete listing of what
can be accessed, see the ZPL Manual, Set-Get-Do Command chapters, or type the following:
! U1 getvar "allcv"
Heres a quick list of these commands:
SETVAR Allows the direct setting of printer parameters.
GETVAR Retrieves printer parameters.
589
ZBI Commands
SETVAR
Format SETVAR (PARAM$, VALUE$)
Parameters
PARAM$ = The printer parameter to set. (See the ZPL Manual for specific parameters.)
VALUE$ = the value to set
Returns Parameter dependent.
Comments None
Description SETVAR allows the direct setting of printer parameters.
Example This is an example of the SETVAR command:
AUTONUM 1,1
LET LOOPCTR = 200
LET TIMER5 = 17
LET TMP = REGISTEREVENT(TIMER5, 0, 1000)
DO WHILE LOOPCTR > 0
IF EVT = TIMER5 THEN
LET A = SETVAR("device.frontpanel.line2",OUTSTR$)
LET OUTSTR$ = OUTSTR$ & "."
IF LEN(OUTSTR$) >16 THEN
END IF
END IF
LET LOOPCTR = LOOPCTR - 1
SLEEP 1
LOOP
LET TMP = UNREGISTEREVENT(TIMER5)
LET A = SETVAR("device.frontpanel.line2","")
END
ZBI Commands
590
GETVAR
Format GETVAR (PARAM$, VALUE$)
Parameters
PARAM$ = the printer parameter to get. (See the ZPL Manual for specific parameters.)
VALUE$ = the string variable where the retrieved data will be placed.
Returns See the SGD Printer Setting Commands on page 615 for specific parameters.
Comments None
Description This function retrieves printer parameters.
Example This is an example of the GETVAR command:
AUTONUM 1,1
LET SGDCOUNT = 7
DECLARE STRING SGDQUERY$(2,SGDCOUNT)
LET SGDQUERY$(1,1) = "appl.name"
LET SGDQUERY$(1,2) = "device.printhead.serialnum"
LET SGDQUERY$(1,3) = "internal_wired.ip.addr"
LET SGDQUERY$(1,4) = "internal_wired.ip.netmask"
LET SGDQUERY$(1,5) = "internal_wired.ip.gateway"
LET SGDQUERY$(1,6) = "internal_wired.ip.port"
LET SGDQUERY$(1,7) = "internal_wired.mac_addr"
FOR I = 1 TO SGDCOUNT
LET SGDQUERY$(2,I) = GETVAR$(SGDQUERY$(1,I))
NEXT I
OPEN #1: NAME "ZPL"
PRINT #1: "^XA"
FOR I = 1 TO SGDCOUNT
PRINT #1: "^FO50,";50*I;"Â0N,25,25^FD";SGDQUERY$(1,I);"=";
PRINT #1: SGDQUERY$(2,I);"^FS"
NEXT I
PRINT #1: "^XZ"
591
ZBI Commands
Example Programs
Example Programs
The next section provides example programs of common tasks using ZBI commands.
These programs are also available for download at: http://www.zebra.com/zbi
Array Program
This program prompts a user to enter first a name; when it is entered, it is added to an array of
all names entered. The user is them prompted to enter an address, which is then added to an
array of all addresses entered. After the user enters a total or five names and addresses, the
program uses the arrays to print the entered data on five labels.
Example This is an example of Array
1 rem ********************************************************
1 rem Zebra Technologies ZBI Sample Program
1 rem
1 rem Professional programming services are available. Please contact
1 rem ZBI-Experts@zebra.com for more information.
1 rem
1 rem This is an example of using arrays to store and use data within
1 rem ZBI.
1 rem ********************************************************
1 rem close all ports except for the console
1 rem*********************************************************
10 for i = 1 to 9 step 1
20 close #i
30 next i
1 rem ********************************************************
1 rem open a port to the print engine
1 rem ******************************************************
40 open #1: name "ZPL"
1 rem ********************************************************
1 rem create string arrays five elements in size to hold names and
1 rem addresses
1 rem ********************************************************
50 declare string name$(5)
60 declare string address$(5)
1 rem ********************************************************
1 rem infinite loop to put name and address data from console into
1 rem arrays
1 rem ********************************************************
ZBI Commands
Example Programs
592
70 do
90 print "PLEASE ENTER THE NAME"
1 rem ********************************************************
1 rem get data from console; input command looks for CRLF
1 rem ********************************************************
100 input name$(i)
1 rem ********************************************************
1 rem if the user inputs end or END, the program will end
1 rem ********************************************************
110 if name$(i) = "END" or name$(i) = "end" then
120 end
130 end if
140 print "PLEASE ENTER THE ADDRESS"
150 input address$(i)
160 if address$(i) = "END" or address$(i) = "end" then
170 end
180 end if
190 next i
200 for index = 1 to 5 step 1 ! For loop To Print data no label
1 rem ********************************************************
1 rem semicolon at the end prints with no CRLF
1 rem ********************************************************
210 print #1: "^XA^FO30,30Â0N,30,30^FD"&NAME$(INDEX)&"^FS";
1 rem ********************************************************
1 rem ampersand used to concatenate data into strings
1 rem ********************************************************
220 print #1: "^FO30,70Â0N,30,30^FD"&ADDRESS$(INDEX)&"^FS^XZ"
230 next index
240 loop ! loops back To Line 60
250 end
593
ZBI Commands
Example Programs
CSV Program
This example consists of two programs. The first is used to create an example CSV file to
serve as the database for the second example. The second example program presents a user
with a console-based menu that allows them to query, update, and print contents of a CSV file
using a hand-held barcode scanner attached to the serial port. When querying, adding an entry,
or deleting an entry from the database the user is asked to scan an item. Depending upon the
action an item will be printed on the console, added to the CSV file, or removed from the CSV
file. The final option allows the user to print the contents of the CSV file in an easy to read
format.
Example Creating an example database:
10 REM *******************************************************
15 REM Zebra Technologies ZBI Sample Program
20 REM
25 REM Professional programming services are available. Please contact
30 REM ZBI-Experts@zebra.com for more information.
35 REM
40 REM This is an example of how to create a CSV file for
45 REM the inventory example
50 REM
55 REM The CSV file for this example is comma delimited and
60 REM consists of three columns per row/item. The first row
65 REM is the scanned barcode number, the second is a
70 REM description of the item, and the third is the number
75 REM of units in stock.
80 REM *******************************************************
85 REM
90 REM
95 LET CRLF$ = CHR$ ( 13 ) & CHR$ ( 10 )
100 LET DBENTRIES$ = "0102030405,Acme Hammer,14" & CRLF$
105 LET DBENTRIES$ = DBENTRIES$ & "0201040306,Acme Nails,13657" & CRLF$
110 LET DBENTRIES$ = DBENTRIES$ & "2010403060,Acme Bandaids,324" & CRLF$
115 LET STRERR = TXTSTORE ( DBENTRIES$ , "E:INVTRY.CSV" )
120 IF STRERR = 1 THEN
125 PRINT "Failed to create example database"
130 ELSE
135 PRINT "Successfully created the example database"
140 END IF
ZBI Commands
Example Programs
594
Example Using the example database:
10 REM********************************************************
15 REM Zebra Technologies ZBI Sample Program
20 REM
25 REM Professional programming services are available. Please
contact
30 REM ZBI-Experts@zebra.com for more information.
35 REM
40 REM This is an example of using a CSV database to store
45 REM an inventory of various items. The items are stored
50 REM and retrieved via a barcode scanner attached to the
55 REM serial port.
60 REM
65 REM The CSV file for this example is comma delimited and
70 REM consists of three columns per row/item. The first row
75 REM is the scanned barcode number, the second is a
80 REM description of the item, and the third is the number
85 REM of units in stock.
90 REM An example CSV File contents:
95 REM 0102030405,Acme Hammer,14
100 REM 0201040306,Acme Nails,13657
105 REM 2010403060,Acme Bandaids,324
110 REM*******************************************************
115 REM
120 REM
125 REM Column identifiers
130 LET COLBCODEID = 1
135 LET COLDESC = 2
140 LET COLQTY = 3
145 REM The scanned item id is stored here
150 LET SCANNEDITEM$ = "NA"
155 REM
160 GOSUB OPENINVENTORY ! Open the DB for use
165 REM
170 REM **************************************************
175 REM Console Menu
180 REM **************************************************
185 SUB MAINMENU
190 PRINT ""
595
ZBI Commands
Example Programs
Example Using the example database (continued):
195 PRINT "----------------------------------------------"
200 PRINT "Inventory Management Menu"
205 PRINT "----------------------------------------------"
210 PRINT "1. Check the quantity of an item in the inventory"
215 PRINT "2. Add a new item to the inventory"
220 PRINT "3. Delete an item from inventory"
225 PRINT "4. Display the entire inventory"
230 PRINT "5. Exit Program"
235 PRINT "Option: " ;
240 INPUT USRSELECT
245 IF USRSELECT = 1 THEN
250 GOSUB SCANITEM ! Retrieve the item to scan
255 GOSUB LOCATEITEM ! Find the item in the DB
260 ELSE IF USRSELECT = 2 THEN
265 GOSUB ADDITEM
275 GOSUB REMOVEITEM
285 GOSUB SHOWINVENTORY
295 END
300 ELSE
305 PRINT STR$ ( USRSELECT ) , "is not a valid option."
310 END IF
315 GOSUB MAINMENU ! Loop back to the start
320 RETURN
325 REM
330 REM
335 REM **************************************************
340 REM Connect to the scanner and return the scanned item
345 REM **************************************************
350 SUB SCANITEM
355 PRINT "Please scan the item."
360 CLOSE # 1
365 OPEN # 1 : NAME "SER"
370 GOSUB GETINPUT
375 PRINT "Scanned item:" , SCANNEDITEM$
380 CLOSE # 1
385 RETURN
390 REM
395 REM
ZBI Commands
Example Programs
596
Example Utilizing the example database (continued):
400 REM **************************************************
405 REM Open the inventory database
410 REM **************************************************
415 SUB OPENINVENTORY
420 DECLARE STRING INVDB$ ( 2 , 2 )
425 LET INVDBNAME$ = "E:INVTRY.CSV"
430 LET NUMOFFIELDS = CSVLOAD ( INVDB$ , INVDBNAME$ )
435 ON ERROR GOSUB DBOPENERROR
440 IF NUMOFFIELDS = 0 THEN
445 GOSUB DBOPENERROR
450 END IF
455 LET NUMOFITEMS = ROWSIZE ( INVDB$ )
460 IF NUMOFITEMS < 1 THEN
465 PRINT "ERROR: Invalid number of rows in the inventory database"
470 END
475 END IF
480 RETURN
485 REM
490 SUB DBOPENERROR
495 PRINT "ERROR: Failed to open the inventory database"
500 END
505 RETURN
510 REM
515 REM
520 REM **************************************************
525 REM Locate an item in the inventory database
530 REM **************************************************
535 SUB LOCATEITEM
540 LET ITEMIX = FIND ( INVDB$ , COLBCODEID , SCANNEDITEM$ )
545 IF ITEMIX = 0 THEN
550 PRINT "Could not find an item" , SCANNEDITEM$ , "in the
inventory."
555 ELSE
560 LET ITEMDESC$ = INVDB$ ( ITEMIX , COLDESC )
565 LET ITEMQTY$ = INVDB$ ( ITEMIX , COLQTY )
570 PRINT "Found item" , ITEMDESC$ ; ". There are" , ITEMQTY$ , "units
in stock."
575 END IF
580 RETURN
585 REM
590 REM
597
ZBI Commands
Example Programs
595 REM **************************************************
600 REM Add a new item to the inventory database
605 REM Add it to the end of the database
610 REM **************************************************
615 SUB ADDITEM
620 GOSUB SCANITEM ! Retrieve the item to add
625 LET EXISTS = FIND ( INVDB$ , COLBCODEID , SCANNEDITEM$ )
630 IF EXISTS > 0 THEN
635 PRINT "Error: This item is already in the database."
640 RETURN
645 END IF
650 LET NUMOFITEMS = ROWSIZE ( INVDB$ )
655 LET NEWCNT = NUMOFITEMS + 1
660 INSERTROW ( INVDB$ , NEWCNT )
665 PRINT "Enter a description for item" , SCANNEDITEM$ ; ": " ;
670 INPUT ITEMDESC$
675 PRINT "Enter the initial quantity for this item: " ;
680 INPUT NEWQTY$
685 LET INVDB$ ( NEWCNT , COLBCODEID ) = SCANNEDITEM$
690 LET INVDB$ ( NEWCNT , COLDESC ) = ITEMDESC$
695 LET INVDB$ ( NEWCNT , COLQTY ) = NEWQTY$
700 GOSUB STOREDB
705 RETURN
710 REM
715 REM
720 REM **************************************************
725 REM Remove an item from the database
730 REM **************************************************
735 SUB REMOVEITEM
740 GOSUB SCANITEM ! Retrieve the item to delete
745 LET ITEMIX = FIND ( INVDB$ , COLBCODEID , SCANNEDITEM$ )
750 IF ITEMIX = 0 THEN
755 PRINT "Error: This item is not in the database."
760 RETURN
765 END IF
770 LET DELDESC$ = INVDB$ ( ITEMIX , COLDESC )
775 DELROW ( INVDB$ , ITEMIX )
780 PRINT "Removed item" , DELDESC$ , "(" ; SCANNEDITEM$ ; ") from
inventory."
785 GOSUB STOREDB
790 RETURN
795 REM
ZBI Commands
Example Programs
598
800 REM
805 REM **************************************************
810 REM Store the inventory db to the file system
815 REM **************************************************
820 SUB STOREDB
825 LET SERROR = CSVSTORE ( INVDB$ , INVDBNAME$ )
830 IF NOT SERROR = 0 THEN
835 PRINT "ERROR: Failed to store the inventory to the file system"
840 END
845 END IF
850 PRINT "Updated " ; INVDBNAME$ ; "."
855 RETURN
860 REM
865 REM
870 REM **************************************************
875 REM Print the entire inventory
880 REM **************************************************
885 SUB SHOWINVENTORY
890 PRINT "====================================="
895 PRINT " Item currently in inventory"
900 PRINT "====================================="
905 LET RNUM = ROWSIZE ( INVDB$ )
910 FOR I = 1 TO RNUM STEP 1
915 PRINT STR$ ( I ) ; ". [" ; INVDB$ ( I , COLBCODEID ) ; "] " ;
INVDB$ ( I , COLDESC ) ; ". Quantity = " ; INVDB$ ( I , COLQTY )
; "."
920 NEXT I
925 RETURN
1000 SUB GETINPUT
1005 INPUT # 1 : SCANNEDITEM$
1010 IF DATAREADY ( 1 ) = 1 THEN
1015 INBYTE # 1 : THROWAWAYLF$
1020 END IF
1025 RETURN
599
ZBI Commands
Example Programs
DPI Conversion Program
This program converts a ZPL format being sent to the printer on the parallel port to 300 dpi
(dots per inch) from 200 dpi (dots per inch). This is done by searching for and extracting ZPL
commands with resolution-dependent arguments and scaling the arguments for a 300 dpi
printer.
Example This is an example of dpi conversion:
1 rem **************************************************
1 rem
1 rem
1 rem This is an example of converting a printer from 200 dpi (dots 1
rem per inch
1 rem to 300 dpi. This example covers only some of the ZPL commands 1
rem that
1 rem could be affected by converting from 200 to 300 dpi printing.
1 rem **************************************************
1 rem open the ports for input and output
1 rem **************************************************
10 close #1
20 close #2
30 open #1 : name "PAR"
40 open #2 : name "ZPL"
1 rem **************************************************
1 rem create an array with the search parameters
1 rem **************************************************
50 declare string find$(20)
60 let find$(1) = "^FO"
70 let find$(2) = "Â0"
80 let find$(3) = "^GB"
90 let find$(4) = "^XZ"
100 let find$(5) = "Â@"
110 let find$(6) = "^LL"
120 let find$(7) = "^LH"
130 let find$(8) = "FO"
140 let find$(9) = "A0"
150 let find$(10) = "GB"
160 let find$(11) = "XZ"
170 let find$(12) = "A@"
180 let find$(14) = "LH"
190 let find$(15) = "^BY"
200 let find$(16) = "BY"
210 let find$(17) = "^B3"
220 let find$(18) = "B3"
ZBI Commands
Example Programs
600
1 rem *******************************************************
1 rem search for the parameters
1 rem *******************************************************
300 do
310 let in$ = searchto$(1, find$, 2)
1 rem ********************************************************
1 rem once a parameter is found, determine how to handle it
1 rem ********************************************************
320 if in$ = "^FO" or in$ = "FO" then
330 gosub 520
340 else if in$ = "^LH" or in$ = "LH" then
350 gosub 520
360 else if in$ = "Â0" or in$ = "A0" then
370 gosub 700
380 else if in$ = "Â@" or in$ = "A@" then
390 gosub 700
400 else if in$ = "^GB" or in$ = "GB" then
410 gosub 1100
420 else if in$ = "^LL" then
430 gosub 1300
440 else if in$ = "^BY" or in$ = "BY" then
450 gosub 1400
460 else if in$ = "^B3" or in$ = "B3" then
470 gosub 1600
480 else if in$ = "^XZ" then
490 print #2: in$;
500 end if
510 loop
1 rem ********************************************************
1 rem convert the ^FO and ^LH commands from 200 to 300 dpi
1 rem ********************************************************
520 inbyte #1: a$
530 let a = ord(a$)
540 if a >= 65 then
550 print #2: in$&a$;
560 goto 660
570 end if
580 let x$ = extract$(1, "", ", ")
590 let x2$ = a$&x$
600 let y$ = extract$(1, "", "^")
610 let x = val(x2$)
620 let y = val(y$)
630 let x2 = (x/2)+x
640 let y2 = (y/2)+y
650 print #2: in$; x2; ","; y2; "^";
660 return
601
ZBI Commands
Example Programs
1 rem ********************************************************
1 rem convert the Â0 and Â@ commands from 200 to 300 dpi
1 rem ********************************************************
700 inbyte #1: a$
710 let a = ord(a$)
720 let b = 0
730 let c = 0
740 if a >= 65 then
750 print #2: in$&a$; ",";
760 let b = 1
770 end if
780 inbyte #1: a$
790 let h$ = extract$(1, "", ",")
800 if in$ = "Â@" or in$ = "A@" then
810 let c = 1
820 let w$ = extract$(1, "", ",")
830 let m$ = extract$(1, "", "^")
840 else
850 let w$ = extract$(1, "", "^")
860 end if
870 let h = val(h$)
880 let w = val(w$)
900 let h2 = (h/2) + h
910 let w2 = (w/2) + w
920 if b = 1 then
930 print #2: h2; ","; w2;
940 else
950 print #2: in$&"N,"; h2; ","; w2;
960 end if
970 if c = 1 then
980 print #2: ","; m$;
990 end if
1000 print #2: "^";
1010 return
1 rem ********************************************************
1 rem convert the ^GB command from 200 to 300 dpi
1 rem ********************************************************
1020 let w$ = extract$(1, "", ",")
1030 let h$ = extract$(1, "", ",")
1040 let t$ = extract$(1, "", "^")
1050 let h = val(h$)
1060 let w = val(w$)
1070 let t = val(t$)
1080 let h2 = (h/2)+ h
1090 let w2 = (w/2)+ w
1100 let t2 = (t/2)+ t
1110 print #2: in$; w2; ","; h2; ","; t2; "^";
1120 return
ZBI Commands
Example Programs
602
1 rem ********************************************************
1 rem convert the ^LL command from 200 to 300 dpi
1 rem ********************************************************
1300 let l$ = extract$(1, "", "^")
1310 let l = VAL(l$)
1320 let l2 = (l/2) + l
1330 print #2: in$; l2; "^";
1340 return
1 rem ********************************************************
1 rem convert the ^BY command from 200 to 300 dpi
1 rem ********************************************************
1400 inbyte #1: a$
1410 let a = ord(a$)
1420 if a >= 48 and a <= 57 then
1460 let x$ = extract$(1, "", ", ")
1470 let x2$ = a$&x$
1480 let x = val(x2$)
1490 let x2 = (x/2) + x
1500 if x2 > 10 then
1510 let x2 = 10
1520 end if
1530 print #2: in$; x2; ",";
1540 else
1550 print #2: in$; a$;
1560 end if
1570 return
1 rem ********************************************************
1 rem convert the ^B3 command from 200 to 300 dpi
1 rem ********************************************************
1600 let o$ = extract$(1, "", ", ")
1610 let e$ = extract$(1, "", ", ")
1620 let h$ = extract$(1, "", ", ")
1630 let h = val(h$)
1640 let h2 = (h/2) + h
1650 print #2: in$; o$; ","; e$; ","; h2; ",";
1660 return
603
ZBI Commands
Example Programs
Email Program
This program sends a simple email message to user@domain.com, assuming a valid email
server is set up by identifying the SMTP server on the print server. In order to write email via
ZBI, the port written to must be named "EML".
Example This is an example of email
1 rem **************************************************
1 rem
1 rem
1 rem This is an example of connecting to an email server to send
1 rem email.
1 rem **************************************************
1 rem EOT$ is the special character used to denote end of transmission
1 rem **************************************************
5 let EOT$ = chr$(4)
1 rem **************************************************
1 rem Open a connection to the email port; if there is an error, try
1 rem again
1 rem **************************************************
10 open #1: name "EML"
15 on error goto 10
1 rem **************************************************
1 rem Specify address to send message to, signal end of recipients
1 rem with EOT$
1 rem Note: To send to multiple addressees, separate addressees with
1 rem a space
1 rem **************************************************
20 print #1: "user@domain.com";EOT$;
1 rem **************************************************
1 rem Fill in the message information
1 rem **************************************************
30 print #1: "From: Sample User"
40 print #1: "To: Recipient"
50 print #1: "Subject: This is a test"
60 print #1: ""
70 print #1: "Hello!"
80 print #1: i
1 rem **************************************************
1 rem Terminate message
1 rem **************************************************
90 print #1: "";EOT$
ZBI Commands
Example Programs
604
1 rem **************************************************
1 rem Close the port, since each open port is only good for sending
1 rem one message
1 rem **************************************************
100 close #1
110 sleep 2
120 let i = i + 1
130 goto 10
605
ZBI Commands
Example Programs
Extraction 1 Program
This program finds and stores data of interest, which in this case is found in a format after the
string "DATA = ". The extract command is used to get the data from the input stream, and it
is inserted into a simple ZPL format to be printed.
Example This is an example of Extraction 1.
1 rem **************************************************
1 rem
1 rem
1 rem This is an example of using ZBI for data extraction.
1 rem There are two methods for doing extraction; this example shows
1 rem data extraction using a string.
1 rem
1 rem The data to extract is as follows:
1 rem START
1 rem DATA = "hello":
1 rem DATA = "goodbye":
1 rem END
1 rem **************************************************
1 rem close ports except console, open channels to parallel and serial
1 rem ports
1 rem **************************************************
10 close #i
20 next i
30 open #1: name "PAR"
1 rem **************************************************
1 rem create string array to hold data
1 rem **************************************************
50 declare string format$(3)
60 let format$(1) = "START"
70 let format$(2) = "END"
80 let format$(3) = "DATA"
1 rem **************************************************
1 rem main program; look for "START" keyword, if found print ^XA to
ZPL port
1 rem **************************************************
90 do
100 let begin$ = searchto$(1,format$,2)
110 if begin$ = "START" then
120 print #2: "^XA";
ZBI Commands
Example Programs
606
1 rem **************************************************
1 rem if "DATA" keyword is found, get two data strings
1 rem **************************************************
130 else if begin$ = "DATA" then
140 input #1: data_string1$
150 input #1: data_string2$
1 rem **************************************************
1 rem get data from between quotes and print to ZPL port with
formatting
1 rem **************************************************
160 let extracted_data1$ = extract$(data_string1$,"""","""")
170 let extracted_data2$ = extract$(data_string2$,"""","""")
180 print #2:"^FO30,30Â0N,30,30^FD"&extracted_data1$&"^FS";
190 print #2:"^FO30,70Â0N,30,30^FD"&extracted_data2$&"^FS";
200 else if begin$ = "END" then
210 print #2: "^XZ"
220 end if
230 loop
607
ZBI Commands
Example Programs
Extraction 2 Program
This program finds and stores data of interest, which in this case is found in a format after the
string "DATA = ". The input command is used to get the data from the input stream, and it is
inserted into a simple ZPL format to be printed.
Example This is an example of Extraction 2.
1 rem******************************************************
1 rem
1 rem
1 rem This is an example of using ZBI for data extraction.
1 rem There are two methods for doing extraction; this example shows
1 rem data extraction from the port directly.
1 rem
1 rem The data to extract is as follows:
1 rem START
1 rem DATA = "hello":
1 rem DATA = "goodbye":
1 rem END
1 rem******************************************************
1 rem close ports except console, open channels to parallel and serial
ports
1 rem******************************************************
10 close #i
20 next i
30 open #1: name "PAR"
1 rem******************************************************
1 rem create string array to hold data
1 rem*******quotes and print to ZPL port with formatting
1 rem***************************************************
50 declare string format$(3)
60 let format$(1) = "START"
70 let format$(2) = "END"
80 let format$(3) = "DATA"
1 rem******************************************************
1 rem main program; look for "START" keyword, if found print ^XA to
ZPL port
1 rem******************************************************
ZBI Commands
Example Programs
608
90 do
100 let begin$ = searchto$(1, format$, 2)
110 if begin$ = "START" then
120 print #2: "^XA";
1 rem******************************************************
1 rem if "DATA" keyword is found, get two data strings
1 rem******************************************************
130 else if begin$ = "DATA" then
1 rem***************************************************
1 rem get data from between q
140 let extracted_data1$ = extract$(1,"""","""")
150 input #1: junk$
170 let extracted_data2$ = extract$(1,"""","""")
180 print #2:"^FO30,30Â0N,30,30^FD" &extracted_data1$& "^FS";
190 print #2:"^FO30,70Â0N,30,30^FD" &extracted_data2$& "^FS";
200 else if begin$ = "END" then
210 print #2: "^XZ"
220 end if
230 loop
609
ZBI Commands
Example Programs
Front Panel Control
This example shows how to intercept front panel button presses and write to the display to
create a simple menu. The buttons used in this demo are set up for a Z4M/Z6M or
ZM400/ZM600. This could be reconfigured to work with any other printer.
Example This is an example of front panel control.
1 REM This example shows how to override the functionality of the feed
key
1 REM and use the front panel display to show a option list
AUTONUM 1,1
REM CLOSE ALL
DECLARE STRING OPTIONS$(5)
FOR I = 1 TO 5
LET OPTIONS$(I) = "Option " & STR$(I)
NEXT I
LET ZPLPORT = 1
LET FEEDKEY = 3
LET SELECTKEY = 10
LET PLUSKEY = 6
LET MINUSKEY = 7
LET EXITKEY = 9
SUB NORMALLOOP
DO WHILE 1 = 1
LET INDEX = 1
GOSUB REGISTERKEYS
GOSUB SHOWMENU
GOTO FEEDLOOP
END IF
SLEEP 1
LOOP
SUB FEEDLOOP
DO WHILE 1 = 1
GOSUB RELEASEKEYS
GOSUB HIDEMENU
GOTO NORMALLOOP
ELSE IF EVT = SELECTKEY THEN
GOSUB HANDLEOPTION
ELSE IF EVT = PLUSKEY THEN
LET INDEX = INDEX + 1
IF INDEX > 5 THEN
LET INDEX = 1
END IF
ZBI Commands
Example Programs
610
GOSUB SHOWMENU
ELSE IF EVT = MINUSKEY THEN
LET INDEX = INDEX - 1
IF INDEX < 1 THEN
LET INDEX = 5
END IF
GOSUB SHOWMENU
ELSE IF EVT = EXITKEY THEN
GOSUB RELEASEKEYS
GOSUB HIDEMENU
GOTO NORMALLOOP
END IF
SLEEP 1
LOOP
REM ******** SUBROUTINE SHOWMENU ***
SUB SHOWMENU
LET LINE1$ = "FEED DISPLAY"
LET LINE2$ = OPTIONS$(INDEX)
GOSUB UPDATEDISPLAY
RETURN
REM ******** SUBROUTINE HIDEMENU ***
SUB HIDEMENU
LET LINE1$ = ""
LET LINE2$ = ""
GOSUB UPDATEDISPLAY
RETURN
SUB UPDATEDISPLAY
LET A = SETVAR("device.frontpanel.line1",LINE1$)
LET A = SETVAR("device.frontpanel.line2",LINE2$)
RETURN
SUB REGISTERKEYS
LET TMP = REGISTEREVENT(SELECTKEY, 0, 1)
LET TMP = REGISTEREVENT(PLUSKEY, 0, 1)
LET TMP = REGISTEREVENT(MINUSKEY, 0, 1)
LET TMP = REGISTEREVENT(EXITKEY, 0, 1)
RETURN
SUB RELEASEKEYS
LET TMP = UNREGISTEREVENT(SELECTKEY)
LET TMP = UNREGISTEREVENT(PLUSKEY)
LET TMP = UNREGISTEREVENT(MINUSKEY)
LET TMP = UNREGISTEREVENT(EXITKEY)
RETURN
SUB HANDLEOPTION
PRINT #ZPLPORT: "^XA^FO100,100Â0N,100,100^FD"; OPTIONS$(INDEX);"^XZ"
RETURN
611
ZBI Commands
Example Programs
Recall Program
This program searches for a ZPL format named "FORMAT.ZPL" that is already saved in
printer memory. If the format is found, a number within the format is extracted and shown on
the console. The user is then prompted to enter a new number, which is then substituted into
the format.
Example This is an example of Recall.zpl
1 rem ********************************************************
1 rem
1 rem
1 rem This is an example of recalling a ZPL format and extracting data
1 rem from it.
1 rem ********************************************************
1 rem close ports except console, open ZPL port and declare search
1 rem array
1 rem ********************************************************
10 for i = 1 to 9 step 1 ! Close all ports
20 close #i
30 next i
40 let zplport = 2
50 open #zplport: name "ZPL"
60 declare string search_zpl$(2)
70 let search_zpl$(1) = chr$(03)
80 let search_zpl$(2) = "FORMAT.ZPL"
1 rem ********************************************************
1 rem main program; look for format to recall on printer
1 rem ********************************************************
90 do
100 print #zplport: "^XA^HWE:*.ZPL^FS^XZ"
110 let present = 0
115 let find$ = ""
120 do until find$ = chr$(03)
130 let find$ = searchto$(zplport, search_zpl$)
140 if find$ = "FORMAT.ZPL" then
150 let present = 1 ! format is present
160 end if
170 loop
ZBI Commands
Example Programs
612
1 rem ********************************************************
1 rem if format is not found, create a format and set data value to
1 rem 000
1 rem ********************************************************
180 if present = 0 then
190 print #zplport:"^XA^DFE:FORMAT.ZPL^FS";
200 print #zplport:"^FX000^FS^XZ"
210 let counter$ = "000"
1 rem ********************************************************
1 rem if format is found, extract the data from ^FX field
1 rem ********************************************************
220 else
230 print #zplport:"^XA^HFE:FORMAT.ZPL^FS^XZ"
240 let stop$ = searchto$(zplport, "^FX")
250 let counter$ = extract$(zplport, "", "^FS")
260 let stop$ = searchto$(zplport, "^XZ")
270 end if
1 rem ********************************************************
1 rem print current data value, prompt user to replace data
1 rem ********************************************************
280 print ""
290 print "Current number in format is " & counter$
300 print "Please enter new number (type EXIT to end) ";
310 input new_counter$
320 if new_counter$ = "EXIT" then
330 print "Program ending"
340 end
350 else
360 print #zplport:"^XA^DFE:FORMAT.ZPL^FS";
370 print #zplport:"^FX" & new_counter$ & "^FS^XZ"
380 end if
390 loop
613
ZBI Commands
Example Programs
Scale Program
This program reads data from a scale connected to the serial port by sending a "W" to the
scale and waiting for a weight to be returned. When the weight is received, it is inserted into a
simple label format and printed.
Example This is an example of Scale
1 rem ********************************************************
1 rem
1 rem
1 rem This is an example of using ZBI to read scale data from the
1 rem serial port.
1 rem ********************************************************
1 rem close all ports except console, open channels to parallel and
1 rem serial ports
1 rem ********************************************************
10 close #i
20 next i
30 open # 2 : name "SER"
40 open # 1 : name "ZPL"
1 rem ********************************************************
1 rem main program; send serial port a 'W' in order to get a weight
1 rem ********************************************************
50 do
60 do
70 sleep 1 ! sleep so scale is not bombarded with incoming
1 rem data
80 print # 2 : "W" ; ! semicolon ends sent W without a CRLF
1 rem ********************************************************
1 rem get response from scale; note that input requires a CRLF to be
1 rem entered
1 rem ********************************************************
90 input # 2 : a$
100 if a$ = "EXIT" then! back door exit - if EXIT is received, ZBI ends
110 close # 2
120 print #1: "^XZ"
130 close #1
140 end
150 end if
1 rem ********************************************************
1 rem loop until valid weight is received, then print on label
1 rem ********************************************************
160 loop while pos ( a$ , "000.00" ) = 1 or pos ( a$ , "?" ) = 1
170 print # 1 : "~SD25^XA^FS";
180 print # 1 : "^LH0,0^FS";
190 print # 1 : "^FO56,47Â0N,69,58^FDThis weighs^FS";
1 rem ********************************************************
1 rem print weight on label; & character concatenates strings
1 rem ********************************************************
200 print # 1 : "^FO56,150Â0N,69,58^FD" & A$ & " lbs^FS";
210 print # 1 : "^PQ1,0,0,N";
220 print # 1 : "^XZ"
1 rem ********************************************************
1 rem loop until weight is off scale, then repeat for next item
1 rem weighed
1 rem ********************************************************
230 do
240 print # 2 : "W" ;
250 input # 2 : A$
260 loop until pos(A$ , "000.00") = 1 or pos(A$ , "?") = 1
270 loop
ZBI Commands
Example Programs
614

Notes ___________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________

6
SGD Printer Commands
This chapter provides a high-level overview of printer setting Set / Get / Do (SGD)
commands. For printer support of these SGD commands, see SGD Command Support
on page 943.
SGD commands are available in printers with firmware version V60.16.2Z, V60.15.xZ,
V50.15.xZ, V61.15.xZ, V56.15.xZ, V53.16.x, V53.15.2Z, or later.
SGD commands are case-sensitive.
Changes made with one command type (ZPL or SGD) will affect the data returned to the
host in response to both ZPL and getvar commands. The command type (ZPL or SGD)
that was sent last determines the current setting.
Some RF cards do not support all of the SGD commands.
languages can be used without the need to send the printer instructions to switch from one
language to another.
Overview
616

Overview
This section describes how and why to use the Set / Get / Do (SGD) commands. It also
provides an example of a typical command structure.
SGD commands are commands that allow you to configure all printers with firmware versions
V60.15.xZ, V50.15.xZ, V61.15.xZ, V56.15.xZ, V53.15.xZ, or later. The printer performs the
specified function immediately after receiving the command. The commands are:
setvar
getvar
do
setvar Command
Setvar commands:
are used to configure printer settings to specific values by setting them in the printer
must be terminated by a space character or a CR/ LF (0x0D, 0x0A)
getvar Command
Getvar commands:
are used to get the current value of the printer settings
must be terminated by a space character or CR/LF (0x0D, 0x0A)
The printer responds with the printer setting of ? if:
the printer setting does not exist (usually due to incorrect spelling of the printer setting)
it has not been configured yet
Note SGD commands must be terminated by a carriage return or a space and line feed.
Important The setvar command and attributes must be specified in lower case.
Important The printer settings and attributes must be specified in lower case.
617
Overview

do Command
Do commands:
are used to instruct the printer to perform predefined actions
must be terminated by a space character or a CR/LF (0x0D, 0x0A)
Some Do commands require additional settings which must be enclosed in double quotes.
Important The values must be specified in lower case.
Command Structure
618

Command Structure
It is important to understand the structure of the command and its components. A command
structure illustration is provided for each command in this guide.
This command must be terminated by a space character or a CR/ LF (0x0D, 0x0A).
How to Send Multiple SGD Commands
For any getvar, setvar, or do command, if you issue the syntax without the "1" and use
the END command followed by a space, multiple SGD commands are sent simultaneously.
Example This is an example of a command structure illustration:
1 Commandalways preceded with an exclamation point (!) and must be specified in
lower case. A space resides between the !and U1 and between U1 and the command
(setvar or getvar).
2 Attributealways in double quotes and must be specified in lower case.
3 Chosen valuealways in double quotes. Only applicable for setvar and do.
Note Some RF cards do not support all of the SGD commands.
! U1 setvar "ip.addr" "value"
1 2 3
Example This syntax shows how you can send multiple getvar commands:
1 The command portion of the string does not use the "1" after the "! U".
2 Commands issued after the first command do not require the "! U".
3 The string of commands is terminated by the word "END" with a space after the
word, and by a carriage return/ line feed.
! U getvar "ip.telnet.enable"
getvar "ip.dhcp.enable"
getvar "ip.dhcp.cid_prefix"
END
1
3
2
619
appl.option_board_version
Description This command returns the version number of the firmware running on the
wireless option board. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar
This table identifies the command for this format:
Note For details on SGD command structure, see Command Structure on page 618.
Commands Details
getvar This command returns the version number of the firmware running on the
wireless option board.
Format: ! U1 getvar "appl.option_board_version"
Example This command returns the version number of the firmware running on the
wireless option board.
! U1 getvar "appl.option_board_version"
"0.0.0 *"
appl.bootblock
620
appl.bootblock
Description This command refers to the bootblock version. On the configuration label, the
bootblock number is identified as the hardware ID. For printer support, see SGD Command
Support on page 943.
Type getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command returns the bootblock version number that appears on the
configuration label .
Format: ! U1 getvar "appl.bootblock"
Example In this example, the getvar returns the bootblock version number.
! U1 getvar "appl.bootblock"
621
appl.name
appl.name
Description This command refers to the printers firmware version. For printer support, see
SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command returns the printers firmware version.
Format: ! U1 getvar "appl.name"
Example In this example, the getvar returns the printers firmware version.
! U1 getvar "appl.name"
cutter.clean_cutter
622
cutter.clean_cutter
Description This command determines if the clean cutter option is enabled or disabled. For
printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar;setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the status of the clean cutter option.
Format: ! U1 getvar "cutter.clean_cutter"
setvar This command instructs the printer to set the clean cutter option.
Format: ! U1 setvar "cutter.clean_cutter"
Values:
"on" = turns on clean cutter
"off" = turns off clean cutter
Default: "on"
Example This setvar example shows the value set to "on".
! U1 setvar "cutter.clean_cutter" "on"
When the setvar value is set to "on", the getvar result is "on".
623
device.download_connection_timeout
Description This command instructs the printer to abort a firmware download if the printer
fails to receive any download data in the set amount of seconds. If the set amount of seconds is
exceeded, the download will be aborted, and the printer automatically restarts. This command
prevents the printer from being locked into the downloading state, if the communication to the
host is interrupted. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar;setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the connection time out value (in seconds).
Format:
! U1 getvar "device.download_connection_timeout"
setvar This command instructs the printer to abort a firmware download if the printer
fails to receive any download data in the set amount of seconds.
Format:
! U1 setvar "device.download_connection_timeout" "value"
Values: "0" through "65535"
Default: "0" ("0" disables this feature)
Example This setvar example shows the value set to "0".
! U1 setvar "device.download_connection_timeout" "0"
When the setvar value is set to "0", the getvar result is "0".
device.friendly_name
624
Description This command shows the name assigned to the printer. For printer support, see
Type getvar;setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the name assigned to the printer.
Format: ! U1 getvar "device.friendly_name"
setvar This command sets the printers name.
Format: ! U1 setvar "device.friendly_name" "value"
Default: "xxxxxxxxxx" ("xxxxxxxxxx"represents the main logic
board serial number)
Example This setvar example shows the value set to "xxxxxxxxxx".
! U1 setvar "device.friendly_name" "xxxxxxxxxx"
When the setvar value is set to "xxxxxxxxxx", the getvar result is
"xxxxxxxxxx".
625
device.frontpanel.key_press
Description This command instructs the printer to press a button on the front panel. For
Type setvar
Commands Details
setvar This command instructs the printer to press a button on the front panel.
Format: ! U1 setvar "device.frontpanel.key_press"
Values: The values vary per printer, as follows:
ZM400, Z4M/Z6M values:
"A" = Pause
"B" = Feed
"C" = Cancel
"D" = Setup/Exit
"E" = Minus
"F" = Select
"G" = Plus
XiIIIplus:
"A" = Pause
"B" = Feed
"C" = Cancel
"D" = Setup/Exit
"E" = Previous
"F" = Next/Save
"G" = Minus
"H" = Plus
"I" = Calibrate
S4M:
"A" = Pause
"B" = Feed
"C" = Up Arrow
"D" = Cancel
"E" = Menu
"F" = Enter
Example This setvar example shows the value set to "A".
! U1 setvar "device.frontpanel.key_press" "A"
device.frontpanel.line1
626
Description This command overrides the content that is shown on the first line of the front
panel when the printer is showing the idle display. Use of the getvar function is dependent
on first using the setvar function. For example, to have the first line of the idle display to
show HELLO, you must first send a setvar command; then a getvar command can be
sent to retrieve the value HELLO. For printer support, see SGD Command Support
on page 943. For details on the supported character set, see Character Set on page 940.
Type getvar;setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the content that is shown on line one of the front
panel.
Format: ! U1 getvar "device.frontpanel.line1"
setvar This command instructs the printer to set the content that is shown on line
one of the front panel.
Format:
! U1 setvar "device.frontpanel.line1" "value"
Values: The maximum amount of alphanumeric ASCII characters available
for line 1 on the printers front panel
Default: ""
Example This setvar example shows the value set to "sample line 1".
! U1 setvar "device.frontpanel.line1" "sample line 1"
When the setvar value is set to "sample line 1", the getvar result is "sample
line 1".
627
Description This command overrides the content that is shown on the second line of the
front panel when the printer is showing the idle display. Use of the getvar function is
dependent on using the setvar function. For example, to have the second line of the idle
display show HELLO, you must first send a setvar command; then a getvar command
can be sent to retrieve the value HELLO. For printer support, see SGD Command Support
on page 943. For details on the supported character set, see Character Set on page 940.
Type getvar;setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the content that shows on line two of the front
panel.
Format: ! U1 getvar "device.frontpanel.line2"
setvar This command instructs the printer to set the content that shows on line
two of the front panel.
Format:
! U1 setvar "device.frontpanel.line2" "value"
Values: The maximum amount of alphanumeric ASCII characters available
for line two on the printers front panel
Default: ""
Example This setvar example shows the value set to "sample line 2".
! U1 setvar "device.frontpanel.line2" "sample line 2"
When the setvar value is set to "sample line 2", the getvar result is "sample
line 2".
device.frontpanel.xml
628
Description This command retrieves the current content of the front panel in an XML
format. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the file that determines the representation of the
front panel.
Format: ! U1 getvar "device.frontpanel.xml"
Example In this example, the getvar shows the status of the LEDs and the two lines of
the front panel in XML formatted text. The text below is formatted for easy reading. When
you use this command the response will not contain line feeds.
! U1 getvar "device.frontpanel.xml"
<FRONT-PANEL>
<LCD>
<LINE1>PRINTER READY</LINE1>
<LINE2>V53.16.0</LINE2>
</LCD>
<LEDS>
<PAUSE-LED>STEADY-OFF</PAUSE-LED>
<DATA-LED>STEADY-OFF</DATA-LED>
<ERROR-LED>STEADY-OFF</ERROR-LED>
</LEDS>
</FRONT-PANEL>
629
device.jobs_print
device.jobs_print
Description This command identifies the number of jobs to be printed. For printer support,
see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the number of jobs to be printed.
Format: ! U1 getvar "device.jobs_print"
Example In this example, the getvar retrieves the jobs currently being printed or last
printed.
! U1 getvar "device.jobs_print"
"1"
device.languages
630
device.languages
Description This command identifies the programming language that the printer is currently
using. This command is supported on printers running V60.15.8Z, V53.15.2Z, and later. For
Type getvar;setvar
* The setvar command is supported only on Zebra G-Series printers.
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the programming language that the printer is
currently using. Table 8 shows the possible response values.
Format: ! U1 getvar "device.languages"
setvar* This command instructs the printer to set the printer to the required
programming language .
Format: ! U1 getvar "device.languages"
Values:
"epl" = Eltron Programming Language
"zpl" = Zebra Programming Language
"epl_zpl" = Eltron Programming Language and Zebra
Programming Language
Default Value: "epl_zpl"
Example This example, the getvar result is the current programming language that the
printer is using.
! U1 getvar "device.languages"
Table 8 Programming Languages
zpl (Zebra Programming Language)
epl (Eltron Programming Language)
hybrid_xml_zpl (both XML and ZPL)
631
device.pnp_option
device.pnp_option
Description This command defines the type of Plug and Play response that is sent by the
printer after the printer is started. The printer must be restarted for a new PNP string to be
reported. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar;setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the Plug and Play option setting.
Format: ! U1 getvar "device.pnp_option"
setvar This command instructs the printer to select the desired Plug and Play
response option.
Format: ! U1 setvar "device.pnp_option" "value"
Values:
"epl" = Eltron Programming Language
"zpl" = Zebra Programming Language
Default: "zpl"
Example This setvar example shows the value set to "zpl".
! U1 setvar "device.pnp_option" "epl"
When the setvar value is set to "epl", the getvar result is "epl".
device.reset
632
device.reset
Description This command instructs the printer to perform a soft reset. For printer support,
Type setvar
Commands Details
setvar This command instructs the printer to perform a soft reset.
Format: ! U1 setvar "device.reset" ""
Example In this example, the setvar performs a soft reset.
! U1 setvar "device.reset" ""
633
device.restore_defaults
Description This command restores to the default of all settings within the specified SGD
branch. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type do;setvar
Commands Details
do This command restores the default setting for all items within the specified
branch.
Format: ! U1 do "device.restore_default" "value"
Values:
"ip" = default all parameters in the ip branch
"wlan" = default all parameters in the wlan branch
"internal_wired" = default all parameters in the internal wired
branch
setvar This command restores to the default of all settings within the specified
branch.
Format: ! U1 setvar "device.restore_default" "value"
Values:
"ip" = default all parameters in the IP branch
"wlan" = default all parameters in the wlan branch
"internal_wired" = default all parameters in the internal wired
branch
Example These do and setvar examples restore the network cards wlan parameters to
their default values.
do ! U1 do "device.restore_default" "wlan"
setvar ! U1 setvar "device.restore_default" "wlan"
device.unique_id
634
device.unique_id
Description This command retrieves the printer identifier. For printer support, see SGD
Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the established printer identifier.
Format: ! U1 getvar "device.unique_id"
Example In this example, assuming the printers unique ID is 12345, the getvar shows
"12345".
! U1 getvar "device.unique_id"
635
device.uptime
device.uptime
Description This command identifies the amount of time the printer has been powered on.
The string format is: xx days, xx hours, xx minutes, and xx seconds. For printer support, see
Type getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the amount of time the print has been powered on.
It responds in the following format (days, hours, minutes, and seconds).
Format: ! U1 getvar "device.uptime"
Example In this example, the getvar retrieves the amount of time the printer has been
turned on.
! U1 getvar "device.uptime"
"00 days 02 hours 45 mins 30 secs"
device.user_p1
636
device.user_p1
Description This command saves and retrieves user specified values. For printer support,
Type getvar;setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command saves and retrieves user specified parameters.
Format: ! U1 getvar "device.user_p1"
setvar This command instructs the printer to set user parameters.
Format: ! U1 setvar "device.user_p1" "value"
Values: alphanumeric text string (1 - 20)
Default Value: ""
Example This setvar example shows the value set to "test".
! U1 setvar "device.user_p1" "test"
When the setvar value is set to "test", the getvar result is "test".
637
device.user_p2
device.user_p2
Description This command saves and retrieves user specified values. For printer support,
Type getvar;setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command saves and retrieves user specified parameters.
Format: ! U1 getvar "device.user_p2"
setvar This command instructs the printer to set user parameters.
Format: ! U1 setvar "device.user_p2" "value"
Values: alphanumeric text string (1 - 20)
Default Value: ""
Example This setvar example shows the value set to "test".
! U1 setvar "device.user_p2" "test"
When the setvar value is set to "test", the getvar result is "test".
device.xml.enable
638
device.xml.enable
Description This command enables and disables language parsing support for XML. When
enabled (on), the printer will parse both ZPL and XML. When disabled (off), the printer will
not parse XML data. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type setvar;getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command enables and disables language parsing support for XML.
Format: ! U1 getvar "device.xml.enable"
setvar This command instructs the printer to disable or enable the language
parsing support for XML.
Format: ! U1 getvar "device.xml.enable" "value"
Values:
"on" = enables language parsing support for XML
"off" = disables language parsing support for XML
Default Value: on
Example This setvar example shows the language parsing support for XML set to
"on".
! U1 setvar "device.xml.enable" "on"
When the setvar value is set to "on", the getvar result is language parsing support for
XML set to "on".
639
display.text
display.text
Description This command retrieves the text data that is being used on the printers LCD.
For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the text data that appears on the printers LCD.
Format: ! U1 getvar "display.text"
Example In this example, the getvar displays text content that appears on the printers
LCD.
! U1 getvar "display.text"
"PRINTER READY V60.16.4Z"
file.delete
640
file.delete
Description This command instructs the printer to delete specified files. For printer support,
Type do
Important Be sure to always specify the memory location.
Commands Details
do This command instructs the printer to delete specified files.
Format: ! U1 do "file.delete" "value"
Values: file name
Example This do example shows the specified file to delete.
! U1 do "file.delete" "e:abcd.zpl"
641
file.dir
file.dir
Description This command displays a directory listing on the same port the command was
received. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type do;getvar;setvar
Commands Details
do This command sets the directory name from which to retrieve files.
Format: ! U1 do "file.dir" "value"
Values: directory letter
getvar This command retrieves a directory listing of the specified directory.
Format: ! U1 getvar "file.dir"
setvar This command sets the directory name from which to retrieve files.
Format: ! U1 setvar "file.dir" "value"
Values: directory letter
Example This do example shows the directory listing of the specified directory.
! U1 do "file.dir" "R:"
- DIR R:*.*
- 11172192 bytes free R: RAM
file.type
642
file.type
Description This command displays the contents of the specified file. For printer support,
Type do;setvar
Commands Details
do This command displays the content of a file on the same port the command
was received.
Format: ! U1 do "file.type" "value"
Values: the drive letter, file name, file extension, such as R:TEST.ZPL
setvar This command instructs the printer to display the content of a file on the
same port the command was received.
Format: ! U1 setvar "file.type" "value"
Values: the drive letter, file name, file extension, such as R:TEST.ZPL
Example This setvar example shows the value set to "R:TEST.ZPL".
! U1 setvar "file.type" "R:TEST.ZPL"
When the setvar value is set to "R:TEST.ZPL", the contents of the file TEST.ZPL
located on the R: drive will be displayed.
643
file.run
file.run
Description This command instructs the printer to send a specified file to the parser. For
Type do; setvar
Commands Details
do This command instructs the printer to send a specified file to the parser.
Format: ! U1 do "file.run" "value"
Values: drive:filename.extension
setvar This command instructs the printer to send a specified file to the parser.
Format: ! U1 setvar "file.run" "values"
Values: drive:filename.extension
Example This setvar example will send the file "text.zpl" stored in RAM to the parser.
! U1 setvar "file.run" "R:text.zpl"
head.latch
644
head.latch
Description This command identifies if the printhead is open or closed. For printer support,
Type getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the status of the printhead, open or closed.
Format: ! U1 getvar "head.latch"
Values:
"ok" = closed
"open" = open
Example In this example, the getvar retrieves the status of the print head.
! U1 getvar "head.latch"
"ok"
645
interface.network.active.gateway
Description This command retrieves the gateway address of the active print server. For
Type getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the gateway address of the active print server.
Format:
! U1 getvar "interface.network.active.gateway"
Example In this example, the getvar retrieves the gateway address of the active print
server.
! U1 getvar "interface.network.active.gateway"
"10.3.5.1"
interface.network.active.ip_addr
646
Description This command retrieves the IP address of the active print server. For printer
support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the IP address of the active print server.
Format:
! U1 getvar "interface.network.active.ip_addr"
Example In this example, the getvar retrieves the IP address of the active print server.
! U1 getvar "interface.network.active.ip_addr"
"10.3.5.92"
647
interface.network.active.mac_addr
Description This command retrieves the MAC address of the active print server. For printer
Type getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the MAC address of the active print server.
Format:
! U1 getvar "interface.network.active.mac_addr"
Example In this example, the getvar retrieves the MAC address of the active print
server.
! U1 getvar "interface.network.active.mac_addr"
"00:07:4d:24:08:ff"
interface.network.active.mac_raw
648
Description This command identifies the RAW MAC address of the active print server. The
raw mac address is the mac address without the colons (":"). For printer support, see SGD
Type getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the RAW MAC address of the active print server.
Format:
! U1 getvar "interface.network.active.mac_raw"
Example In this example, the getvar retrieves the RAW MAC address of the active print
server.
! U1 getvar "interface.network.active.mac_raw"
"00074d2408ff"
649
interface.network.active.netmask
Description This command retrieves the netmask of the active print server. For printer
Type getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the netmask of the active print server.
Format:
! U1 getvar "interface.network.active.netmask"
Example In this example, the getvar retrieves the netmask of the active print server.
! U1 getvar "interface.network.active.netmask"
"255.255.255.0"
interface.network.active.protocol
650
Description This command retrieves IP protocol of the active print server. For printer
Type getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the IP protocol of the active print server.
Format:
! U1 getvar "interface.network.active.protocol"
Example In this example, the getvar retrieves the IP protocol of the active print server.
! U1 getvar "interface.network.active.protocol"
Possible values include:
"bootp"
"dhcp"
"rarp"
"glean"
"permanent"
651
media.darkness_mode
media.darkness_mode
Description This command instructs the printer to set the darkness mode. For printer
Type setvar
Commands Details
setvar This command instructs the printer to set the darkness mode.
Format: ! U1 setvar "media.darkness_mode" "value"
Values:
"cartridge" = cartridge mode (no changes allowed)
"user" = user mode (darkness is set by the user, and the cartridge
value is ignored. This value is used for all cartridges inserted in the
printer)
"relative" = relative mode (the specified darkness value is added
to the cartridge default value)
Default: "cartridge"
Example This setvar example shows the darkness mode set to "cartridge".
! U1 setvar "media.darkness_mode" "cartridge"
media.printmode
652
media.printmode
Description This printer setting determines the action the printer takes after a label or group
of labels has printed. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar; setvar
This table identifies the commands for this format:
* These values are only supported on the Zebra ZM400/ZM600 printer.
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with the the currently set
media print mode.
Format: ! U1 getvar "media.printmode"
setvar This command instructs the printer to change the media print mode.
Format: ! U1 setvar "media.printmode" "value"
Values:
tear off = "T"
peel off = "P"
rewind = "R"
applicator = "A"
cutter = "C"
delayed cutter = "D"
reserved = "L" *
reserved = "U" *
Example This setvar example shows the value set to "T".
! U1 setvar "media.printmode" "T"
What the setvar value is set to is the getvar result. In this example, the getvar result is
"tear off".
For more details on how each setvar value relates to the getvar responses, see Table 9,
Setvar / Getvar Relation on page 653.
653
media.printmode
Table 9 Setvar / Getvar Relation
If the setvar is set to Then the getvar response and control panel display is
"T" TEAR OFF
"P" PEEL OFF
"R" REWIND
"A" APPLICATOR
"C" CUTTER
"D" DELAYED CUT
"L" RESERVED
"U" RESERVED
media.speed
654
media.speed
Description This command specifies media print speed in inches per second (ips). For
Type getvar;setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the currently set media print speed.
Format: ! U1 getvar "media.speed"
setvar This command instructs the printer to set the media print speed.
Format: ! U1 setvar "media.speed" "value"
Values:
2-12 ips
"up" = increments the printer speed by one unit
"down" = decrements the speed by one unit
Default: "2"
! U1 setvar "media.speed" "2"
Example This setvar example shows the value set to "up".
! U1 setvar "media.speed" "up"
If the current print speed is 2: When the setvar value is set to "up", the getvar result is
"3".
Example This setvar example shows the value set to "down".
! U1 setvar "media.speed" "down"
If the current print speed is 2: When the setvar value is set to "down", the getvar result
is "1".
655
odometer.headclean
odometer.headclean
Description This printer setting refers to the head clean odometer count. This counter tracks
how many inches and centimeters have passed through the printer since the head was last
cleaned. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to retrieve the values for the head clean
counter.
Format: ! U1 getvar "odometer.headclean"
setvar This command instructs the printer to reset the head clean counter.
Format: ! U1 setvar "odometer.headclean" "value"
Values:
"0" = reset the head clean counter
Default: must be an accepted value or it is ignored
Example This example shows how to get the odometer head clean, how to reset it, and how
to confirm the settings changed.
1. To see the current settings, type:
! U1 getvar "odometer.headclean"
Something similar to this is shown:
"1489 INCHES, 3784 CENTIMETERS"
2. To reset the these values to 0, type:
! U1 setvar "odometer.headclean" "0"
3. To confirm this settings were reset, type:
! U1 getvar "odometer.headclean"
If the resetting was successful, this is shown:
odometer.headnew
656
odometer.headnew
Description This printer setting refers to the head replaced odometer count. This counter
tracks how many inches and centimeter passed through the printer since the head was last
replaced. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to retrieve the values for the head new
counter.
Format: ! U1 getvar "odometer.headnew"
setvar This command instructs the printer to reset the head new counter.
Format: ! U1 setvar "odometer.headnew" "value"
Values:
"0" = resets the head new counter
Example This example shows how to get the odometer head new, how to reset it, and how
to confirm the settings changed:
! U1 getvar "odometer.headnew"
! U1 setvar "odometer.headnew" "0"
3. To confirm this settings were reset, type:
! U1 getvar "odometer.headnew"
"0 INCHES, 0 CENTIMETERS
657
odometer.label_dot_length
Description This command returns the length of the last label printed or fed (in dots). For
Type getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command returns the length of the last label printed or fed (in dots).
Format:
! U1 getvar "odometer.label_dot_length"
Example This is an example of how to reset the length using the ^LL command and how to
use the getvar to confirm the change. For the ^LL command to work the printer must be in
continuous mode.
1. To change the odometer label dot length, type:
^XA
^LL500
^XZ
2. To get the current odometer label dot length, type:
! U1 getvar "odometer.label_dot_length"
"500"
odometer.media_marker_count1
658
Description This printer setting refers to the value of the first (count1) user resettable
counter. The user resettable counters track how much media has passed through the printer in
both inches or centimeters. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar; setvar
Note For details on the command structure of SGD commands, see Command Structure
on page 618.
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to return the current value of the first
(count1) user resettable counter in both inches and centimeters.
Format: ! U1 getvar "odometer.media_marker_count1"
setvar This command instructs the printer to reset the first user resettable counter.
Format:
! U1 setvar "odometer.media_marker_count1" "value"
Values:
"0" = reset the counter
Example This example shows how to get the first user resettable counter, how to reset it,
and how to confirm the settings have changed:
! U1 getvar "odometer.media_marker_count1"
! U1 setvar "odometer.media_marker_count1" "0"
3. To confirm these settings were reset, type:
659
Description This printer setting refers to the value of the second (count2) user resettable
counter. The user resettable counters track how much media has passed through the printer in
both inches or centimeters. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to return the current value of the
second (count2) user resettable counter in both inches and centimeters.
Format: ! U1 getvar "odometer.media_marker_count2"
setvar This command instructs the printer to reset the second user resettable
counter.
Format:
! U1 setvar "odometer.media_marker_count2" "value"
Values:
"0" = reset the counter
Example This example shows how to get the second user resettable counter, how to reset
it, and how to confirm the settings have changed:
! U1 setvar "odometer.media_marker_count2" "0"
3. To confirm these settings were reset, type:
odometer.total_print_length
660
Description This command tracks the total length of media that printed over the life of the
printer. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command returns the value of the total length of media that printed
over the life of the printer.
Format: ! U1 getvar "odometer.total_print_length"
Example This example shows how to get the total length of media that printed over the life
of the printer.
1. To get the total length of media that has printed to date, type:
! U1 getvar "odometer.total_print_length"
661
print.tone
print.tone
Description This command specifies the printer darkness. For printer support, see SGD
Type getvar;setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the printers current darkness setting.
Format: ! U1 getvar "print.tone"
setvar This command instructs the printer to set the darkness and relative
darkness.
Format: ! U1 setvar "print.tone" "value"
Values:
"0.0" to "30.0" = darkness
"-0.1" to "-30.0" and "+0.1" to "+30.0" = incremental
adjustments
Default: "4.0"
Example This setvar example shows the value set to "4.0".
! U1 setvar "print.tone" "4.0"
When the setvar value is set to "4.0", the getvar result is "4.0".
rfid.error.response
662
rfid.error.response
Description During an error condition, an error message shows on the second line of the
display. This command can be used to retrieve that error message. For printer support, see
Type getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with any active RFID error
messages.
Format: ! U1 getvar "rfid.error.response"
Example This getvar example shows responses that you may get in different situations:
! U1 getvar "rfid.error.response"
If no RFID tag is present, you get the following response:
NO TAG FOUND
If an RFID tag is present and there are no errors, you get the following response:
RFID OK
663
rfid.position.program
Description This command sets the read/write position of the transponder in vertical
(Yaxis) dot rows from the top of the label. Set to 0 (no movement) if the transponder is
already in the effective area without moving the media.. For printer support, see SGD
Type getvar; setvar
Important If a label format specifies a value for this parameter, this value will be used for
the programming position for all labels until a new position is specified or until the printer is
turned off (O) and then back on (I).
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with the current
programming position.
Format: ! U1 getvar "rfid.position.program"
setvar This command instructs the printer to set the programming position.
Format: ! U1 setvar "rfid.position.program" "value"
Values:
0 to label length
Default value:
For the R110PAX4 and R2844-Z: 0
For all other supported printers: label length minus 1 mm (1/16 in.)
Default: 1
Example This setvar example shows the programming position being set at 15 dot rows
from the top of the label.
! U1 setvar "rfid.position.program" "15"
rfid.reader_1.antenna_port
664
Description This command selects the RFID antenna port. For printer support, see SGD
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with the current antenna
port.
Format: ! U1 getvar "rfid.reader_1.antenna_port"
setvar This command instructs the printer to set the antenna port.
Format:
! U1 setvar "rfid.reader_1.antenna_port" "value"
Values:
1 = antenna port 1
2 = antenna port 2
Default: 1
Example This setvar example shows the selection of antenna port 2.
! U1 setvar "rfid.reader_1.antenna_port" "2"
665
rfid.reader_1.power.read
Description This command sets the RFID reader power level for reading RFID tags. For
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with the antennas current
read power level.
Format: ! U1 getvar "rfid.reader_1.power.read"
setvar This command instructs the printer to set the antennas read power level.
Format:
! U1 setvar "rfid.reader_1.power.read" "value"
Values:
H = high
M = medium
L = low
Default: L
Example This setvar example sets the antenna to high power for reading RFID tags.
! U1 setvar "rfid.reader_1.power.read" "H"
When the setvar value is set to "H", the getvar result is "H".
rfid.reader_1.power.single_power
666
Description This command sets the RFID reader power level for reading and writing to
RFID tags for readers with a single power level. For printer support, see SGD Command
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with the current power
level.
Format: ! U1 getvar
"rfid.reader_1.power.single_power"
setvar This command instructs the printer to set the power level for reading and
writing.
Format: ! U1 setvar
"rfid.reader_1.power.single_power" "value"
Values:
H = high
M = medium
L = low
Default: L
Example This setvar example sets the antenna to high power for writing to RFID tags.
! U1 setvar "rfid.reader_1.power.single_power" "H"
667
rfid.reader_1.power.write
Description This command sets the RFID reader power level for writing to RFID tags. For
Type getvar; setvar
Note This parameter is ignored on the R110Xi HF printer because read and write powers
cannot be specified separately. See rfid.reader_1.power.single_power on page 666 to set the
power level for the R110Xi HF printer.
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with the antennas current
write power level.
Format: ! U1 getvar "rfid.reader_1.power.write"
setvar This command instructs the printer to set the wrtie power level.
Format:
! U1 setvar "rfid.reader_1.power.write" "value"
Values:
H = high
M = medium
L = low
Default: L
Example This setvar example sets the antenna to high power for writing to RFID tags.
! U1 setvar "rfid.reader_1.power.write" "H"
zbi.control.add_breakpoint
668
Description This command instructs the printer to set a ZBI program break point. For
Type setvar
Commands Details
setvar This command instructs the printer to set a ZBI program break point.
Format:
! U1 setvar "zbi.control.add_breakpoint" "value"
Values: Any line number of the program currently being debugged.
Example This setvar example shows setting the breakpoint at line "30".
! U1 setvar "zbi.control.add_breakpoint" "30"
669
zbi.control.break
zbi.control.break
Description This command breaks the execution of the ZBI 2.0 program that is currently
running. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type setvar
Commands Details
setvar This command breaks the execution of the ZBI program that is currently
running.
Format: ! U1 setvar "zbi.control.break" ""
Values:
""
Example This setvar example shows the value set to "".
! U1 setvar "zbi.control.break" ""
zbi.control.clear_breakpoints
670
Description This command deletes all breakpoints in the current ZBI 2.0 program. For
Type setvar
Commands Details
setvar This command instructs the printer to delete all breakpoints.
Format:
! U1 setvar "zbi.control.clear_breakpoints" ""
Values: ""
! U1 setvar "zbi.control.clear_breakpoints" ""
671
zbi.control.delete_breakpoint
Description This command deletes a breakpoint in the current ZBI 2.0 program. For printer
Type setvar
Commands Details
setvar This command instructs the printer to delete the breakpoint at the line
indicated by the value parameter.
Format:
! U1 setvar "zbi.control.delete_breakpoint" "value"
Values: you can use the same value as add_breakpoint.
Example This setvar example shows the breakpoint set to "30".
! U1 setvar "zbi.control.delete_breakpoint" "30"
zbi.control.line_number
672
Description This command gives you control and information about which line of a stopped
ZBI 2.0 program is being executed. For printer support, see SGD Command Support
on page 943.
Type getvar;setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command returns the line number that is currently being executed in
the ZBI 2.0 program.
Format: ! U1 getvar "zbi.control.line_number"
setvar This command sets which line of the current ZBI 2.0 program should be
executed.
Format:
! U1 setvar "zbi.control.line_number" "value"
Values: Any line number of the currently stopped ZBI program.
Default: "0"
Example This setvar example shows the value parameter set to "30".
! U1 setvar "zbi.control.line_number" "30"
673
zbi.control.restart
zbi.control.restart
Description This command restarts a ZBI 2.0 program that is currently stopped. For printer
Type setvar
Commands Details
setvar This command restarts a ZBI 2.0 program that is currently stopped.
Format: ! U1 setvar "zbi.control.restart" "value"
Values:
""
! U1 setvar "zbi.control.restart" ""
zbi.control.run
674
zbi.control.run
Description This command runs the current ZBI 2.0 program that is loaded in the
interpreter. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type setvar
Commands Details
setvar This command runs the ZBI 2.0 program that is loaded in the interpreter.
Format: ! U1 setvar "zbi.control.run" ""
Values:
""
! U1 setvar "zbi.control.run" ""
675
zbi.control.step
zbi.control.step
Description This command restarts the execution of the currently stopped ZBI 2.0program
for one line. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type setvar
Commands Details
setvar This command instructs the printer to restart the execution of the currently
stopped ZBI 2.0 program for one line.
Format: ! U1 setvar "zbi.control.step" ""
Values:
""
Default: ""
! U1 setvar "zbi.control.step" ""
When the setvar value is set to "".
zbi.control.terminate
676
Description This command instructs the ZBI 2.0 program to terminate and shuts down the
interpreter. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type setvar
Commands Details
setvar This command instructs the ZBI 2.0 program to terminate and shuts down
the interpreter.
Format: ! U1 setvar "zbi.control.terminate" "value"
Values:
""
! U1 setvar "zbi.control.terminate" ""
677
zbi.control.variable_name
Description This command sets the name of the variable that is to be read or modified
through variable_value. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar;setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the variable value that is to show on the front
panel.
Format: ! U1 getvar "zbi.control.variable_name"
setvar This command sets the variable that is to show on the front panel.
Format:
! U1 setvar "zbi.control.variable_name" "value"
Values: Any ZBI variable in the program that is currently being debugged.
Default: ""
Example This setvar example shows the value set to "MYVAR$".
! U1 setvar "zbi.control.variable_name" "MYVAR$"
When the setvar value is set to "MYVAR$", the getvar result is "MYVAR$".
zbi.control.variable_value
678
Description This command identifies the variable name. For printer support, see SGD
Type getvar;setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the variable name that is loaded into the
variable_name.
Format: ! U1 getvar "zbi.control.variable_value"
setvar This command sets a value to the variable referenced by a variable_name.
Format:
! U1 setvar "zbi.control.variable_value" "value"
Values: A string or integer that is dependent on the variable type in
variable_name.
Default: The current value of the variable referenced via variable_name
Example This setvar example shows the value set to "Hello World".
! U1 setvar "zbi.control.variable_value" "Hello World"
When the setvar value is set to "Hello World", the getvar result is "Hello
World".
679
zbi.key
zbi.key
Description This command identifies if the ZBI 2.0 option is enabled or disabled on the
printer. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the status of the ZBI 2.0 option on the printer.
Format: ! U1 getvar "zbi.key"
Example In this example, the getvar shows the status of ZBI on the printer.
! U1 getvar "zbi.key"
"ENABLED"
zbi.last_error
680
zbi.last_error
Description This command identifies the last error that the ZBI 2.0 interpreter encountered.
Type getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command shows the last error that the ZBI 2.0 interpreter
encountered.
Format: ! U1 getvar "zbi.last_error"
Example This example demonstrates how to make the ZBI 2.0 interpreter return the last
error it encountered.
! U1 getvar "zbi.last_error"
681
zbi.reseller_key
zbi.reseller_key
Description This command allows programs that are encrypted with this key in ZBI-
Developer to run. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type setvar
Commands Details
setvar This command allows programs that are encrypted with this key in ZBI
developer to run.
Format: ! U1 setvar "zbi.reseller_key" "value"
Values: Any valid encryption key provided by ZBI Developer.
Example This setvar example shows the value set to "abc123".
! U1 setvar "zbi.reseller_key" "abc123".
zbi.revision
682
zbi.revision
Description This command identifies the current ZBI version. For printer support, see SGD
Type getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the current ZBI version.
Format: ! U1 getvar "zbi.revision"
Example In this example, the getvar shows the current ZBI version.
! U1 getvar "zbi.revision"
683
zbi.running_program_name
Description This command identifies the name of the ZBI 2.0 program that is currently
running. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the name of the currently running ZBI 2.0
program.
Format: ! U1 getvar "zbi.running_program_name"
Example In this example, the getvar command causes the printer to respond that the
program choices.bas is currently running.
! U1 getvar "zbi.running_program_name"
"CHOICES.BAS"
zbi.start_info.execute
684
Description This command instructs the ZBI 2.0 environment to execute the program listed
in the file_name. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type setvar
Commands Details
setvar This command instructs the ZBI 2.0 environment to execute the program
listed in the file_name.
Format: ! U1 setvar "zbi.start_info.execute"
Example This setvar example executes the "choices.bas" program.
! U1 setvar "zbi.start_info.execute" "choices.bas"
685
zbi.start_info.file_name
Description This command prepares a program to run when the
zbi.start_info.execute command is used. This command does not run the program.
Type getvar;setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command is used to return the file path and file name of a ZBI 2.0
program to run using the zbi.start_info.execute command.
Format: ! U1 getvar "zbi.start_info.file_name"
Default: The last program run. If nothing has been run, "*:\.BAZ".
setvar This command is used to prepare a ZBI 2.0 program to be executed using
the zbi.start_info.execute command.
Format: ! U1 setvar "zbi.start_info.file_name" "value"
Values: a file name or path of a basic program
Example This setvar example shows the value set to "E:PROGRAM1.BAS".
! U1 setvar "zbi.start_info.file_name" "E:PROGRAM1.BAS"
When the setvar value is set to "E:PROGRAM1.BAS", the getvar result is
"E:PROGRAM1.BAS".
zbi.start_info.memory_alloc
686
Description This command identifies the amount of memory currently in use in a ZBI 2.0
program. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command shows the amount of memory currently in use in bytes.
Format: ! U1 getvar "zbi.start_info.memory_alloc"
Example In this example, the getvar shows the amount of memory currently in use.
! U1 getvar "zbi.start_info.memory_alloc"
"17203"
687
zbi.state
zbi.state
Description This command shows the current state of the ZBI 2.0 program. For printer
Type getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the current state of ZBI.
Format: ! U1 getvar "zbi.state"
Values:
"running" = ZBI Interpreter is active and running a program
"off" = ZBI Interpreter is inactive
"stopped" = ZBI Interpreter is active but not executing a program
Example In this example, the getvar shows that state of ZBI.
! U1 getvar "zbi.state"
"running"
zbi.state
688

Notes ___________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________

7
SGD Wired Commands
This chapter provides a high-level overview of the wired Set / Get / Do (SGD) commands. For
printer support of these SGD commands, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
SGD commands are available in printers with firmware version V60.15.x, V50.15.x,
V61.15.x, V56.15.x, V53.15.xZ, or later.
SGD Wired Commands
Overview
690

Overview
SGD commands are commands that allow you to configure all printers with firmware version
V60.15.x, V50.15.x, V61.15.x, V56.15.x, V53.15.xZ, or later. The printer performs the
setvar
getvar
do
setvar Command
Setvar commands:
getvar Command
Getvar commands:
691
SGD Wired Commands
Overview

do Command
Do commands:
SGD Wired Commands
Command Structure
692

Command Structure
(setvar or getvar).
1 2 3
END
1
3
2
693
SGD Wired Commands
external_wired.check
Description This command controls whether to check for external print server during the
network interface search. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar;setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the status of the network interface search.
Format: ! U1 getvar "external_wired.check"
setvar This command instructs the printer to set the network interface search.
Format: ! U1 setvar "external_wired.check" "value"
Values:
"on" = turn on external wired network interface search
"off" = turn off external wired network interface search
Default Value:
"on" = If wireless option board is not installed
"off" = If wireless option board is installed
Example This setvar example shows the value set to "off".
! U1 setvar "external_wired.check" "off"
When the setvar value is set to "off", the getvar result is "off".
SGD Wired Commands
external_wired.ip.addr
694
Description This command allows you to get or set the external wired print serverss IP
address. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar; setvar
* On SEH print server models PS102-Z or the PS105-Z, only the getvar command is
supported.
Important For a set IP address to take affect, the IP protocol must be set to permanent and
the print server must be reset.
Commands Details
getvar * This command instructs the printer to respond with its current external
wired print server IP address.
Format: ! U1 getvar "external_wired.ip.addr"
setvar This command instructs the printer to change its current external wired
print server IP address upon powering the printer on.
Format: ! U1 setvar "external_wired.ip.addr" "value"
Values: any valid IP address
Default: "0.0.0.0"
Note The setvar value of this command can be affected by the
external_wired.ip.dhcp.enable command.
Example This setvar example shows the value set to "10.14.4.235".
! U1 setvar "external_wired.ip.addr" "10.14.4.235"
"10.14.4.235".
695
SGD Wired Commands
external_wired.ip.arp_interval
Description This print server setting allows you to specify the ARP (Address Resolution
Protocol) interval or the ARP cache time out for the external wired print server. For printer
Type getvar; setvar
supported.
Commands Details
getvar * This command instructs the printer to respond with the ARP interval or the
ARP cache time out value for the external wired print server.
Format: ! U1 getvar
"external_wired.ip.arp_interval"
setvar This command instructs the printer to change the ARP interval or the ARP
cache time out for the external wired print server.
Format:
! U1 setvar "external_wired.ip.arp_interval" "value"
Values: 0 - 30
Default: "0"
! U1 setvar "external_wired.ip.arp_interval" "0"
"0".
SGD Wired Commands
external_wired.ip.default_addr_enable
696
Description This command allows you to default the external wired print servers IP
Type getvar; setvar
supported.
Commands Details
getvar * This command instructs the printer to show the status of the setting of
external wired print servers default IP address feature.
Format:
! U1 getvar "external_wired.ip.default_addr_enable"
setvar This command tells the printer to use its default address, if no address is
provided through DHCP or BOOTP. If you do not assign an IP address
after 2 minutes, the 10/100 Internal PS defaults to IP address
192.168.254.254.
Format:
! U1 setvar "external_wired.ip.default_addr_enable" "value"
Values:
"on" = enabled
"off" = disabled
Default: "on"
! U1 setvar "external_wired.ip.default_addr_enable" "on"
"on".
697
SGD Wired Commands
external_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_all
Description This printer setting defines the entire client identifier (DHCP option 61) if
DHCP is enabled on the external print server and
"external_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_type" is set to "0", or "2". The MAC address is
used if the type is set to "1". For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar; setvar
supported.
Commands Details
getvar * This command instructs the printer to respond with the client identifier
prefix and suffix of the external wired print server.
Format:
! U1 getvar "external_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_all"
setvar This command instructs the printer to change the client identifier prefix
and suffix of the external wired print server. The prefix gets cleared and the
suffix contains the entire client identifier.
Format:
! U1 setvar "external_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_all" "value"
Values: A maximum length of 60 characters if the CID type is ASCII, or
120 characters if the CID type is hexadecimal.
Default Value: ""
Example This setvar example shows the value set to "printer".
! U1 setvar "external_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_all" "printer"
"printer".
SGD Wired Commands
external_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_enable
698
Description This command determines if DHCP (option 61) on the external wired print
server is turned on or off. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar; setvar
supported.
Commands Details
getvar * This command instructs the printer to respond with the status of the client
identifier of the external wired print server.
Format:
! U1 getvar "external_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_enable"
setvar This command instructs the printer to set the status of the client identifier
of the external wired print server.
Format:
! U1 setvar "external_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_enable"
"value"
Values:
"off" = client identifier is turned off
"on" = client identifier is turned on
Default: "off"
! U1 setvar "external_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_enable" "off"
"off".
699
SGD Wired Commands
external_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_prefix
Description This printer setting defines the prefix to be prepended to the DHCP client
identifier (option 61) when DHCP is enabled on the external wired print server and
"external_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_type" is set to "0" or "2". For printer support,
Type getvar; setvar
supported.
Commands Details
prefix of the external wired print server.
Format:
! U1 getvar "external_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_prefix"
setvar This command instructs the printer to change the CID prefix of the
external wired print server.
Format:
! U1 setvar "external_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_prefix" "value"
Values: Any text string up to 10 characters if the CID type is ASCII, or 20
characters if the CID type is hexadecimal.
Default Value: ""
Example This setvar example shows the value set to "PRT001".
! U1 setvar "external_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_prefix" "PRT001"
"PRT001".
SGD Wired Commands
external_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_suffix
700
Description This printer setting defines the unique suffix to be used as the client identifier
(DHCP option 61) if DHCP is enabled repeated on the external wired print server and
external_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_type on page 701 is set to "0" or "2", not "1". For printer
Type getvar; setvar
supported.
Commands Details
suffix on the external wired print server.
Format:
! U1 getvar "external_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_suffix"
setvar This command instructs the printer to change the client identifier suffix
value.
Format:
! U1 setvar "external_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_suffix"
"value"
Values: The maximum length of a value allowed is 60 ASCII characters
when the CID type is ASCII, or 120 hexadecimal values when the CID
type is hexadecimal.
Default Value: ""
Example This setvar example shows setting the suffix to "printer".
! U1 setvar "external_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_suffix"
"printer"
"printer".
701
SGD Wired Commands
external_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_type
Description This printer setting defines the type of client identifier (DHCP option 61) that
will be sent if DHCP is enabled on the external wired print server. A value of "1" means the
type of "Ethernet" and the printers MAC address will be used. A value of "0" or "2" means
the client identifier sent will be "external_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_prefix"
concatenated with "external_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_suffix". For printer support,
Type getvar; setvar
supported.
Commands Details
type for the external wired print server.
Format:
! U1 getvar "external_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_type"
setvar This command instructs the printer to enable "synthetic" Client Identifier
for the external wired print server.
Format:
! U1 setvar "external_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_type" "value"
Values:
"0" = ASCII string
"1" = wired print servers MAC address
"2" = HEX value
Default Value: "1"
! U1 setvar "external_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_type" "1"
SGD Wired Commands
external_wired.ip.gateway
702
Description This command instructs the printer to change the external wired print servers
gateway address. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar; setvar
supported.
Important This setting refers to the gateway address. A set value is ignored if the IP
protocol is not set to permanent.
Commands Details
getvar * This command instructs the printer to respond with the external wired
printer servers gateway address.
Format: ! U1 getvar "external_wired.ip.gateway"
setvar This command instructs the printer to change the external wired printer
servers gateway address.
Format:
! U1 setvar "external_wired.ip.gateway" "value"
Values: Any valid gateway address
Default: "0.0.0.0"
! U1 setvar "external_wired.ip.gateway" "10.3.5.1"
When the setvar value is set to "10.3.5.1", the getvar result is "10.3.5.1".
703
SGD Wired Commands
external_wired.ip.netmask
Description This setting refers to the external wired print servers subnet mask address.
This value is ignored if the IP protocol is not set to permanent. For printer support, see SGD
Type getvar; setvar
supported.
Commands Details
getvar * This command instructs the printer to respond with the external wired print
servers subnet mask.
Format: ! U1 getvar "external_wired.ip.netmask"
setvar This command instructs the printer to change the external wired print
serverss subnet mask.
Format:
! U1 setvar "external_wired.ip.netmask" "value"
Values: Any valid subnet mask.
Default: "255.255.255.0"
! U1 setvar "external_wired.ip.netmask" "255.255.255.0"
When the setvar value is set to "255.255.255.0", the getvar result is
"255.255.255.0".
SGD Wired Commands
external_wired.ip.port
704
Description This printer setting refers to the external wired print servers port number that
the TCP print service is listening on. Normal TCP communications from the host should be
directed to this port. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar; setvar
supported.
Commands Details
getvar * This command instructs the printer to respond with the external wired
printer servers TCP/UDP port number.
Format: ! U1 getvar "external_wired.ip.port"
setvar This command instructs the printer to set the external wired print servers
TCP/UDP port number.
Format: ! U1 setvar "external_wired.ip.port" "value"
Values: 1 - 65535 (excluding any ports currently used by other services,
such as 21, 23, 80, and 515).
Default: "9100"
! U1 setvar "external_wired.ip.port" "9100"
705
SGD Wired Commands
external_wired.ip.protocol
Description This command configures the IP addressing method used by the external wired
print server. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar; setvar
supported.
Commands Details
getvar * This command returns the IP addressing method used by the external print
server.
Format: ! U1 getvar "external_wired.ip.protocol"
setvar This command instructs the printer to configure the IP addressing method
used by the external wired print server.
Format:
! U1 setvar "external_wired.ip.protocol" "value"
Values:
"bootp" = uses the standard bootp addressing method to obtain an
IP address and configuration
"dhcp" = uses the standard dhcp addressing method to obtain an IP
address and configuration for a server specified period of time
"rarp" = uses the standard rarp addressing method to obtain an IP
address
"glean" = uses the IP address from a PING packet that is sent to its
hardware address (unicast address)
permanent = uses static values assigned through other
commands
"all" = tries all of the dynamic addressing methods, not permanent,
to obtain an IP address
Default: "all"
Example In this example, the setvar result is the current programming language that the
printer is using.
! U1 setvar "external_wired.ip.protocol" "bootp"
"bootp".
SGD Wired Commands
external_wired.ip.timeout.enable
706
Description This network setting refers to enabling the connection timeout on the external
wired 10/100 print server. For this to take effect, the print server must be reset. For printer
Type getvar; setvar
supported.
Commands Details
getvar * This command instructs the printer to return whether the timeout checking
is enabled on the external wired print server.
Format:
! U1 getvar "external_wired.ip.timeout.enable"
setvar This command instructs the printer to enable or disable the timeout
checking on the external wired print server.
Format:
! U1 setvar "external_wired.ip.timeout.enable" "value"
Values:
"off" = turns off the connection checking
"on" = turns on the connection checking
Default: "on"
! U1 setvar "external_wired.ip.timeout.enable" "on"
707
SGD Wired Commands
external_wired.ip.timeout.value
Description This network setting refers to the number of seconds before the connection
times out for the external wired print server. For printer support, see SGD Command Support
on page 943.
Type getvar; setvar
supported.
Commands Details
getvar * This command instructs the printer to respond with the time of the external
wired print server, in seconds, before the connection times out.
Format:
! U1 getvar "external_wired.ip.timeout.value"
setvar This command instructs the printer to set the time of the external wired
print server, in seconds, before the connection times out.
Format:
! U1 setvar "external_wired.ip.timeout.value"
"value"
Default: "300"
! U1 setvar "external_wired.ip.timeout.value" "300"
SGD Wired Commands
external_wired.ip.v6.addr
708
Description This command retrieves the IPv6 address of the SEH wired print server. This
command is only supported on SEH print server models PS105-Z and PS102-Z with firmware
version v60.16.5Z or v53.16.5Z and later. For printer support, see SGD Command Support
on page 943.
Type getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the IPv6 address of the SEH wired print server.
Format: ! U1 getvar "external_wired.ip.v6.addr"
Values:
8 group of four hexadecimal digits with a colon delimiter
character set = A-F or 0-9 (39-character maximum)
Example In this example, the getvar returns the IPv6 address of the wired print server.
! U1 getvar "external_wired.ip.v6.addr"
709
SGD Wired Commands
external_wired.ip.v6.gateway
Description This command retrieves the IPv6 gateway of the SEH wired print server. This
command is only supported on SEH print server models PS105-Z and PS102-Z with firmware
version v60.16.5Z or v53.16.5Z and later. For printer support, see SGD Command Support
on page 943.
Type getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the IPv6 gateway of the SEH wired print server.
Format: ! U1 getvar "external_wired.ip.v6.gateway"
Values:
8 group of four hexadecimal digits with a colon delimiter
character set = A-F or 0-9 (39-character maximum)
Example In this example, the getvar returns the IPv6 gateway of the wired print server.
! U1 getvar "external_wired.ip.v6.gateway"
SGD Wired Commands
external_wired.ip.v6.prefix_length
710
Description This command retrieves the IPv6 address prefix length of the SEH wired print
server. This command is only supported on SEH print server models PS105-Z and PS102-Z
with firmware version v60.16.5Z or v53.16.5Z and later. For printer support, see SGD
Type getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the IPv6 address prefix length of the SEH wired
print server.
Format:
! U1 getvar "external_wired.ip.v6.prefix_length"
Values: character set = 0-9 (3-character maximum)
Example In this example, the getvar returns the IPv6 address prefix length of the wired
print server.
! U1 getvar "external_wired.ip.v6.prefix_length"
711
SGD Wired Commands
external_wired.mac_addr
Description This command retrieves the MAC address of the external wired print server.
Type getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with the MAC address of
the external wired print server.
Format: ! U1 getvar "external_wired.mac_addr"
Example In this example, the getvar result is the MAC address of the external wired
print server.
! U1 getvar "external_wired.mac_addr"
SGD Wired Commands
external_wired.mac_raw
712
Description This command specifies the RAW MAC address of the external print server.
The raw mac address is the mac address without the colons (":"). For printer support, see
Type getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the RAW MAC address of the external print
server.
Format: ! U1 getvar "external_wired.mac_raw"
Example In this example, the getvar retrieves the RAW MAC address of the external
print server.
! U1 getvar "external_wired.mac_raw"
"00074d2408ff"
713
SGD Wired Commands
internal_wired.auto_switchover
Description This command instructs the printer to switch from wireless to the internal wired
print server when an Ethernet cable is plugged into the printer and the printer detects an active
data link. This command is supported only on Zebra ZM400/ZM600 printer. For printer
Type getvar;setvar
Important For this command to work, be sure:
you are using a ZM400/ZM600 printer with both the internal 10/100 wired print server
and wireless option board installed
the value for this command is set to "on" (switchover enabled)
the printer is currently communicating to the network through a wireless connection
a Ethernet cable is plugged into the ZM400/ZM600 printer and the printer recognizes a
data link connection
When the above conditions exist and an active Ethernet cable is plugged into an internal
wired print server, the printer will detect the wired data link and automatically switch to the
wired interface. The printer will automatically switch back to the wireless interface when the
Ethernet cable is disconnected.
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the current automatic switchover value.
Format:
! U1 getvar "internal_wired.auto_switchover"
setvar This command configures switches between the wireless and wired
interfaces.
Format:
! U1 setvar "internal_wired.auto_switchover" "value"
Values:
"on" = switchover enabled
"off" = switchover disabled
Default: "off"
! U1 setvar "internal_wired.auto_switchover" "off"
SGD Wired Commands
internal_wired.ip.addr
714
Description This command allows you to get or set the internal wired print serverss IP
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with its current internal
wired print server IP address.
Format: ! U1 getvar "internal_wired.ip.addr"
setvar This command instructs the printer to change its current internal wired
print server IP address upon powering the printer on.
Format: ! U1 setvar "internal_wired.ip.addr" "value"
Default: "0.0.0.0"
internal_wired.ip.dhcp.enable command.
! U1 setvar "internal_wired.ip.addr" "10.14.4.235"
"10.14.4.235".
715
SGD Wired Commands
internal_wired.ip.arp_interval
Protocol) interval or the ARP cache time out for the internal wired print server. For printer
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with the ARP interval or the
ARP cache time out value for the internal wired print server.
Format:
! U1 getvar "internal_wired.ip.arp_interval"
cache time out for the internal wired print server.
Format:
! U1 setvar "internal_wired.ip.arp_interval" "value"
Values: 0 - 30
Default: "0"
! U1 setvar "internal_wired.ip.arp_interval" "0"
"0".
SGD Wired Commands
internal_wired.ip.default_addr_enable
716
Description This command allows you to default the internal wired print servers IP
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to show the status of the setting of
internal wired print servers default IP address feature.
Format:
! U1 getvar "internal_wired.ip.default_addr_enable"
192.168.254.254.
Format:
! U1 setvar "internal_wired.ip.default_addr_enable" "value"
Values:
"on" = enabled
"off" = disabled
Default: "on"
! U1 setvar "internal_wired.ip.default_addr_enable" "on"
"on".
717
SGD Wired Commands
internal_wired.ip.dhcp.cache_ip
Description This command enables or disables the IP cache on the internal wired print
server. This command is supported only on Zebra ZM400/ZM600 printers. For printer
Type getvar;setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the status of the IP cache on the internal wired print
server.
Format:
! U1 getvar "internal_wired.ip.dhcp.cache_ip"
setvar This command sets the status of the IP cache.
Format:
! U1 setvar "internal_wired.ip.dhcp.cache_ip" "value"
Values:
"on" = enabled
"off" = disabled
Default: "off"
! U1 setvar "internal_wired.ip.dhcp.cache_ip" "off"
SGD Wired Commands
internal_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_all
718
DHCP is enabled on the internal print server and
"internal_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_type" is set to "0", or "2". The MAC address is
Type getvar;setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with the client identifier prefix
and suffix of the internal wired print server.
Format:
! U1 getvar "internal_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_all"
setvar This command instructs the printer to change the client identifier prefix and
suffix of the internal wired print server. The prefix gets cleared and the suffix
contains the entire client identifer.
Format:
! U1 setvar "internal_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_all" "value"
Values: A maximum length of 60 characters if the CID type is ASCII, or 120
Default Value: ""
! U1 setvar "internal_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_all" "printer"
"printer".
719
SGD Wired Commands
internal_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_enable
Description This command determines if DHCP (option 61) is turned on or off of the
internal wired print server. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with the status of the client
identifier of the internal wired print server.
Format:
! U1 getvar "internal_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_enable"
of the internal wired print server.
Format:
! U1 setvar "internal_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_enable" "value"
Values:
Default: "off"
! U1 setvar "internal_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_enable" "off"
"off".
SGD Wired Commands
internal_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_prefix
720
identifier (option 61) when DHCP is enabled on the internal wired print server and
"internal_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_type" is set to "0" or "2". For printer support,
Type getvar;setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with the client identifier
prefix of the internal wired print server.
Format:
! U1 getvar "internal_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_prefix"
setvar This command instructs the printer to change the CID prefix of the internal
wired print server.
Format:
! U1 setvar "internal_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_prefix" "value"
Default Value: ""
! U1 setvar "internal_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_prefix" "PRT001"
"PRT001".
721
SGD Wired Commands
internal_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_suffix
(DHCP option 61) if DHCP is enabled on the internal wired 10/100 print server and
"internal_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_type" is set to "0" or "2". For printer support,
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
suffix of the internal wired 10/100 print server.
Format:
! U1 getvar "internal_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_suffix"
value of the internal wired 10/100 print server.
Format:
! U1 setvar "internal_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_suffix"
"value"
Default Value: ""
! U1 setvar "internal_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_suffix" "printer"
"printer".
SGD Wired Commands
internal_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_type
722
will be sent if DHCP is enabled on the internal wired print server. A value of "1" means the
type of "Ethernet" and the printers MAC address will be used.A value of "0" or "2" means
the client identifier sent will be "internal_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_prefix"
concatenated with "internal_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_suffix". For printer support,
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
type for the internal wired print server.
Format:
! U1 getvar "internal_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_type"
setvar This command instructs the printer to enable "synthetic" Client Identifier
for the internal wired print server.
Format:
! U1 setvar "internal_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_type" "value"
Values:
"0" = ASCII string
"1" = wired print servers MAC address
"2" = HEX value
Default Value: "1"
! U1 setvar "internal_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_type" "1"
723
SGD Wired Commands
internal_wired.ip.dhcp.lease.last_attempt
Description This command retrieves the last time a DHCP request was sent from the
internal wired print server. This command is supported only on Zebra ZM400/ZM600
printers. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the last time a DHCP request was sent from the
internal wired print server.
Format:
! U1 getvar
"internal_wired.ip.dhcp.lease.last_attempt"
Example In this example, the getvar retrieves the last time a DHCP request was sent to
the internal wired print server.
! U1 getvar "internal_wired.ip.dhcp.lease.last_attempt"
SGD Wired Commands
internal_wired.ip.dhcp.lease.length
724
Description This command retrieves the original length (in seconds) of the DHCP lease on
the internal wired print server. This command is supported only on Zebra ZM400/ZM600
Type getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the original length (in seconds) of the DHCP lease
on the internal wired print server.
Format:
! U1 getvar "internal_wired.ip.dhcp.lease.length"
Example In this example, the getvar returns the original length of the DHCP lease on
! U1 getvar "internal_wired.ip.dhcp.lease.length"
"691200"
725
SGD Wired Commands
internal_wired.ip.dhcp.lease.server
Description This command retrieves the address of the server that provided the DHCP lease
on the internal wired print server. This command is supported only on Zebra ZM400/ZM600
Type getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the address of the server that provided the DHCP
lease on the internal wired print server.
Format:
! U1 getvar "internal_wired.ip.dhcp.lease.server"
Example In this example, the getvar retrieves the address of the server that provided the
DHCP lease on the internal wired print server.
! U1 getvar "internal_wired.ip.dhcp.lease.server"
"10.3.1.98"
SGD Wired Commands
internal_wired.ip.dhcp.lease.time_left
726
Description This command retrieves the time (in seconds) left in the current DHCP lease on
the internal wired print server. This command is supported only on Zebra ZM400/ZM600
Type getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the time (in seconds) left in the current DHCP
lease on the internal wired print server.
Format:
! U1 getvar
"internal_wired.ip.dhcp.lease.time_left"
Example In this example, the getvar retrieves the time left in the current DHCP lease on
the wired internal print server.
! U1 getvar "internal_wired.ip.dhcp.lease.time_left"
"10.3.1.98"
727
SGD Wired Commands
internal_wired.ip.dhcp.option12
Description This command specifies if the DHCP option 12 (host name) is on or off in the
discovery packet that is sent from the internal wired print server. This command is only
supported on Zebra ZM400/ZM600 printers. For printer support, see SGD Command
Type getvar;setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the status of the DHCP option 12 (host name) in the
discovery packet of the internal wired print server.
Format: ! U1 getvar "internal_wired.ip.dhcp.option12"
setvar This command instructs the printer to set the DHCP option 12 (host name) in
the discovery packet of the internal wired print server.
Format:
! U1 setvar "internal_wired.ip.dhcp.option12" "values"
Values:
"on" = turns on option 12
"off" = turns off option 12
Default Value: "on"
! U1 setvar "internal_wired.ip.dhcp.option12" "on"
SGD Wired Commands
internal_wired.ip.dhcp.option12_format
728
Description This command specifies the value which will be used for option 12 (host name)
to be used in the DHCP discovery packet of the internal wired print server. This command is
only supported on Zebra ZM400/ZM600 printers. For printer support, see SGD Command
Type getvar;setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the value which will be used for option 12 (host
name) to be used in the DHCP discovery packet of the internal wired print
server.
Format:
! U1 getvar
"internal_wired.ip.dhcp.option12_format"
setvar This command instructs the printer to set value which will be used for
option 12 (host name) to be used in the DHCP discovery packet of the
internal wired print server.
Format: ! U1 setvar
"internal_wired.ip.dhcp.option12_format" "value"
Values: 0 to 109 alphanumeric characters
Default Value: ""
Example This setvar example shows configuring the
internal_wired.ip.dhcp.option12_format to the value contained in the device.friendly_name.
It is necessary to surround the SGD entry to be used as source for the data with the < and >
characters.
! U1 setvar "internal_wired.ip.dhcp.option12_format"
"<device.friendly_name>"
To further explain, if the above command was issued and the value currently stored in the
device.friendly_name parameter was "ShipPrinter", then the response to following
command would be "ShipPrinter":
! U1 getvar "internal_wired.ip.dhcp.option12_value"
729
SGD Wired Commands
internal_wired.ip.dhcp.option12_value
Description This command retrieves the actual value which will be used in the discovery
packet of the internal wired print server. This command is only supported on Zebra
ZM400/ZM600 printers. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the actual value which will be used in the
discovery packet of the internal wired print server.
Format:
! U1 getvar
"internal_wired.ip.dhcp.option12_value"
Example This setvar example shows configuring the
internal_wired.ip.dhcp.option12_format to the value contained in the device.friendly_name.
characters.
! U1 setvar "internal_wired.ip.dhcp.option12_format"
! U1 getvar "internal_wired.ip.dhcp.option12_value"
SGD Wired Commands
internal_wired.ip.dhcp.request_timeout
730
Description This command retrieves the maximum amount of time to wait (in seconds) for
a response for a DHCP discover requests on the internal print server. This command is
supported only on Zebra ZM400/ZM600 printers. For printer support, see SGD Command
Type getvar;setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the currently set maximum amount of time to wait
for a response before timing out DHCP discover requests.
Format:
! U1 getvar
"internal_wired.ip.dhcp.request_timeout"
setvar This command instructs the printer to set the maximum amount of time to
wait for a response before timing out DHCP discover requests.
Format:
! U1 setvar
"internal_wired.ip.dhcp.request_timeout" "value"
Values: 2-30
Default: "2"
! U1 setvar "ip.dhcp.request_timeout" "2"
731
SGD Wired Commands
internal_wired.ip.dhcp.requests_per_session
Description This command retrieves the maximum amount of DHCP discover requests for
a single DHCP session on the internal wired print server. This command is supported only on
Zebra ZM400/ZM600 printers. For printer support, see SGD Command Support
on page 943.
Type getvar;setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the currently set maximum amount of DHCP
discover requests for a single DHCP session on the internal wired print
server.
Format: ! U1 getvar
"internal_wired.ip.dhcp.requests_per_session"
setvar This command instructs the printer to set the maximum amount of DHCP
discover requests for a single DHCP session on the internal wired print
server.
Format:
! U1 setvar
"internal_wired.ip.dhcp.requests_per_session"
"value"
Values: 1-10
Default: "2"
! U1 setvar "internal_wired.ip.dhcp.requests_per_session"
"2"
SGD Wired Commands
internal_wired.ip.dhcp.session_interval
732
Description This command retrieves how long it will take (in seconds) for a DHCP session
to time out before a new DHCP session begins. This command is supported only on Zebra
ZM400/ZM600 printers. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar;setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the current DHCP session time out.
Format:
! U1 getvar
setvar This command instructs the printer to set the DHCP session time out.
Format:
! U1 setvar
internal_wired.ip.dhcp.session_interval value
Values: 0-60
Default: 10
Example This setvar example shows the value set to 10.
! U1 setvar internal_wired.ip.dhcp.session_interval 10
When the setvar value is set to 10, the getvar result is 10.
733
SGD Wired Commands
internal_wired.ip.gateway
Description This command instructs the printer to change the internal wired print servers
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with the internal wired
printer servers gateway address.
Format: ! U1 getvar "internal_wired.ip.gateway"
setvar This command instructs the printer to change the internal wired printer
Format:
! U1 setvar "internal_wired.ip.gateway" "value"
Default: "0.0.0.0"
! U1 setvar "internal_wired.ip.gateway" "10.3.5.1"
SGD Wired Commands
internal_wired.ip.netmask
734
Description This setting refers to the internal wired print servers subnet mask address. This
value is ignored if the IP protocol is not set to permanent. For printer support, see SGD
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with internal wired print
Format: ! U1 getvar "internal_wired.ip.netmask"
setvar This command instructs the printer to change the internal wired print
Format:
! U1 setvar "internal_wired.ip.netmask" "value"
Default: "255.255.255.0"
! U1 setvar "internal_wired.ip.netmask" "255.255.255.0"
"255.255.255.0".
735
SGD Wired Commands
internal_wired.ip.port
Description This printer setting refers to the internal wired print servers port number that
the TCP print service is listening on. Normal TCP communications from the host should be
directed to this port. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with the internal wired
printer servers TCP/UDP port number.
Format: ! U1 getvar "internal_wired.ip.port"
setvar This command instructs the printer to set the internal wired print servers
Format: ! U1 setvar "internal_wired.ip.port" "value"
such as 21, 23, 80, and 515).
Default: "9100"
! U1 setvar "internal_wired.ip.port" "9100"
SGD Wired Commands
internal_wired.ip.protocol
736
Description This command configures the IP addressing method used by the internal wired
Type getvar;setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command returns the IP addressing method used by the internal wired
print server.
Format: ! U1 getvar "internal_wired.ip.protocol"
used by the internal wired print server.
Format:
! U1 setvar "internal_wired.ip.protocol" "value"
Values:
address
"glean" = uses the IP address from a PING packet that is sent to its
hardware address (unicast address)
commands
Default: "all"
printer is using.
! U1 setvar "internal_wired.ip.protocol" "bootp"
"bootp".
737
SGD Wired Commands
internal_wired.ip.timeout.enable
Description This network setting refers to enabling the connection timeout on the internal
wired print server. For this to take effect, the print server must be reset. For printer support, see
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to return whether the timeout checking
is enabled on the internal wired print server.
Format:
! U1 getvar "internal_wired.ip.timeout.enable"
checking on the internal wired print server.
Format:
! U1 setvar "internal_wired.ip.timeout.enable" "value"
Values:
Default: "on"
! U1 setvar "internal_wired.ip.timeout.enable" "on"
SGD Wired Commands
internal_wired.ip.timeout.value
738
times out for the internal wired print server. For this to take effect, the print server must be
reset. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with the time of the internal
wired print server, in seconds, before the connection times out.
Format:
! U1 getvar "internal_wired.ip.timeout.value"
setvar This command instructs the printer to set the time of the internal wired print
server, in seconds, before the connection times out.
Format:
! U1 setvar "internal_wired.ip.timeout.value" "value"
Default: "300"
! U1 setvar "internal_wired.ip.timeout.value" "300"
739
SGD Wired Commands
internal_wired.mac_addr
Description This command retrieves the MAC address of the internal wired print server.
Type getvar
Commands Details
Format: ! U1 getvar "internal_wired.mac_addr"
Example In this example, the getvar result is the MAC address of the internal wired
print server.
! U1 getvar "internal_wired.mac_addr"
SGD Wired Commands
internal_wired.mac_raw
740
Description This command identifies the RAW MAC address of the internal wired print
server. The raw mac address is the mac address without the colons (":"). This command is
only supported on Zebra ZM400/ZM600 printers. For printer support, see SGD Command
Type getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the RAW MAC address of the internal wired print
server.
Format: ! U1 getvar "internal_wired.mac_raw"
Example In this example, the getvar retrieves the RAW MAC address of the internal
wired print server.
! U1 getvar "internal_wired.mac_raw"

8
SGD Wireless Commands
This chapter provides a high-level overview of the wireless Set / Get / Do (SGD) commands
and details on each SGD command. For printer support of these SGD commands, see SGD
SGD commands are available in printers with firmware version V60.15.x, V50.15.x,
V61.15.x, V56.15.x, V53.15.xZ, or later.
Note The commands listed in this chapter are for use with the Wireless Print Server and
Wireless Plus Print Server, when used with firmware version V60.15.x, V50.15.x, or later.
Overview
742

Overview
SGD commands are commands that allow you to configure all printers with firmware version
V60.15.x, V50.15.x, V61.15.x, V56.15.x, V53.15.xZ, or later. The printer performs the
setvar
getvar
do
setvar Command
Setvar commands:
getvar Command
Getvar commands:
743
Overview

do Command
Do commands:
Command Structure
744

Command Structure
(setvar or getvar).
1 2 3
END
1
3
2
745
bluetooth.address
bluetooth.address
Description This command returns the printers Bluetooth device address. For printer
Type getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the printers Bluetooth address.
Format: ! U1 getvar "bluetooth.address"
Example In this example, the getvar command causes the printer to return the printers
Bluetooth address.
! U1 getvar "bluetooth.address"
bluetooth.afh_map
746
bluetooth.afh_map
Description This command sets or retrieves the default AFH (adaptive frequency hopping)
channel map (Bluetooth radios 1.2 and later); 20 bytes. For printer support, see SGD
Type getvar;setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves default AFH channel map.
Format: ! U1 getvar "bluetooth.afh_map"
setvar This command selectively enables or disables individual Bluetooth
channels for use when AFH mode is set to "on".
Format: ! U1 setvar "bluetooth.afh_map" "value"
Values: 20-byte string of hexadecimal characters
Default: "7FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF"
Example This setvar example shows the value set to "7FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF".
! U1 setvar "bluetooth.afh_map" "7FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF"
"7FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF".
747
bluetooth.afh_map_curr
Description This command retrieves the current AFH (adaptive frequency hopping)
channel map (Bluetooth radios 1.2 and later). For printer support, see SGD Command Support
on page 943.
Type getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the current AFH channel map.
Format: ! U1 getvar "bluetooth.afh_map_curr"
Example In this example, the getvar command causes the printer to retrieve the current
AFH channel map.
! U1 getvar "bluetooth.afh_map_curr"
bluetooth.afh_mode
748
bluetooth.afh_mode
Description This command sets or retrieves AFH (adaptive frequency hopping) mode
setting (Bluetooth radios 1.2 and later). For printer support, see SGD Command Support
on page 943.
Type getvar;setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the current setting of the AFH mode.
Format: ! U1 getvar "bluetooth.afh_mode"
setvar This command enables and disables AFH mode.
Format: ! U1 setvar "bluetooth.afh_mode" "value"
Values:
"on" = enables AFH mode
"off" = disables AFH mode
Default: "off"
! U1 setvar "bluetooth.afh_mode" "on"
"on".
749
bluetooth.authentication
Description This command sets or retrieves Bluetooth authentication mode and works in
combination with the bluetooth.bluetooth_pin. For printer support, see SGD
Type getvar;setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the current Bluetooth authentication mode.
Format: ! U1 getvar "bluetooth.authentication"
setvar This command enables and disables Bluetooth authentication.
Format: ! U1 setvar "bluetooth.authentication" "value"
Values:
"off" = disables authentication (can connect to master device
without PIN)
"setpin" = enables authentication (requires PIN or passkey to
connect to a master device)
Default: "off"
Example This setvar example shows the value set to "setpin".
! U1 setvar "bluetooth.authentication" "setpin"
"setpin".
bluetooth.bluetooth_pin
750
Description This command is used to connect to the printer only when the command
bluetooth.authentication is set to "setpin". For printer support, see SGD
Type getvar;setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the current Bluetooth pin.
Format: ! U1 getvar "bluetooth.bluetooth_pin"
setvar This command sets the Bluetooth pin value.
Format:
! U1 setvar "bluetooth.bluetooth_pin" "value"
Values: Any text string up to 16 characters
Default: ""
! U1 setvar "bluetooth.bluetooth_pin" "1234567890"
"1234567890".
751
bluetooth.date
bluetooth.date
Description This command shows the release date of the Bluetooth module. For printer
Type getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command shows the release date of the Bluetooth module.
Format: ! U1 getvar "bluetooth.date"
Example In this example, the getvar command returns the release date of the Bluetooth
module.
! U1 getvar "bluetooth.date"
bluetooth.discoverable
752
Description This command enables or disables the Bluetooth discoverable mode. For
Type getvar;setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the current Bluetooth discoverable mode.
Format: ! U1 getvar "bluetooth.discoverable"
setvar This command enables or disables the Bluetooth discoverable mode.
Format: ! U1 setvar "bluetooth.discoverable" "value"
Values:
"on" = enables Bluetooth discoverable mode
"off" = disables Bluetooth discoverable mode
Default: "on"
! U1 setvar "bluetooth.discoverable" "on"
"on".
753
bluetooth.enable
bluetooth.enable
Description This command enables or disables the Bluetooth radio. For printer support, see
Type getvar;setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the current status of the Bluetooth radio.
Format: ! U1 getvar "bluetooth.enable"
setvar This command enables or disables the Bluetooth radio.
Format: ! U1 setvar "bluetooth.enable"
Values:
"on" = enables the Bluetooth radio
"off" = disables the Bluetooth radio
Default: "on"
! U1 setvar "bluetooth.enable" "on"
"on".
bluetooth.friendly_name
754
Description This command sets the friendly name, which is used during service discovery.
For changes to take effect, you must power cycle the printer or issue the device.reset
command. If bluetooth.friendly_name is not set by you, it will default to the printer
serial number. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar;setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the current Bluetooth discoverable mode.
Format: ! U1 getvar "bluetooth.friendly_name"
setvar This command sets the Bluetooth discoverable mode.
Format: ! U1 setvar "bluetooth.friendly_name" "value"
Values: Any text string up to 17 characters
! U1 setvar "bluetooth.friendly_name" "1234567"
"1234567".
755
bluetooth.local_name
Description This command retrieves the local name that is provided during service
discovery. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the local name that is provided during service
discovery.
Format: ! U1 getvar "bluetooth.local_name"
Example In this example, the getvar command returns the local name that is provided
during service discovery.
! U1 getvar "bluetooth.local_name"
bluetooth.radio_auto_baud
756
Description This command retrieves the Bluetooth radio data rate. For printer support, see
Type getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves Bluetooth radio data rate.
Format: ! U1 getvar "bluetooth.radio_auto_baud"
Example In this example, the getvar retrieves the short Bluetooth address.
! U1 getvar "bluetooth.radio_auto_baud"
757
bluetooth.radio_version
Description This command returns the version of the currently installed Bluetooth radio.
Type getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command returns the version of the currently installed Bluetooth
radio.
Format: ! U1 getvar "bluetooth.radio_version"
Example In this example, the getvar command returns the currently installed Bluetooth
radio.
! U1 getvar "bluetooth.radio_version"
bluetooth.short_address
758
Description This command shortens the Bluetooth address by removing the colons (":").
Type getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the shortened Bluetooth address.
Format: ! U1 getvar "bluetooth.short_address"
Example In this example, the getvar retrieves the short Bluetooth address.
! U1 getvar "bluetooth.short_address"
759
bluetooth.version
bluetooth.version
Description This command returns the Bluetooth library version number. For printer
Type getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command returns the Bluetooth library version number.
Format: ! U1 getvar "bluetooth.version"
Example In this example, the getvar command returns the Bluetooth library version
number.
! U1 getvar "bluetooth.version"
card.mac_addr
760
card.mac_addr
Description This command retrieves the MAC address of the wireless radio card. For
Type getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with the MAC address.
Format: ! U1 getvar "card.mac_addr"
Example In this example, the getvar result is the MAC address for the wireless radio
card.
! U1 getvar "card.mac_addr"
761
card.inserted
card.inserted
Description This command indicates whether the wireless radio card is or is not inserted.
Type getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with the wireless radio card
status. Its inserted or its not inserted.
Format: ! U1 getvar "card.inserted"
Example In this example, the getvar result is "Inserted".
! U1 getvar "card.inserted"
ip.active_network
762
ip.active_network
Description This command displays if the printer is actively connected to wireless, external
wired, or internal wired. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with what the printer is
currently connected to internal wired, wireless, external wired, or
unknown. Table 10 provides details on the potential return values.
Format: ! U1 getvar "ip.active_network"
Example In this example, the getvar will return the current active network the printer is
connected to.
! U1 getvar "ip.active_network"
Table 10 Printer Responses
Return Values Details
internal wired This is the return value when an internal wired device is detected.
wireless This is the return value when a wireless device is detected.
external wired This is the return value when an external wired device is detected.
unknown This is the return value:
if the printer has not established a network connection on any of
the devices
if you don't have any of the network devices plugged in
if the printer is still trying to establish a connection (i.e. on
wireless it is going through the association process).
763
ip.addr
ip.addr
Description This command allows you to get or set the printers IP address. For printer
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with its current IP address.
Format: ! U1 getvar "ip.addr"
setvar This command instructs the printer to change its current IP address upon
powering the printer on.
Format: ! U1 setvar "ip.addr" "value"
Default: "0.0.0.0"
Note The setvar value of this command can be affected by the ip.dhcp.enable
command.
! U1 setvar "ip.addr" "10.14.4.235"
"10.14.4.235".
ip.arp_interval
764
ip.arp_interval
Description This printer setting allows you to specify the ARP (Address Resolution
Protocol) interval or the ARP cache time out. For printer support, see SGD Command Support
on page 943.
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
ARP cache time out value in seconds.
Format: ! U1 getvar "ip.arp_interval"
cache time out.
Format: ! U1 setvar "ip.arp_interval" "value"
Values: 0 - 30
Default: "0"
! U1 setvar "ip.arp_interval" "0"
"0".
765
ip.bootp.enable
ip.bootp.enable
Description This printer setting turns BOOTP on or off. BOOTP is a method for acquiring
an IP address, netmask, and gateway automatically on printer power-up. It requires a BOOTP
server on the local network. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar; setvar
Note If you are using static IP addressing, the IP protocol must be set to permanent.
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with the current BOOTP
setting.
Format: ! U1 getvar "ip.bootp.enable"
setvar This command instructs the printer to turn BOOTP on or off.
Format: ! U1 setvar "ip.bootp.enable" "value"
Values:
"off" = printer does not use BOOTP to get the IP address
"on" = printer uses BOOTP to get the IP address
Default: "on"
! U1 setvar "ip.bootp.enable" "on"
ip.dhcp.cache_ip
766
ip.dhcp.cache_ip
Description This command enables or disables the IP caching. For printer support, see SGD
Type getvar;setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the status of the IP cache.
Format: ! U1 getvar "ip.dhcp.cache_ip"
Format: ! U1 setvar "ip.dhcp.cache_ip" "value"
Values:
"on" = enabled
"off = disabled
Default: "off
Example This setvar example shows the value set to "off.
! U1 setvar "ip.dhcp.cache_ip" "off
767
ip.dhcp.cid_all
ip.dhcp.cid_all
Description This printer setting defines the entire client identifier (DHCP option 61) if the
DHCP is enabled and "ip.dhcp.cid_type" is set to "0", or "2". The MAC address is
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
prefix and suffix.
Format: ! U1 getvar "ip.dhcp.cid_all"
setvar This command instructs the printer to change the CID prefix and suffix.
Format: ! U1 setvar "ip.dhcp.cid_all" "value"
Default Value: ""
! U1 setvar "ip.dhcp.cid_all" "printer"
"printer".
ip.dhcp.cid_enable
768
ip.dhcp.cid_enable
Description This command determines if DHCP (option 61) is turned on or off. For printer
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
identifier.
Format: ! U1 getvar "ip.dhcp.cid_enable"
setvar This command instructs the printer to set the status of the client identifier.
Format: ! U1 setvar "ip.dhcp.cid_enable" "value"
Values:
Default: "off"
! U1 setvar "ip.dhcp.cid_enable" "off"
"off".
769
ip.dhcp.cid_prefix
ip.dhcp.cid_prefix
identifier (option 61) when DHCP is enabled and "ip.dhcp.cid_type" is set to "0"or
"2". For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
prefix.
Format: ! U1 getvar "ip.dhcp.cid_prefix"
setvar This command instructs the printer to change the CID prefix.
Format: ! U1 setvar "ip.dhcp.cid_prefix" "value"
Values: Any text string up to 10 characters if the CID type is ASCII, or
Default Value: ""
! U1 setvar "ip.dhcp.cid_prefix" "PRT001"
"PRT001".
ip.dhcp.cid_suffix
770
ip.dhcp.cid_suffix
(DHCP option 61) if DHCP is enabled and "ip.dhcp.cid_type" is set to "0" or "2".
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
suffix.
Format: ! U1 getvar "ip.dhcp.cid_suffix"
setvar This command instructs the printer to change the CID value.
Format: ! U1 setvar "ip.dhcp.cid_suffix" "value"
Default Value: ""
! U1 setvar "ip.dhcp.cid_suffix" "printer"
"printer".
771
ip.dhcp.lease.length
Description This command retrieves the original length of the DHCP lease on the wireless
Type getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the original length of the DHCP lease on the
Format: ! U1 getvar "ip.dhcp.lease.length"
Example This command retrieves the original length of the DHCP lease on the wireless
print server.
! U1 getvar "ip.dhcp.lease.length"
"1296000"
ip.dhcp.cid_type
772
ip.dhcp.cid_type
will be sent if DHCP is enabled. A value of "1" means the type of "Ethernet" and the printers
MAC address will be used. A value of "0" or "2" means the client identifier sent will be
"ip.dhcp.cid_prefix" concatenated with "ip.dhcp.cid_suffix". For printer
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
type.
Format: ! U1 getvar "ip.dhcp.cid_type"
setvar This command instructs the printer to enable "synthetic" Client Identifier.
Format: ! U1 setvar "ip.dhcp.cid_type" "value"
Values:
"0" = ASCII string
"1" = wireless radio cards MAC address
"2" = HEX value
Default Value: "1"
! U1 setvar "ip.dhcp.cid_type" "1"
773
ip.dhcp.enable
ip.dhcp.enable
Definition This printer setting turns DHCP on or off. DHCP is a method for acquiring an IP
address, netmask, and gateway automatically on printer power-up. It requires a DHCP server
on the local network. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar; setvar
Note If you are using static IP addressing, the IP protocol must be set to permanent.
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with the DHCP status.
Format: ! U1 getvar "ip.dhcp.enable"
setvar This command instructs the printer to turn DHCP on or off.
Format: ! U1 setvar "ip.dhcp.enable" "value"
Values:
"off" = printer does not use DHCP to get the IP address
"on" = printer uses DHCP to get the IP address
Default: "on"
! U1 setvar "ip.dhcp.enable" "on"
ip.dhcp.lease.last_attempt
774
Description This command retrieves the time from the DHCP server of when the last DHCP
request was sent. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the last time a DHCP request was sent.
Format: ! U1 getvar "ip.dhcp.lease.last_attempt"
the wireless print server.
! U1 getvar "ip.dhcp.lease.last_attempt"
775
ip.dhcp.lease.server
Description This command retrieves the address of the server that provided the DHCP lease
on the wireless print server. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the address of the server that provided the DHCP
lease on the wireless print server.
Format: ! U1 getvar "ip.dhcp.lease.server"
Example In this example, the getvar retrieves the server that provided the DHCP lease
on the wireless print server.
! U1 getvar "ip.dhcp.lease.server"
"10.3.5.1"
ip.dhcp.lease.time_left
776
Description This command retrieves the time left in the current DHCP lease on the wireless
Type getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the time left in the current DHCP lease on the
Format: ! U1 getvar "ip.dhcp.lease.time_left"
! U1 getvar "ip.dhcp.lease.time_left"
"1192518"
777
ip.dhcp.option12
ip.dhcp.option12
discovery packet that is sent from the wireless print server. For printer support, see SGD
Type getvar;setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the status of the DHCP option 12 (host name) in
the discovery packet that is sent from the wireless print server.
Format: ! U1 getvar "ip.dhcp.option12"
setvar This command instructs the printer to set the DHCP option 12 (host name)
in the discovery packet that is sent from the wireless print server.
Format: ! U1 setvar "ip.dhcp.option12" "value"
Values:
Default Value: "on"
! U1 setvar "ip.dhcp.option12" "on"
ip.dhcp.option12_format
778
Description This command specifies the value which will be used for option 12 (host name)
to be used in the DHCP discovery packet of the wireless print server. For printer support, see
Type getvar;setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the value which will be used for option 12 (host
name) to be used in the DHCP discovery packet of the wireless print
server.
Format: ! U1 getvar "ip.dhcp.option12_format"
setvar This command instructs the printer to set the value which will be used for
option 12 (host name) to be used in the DHCP discovery packet of the
Format:
! U1 setvar "ip.dhcp.option12_format" "value"
Values: string
Default Value: ""
Example This setvar example shows configuring the ip.dhcp.option12_format to the
value contained in the device.friendly_name.
characters.
! U1 setvar "ip.dhcp.option12_format" "<device.friendly_name>"
! U1 getvar "ip.dhcp.option12_value"
779
ip.dhcp.option12_value
packet of the wireless print server. For printer support, see SGD Command Support
on page 943.
Type getvar
Commands Details
discovery packet of the wireless print server.
Format: ! U1 getvar "ip.dhcp.option12_value"
Example This setvar example shows configuring the ip.dhcp.option12_format to the
value contained in the device.friendly_name.
characters.
! U1 setvar "ip.dhcp.option12_format" "<device.friendly_name>"
! U1 getvar "ip.dhcp.option12_value"
ip.dhcp.request_timeout
780
Description This command retrieves the maximum amount of time (in seconds) for a DHCP
discovery requests on the wireless print server. For printer support, see SGD Command
Type getvar;setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the currently set the amount of time (in seconds)
to wait before timing out a DHCP discovery request.
Format: ! U1 getvar "ip.dhcp.request_timeout"
setvar This command instructs the printer to set the amount of time (in seconds)
to wait before timing out a DHCP discovery request.
Format:
! U1 setvar "ip.dhcp.request_timeout" "value"
Default: "2"
! U1 setvar "ip.dhcp.request_timeout" "2"
781
ip.dhcp.requests_per_session
Description This command retrieves the maximum amount of DHCP discovery requests for
a single DHCP session on the wireless print server. For printer support, see SGD Command
Type getvar;setvar
Commands Details
discovery requests for a single DHCP session on the wireless print server.
Format: ! U1 getvar "ip.dhcp.requests_per_session"
discovery requests for a single DHCP session on the wireless print server.
Format:
! U1 setvar "ip.dhcp.requests_per_session" "value"
Default: "2"
! U1 setvar "ip.dhcp.requests_per_session" "2"
ip.dhcp.session_interval
782
Description This command configures the time interval (in seconds) before a new DHCP
session is started on the wireless print server. For printer support, see SGD Command Support
on page 943.
Type getvar;setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the current DHCP session time out value (in
seconds).
Format: ! U1 getvar "ip.dhcp.session_interval"
setvar This command instructs the printer to set the DHCP session time out value
(in seconds).
Format:
! U1 setvar "ip.dhcp.session_interval" "value"
Default: "10"
! U1 setvar "ip.dhcp.session_interval" "10"
783
ip.dns.domain
ip.dns.domain
Description This command identifies the network domain of the wireless print server. For
Type getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the network domain of the wireless print server.
Format: ! U1 getvar "ip.dns.domain"
Example In this example, the getvar retrieves the network domain of the wireless print
server.
! U1 getvar "ip.dns.domain"
ip.dns.servers
784
ip.dns.servers
Description This command retrieves a space delimited list of the domain name servers from
a wireless print server. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves a list of space delimited DNS wireless print
servers.
Format: ! U1 getvar "ip.dns.servers"
Example In this example, the getvar retrieves a list of space delimited DNS wireless
print servers.
! U1 getvar "ip.dns.servers"
785
ip.ftp.enable
ip.ftp.enable
Description This printer setting refers to the FTP protocol setting. This command tells the
printer to turn FTP on or off. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with the FTP status.
Format: ! U1 getvar "ip.ftp.enable"
setvar This command instructs the printer to turn FTP on or off.
Format: ! U1 setvar "ip.ftp.enable" "value"
Values:
"off" = disables FTP
"on" = enables FTP
Default: "on"
Example This setvar example shows the FTP status set to "on".
! U1 setvar "ip.ftp.enable" "on"
When the setvar value is set to "on", the getvar result is that the FTP status is "on".
ip.gateway
786
ip.gateway
Description This command instructs the printer to change the gateway address. For printer
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with the gateway address.
Format: ! U1 getvar "ip.gateway"
setvar This command instructs the printer to change the gateway address.
Format: ! U1 setvar "ip.gateway" "value"
Default: "0.0.0.0"
! U1 setvar "ip.gateway" "10.3.5.1"
787
ip.http.enable
ip.http.enable
Description This printer setting refers to the HTTP protocol/web server setting. For printer
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with the HTTP status.
Format: ! U1 getvar "ip.http.enable"
setvar This command instructs the printer to change HTTP to on or off.
Format: ! U1 setvar "ip.http.enable" "value"
Values:
"off" = disables HTTP protocol
"on" = enables HTTP protocol
Default: "on"
! U1 setvar "ip.http.enable" "on"
ip.lpd.enable
788
ip.lpd.enable
Description This printer setting refers to the LPD (Line Printer Daemon) protocol setting.
Type getvar; setvar
Important LPD communications from the host should be directed to port 515.
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with the LPD status.
Format: ! U1 getvar "ip.lpd.enable"
setvar This command instructs the printer to turn LPD on or off.
Format: ! U1 setvar "ip.lpd.enable" "value"
Values:
"off" = disables LPD protocol
"on" = enables LPD protocol
Default: "on"
! U1 setvar "ip.lpd.enable" "on"
789
ip.mac_raw
ip.mac_raw
Description This command specifies the RAW MAC address of the wireless print server.
Type getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the RAW MAC address of the wireless print
server.
Format: ! U1 getvar "ip.mac_raw"
Example In this example, the getvar retrieves the RAW MAC address of the wireless
print server.
! U1 getvar "ip.mac_raw"
ip.netmask
790
ip.netmask
Description This setting refers to the subnet mask address. This value is ignored if the IP
protocol is not set to permanent. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with subnet mask.
Format: ! U1 getvar "ip.netmask"
setvar This command instructs the printer to change the subnet mask.
Format: ! U1 setvar "ip.netmask" "value"
Default: "255.255.255.0"
! U1 setvar "ip.netmask" "255.255.255.0"
"255.255.255.0".
791
ip.pop3.enable
ip.pop3.enable
Description This printer setting determines if the printer queries a POP3 mailbox for mail.
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with the POP3 status.
Format: ! U1 getvar "ip.pop3.enable"
setvar This command instructs the printer to turn POP3 on or off.
Format: ! U1 setvar "ip.pop3.enable" "value"
Values:
"off" = disables POP3
"on" = enables POP3
Default: "on"
! U1 setvar "ip.pop3.enable" "on"
ip.pop3.password
792
ip.pop3.password
Description This printer setting refers to the POP3 mailbox password. This only applies if
"ip.pop3.enable" is set to on. For printer support, see SGD Command Support
on page 943.
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with the POP3 password.
Format: ! U1 getvar "ip.pop3.password"
For protection a single "*" prints.
setvar This command instructs the printer to change the POP3 password.
Format: ! U1 setvar "ip.pop3.password" "value"
Values: A maximum of 20 alphanumeric characters
Default: " "
Example This setvar example shows the value set to "password".
! U1 setvar "ip.pop3.password" "password"
When the setvar value is set to "password", the getvar result is "*".
793
ip.pop3.poll
ip.pop3.poll
Description This printer setting refers to how frequent (in seconds) the printer queries a
POP3 mailbox for new mail. This only applies if the "ip.pop3.enable" is set to on. For
Type getvar; setvar
Note A poll value of less then thirty seconds is not recommended. The printer is
unresponsive for several seconds when polling for email depending on data transfer time
from the server to the printer.
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with the POP3 poll
frequency (in seconds).
Format: ! U1 getvar "ip.pop3.poll"
setvar This command instructs the printer to change the POP3 poll interval. A
value of "0" causes the printer to only query the POP3 mailbox one time,
on printer power up, or following a network reset.
Format: ! U1 setvar "ip.pop3.poll" "value"
Default: "0"
! U1 setvar "ip.pop3.poll" "0"
ip.pop3.server_addr
794
ip.pop3.server_addr
Description This printer setting refers to the POP3 server IP address that the printer contacts
when checking for new mail. This only applies if "ip.pop3.enable" is set to on. For
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with the POP3 server
address.
Format: ! U1 getvar "ip.pop3.server_addr"
setvar This command instructs the printer to change the POP3 server address.
Format: ! U1 setvar "ip.pop3.server_addr" "value"
Values: Any valid POP3 server address
Default: "0.0.0.0"
! U1 setvar "ip.pop3.server_addr" "10.3.5.10"
795
ip.pop3.username
ip.pop3.username
Description This printer setting refers to the POP3 user name. This only applies if the
"ip.pop3.enable" is set to on. For printer support, see SGD Command Support
on page 943.
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with the POP3 user name.
Format: ! U1 getvar "ip.pop3.username"
setvar This command instructs the printer to change the POP3 user name.
Format: ! U1 setvar "ip.pop3.username" "value"
Default: " "
Example This setvar example shows the value set to "user".
! U1 setvar "ip.pop3.username" "user"
When the setvar value is set to "user", the getvar result is "user".
ip.port
796
ip.port
Description This printer setting refers to the port number that the TCP print service is
listening on. Normal TCP communications from the host should be directed to this port. For
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with the TCP/UDP port
number.
Format: ! U1 getvar "ip.port"
setvar This command instructs the printer to set the TCP/UDP port number.
Format: ! U1 setvar "ip.port" "value"
such as 21, 23, 80, and 515).
Default: "9100"
! U1 setvar "ip.port" "9100"
797
ip.primary_network
ip.primary_network
Description This command allows you to set the primary network to either wired or
wireless. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with the name of the current
primary network device.
Format: ! U1 getvar "ip.primary_network"
setvar This command instructs the printer to set the primary network device.
Format: ! U1 setvar "ip.primary_network" "value"
Values:
1 = wired
2 = wireless
Default: "1"
! U1 setvar "ip.primary_network" "1"
"1".
ip.smtp.domain
798
ip.smtp.domain
Description This printer setting refers to the domain name used by the printer in sending
email with respect to the SMTP server. For printer support, see SGD Command Support
on page 943.
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to return the SMTP domain name.
Format: ! U1 getvar "ip.smtp.domain"
setvar This command instructs the printer to change the SMTP domain name.
Format: ! U1 setvar "ip.smtp.domain" "value"
Default: "ZBRPrintServer"
Example This setvar example shows the value set to "ZBRPrintServer.com".
! U1 setvar "ip.smtp.domain" "ZBRPrintServer.com"
When the setvar value is set to "ZBRPrintServer.com", the getvar result is
"ZBRPrintServer.com".
799
ip.smtp.enable
ip.smtp.enable
Description This printer setting refers to the SMTP protocol. For printer support, see SGD
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to return the SMTP status.
Format: ! U1 getvar "ip.smtp.enable"
setvar This command instructs the printer to turn SMTP on or off.
Format: ! U1 setvar "ip.smtp.enable" "value"
Values:
"off" = disables SMTP
"on" = enables SMTP
Default: "on"
! U1 setvar "ip.smtp.enable" "on"
ip.smtp.server_addr
800
ip.smtp.server_addr
Description This printer setting refers to the IP address of the SMTP server used for sending
email. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with the current SMTP
server address.
Format: ! U1 getvar "ip.smtp.server_addr"
setvar This command instructs the printer to change the SMTP server address.
Format: ! U1 setvar "ip.smtp.server_addr" "value"
Values: Any valid IP address.
Default: 0.0.0.0
Example This setvar example shows the value set to 10.10.10.10.
! U1 setvar "ip.smtp.server_addr" "10.10.10.10"
"10.10.10.10".
801
ip.snmp.get_community_name
Description This printer setting is used when making SNMP queries. The SNMP client
must supply the get community name that matches the printers get community name in order
to query any SNMP data. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to get the SNMP get community name
string.
Format: ! U1 getvar "ip.snmp.get_community_name"
setvar This command instructs the printer to set the SNMP get community name
string.
Format:
! U1 setvar "ip.snmp.get_community_name" "value"
Values: A maximum of 19 alphanumeric characters.
Default: "public"
Example This setvar example shows the value set to "public".
! U1 setvar "ip.snmp.get_community_name" "public"
When the setvar value is set to "public", the getvar result is "*".
ip.snmp.set_community_name
802
Description This printer setting is used when changing SNMP data remotely. To alter any
SNMP data, the SNMP client must supply the set community name that matches the printers
set community name. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to return the printers SNMP set
community name string.
Format: ! U1 getvar "ip.snmp.set_community_name"
For protection a single "*" returns.
setvar This command instructs the printer to set the SNMP set community name
string.
Format:
! U1 setvar "ip.snmp.set_community_name" "value"
Default: "public"
Example This setvar example shows the value set to "public".
! U1 setvar "ip.snmp.set_community_name" "public"
When the setvar value is set to "public", the getvar result is "*".
803
ip.snmp.enable
ip.snmp.enable
Description This printer setting refers to the SNMP protocol. For printer support, see SGD
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with the SNMP status.
Format: ! U1 getvar "ip.snmp.enable"
setvar This command instructs the printer to enable or disable the SNMP
protocol.
Format: ! U1 setvar "ip.snmp.enable" "value"
Values:
"on" = enable the SNMP protocol
"off" = disable the SNMP protocol
Default: "on"
! U1 setvar "ip.snmp.enable" "on"
ip.telnet.enable
804
ip.telnet.enable
Description This printer setting refers to the TELNET (port 23) protocol. For printer
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with the TELNET status.
Format: ! U1 getvar "ip.telnet.enable"
setvar This command instructs the printer to turn TELNET on or off.
Format: ! U1 setvar "ip.telnet.enable" "value"
Values:
"off" = disables telnet protocol
"on" = enables telnet protocol
Default: "on"
! U1 setvar "ip.telnet.enable" "on"
805
ip.tcp.enable
ip.tcp.enable
Description This printer setting refers to the TCP socket protocol. For printer support, see
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with the TCP status.
Format: ! U1 getvar "ip.tcp.enable"
setvar This command instructs the printer to turn the TCP on or off.
Format: ! U1 setvar "ip.tcp.enable" "value"
Values:
"off" = disables TCP protocol
"on" = enables TCP protocol
Default: "on"
! U1 setvar "ip.tcp.enable" "on"
ip.udp.enable
806
ip.udp.enable
Description This printer setting refers to the UDP socket protocol. For printer support, see
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with the UDP status.
Format: ! U1 getvar "ip.udp.enable"
setvar This command instructs the printer to turn UDP on or off.
Format: ! U1 setvar "ip.udp.enable" "value"
Values:
"off" = disables UDP protocol
"on" = enables UDP protocol
Default: "off"
! U1 setvar "ip.udp.enable" "on"
807
wlan.adhocautomode
wlan.adhocautomode
Description This printer setting refers to enabling or disabling the adhoc auto mode. For
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with the adhoc auto mode
status.
Format: ! U1 getvar "wlan.adhocautomode"
setvar This command instructs the printer to set the adhoc auto mode.
Format: ! U1 setvar "wlan.adhocautomode" "value"
Values:
"on" = adhoc auto mode enabled
"off" = adhoc auto mode disabled
Default: "off"
! U1 setvar "wlan.adhocautomode" "on"
wlan.adhocchannel
808
wlan.adhocchannel
Description This printer setting refers to specifying the wireless channel for adhoc channel.
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with the wireless channel
for adhoc channel mode.
Format: ! U1 getvar "wlan.adhocchannel"
setvar This command instructs the printer to set the wireless channel for adhoc
channel mode.
Format: ! U1 setvar "wlan.adhocchannel" "value"
Values: Decimal value between 1 and 16 inclusive
Default: "1"
! U1 setvar "wlan.adhocchannel" "1"
809
wlan.associated
wlan.associated
Description This command refers to if the printer is or is not associated with an access point
(AP). For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with yes or no, which
identifies if it is associated with the AP.
Format: ! U1 getvar "wlan.associated"
Example In this example, the getvar result is "yes".
! U1 getvar "wlan.associated"
wlan.bssid
810
wlan.bssid
Description This command returns the MAC address of the access point (AP) with which
the printer is associated. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the MAC address of the access point (AP).
Format: ! U1 getvar "wlan.bssid"
Example In this example, the getvar result is the MAC address of the access point.
! U1 getvar "wlan.bssid"
811
wlan.channel
wlan.channel
Description This command retrieves the current WI-FI channel the printer is using. For
Type getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the current WI-FI channel the printer is using.
Format: ! U1 getvar "wlan.channel"
Example In this example, the getvar retrieves the current WI-FI channel the printer is
using.
! U1 getvar "wlan.channel"
wlan.channel_mask
812
wlan.channel_mask
Description This printer setting refers to specifying the wireless channel masks to enable
and disable various channels. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with the wireless channel
mask value.
Format: ! U1 getvar "wlan.channel_mask"
setvar This command instructs the printer to set the wireless channel mask value.
Format: ! U1 setvar "wlan.channel_mask" "value"
Values: 4 Hexadecimal digits preceded by "0x" (0x0000 to 0xFFFF). For
commonly used channel masks, see Table 1 on page 812.
Default: "0x7FF"
Table 1 Channel Mask Settings
Region Channel Mask
United States, Canada, Latin America 0x7FF
Europe, Middle East, Africa, other 0x1FFF
Japan 0x3FFF
Example This setvar example shows the value set to "0x7FF".
! U1 setvar "wlan.channel_mask" "0x7FF"
When the setvar value is set to "0x7FF", the getvar result is "0x7FF".
813
wlan.current_tx_rate
Description This command retrieves the transmission rate of the wireless print server. For
Type getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to retrieve the current transmit rate of
Format: ! U1 getvar "wlan.current_tx_rate"
Example In this example, the getvar retrieves the transmission rate of the wireless print
server.
! U1 getvar "wlan.current_tx_rate"
wlan.essid
814
wlan.essid
Description This printer setting refers to the printers stored ESSID. Setting the ESSID to ""
will set the printer in a "broadcast" mode. For printer support, see SGD Command
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with the stored ESSID
value.
Format: ! U1 getvar "wlan.essid"
setvar This command instructs the printer to change the ESSID.
Format: ! U1 setvar "wlan.essid" "value"
Values: 32 character alphanumeric string
Default: "125"
! U1 setvar "wlan.essid" "125"
815
wlan.firmware_version
Description This command refers to the firmware version of the wireless radio card. For
Type getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with the current version of
the wireless radio card firmware.
Format: ! U1 getvar "wlan.firmware_version"
Example In this example, the getvar result is the version of Symbol 4137 card (for
example, "F3.91-69").
! U1 getvar "wlan.firmware_version"
wlan.ip.addr
816
wlan.ip.addr
Description This command allows you to get or set the wireless print serverss IP address.
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with its current wireless
print server IP address.
Format: ! U1 getvar "wlan.ip.addr"
setvar This command instructs the printer to change its current wireless print
server IP address upon powering the printer on.
Format: ! U1 setvar "wlan.ip.addr" "value"
Default: "0.0.0.0"
wlan.ip.dhcp.enable command.
! U1 setvar "wlan.ip.addr" "10.14.4.235"
"10.14.4.235".
817
wlan.ip.arp_interval
Protocol) interval or the ARP cache time out for the wireless print server. For printer support,
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
ARP cache time out value (in seconds) for the wireless print server.
Format: ! U1 getvar "wlan.ip.arp_interval"
setvar This command instructs the printer to respond with the ARP interval or the
ARP cache time out value for the wireless print server.
Format: ! U1 setvar "wlan.ip.arp_interval" "value"
Values: 0 to 30 seconds
Default: "0"
! U1 setvar "wlan.ip.arp_interval" "0"
"0".
wlan.ip.default_addr_enable
818
Description This command allows you to default the wireless print servers IP address. For
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to show the status of the setting of the
wireless print servers default IP address feature.
Format:
! U1 getvar "wlan.ip.default_addr_enable"
192.168.254.254.
Format:
! U1 setvar "wlan.ip.default_addr_enable" "value"
Values:
"on" = enabled
"off" = disabled
Default: "on"
! U1 setvar "wlan.ip.default_addr_enable" "on"
"on".
819
wlan.ip.dhcp.cache_ip
Description This command enables or disables the IP cache of the wireless print server. For
Type getvar;setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the status of the IP cache.
Format: ! U1 getvar "wlan.ip.dhcp.cache_ip"
Format: ! U1 setvar "ip.dhcp.cache_ip" "value"
Values:
"on" = enabled
"off = disabled
Default: "off
! U1 setvar "wlan.ip.dhcp.cache_ip" "off"
wlan.ip.dhcp.cid_all
820
DHCP is enabled on the wireless print server and "wlan.ip.dhcp.cid_type" is set to
"0", or "2". The MAC address is used if the type is set to "1". For printer support, see SGD
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
prefix and suffix of the wireless print server.
Format:
! U1 getvar "wlan.ip.dhcp.cid_all"
setvar This command instructs the printer to change the client identifer prefix and
suffix of the wireless print server. The prefix gets cleared and the suffix
contains the entire client identifer.
Format:
! U1 setvar "wlan.ip.dhcp.cid_all" "value"
Default Value: ""
! U1 setvar "wlan.ip.dhcp.cid_all" "printer"
"printer".
821
wlan.ip.dhcp.cid_enable
Description This command determines if DHCP (option 61) is turned on or off of the
wireless print server. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
identifier of the wireless print server.
Format:
! U1 getvar "wlan.ip.dhcp.cid_enable"
of the wireless print server.
Format:
! U1 setvar "wlan.ip.dhcp.cid_enable" "value"
Values:
Default: "off"
! U1 setvar "wlan.ip.dhcp.cid_enable" "off"
"off".
wlan.ip.dhcp.cid_prefix
822
identifier (option 61) when DHCP is enabled on the wireless print server and
"wlan.ip.dhcp.cid_type" is set to "0" or "2". For printer support, see SGD
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
prefix of the wireless print server.
Format:
! U1 getvar "wlan.ip.dhcp.cid_prefix"
setvar This command instructs the printer to change the CID prefix of the
Format:
! U1 setvar "wlan.ip.dhcp.cid_prefix" "value"
Default Value: ""
! U1 setvar "wlan.ip.dhcp.cid_prefix" "PRT001"
"PRT001".
823
wlan.ip.dhcp.cid_suffix
(DHCP option 61) if DHCP is enabled on the wireless print server and
"wlan.ip.dhcp.cid_type" is set to "0" or "2". For printer support, see SGD
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
suffix on the wireless print server.
Format:
! U1 getvar "wlan.ip.dhcp.cid_suffix"
value on the wireless print server.
Format:
! U1 setvar "wlan.ip.dhcp.cid_suffix" "value"
Default Value: ""
! U1 setvar "wlan.ip.dhcp.cid_suffix" "printer"
"printer".
wlan.ip.dhcp.cid_type
824
will be sent if DHCP is enabled on the wireless print server. A value of "1" means the type of
"Ethernet" and the printers MAC address will be used. A value of "0" or "2" means the
client identifier sent will be "wlan.ip.dhcp.cid_prefix" concatenated with
"wlan.ip.dhcp.cid_suffix". For printer support, see SGD Command Support
on page 943.
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
type for the wireless print server.
Format:
! U1 getvar "wlan.ip.dhcp.cid_type"
setvar This command instructs the printer to enable "synthetic" client identifier
for the wireless print server.
Format:
! U1 setvar "wlan.ip.dhcp.cid_type" "value"
Values:
"0" = ASCII string
"1" = wireless radio cards MAC address
"2" = HEX value
Default Value: "1"
! U1 setvar "wlan.ip.dhcp.cid_type" "1"
"1".
825
wlan.ip.dhcp.lease.last_attempt
Description This command retrieves the last time a DHCP request was sent from the
wireless print server. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the last time a DHCP request was sent from the
Format:
! U1 getvar "wlan.ip.dhcp.lease.last_attempt"
! U1 getvar "wlan.ip.dhcp.lease.last_attempt"
wlan.ip.dhcp.lease.length
826
Description This command retrieves the original length (in seconds) of the DHCP lease on
the wireless print server. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the original length (in seconds) of the DHCP lease
Format: ! U1 getvar "wlan.ip.dhcp.lease.length"
Example This command retrieves the original length of the DHCP lease on the wireless
print server.
! U1 getvar "wlan.ip.dhcp.lease.length"
827
wlan.ip.dhcp.lease.server
Description This command retrieves the address of the print server that provided the DHCP
lease on the wireless print server. For printer support, see SGD Command Support
on page 943.
Type getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the address if the print server that provided the
DHCP lease on the wireless print server.
Format: ! U1 getvar "wlan.ip.dhcp.lease.server"
Example In this example, the getvar retrieves the server that provided the DHCP lease
! U1 getvar "wlan.ip.dhcp.lease.server"
SGD Wireless Settings
wlan.ip.dhcp.lease.time_left
828
Description This command retrieves the time (in seconds) left in the current DHCP lease on
the wireless print server. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the time (in seconds) left in the current DHCP
lease on the wireless print server.
Format: ! U1 getvar "wlan.ip.dhcp.lease.time_left"
! U1 getvar "wlan.ip.dhcp.lease.time_left"
829
wlan.ip.dhcp.option12
discovery packet that is sent from the wireless print server. For printer support, see SGD
Type getvar;setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the status of the DHCP option 12 (host name) is
on or off in the discovery packet that is sent from the wireless print server.
Format: ! U1 getvar "wlan.ip.dhcp.option12"
setvar This command instructs the printer to set the DHCP option 12 (host name)
is on or off in the discovery packet that is sent from the wireless print
server.
Format: ! U1 setvar "wlan.ip.dhcp.option12" "value"
Values:
Default Value: "on"
! U1 setvar "wlan.ip.dhcp.option12" "on"
wlan.ip.dhcp.option12_format
830
Description This command specifies the format of the option 12 value to be used in the
discovery packet of the wireless print server. For printer support, see SGD Command Support
on page 943.
Type getvar;setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the format of option 12 value to be used in the
Format: ! U1 getvar "wlan.ip.dhcp.option12_format"
setvar This command instructs the printer to set the format of option 12 value to
be used in the discovery packet of the wireless print server.
Format:
! U1 setvar "wlan.ip.dhcp.option12_format" "value"
Values: string
Default Value: ""
Example This setvar example shows configuring the wlan.ip.dhcp.option12_format to
the value contained in the device.friendly_name.
characters.
! U1 setvar "wlan.ip.dhcp.option12_format"
! U1 getvar "wlan.ip.dhcp.option12_value"
831
wlan.ip.dhcp.option12_value
packet of the wireless print server. For printer support, see SGD Command Support
on page 943.
Type getvar
Commands Details
Format: ! U1 getvar "wlan.ip.dhcp.option12_value"
Example This setvar example shows configuring the wlan.ip.dhcp.option12_format to
the value contained in the device.friendly_name.
characters.
! U1 setvar "wlan.ip.dhcp.option12_format"
! U1 getvar "wlan.ip.dhcp.option12_value"
wlan.ip.dhcp.request_timeout
832
Description This command sets the maximum time (in seconds) to wait for a response to a
DHCP discovery request on the wireless print server. For printer support, see SGD Command
Type getvar;setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the maximum time (in seconds) to wait for a
response to a DHCP discovery request on the wireless print server.
Format: ! U1 getvar "wlan.ip.dhcp.request_timeout"
setvar This command instructs the printer to set the maximum time (in seconds)
to wait for a response to a DHCP discovery request on the wireless print
server.
Format:
! U1 setvar "wlan.ip.dhcp.request_timeout" "value"
Default: "2"
! U1 setvar "wlan.ip.dhcp.request_timeout" "2"
833
wlan.ip.dhcp.requests_per_session
Description This command retrieves the maximum amount of DHCP discover requests for
a single DHCP session on the wireless print server. For printer support, see SGD Command
Type getvar;setvar
Commands Details
discover requests for a single DHCP session on the wireless print server.
Format:
! U1 getvar "wlan.ip.dhcp.requests_per_session"
discover requests for a single DHCP session on the wireless print server.
Format:
! U1 setvar "wlan.ip.dhcp.requests_per_session"
"value"
Default: "2"
! U1 setvar "wlan.ip.dhcp.requests_per_session" "2"
wlan.ip.dhcp.session_interval
834
Description This command retrieves how long it will take for a DHCP session to time out
before a new DHCP session begins on the wireless print server. For printer support, see SGD
Type getvar;setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the current DHCP session time out.
Format: ! U1 getvar "wlan.ip.dhcp.session_interval"
setvar This command instructs the printer to set the DHCP session time out.
Format:
! U1 setvar "wlan.ip.dhcp.session_interval" "value"
Default: "10"
! U1 setvar "wlan.ip.dhcp.session_interval" "10"
835
wlan.ip.gateway
wlan.ip.gateway
Description This command instructs the printer to change the wireless print servers
Type getvar; setvar
Note This setting refers to the gateway address. A set value is ignored if the IP protocol is
not set to permanent.
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with the wireless printer
Format:
! U1 getvar "wlan.ip.gateway"
setvar This command instructs the printer to change the wireless printer servers
gateway address.
Format: ! U1 setvar "wlan.ip.gateway" "value"
Default: "0.0.0.0"
! U1 setvar "wlan.ip.gateway" "10.3.5.1"
wlan.ip.netmask
836
wlan.ip.netmask
Description This setting refers to the wireless print servers subnet mask address. This value
is ignored if the IP protocol is not set to permanent. For printer support, see SGD Command
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with wireless print servers
subnet mask.
Format: ! U1 getvar "wlan.ip.netmask"
setvar This command instructs the printer to change the wireless print serverss
subnet mask.
Format: ! U1 setvar "wlan.ip.netmask" "value"
Default: "255.255.255.0"
! U1 setvar "wlan.ip.netmask" "255.255.255.0"
"255.255.255.0".
837
wlan.ip.port
wlan.ip.port
Description This printer setting refers to the wireless print servers port number that the
TCP print service is listening on. Normal TCP communications from the host should be
directed to this port.For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with the wireless printer
servers TCP/UDP port number.
Format: ! U1 getvar "wlan.ip.port"
setvar This command instructs the printer to set the wireless print servers
Format: ! U1 setvar "wlan.ip.port" "value"
such as 21, 23, 80, and 515).
Default: "9100"
! U1 setvar "wlan.ip.port" "9100"
wlan.ip.protocol
838
wlan.ip.protocol
Description This command configures the IP addressing method used by the wireless print
server. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command returns the value of the currently selected IP protocol used
by the wireless print server.
Format: ! U1 getvar "wlan.ip.protocol"
used by the wireless print server.
Format:
! U1 setvar "wlan.ip.protocol" "value"
Values:
address
"glean only" = uses the IP address from a PING packet that is
sent to its hardware address (unicast address)
commands
Default: "all"
printer is using.
! U1 setvar "wlan.ip.protocol" "bootp"
"bootp".
839
wlan.ip.timeout.enable
Description This network setting refers to enabling the connection timeout on the wireless
print server. For this to take effect, the print server must be reset. For printer support, see SGD
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to return whether the timeout checking
is enabled on the wireless print server.
Format: ! U1 getvar "wlan.ip.timeout.enable"
checking on the wireless print server.
Format: ! U1 setvar "wlan.ip.timeout.enable" "value"
Values:
Default: "on"
! U1 setvar "wlan.ip.timeout.enable" "on"
wlan.ip.timeout.value
840
times out for the wireless print server. For this to take effect, the print server must be reset. For
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with the time, in seconds,
before the connection times out.
Format: ! U1 getvar "wlan.ip.timeout.value"
setvar This command instructs the printer to set the the time value of the wireless
print server, in seconds, before the connection times out.
Format: ! U1 setvar "wlan.ip.timeout.value" "value"
Default: "300"
! U1 setvar "wlan.ip.timeout.value" "300"
841
wlan.keep_alive.enable
Description This setting controls the printers ability to send a LSAP (link service access
point) packet to the access point on an user controllable interval. This feature is included to
accommodate access points that require a regular confirmation that wireless clients are still
active. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with the
wlan.keep_alive.enable setting.
Format: ! U1 getvar "wlan.keep_alive.enable"
setvar This command instructs the printer to send a LSAP (link service access
point) packet to the access point on an user controllable interval.
Format: ! U1 setvar "wlan.keep_alive.enable" "value"
Values:
"on" = turns on keep_alive
"off" = turns off keep_alive
Default: "on"
! U1 setvar "wlan.keep_alive.enable" "on"
wlan.keep_alive.timeout
842
Description This printer setting manages the interval at which the LSAP (link service
access point) packet is sent. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with the
wlan.keep_alive.timeout interval value.
Format: ! U1 getvar "wlan.keep_alive.timeout"
setvar This command instructs the printer to configure the frequency at which the
printer sends the wlan.keep_alive packet.
Format: ! U1 setvar "wlan.keep_alive.timeout" "value"
Values: 5 to 300 seconds
Default: "15"
! U1 setvar "wlan.keep_alive.timeout" "15"
843
wlan.kerberos.kdc
wlan.kerberos.kdc
Description This printer setting refers to the Kerberos Key Distribution Center (KDC). The
KDC is a trusted server which maintains a database with account information for all security
principals (users) for a particular site or administrative domain (realm). For printer support,
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with the current Kerberos
KDC.
Format: ! U1 getvar "wlan.kerberos.kdc"
setvar This command instructs the printer to change the Kerberos KDC.
Format: ! U1 setvar "wlan.kerberos.kdc" "value"
Values: 0-32 ASCII characters
Default: "krbtgt"
Example This setvar example shows the value set to "krbtgt".
! U1 setvar "wlan.kerberos.kdc" "krbtgt"
When the setvar value is set to "krbtgt", the getvar result is "krbtgt".
wlan.kerberos.password
844
Description This printer setting refers to the Kerberos password. The password must
correspond to a user profile established on the Kerberos KDC server in use. For printer
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
password.
Format: ! U1 getvar "wlan.kerberos.password"
setvar This command instructs the printer to set the Kerberos password.
Format: ! U1 setvar "wlan.kerberos.password" "value"
Values: 0-32 alphanumeric characters
Default: "password"
! U1 setvar "wlan.kerberos.password" "password"
845
wlan.kerberos.realm
wlan.kerberos.realm
Description This printer setting refers to the Kerberos realm, an administrative domain with
its own Kerberos server (KDC). For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar; setvar
Important If you are using a Windows 2000 Server the realm must be all upper-case. For
details, see the Windows 2000 Server example below.
Commands Details
realm.
Format: ! U1 getvar "wlan.kerberos.realm"
setvar This command instructs the printer to change the Kerberos realm.
Format: ! U1 setvar "wlan.kerberos.realm" "value"
Default: "kerberos"
Example This setvar example shows the value set to "zebra".
! U1 setvar "wlan.kerberos.realm" "zebra"
When the setvar value is set to "zebra", the getvar result is "zebra".
Example This setvar example shows the value set to "ZEBRA" on a Windows 2000
server.
! U1 setvar "wlan.kerberos.realm" "ZEBRA"
When the setvar value is set to "ZEBRA", the getvar result is "ZEBRA".
wlan.kerberos.username
846
Description This printer setting refers to the Kerberos user name. The user name must
correspond to a user profile established on the Kerberos KDC server in use. For printer
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
user name.
Format: ! U1 getvar "wlan.kerberos.username"
setvar This command instructs the printer to change the Kerberos user name.
Format: ! U1 setvar "wlan.kerberos.username" "value"
Default: "user"
! U1 setvar "wlan.kerberos.username" "user"
847
wlan.mac_addr
wlan.mac_addr
Description This command retrieves the MAC address of the wireless print server. For
Type getvar
Commands Details
Format: ! U1 getvar "wlan.mac_addr"
Example In this example, the getvar result is the MAC address for the wireless print
server.
! U1 getvar "wlan.mac_addr"
wlan.mac_raw
848
wlan.mac_raw
Description This command specifies the RAW MAC address of the wireless print server.
Type getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the RAW MAC address of the wireless print
server.
Format: ! U1 getvar "wlan.mac_raw"
Example In this example, the getvar retrieves the RAW MAC address of the wireless
print server.
! U1 getvar "wlan.mac_raw"
849
wlan.operating_mode
wlan.operating_mode
Description This printer setting refers to the network operating mode. Infrastructure mode
means that the printer will try to associate with an access point. Ad hoc mode means that the
printer will try to associate with a device other than an access point and join a standalone
network. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar; setvar
To use "ad hoc" mode configure the printer as follows:
Set the ESSID to the new networks ESSID.
Turn off the DHCP and assign an IP Address to the printer.
Set the subnet mask on the printer to the new networks subnet mask.
Change the operating mode on the printer to "ad hoc".
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with the network-mode
value.
Format: ! U1 getvar "wlan.operating_mode"
setvar This command instructs the printer to set the network operating mode.
Format: ! U1 setvar "wlan.operating_mode" "value"
Values:
"adhoc" = printer will try to associate with a network device
"infrastructure" = printer will try to associate with an access
point
Default: "infrastructure"
Example This setvar example shows the value set to "infrastructure".
! U1 setvar "wlan.operating_mode" "infrastructure"
When the setvar value is set to "infrastructure", the getvar result is
"infrastructure".
wlan.password
850
wlan.password
Description This printer setting refers to the generic password that is used by the wireless
securities that need a password. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar; setvar
Important Kerberos has its own password field
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with a generic password for
wireless securities.
Format: ! U1 getvar "wlan.password"
setvar This command instructs the printer to set a generic password for the
wireless securities that need a password.
Format: ! U1 setvar "wlan.password" "value"
Values: A maximum of 32 alphanumeric characters.
Default: "password"
! U1 setvar "wlan.password" "password"
851
wlan.preamble
wlan.preamble
Description This printer setting selects the radio preamble length to be used. For printer
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with the current preamble
length.
Format: ! U1 getvar "wlan.preamble"
setvar This command instructs the printer to set the preamble length.
Format: ! U1 setvar "wlan.preamble" "value"
Values:
"long" = enables long preamble
"short" = enables short preamble
Default: "long"
Example This setvar example shows the value set to "long".
! U1 setvar "wlan.preamble" "long"
When the setvar value is set to "long", the getvar result is "long".
wlan.private_key_password
852
Description This printer setting allows the setting of the optional private key password. For
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with the value of the private
key password.
Format: ! U1 getvar "wlan.private_key_password"
setvar This command instructs the printer to set the private key password.
Format:
! U1 setvar "wlan.private_key_password" "value"
Default: ""
! U1 setvar "wlan.private_key_password" "password"
853
wlan.roam.interchannel_delay
Description This command sets how long of a delay before scanning the next channel when
roaming. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar;setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the current set delay time before scanning the next
channel when roaming.
Format: ! U1 getvar "wlan.roam.interchannel_delay"
setvar This command sets how long of a delay before scanning the next channel
when roaming. The values are in milliseconds.
Format:
! U1 setvar "wlan.roam.interchannel_delay" "value"
Values: 10 to 30000
Default: "400"
! U1 setvar "wlan.roam.interchannel_delay" "400"
The getvar result returns the current setvar value. In this example, the getvar result is
"400".
wlan.roam.interval
854
wlan.roam.interval
Description This printer setting refers to specifying the wireless roam interval. For printer
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with the specified roam
interval.
Format: ! U1 getvar "wlan.roam.interval"
setvar This command instructs the printer to set the wireless roam interval.
Format: ! U1 setvar "wlan.roam.interval" "value"
Values: Decimal values between 5 and 255 inclusive
Default: "20"
! U1 setvar "wlan.roam.interval" "20"
855
wlan.roam.max_chan_scan_time
Description This command sets how long the radio waits on a channel looking for probe
responses. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar;setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command retrieves the current setting for how long the radio waits on
a channel looking for probe responses.
Format: ! U1 getvar "wlan.roam.max_chan_scan_time"
setvar This command sets how long the radio waits on a channel looking for
probe responses. The values are in milliseconds.
Format:
! U1 setvar "wlan.roam.max_chan_scan_time" "value"
Values: 10 to 500
Default: "100"
! U1 setvar "wlan.roam.max_chan_scan_time" "100"
The getvar result returns the current setvar value. In this example, the getvar result is
"100".
wlan.roam.signal
856
wlan.roam.signal
Description This printer setting refers to specifying the wireless roam signal. For printer
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with the specified wireless
roam signal.
Format: ! U1 getvar "wlan.roam.signal"
setvar This command instructs the printer to set the wireless roam signal.
Format: ! U1 setvar "wlan.roam.signal" "value"
Values: Decimal values between 1 and 75 inclusive.
Default: "50"
! U1 setvar "wlan.roam.signal" "50"
857
wlan.security
wlan.security
Description This printer setting allows you to specify both the wireless encryption type and
authentication type in one command. For printer support, see SGD Command Support
on page 943.
Type getvar; setvar
These certificate files can only be sent using ZPL, not SGD. The ZPL command to use when
sending these certificate files is the ~DY command.
Note The supporting parameters that are required vary based on the security type that you
select. See Supporting SGD Commands for Different Security Types on page 859 for
instructions for each security type.
Note When using certificate files, Zebra printers support:
using Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM) formatted certificate files.
using the client certificate and private key as two files, each downloaded separately.
using exportable PAC files for EAP-FAST.
environments.
wlan.security
858
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to return the name and not the type. If
an invalid security mode is entered the printer returns Invalid Mode.
Format: ! U1 getvar "wlan.security" "value"
setvar This command instructs the printer to set the wireless security value.
Format: ! U1 setvar "wlan.security" "value"
Values:
"1" = No wireless security or "none"
"2" = WEP 40-bit or "wep 40-bit"
"3" = WEP 128-bit or "wep 128-bit"
"4" = EAP-TLS or "eap-tls"
"5" = EAP-TTLS or "eap-ttls"
"6" = EAP-FAST or "eap-fast"
"7" = PEAP or "peap"
"8" = LEAP or "leap"
"9" = WPA PSK or "wpa psk" (Key rotation for WPA2 PSK is
supported in firmware versions V53.15.8Z , V60.15.8Z, and
later.)
"10" = WPA EAP-TLS or "wpa eap-tls"
"11" = WPA EAP-TTLS or "wpa eap-ttls"
"12" = WPA EAP-FAST or "wpa eap-fast"
"13" = WPA PEAP or "wpa peap"
"14" = WPA LEAP or "wpa leap"
"15" = Kerberos or "kerberos"
Default: "1"
! U1 setvar "wlan.security" "1"
When the setvar value is set to "1", the getvar result is "none".
859
wlan.security
Supporting SGD Commands for Different Security Types
The supporting SGD commands required for wlan.security vary based on the security
type that you select. You must send the additional commands for your printer to be able to
work on your wireless network. Follow the example and format for your specific security type
in this section, substituting your own wireless network data.
Security Type 1: No Wireless Security Active
Additional parameters that need to be set: none
Additional parameters that need to be set and the SGD commands to use:
WEP encryption index (see wlan.wep.index on page 874)
WEP authentication type (see wlan.wep.auth_type on page 873)
WEP key type (see wlan.wep.key_format on page 880)
the actual values of any WEP encryption keys to be used (see wlan.wep.key1 on page 875,
wlan.wep.key2 on page 876, wlan.wep.key3 on page 877, or wlan.wep.key4 on page 878)
Example This example turns off all wireless securities controlled under this command, but
it does not reset the printers wireless settings to their defaults.
key 1, open authentication, and a hexadecimal WEP key with a value of A1B2C3D4F5.
! U1 setvar "wlan.wep.index" "1"
! U1 setvar "wlan.wep.auth_type" "open"
! U1 setvar "wlan.wep.key_format" "hex"
! U1 setvar "wlan.wep.key1" "A1B2C3D4F5"
wlan.security
860
WEP encryption index (see wlan.wep.index on page 874)
WEP authentication type (see wlan.wep.auth_type on page 873)
WEP key type (see wlan.wep.key_format on page 880)
the actual values of any WEP encryption keys to be used (see wlan.wep.key1 on page 875,
wlan.wep.key2 on page 876, wlan.wep.key3 on page 877, or wlan.wep.key4 on page 878)
Security Type 4: EAP-TLS
optional private key password (see wlan.private_key_password on page 852)
key 2, open authentication, and four hexadecimal WEP keys.
! U1 setvar "wlan.wep.key_format" "hex"
! U1 setvar "wlan.wep.key1" "001122334455667788"
Example This example configures the printer for EAP-TLS authentication with an optional
private key password with a value of private.
! U1 setvar "wlan.private_key_password" "private"
861
wlan.security
Security Type 5: EAP-TTLS
user ID (see wlan.username on page 872)
password (see wlan.password on page 850)
Security Type 6: EAP-FAST
Example This example configures the printer for EAP-TTLS authentication, including a
! U1 setvar "wlan.username" "user"
Example This example configures the printer for EAP-FAST authentication, including a
user ID of user, a password of password, and an optional private key of
private.
wlan.security
862
Security Type 7: PEAP
Security Type 8: LEAP
Security Type 9: WPA PSK
Pre-Shared Key (PSK) value (see wlan.wpa.psk on page 879)
Example This example configures the printer for PEAP authentication, including a user ID
Example This example configures the printer for LEAP authentication, including a user ID
environments. Key rotation for WPA2 PSK is supported in firmware version 60.15.8Z and
later and in firmware version 53.15.8Z and later.
Example This example configures the printer for WPA PSK authentication with a PSK
value of all zeroes (64 hexadecimal digits).
! U1 setvar "wlan.wpa.psk" "00000000..."
863
wlan.security
Security Type 10: WPA EAP-TLS
Security Type 11: WPA EAP-TTLS
environments.
Example This example configures the printer for WPA EAP-TLS authentication with an
optional private key password with a value of private.
environments.
Example This example configures the printer for WPA EAP-TTLS authentication,
including a user ID with a value of user and a password with a value of password.
wlan.security
864
Security Type 12: WPA EAP-FAST
Security Type 13: WPA PEAP
environments.
Example This example configures the printer for WPA EAP-FAST authentication,
including a user ID of user, a password of password, and an optional private key of
private.
environments.
Example This example configures the printer for WPA PEAP authentication, including a
865
wlan.security
Security Type 14: WPA LEAP
Security Type 15: Kerberos
Kerberos user ID (see wlan.kerberos.username on page 846)
Kerberos password (see wlan.kerberos.password on page 844)
realm (see wlan.kerberos.realm on page 845)
Key Distribution Center (KDC) (see wlan.kerberos.kdc on page 843)
environments.
Example This example configures the printer for WPA LEAP authentication, including a
Example This example configures the printer for Kerberos encryption, including a
Kerberos user ID with a value of user, a Kerberos password with a value of
password, a realm of zebra, and a KDC of krbtgt.
! U1 setvar "wlan.kerberos.username" "user"
! U1 setvar "wlan.kerberos.password" "password"
! U1 setvar "wlan.kerberos.realm" "zebra"
! U1 setvar "wlan.kerberos.kdc" "krbtgt"
wlan.signal_noise
866
wlan.signal_noise
Description This command returns the signal noise on the wireless network. Values above
40% represent a very significant noise, and radio communication is not reliable. For printer
Type getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to return the current signal noise on the
wireless network.
Format: ! U1 getvar "wlan.signal_noise"
Example In this example, the getvar result is the current signal_noise value.
! U1 getvar "wlan.signal_noise"
867
wlan.signal_quality
wlan.signal_quality
Description This command instructs the printer to return the current signal quality of the
wireless network. Values below 40% represent a very poor signal quality, and radio
communication is not reliable. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to return the current signal quality of
the wireless network.
Format: ! U1 getvar "wlan.signal_quality"
Example In this example, the getvar result is the current signal_quality value.
! U1 getvar "wlan.signal_quality"
wlan.signal_strength
868
Description This command returns the signal strength of the connection to the access point
as a percentage value between zero (not connected) and 100 (strongest signal). Values below
40% represent a very poor signal and radio communication is not reliable. For printer support,
Type getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with the current signal
strength.
Format: ! U1 getvar "wlan.signal_strength"
Example In this example, the getvar result is "93".
! U1 getvar "wlan.signal_strength"
869
wlan.station_name
wlan.station_name
Description This printer setting refers to the station name. For printer support, see SGD
Type setvar;getvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with the station name value.
Format: ! U1 getvar "wlan.station_name"
setvar This command instructs the printer to set the station name.
Format: ! U1 setvar "wlan.station_name" "value"
Default: "ZEBRA"
Example This setvar example shows the value set to "ZEBRA".
! U1 setvar "wlan.station_name" "ZEBRA"
When the setvar value is set to "ZEBRA", the getvar result is "ZEBRA".
wlan.tx_power
870
wlan.tx_power
Description This printer setting refers to specifying the wireless transmit power. For printer
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with the wireless transmit
power.
Format: ! U1 getvar "wlan.tx_power"
setvar This command instructs the printer to set the wireless transmit power.
Format: ! U1 setvar "wlan.tx_power" "value"
Values: Decimal values of 1, 5, 20, 30, 50, 100
Default: "100"
! U1 setvar "wlan.tx_power" "100"
871
wlan.tx_rate
wlan.tx_rate
Description This printer setting refers to specifying the wireless transmit rate. For printer
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with the wireless transmit
rate.
Format: ! U1 getvar "wlan.tx_rate"
setvar This command instructs the printer to set the wireless transmit rate.
Format: ! U1 setvar "wlan.tx_rate" "value"
Values: 1, 2, 5.5, 11, all
Default: "all"
Example This setvar example shows the value set to "all".
! U1 setvar "wlan.tx_rate" "all"
When the setvar value is set to "all", the getvar result is "all".
wlan.username
872
wlan.username
Description This printer setting refers to the generic user name that is used by the wireless
securities that need a user name. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar; setvar
Important Kerberos has its own user name field.
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with a generic user name for
the wireless securities that need a user name.
Format: ! U1 getvar "wlan.username"
setvar This command instructs the printer to set a generic user name for wireless
securities that need a user name.
Format: ! U1 setvar "wlan.username" "value"
Default: "user"
873
wlan.wep.auth_type
wlan.wep.auth_type
Description For the WEP security type, this printer setting selects the authentication type to
be used between the printer and the access point. The authentication types are open system and
shared key. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to retrieve the current WEP
authentication type.
Format: ! U1 getvar "wlan.wep.auth_type"
setvar This command instructs the printer to set the WEP authentication type.
Format: ! U1 setvar "wlan.wep.auth_type" "value"
Values:
"open" = enables the open authentication type
"shared" = enables the shared authentication type
Default: "open"
Example This setvar example shows the value set to "open".
When the setvar value is set to "open", the getvar result is "open".
wlan.wep.index
874
wlan.wep.index
Description This printer setting refers to the WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) encryption
key index. This printer setting determines which one of the four encryption keys is to be used
by the client (printer). For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with the encryption key
index.
Format: ! U1 getvar "wlan.wep.index"
setvar This command instructs the printer to set the encryption key index.
Format: ! U1 setvar "wlan.wep.index" "value"
Values:
"1" = enables encryption key 1
Default: "1"
875
wlan.wep.key1
wlan.wep.key1
Description This printer setting refers to the first indexed WEP encryption key. The WEP
encryption key is a hexadecimal or string value. This key should match the wireless network
WEP encryption key 1. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with the encryption key.
Format: ! U1 getvar "wlan.wep.key1"
setvar This command instructs the printer to set the encryption key.
Format: ! U1 setvar "wlan.wep.key1" "value"
Values:
10 hexadecimal characters for 40-bit encryption
Default: All zeros
Example This setvar example shows the value set to "A1B2C3D4F5".
When the setvar value is set to "A1B2C3D4F5", the getvar result is "*".
wlan.wep.key2
876
wlan.wep.key2
Description This printer setting refers to the second indexed WEP encryption key. The
WEP encryption key is a hexadecimal string value. This key should match the wireless
network WEP encryption key 2. For printer support, see SGD Command Support on page 943.
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer respond with the encryption key.
Values:
Default: All zeros
877
wlan.wep.key3
wlan.wep.key3
Description This printer setting refers to the third indexed WEP encryption key. The WEP
encryption key is a hexadecimal string value. This key should match the wireless network
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with the encryption key.
Values:
Default: All zeros
wlan.wep.key4
878
wlan.wep.key4
Description This printer setting refers to the fourth indexed WEP encryption key. The WEP
encryption key is a hexadecimal string value. This key should match the wireless network
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer respond with the encryption key.
Values:
Default: All zeros
879
wlan.wpa.psk
wlan.wpa.psk
Description This printer setting specifies the pre-shared key (PSK) value to use when the
WPA authentication is set to PSK. For printer support, see SGD Command Support
on page 943.
Type getvar; setvar
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with the pre-shared key.
Format: ! U1 getvar "wlan.wpa.psk"
setvar This command instructs the printer to set the pre-shared key.
Format: ! U1 setvar "wlan.wpa.psk" "value"
Values: 64 hexadecimal digits
Default: 64 zeros (00000000...)
Example This setvar example shows the value set to "00000000...".
! U1 setvar "wlan.wpa.psk" "00000000..."
When the setvar value is set to "00000000...", the getvar result is "*".
wlan.wep.key_format
880
wlan.wep.key_format
Description This printer setting specifies the format for the WEP key. For printer support,
Type getvar; setvar
Important This printer setting should proceed any of the wep.key settings if you select a
non-default value.
Commands Details
getvar This command instructs the printer to respond with the WEP key format.
Format: ! U1 getvar "wep.key_format"
setvar This command instructs the printer to set the WEP key format.
Format: ! U1 setvar "wlan.wep.key_format" "value"
Values:
"ascii" = WEP key is set by ASCII string
"hex" = WEP key is a Hex string
Default: "hex"
Example This setvar example shows the value set to "ascii".
! U1 setvar "wlan.wep.key_format" "ascii"
When the setvar value is set to "ascii", the getvar result is "ascii".
A
Zebra Code Pages
This section provides you with a visual of the different Zebra Code pages.
Zebra Code Pages
Zebra Code Page 850
882
Zebra Code Page 850
This is the Zebra Code Page 850:
Note For hex 5C, a cent sign prints for all printer resident fonts. A backslash prints for
downloaded fonts.
883
Zebra Code Pages
Zebra Code Page 850
Zebra Code Pages
Zebra Code Page 1250 (Scalable/Downloaded TTF)
884
Zebra Code Page 1250 (Scalable/Downloaded TTF)
This is the Zebra Code Page 1250 that supports scalable/downloaded TTF fonts:
a3
Note Font 0 (zero) was used to display this chart.
885
Zebra Code Pages
Zebra Code Pages
Zebra Code Page 1250 (Bitmap fonts)
886
This is the Zebra Code Page 1250 that supports bitmap fonts:
Note Font D was used to display this chart.
887
Zebra Code Pages
Zebra Code Pages
Zebra Code Page 1252
888
This is the Zebra Code Page 1252:
889
Zebra Code Pages
Zebra Code Pages
890

Notes ___________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
B
ASCII
This section shows the American Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII) code
used by Zebra printers.
ASCII
ASCII Code Chart
892
ASCII Code Chart
Shaded areas in Table 2 indicate characters not recommended for command prefix, format
prefix, or delimiter characters.
Table 2 Zebra Used ASCII Code
HEX Character HEX Character HEX Character HEX Character
00 NUL 20 Space 40 @ 60
01 SOH 21 ! 41 A 61 a
02 STX 22 42 B 62 b
03 ETX 23 # 43 C 63 c
04 EOT 24 $ 44 D 64 d
05 ENQ 25 % 45 E 65 e
06 ACK 26 & 46 F 66 f
07 BEL 27 47 G 67 g
08 BS 28 ( 48 H 68 h
09 HT 29 ) 49 I 69 i
0A LF 2A * 4A J 6A j
0B VT 2B + 4B K 6B k
0C FF 2C , 4C L 6C l
0D CR 2D - 4D M 6D m
0E SO 2E . 4E N 6E n
0F SI 2F / 4F O 6F o
10 DLE 30 0 50 P 70 p
11 DC1 31 1 51 Q 71 q
12 DC2 32 2 52 R 72 r
13 DC3 33 3 53 S 73 s
14 DC4 34 4 54 T 74 t
15 NAK 35 5 55 U 75 u
16 SYN 36 6 56 V 76 v
17 ETB 37 7 57 W 77 w
18 CAN 38 8 58 X 78 x
19 EM 39 9 59 Y 79 y
1A SUB 3A : 5A Z 7A z
1B ESC 3B ; 5B [ 7B {
1C FS 3C < 5C \ 7C |
1D GS 3D = 5D ] 7D }
1E RS 3E > 5E ^ 7E ~
1F US 3F ? 5F _ 7F DEL
C
Fonts and Bar Codes
This section provides information about different fonts (type faces) and bar codes that can be
used with the printer.
Contents
Standard Printer Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 894
Proportional and Fixed Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 896
Scalable Versus Bitmapped Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 898
Font Matrices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900
Bar Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 902
Fonts and Bar Codes
Standard Printer Fonts
894
Most Zebra printers come standard with 15 bitmapped fonts and one scalable font, see
Figure 1. Additional downloadable bitmapped and scalable fonts are also available. Character
size and density (how dark it appears) depend on the density of the printhead and the media
used.
Figure 1 Examples of the Standard Printer Fonts
To use one of these fonts, you must either use the change alphanumeric default font command
(^CF) or specify an alphanumeric field command (Â).
The standard Zebra character set is Code 850 for character values greater than 20 HEX. There
are six HEX character values below 20 HEX that are also recognized. Figure 2 shows how
these character values are printed.
Note Unidentified characters should default to a space.
Accessed with the ^GS command.
zero
895
Fonts and Bar Codes
Figure 2 Recognized HEX Values below 20 HEX
Fonts and Bar Codes
Proportional and Fixed Spacing
896
Proportional spacing is different than fixed spacing. In Table 3, the intercharacter gap (ICG),
the space between characters, is constant for fonts A through H, which means that the spacing
between all characters is the same. For example, the spacing between the letters MW is the same
as between the letters IE.
Figure 3 is an example of fixed space fonts:
Figure 3 Fixed Space Fonts Proportion
The baseline is the imaginary line on which the bottom (base) of all characters (except any
descenders) rest. The area between the baseline and the bottom of the matrix is used for any
character descenders. Baseline numbers define where the baseline is located in relationship
to the top of the matrix. For example, the baseline for font E is 23 dots down from the top of
the matrix.
Table 3 Intercharacter Gap and Baseline Parameters
Font H x W (in dots) Type
Intercharacter Gap
(in dots)
Baseline
(in dots)
A 9 x 5 U-L-D 1 7
B 11 x 7 U 2 11
C,D 18 x 10 U-L-D 2 14
E 28 x 15 OCR-B 5 23
F 26 x 13 U-L-D 3 21
G 60 x 40 U-L-D 8 48
H 21 x 13 OCR-A 6 21
897
Fonts and Bar Codes
GS 24 x 24 SYMBOL PROPORTIONAL 3 x HEIGHT/4
0 DEFAULT: 15 x 12 PROPORTIONAL 3 x HEIGHT/4
Table 3 Intercharacter Gap and Baseline Parameters
Font H x W (in dots) Type
Intercharacter Gap
(in dots)
Baseline
(in dots)
Fonts and Bar Codes
Scalable Versus Bitmapped Fonts
898
For scalable fonts, setting the height and width equally produces characters that appear the
most balanced. Balanced characters are pleasing to the eye because actual height and width are
approximately equal to each other. This is achieved through the use of a smooth-scaling
algorithm in the printer.
For bitmapped fonts, this balancing is built into the font. In actuality, the height of a bitmap
font is slightly larger than the width. Bitmap fonts are always at the maximum size of the
characters cell.
Scalable Fonts
All dot parameters used in the commands to create scalable fonts are translated into a point
size because scalable fonts are measured in point sizes, not dots. To determine how many dots
to enter to obtain a particular point size, use the following formula. The actual point size will
be an approximate value.
For printers using a 6 dot/mm printhead the dots per inch of printer value is 152.4
The actual height and width of the character in dots will vary, depending on the font style and
the particular character. Therefore, some characters will be smaller and some will be larger
than the actual dot size requested. The baselines for all scalable fonts are calculated against the
dot size of the cell. The baseline is 3/4 down from the top of the cell. For example, if the size
of the cell is 80 dots, the baseline will be 60 dots (3/4) down from the top of the cell.
For more information concerning fonts and related commands, see ~DB on page 160 and ~DS
on page 169.
Bitmapped Fonts
Internal bitmapped fonts can be magnified from 1 to 10 times their normal (default) size. The
magnification factor is in whole numbers. Therefore, if the normal size of a bitmapped font is
9 dots high and 5 dots wide, a magnification factor of 3 would produce a character of 27 dots
high and 15 dots wide. Height and width can be magnified independently.
Magnification Factor
The font commands contain parameters for entering the height and width of printed characters.
The values are always entered in dots. When entering these values for bitmapped fonts, use the
following formula:
Base Height x Magnification Factor = Height Parameter Value
Dots =
(Point size) x (Dots per inch of Printer)
72
899
Fonts and Bar Codes
The same principle applies when calculating width.
Example:
Base height = 9 dots
Base width = 5 dots
To magnify a bitmapped character with the above specifics 3 times its size:
Height parameter = 27 [9 x 3]
Width parameter = 15 [5 x 3]
Changing Bitmapped Font Size
Alphanumeric field command (Â) parameters h and w control the magnification and,
therefore, the ultimate size of the font. The parameter is specified in dots, but ZPL II actually
uses an integer multiplier times the original height/width of the font. For example, if you
specify
ÂD,54
you get characters three times their normal size (54 dots high), but if you specify
ÂD,52
you receive the same result, not characters 52 dots high.
Defining only the height or width of a bitmapped font forces the magnification to be
proportional to the parameter defined. If neither is defined, the ^CF height and width are used.
For example, if the height is twice the standard height, the width will be twice the standard
width.
Example If a ^CF command, with height and width parameters defined, is used to set the
first font, any Â commands (to select a different font) that follow must have the height and
width parameter filled in.
If this is not done, the newly selected font will be magnified using values for the ^CF height
and width parameters. This is an example of what happens:.
^XA^LL1800
^FO50,50^CFD,26,10^FDZEBRA....^FS
^FO50,100^FD"Bar Code, Bar None"^FS
^FO50,200ÂA^FDZEBRA....^FS
^FO50,250^FD"Bar Code, Bar None"^FS
^XZ
Fonts and Bar Codes
Font Matrices
900
Font Matrices
Type Key U = Uppercase, L = Lowercase, D = Descenders
Table 4 6 dot/mm printhead
Font
Matrix
Type
Character Size
HxW (in dots) HxW (in in.) Char./in. HxW (in mm) Char. /mm
A 9 x 5 U-L-D 0.059 x 0.039 25.4 1.50 x 0.99 1.01
B 11 x 7 U 0.072 x 0.059 16.9 1.82 x 1.50 0.066
C, D 18 x 10 U-L-D 0.118 x 0.079 12.7 2.99 x 2.00 0.05
E 21 x 10 OCR-B 0.138 x 0.085 11.7 3.50 x 2.16 0.46
F 26 x 13 U-L-D 0.170 x 0.105 9.53 4.32 x 2.67 0.37
G 60 x 40 U-L-D 0.394 x 0.315 3.18 10.0 x 8.00 0.125
H 17 x 11 OCR-A 0.111 x 0.098 10.2 2.81 x 2.48 0.40
GS 24 x 24 SYMBOL 0.157 x 0.157 6.35 3.98 x 3.98 0.251
0 Default: 15 x 12
Table 5 8 dot/mm (203 dpi) printhead
Font
Matrix
Type
Character Size
A 9 X 5 U-L-D 0.044 x 0.030 33.3 1.12 x 0.76 1.31
B 11 X 7 U 0.054 x 0.044 22.7 1.37 x 1.12 0.89
C, D 18 X 10 U-L-D 0.089 x 0.059 16.9 2.26 x 1.12 0.66
E 28 x 15 OCR-B 0.138 x 0.098 10.2 3.50 x 2.49 0.40
F 26 x 13 U-L-D 0.128 x 0.079 12.7 3.25 x 2.00 0.50
G 60 x 40 U-L-D 0.295 x 0.197 4.2 7.49 x 5.00 0.167
H 21 x 13 OCR-A 0.103 x 0.093 10.8 2.61 x 2.36 0.423
GS 24 x 24 SYMBOL 0.118 x 0.118 8.5 2.99 x 2.99 0.334
P 20 x 18 U-L-D 0.098 x 0.089 N/A 2.50 x 2.25 N/A
Q 28 x 24 U-L-D 0.138 x 0.118 N/A 3.50 x 3.00 N/A
R 35 x 31 U-L-D 0.172 x 0.153 N/A 4.38 x 3.88 N/A
S 40 x 35 U-L-D 0.197 x 0.172 N/A 5.00 x 4.38 N/A
T 48 x 42 U-L-D 0.236 x 0.207 N/A 6.00 x 5.25 N/A
U 59 x 53 U-L-D 0.290 x 0.261 N/A 7.38 x 6.63 N/A
V 80 x 71 U-L-D 0.394 x 0.349 N/A 10.00 x 8.88 N/A
0 Default: 15 x 12 U-L-D Scalable Scalable
901
Fonts and Bar Codes
Font Matrices
aa
Font
Matrix
Type
Character Size
A 9 X 5 U-L-D 0.030 x 0.020 50.8 0.75 x 0.50 2.02
B 11 X 7 U 0.036 x 0.030 33.8 0.91 x 0.75 1.32
C, D 18 X 10 U-L-D 0.059 x 0.040 25.4 1.50 x 1.00 1.00
E 42 x 20 OCR-B 0.138 x 0.085 23.4 1.75 x 1.08 0.92
F 26 x 13 U-L-D 0.085 x 0.053 19.06 2.16 x 1.34 0.74
G 60 x 40 U-L-D 0.197 x 0.158 6.36 5.00 x 4.00 0.25
H 34 x 22 OCR-A 0.111 x 0.098 10.20 2.81 x 2.48 0.40
GS 24 x 24 SYMBOL 0.079 x 0.079 12.70 1.99 x 1.99 0.52
P 20 x 18 U-L-D 0.067 x 0.060 N/A 1.69 x 1.52 N/A
Q 28 x 24 U-L-D 0.093 x 0.080 N/A 2.37 x 2.03 N/A
R 35 x 31 U-L-D 0.117 x 0.103 N/A 2.96 x 2.62 N/A
S 40 x 35 U-L-D 0.133 x 0.177 N/A 3.39 x 2.96 N/A
T 48 x 42 U-L-D 0.160 x 0.140 N/A 4.06 x 3.56 N/A
U 59 x 53 U-L-D 0.197 x 0.177 N/A 5.00 x 4.49 N/A
V 80 x 71 U-L-D 0.267 x 0.237 N/A 6.77 x 6.01 N/A
Font
Matrix
Type
Character Size
A 9 X 5 U-L-D 0.015 x 0.010 100.00 0.38 x 0.25 4.00
B 11 X 7 U 0.018 x 0.015 66.66 0.46 x 0.38 2.60
C, D 18 X 10 U-L-D 0.030 x 0.020 50.00 0.77 x 0.51 2.0
E 42 x 20 OCR-B 0.137 x 0.087 11.54 3.47 x 2.20 0.45
F 26 x 13 U-L-D 0.043 x 0.027 37.5 1.10 x 0.68 1.50
G 60 x 40 U-L-D 0.100 x 0.080 12.50 2.54 x 2.04 0.50
H 34 x 22 OCR-A 0.100 x 0.093 10.71 2.54 x 2.37 0.42
GS 24 x 24 SYMBOL 0.040 x 0.040 25.00 1.02 x 1.02 1.00
P 20 x 18 U-L-D 0.067 x 0.060 N/A 1.69 x 1.52 N/A
Q 28 x 24 U-L-D 0.093 x 0.080 N/A 2.37 x 2.03 N/A
R 35 x 31 U-L-D 0.117 x 0.103 N/A 2.96 x 2.62 N/A
S 40 x 35 U-L-D 0.133 x 0.117 N/A 3.39 x 2.96 N/A
T 48 x 42 U-L-D 0.160 x 0.140 N/A 4.06 x 3.56 N/A
U 59 x 53 U-L-D 0.197 x 0.177 N/A 5.00 x 4.49 N/A
V 80 x 71 U-L-D 0.267 x 0.237 N/A 6.77 x 6.01 N/A
Fonts and Bar Codes
Bar Codes
902
Bar Codes
Every bar code contains data made up of a sequence of light spaces and dark bars that
represent letters, numbers, or other graphic characters. The usable characters differ among the
various kinds of bar codes. Each bar code section in the ZPL Commands on page 35 provides a
table of applicable characters. Start and stop characters and check digits are used by many, but
not all, bar codes. These will be indicated in the specific bar code explanations.
Zebra printers can print the following kinds of bar codes:
Bar code modulus X dimensions
Picket fence (non-rotated) orientation:
203 dpi = 0.0049 in. mil to 0.049 in.
300 dpi = 0.0033 in. mil to 0.033 in.
Ladder (rotated) orientation:
203 dpi = 0.0049 in. mil to 0.049 in.
300 dpi = 0.0039 in. mil to 0.039 in.
Linear bar codes
Codabar
Code 11
Code 39
Code 93
Code 128 with subsets A/B C and
UCC Case Codes
ISBT-128
UPC-A
UPC-E
EAN-8
EAN-13
UPC and EAN 2 or 5 digit extensions
Planet Code
Plessey
Postnet
Standard 2 of 5
Industrial 2 of 5
Interleaved 2 of 5
LOGMARS
MSI
RSS-14
Two-dimensional bar codes
Aztec
Code 49
Maxi Code
TLC39
PDF-417
QR Code
Codablock
DataMatrix
Micro-PDF417
Bar code ratios
2:1
7:3
5:2
3:1
903
Fonts and Bar Codes
Bar Codes
Basic Format for Bar Codes
The basic format for bar codes is quiet zone, start character, data, check digit, stop character,
and quiet zone. Not all bar codes require each of these elements.
Every bar code requires a quiet zone. A quiet zone (sometimes called a clear area) is an area
adjacent to the machine-readable symbols that ensure proper reading (decoding) of the
symbols. No printing is permissible within this area. Preprinted characters, borders, and
background color are acceptable if they are invisible to the reading device; these are used in
some applications but restrict the type of reading device that can be used. The size of the quiet
zone depends on the size of bar widths (usually 10 times the width of the narrow bar).
Figure 4 Quiet Zone in a Bar Code
Bar Code Field Instructions
To create a bar code, a bar code field command must be contained in the label format. Table 8
shows the bar code field commands. The number in brackets denotes the print ratio. Each
command produces a unique bar code.
As another reference to the bar code field commands ratio, see Table 11 on page 141.
Quiet Zone Quiet Zone
Important (*) for Fixed Printing Ratio means that the ratio between the width of the bars in
the code is a fixed standard and cannot be changed.
Table 8 Bar Code Field Commands
ZPL Command Command Description Ratio
^B0 Aztec Bar Code Parameters [Fixed]
^B1 Code 11 (USD-8) [2.0 - 3.0]
^B2 Interleaved 2 of 5 [2.0 - 3.0]
^B3 Code 39 (USD-3 and 3 of 9) [2.0 - 3.0]
^B4 Code 49 (*) [Fixed]
^B5 Planet Code Bar Code [Fixed]
Fonts and Bar Codes
Bar Codes
904
Additionally, each bar code field command can be issued with a definition parameter string.
The parameter string defines field rotation, height, and interpretation line status for all bar
codes. For some bar codes, the parameter string also sets a check digit, start character, and/or
stop character. Use the definition parameter string to command the printer to print bar codes of
appropriate heights and densities that conform to the specifications of the application.
The use of the parameter string is optional because all parameters have default values. If the
default values for all of the bar code parameters suit the application, then only the bar code
command needs to be entered.
Parameters in bar code field commands are position specific. If a value (other than the
default value) is manually entered for one parameter the ZPL II delimiter character (a comma)
must be used to mark the position of the preceding parameters in the string.
To change just the third parameter, enter two commas and then the value for the third
parameter. The default values will be automatically used for the first and second parameters.
^B7 PDF417 (*) [Fixed]
^B8 EAN-8 (*) [Fixed]
^B9 UPC-E [Fixed]
^BA Code 93 (USS-93)(*) [Fixed]
^BB CODABLOCK A, E, F (*) [Fixed]
^BC Code 128 (USD-6) (*) [Fixed]
^BD UPS MaxiCode (*) [Fixed]
^BE EAN-13 [Fixed]
^BF Micro-PDF417 [Fixed]
^BI Industrial 2 of 5 [2.0 - 3.0]
^BJ Standard 2 of 5 [2.0 - 3.0]
^BK ANSI Codabar (USD-4 and 2 of 7) [2.0 - 3.0]
^BL LOGMARS [2.0 - 3.0]
^BM MSI [2.0 - 3.0]
^BO Aztec Bar Code Parameters [Fixed]
^BP Plessey [2.0 - 3.0]
^BQ QR Code (*) [Fixed]
^BR RSS (reduced Space Symbology Bar Code) [Fixed]
^BS UPC/EAN Extensions (*) [Fixed]
^BU UPC-A (*) [Fixed]
^BX Data Matrix (*) [Fixed]
^BZ PostNet (*), USPS Intelligent Mail, and Planet bar
codes
[Fixed]
Table 8 Bar Code Field Commands
ZPL Command Command Description Ratio
905
Fonts and Bar Codes
Bar Codes
Bar Code Command Groups
Bar code commands are organized into four groups. Each group represents a type of bar code.
Table 9 through Table 12 identify the groups and the bar codes they contain:
Table 9 Numeric Only Bar Codes
ZPL Command Command Description
^B0 Aztec Bar Code Parameters
^B1 Code 11
^B5 Planet Code Bar Code
^BI Industrial 2 of 5
^BJ Standard 2 of 5
^BK ANSI Codabar (or NW-7)
^BM MSI
^BO Aztec Bar Code Parameters
^BP Plessey
^BZ PostNet (*), USPS Intelligent Mail, and Planet bar codes
Table 10 Retail Labeling Bar Codes
^B8 EAN-8
^B9 UPC-E
^BE EAN-13
^BS UPC/EAN extensions
^BU UPC-A
Table 11 Alphanumeric Bar Code
^B3 Code 39
^BA Code 93
^BC Code 128
^BL LOGMARS
Fonts and Bar Codes
Bar Codes
906
Table 12 Two-Dimensional Bar Codes
^B4 Code 49
^B7 PDF417
^BB CODABLOCK
^BD UPS MaxiCode
^BF MicroPDF417
^BQ QR Code
^BR RSS (Reduced Space Symbology)Bar Code
^BT TLC39
^BX Data Matrix
D
Mod 10 and Mod 43
Check Digits
This section provides information about Mod 10 and Mod 43 check digits.
Contents
Mod 10 Check Digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 908
Mod 43 Check Digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 909
Mod 10 Check Digit
908
Mod 10 Check Digit
The calculations for determining the Mod 10 Check Digit character are as follows:
1. Start at the first position and add the value of every other position together.
0 + 2 + 4 + 6 + 8 + 0 = 20
2. The result of Step 1 is multiplied by 3.
20 x 3 = 60
3. Start at the second position and add the value of every other position together.
1 + 3 + 5 + 7 + 9 = 25
4. The results of steps 1 and 3 are added together.
60 + 25 = 85
5. The check character (12th character) is the smallest number which, when added to the
result in step 4, produces a multiple of 10.
85 + X = 90 (next higher multiple of 10)
X = 5 Check Character
This bar code illustrates the above example. The digit on the right (5) is the check digit.
909
Mod 43 Check Digit
Mod 43 Check Digit
The calculations for determining the Mod 43 check Digit character are as follows:
Each character in the Code 39 character set has a specific value, as follows:
1. Add the sum of all the character values in the data string. Using the chart above, the sum
of the character values is as follows:
1 + 2 + 3 + 4 + 5 + 10 + 11 + 12 + 13 + 14 + 40 =115
2. Divide the total by 43. Keep track of the remainder.
115/43 = 2 Remainder is 29
3. The check digit is the character that corresponds to the value of the remainder.
Remainder = 29
29 is the value for the letter T.
T is the check digit.
Below is a bar code that illustrates the example. The character on the right, T, is the check
digit.
Example Data string 2345ABCDE/
0=0
1=1
2=2
3=3
4=4
5=5
6=6
7=7
8=8
9=9
A=10
X=33
Y=34
Z=35
- =36
. = 37
Space=38
$=39
/=40
+=41
%=42
M=22
N=23
O=24
P=25
Q=26
R=27
S=28
T=29
U=30
V=31
W=32
B=11
C=12
D=13
E=14
F=15
G=16
H=17
I=18
J=19
K=20
L=21
Mod 43 Check Digit
910

Notes ___________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
E
ZB64 Encoding and
Compression
This section describes the Base 64 MIME (ZB64) encoding and compression. This is the same
type of MIME encoding that is used in e-mail.
Contents
Introduction to B64 and Z64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 912
B64 and Z64 Encoding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 914
Introduction to B64 and Z64
912
The first encoding, known as B64, encodes the data using the MIME Base64 scheme. Base64
is used to encode e-mail attachments and is specifically designed to address communications
path limitations, such as control characters and 7-bit data links. It encodes the data using only
the printable ASCII characters:
With the use of ZPL, this has the added benefit of avoiding the caret (^) and tilde (~)
characters. Base64 encodes six bits to the byte, for an expansion of 33 percent over the un-
enclosed data. This is much better than the 100 percent expansion given by the existing ASCII
hexadecimal encoding.
The second encoding, known as Z64, first compresses the data using the LZ77 algorithm to
reduce its size. (This algorithm is used by the PKWARE
compression program PKZIP and

is integral to the PNG graphics format.) The compressed data is then encoded using the MIME
Base64 scheme as described above.
A CRC is calculated across the Base64-encoded data. If the CRC-check fails or the download
is aborted, the object can be invalidated by the printer.
The robust encodings can be piggybacked on the existing download commands with full
backward compatibility. This is done by prefacing the new encodings with a header that
uniquely identifies them. The download routines in the printer firmware can key-off the header
to determine whether the data is in the old ASCII hexadecimal encoding or one of the new
encodings. This allows existing downloadable objects to be used in their present format, while
new objects can be created using the same download commands with the new encodings for
increased integrity and reduced download times.
For easy reference, B64 and Z64 are referred to as ZB64. In any reference to the ZB64
encoding, assume that both Base64-only (B64) and LZ77/Base64 (Z64) encodings are
accepted.
Example The following is an example of an existing download command using the new
encoding:
~DTARIAL,59494,:Z64:H4sICMB8+DMAC0FSSUFMLlRURgDsmnd8VEW7x5+ZO
edsyibZNNJhlyWhbEJIwYSwJDGNkmwghJIgJYEEEhQIPSggKAjEAiIiVaSoIJ
YNBAkIGgGxUBVUUCGU0JQSC0WFnPvbE+SF18+9H+8f973X+3Jm93umzzNznvn
NSSFGRJ6ARAVZvXK7XDaXLyTiR5B7ontuZPQ824I5RKIa6ew+aba8+pU1rVDZ
iciv
[multiple lines deleted]
/O6DU5wZ7ie2+g4xzDPwCpwm3nqW2GAPcdclxF4fIP66jHjncmKvKzh/ZUNCx
l9/QQx2HXHYB4m/PkQcdCdx2G7OYt+mszkMh4iZxoifvkh89BFipo87kwD/Bf
/dOcycAAEA:a1b2
913
The parameters are identical to the existing ~DT command:
When downloading graphics, the colon is used in the current ASCII hexadecimal encoding
indicate repeat the previous dot row. Since this shorthand is invalid for the first character of
data (no previous dot row has been downloaded), it is safe for the printer to detect the leading
colon character as the lead-in for the new encodings.
Table 13 ~DT Command Parameters
Parameter Details
o = font name Accepted Values: any valid TrueType name, up to 8 characters
In this example, Arial is the specified font.
s = font size Accepted Values: the number of memory bytes required to hold
the Zebra-downloadable format of the font
command is ignored
In this example, 59494 is the size.
To maintain compatibility with the existing ASCII hexadecimal
encoding, this field must contain the size of the un-enclosed and
uncompressed object the number of bytes that are finally
placed into the printers memory, not the number of bytes
downloaded.
hexadecimal digits/byte). The total number of two-digit values
must match parameter s.
Everything following the size field is data. The new encoding
imposes a header with a unique signature. The new encoding must
start with the characters :B64: (data encoded in Base-64 only) or
:Z64: (data compressed with LZ77, then encoded in Base-64)
followed by the encoded data.
After the data is presented, another colon (:) and four hexadecimal
digits comprise the CRC. The Base64 standard allows new-line
characters (carriage returns and line feeds) to be inserted into the
encoded data for clarity. These characters are ignored by the
printer.
B64 and Z64 Encoding
914
These download encodings, B64 and Z64, are created as drop-in replacements for the existing
ASCII hexadecimal encoding.
B64 encoding do the following:
Encode the compressed data using the MIME Base64 algorithm.
Calculate a CRC across the encoded data.
Add a unique header to differentiate the new format from the existing ASCII hex
encoding.
Z64 encoding do the following:
Compress the data using the LZ77 algorithm.
Encode the compressed data using the MIME Base64 algorithm.
Calculate a CRC across the encoded data.
Add a unique header to differentiate the new format from the existing ASCII hexadecimal
encoding.
The data field have this format:
:id:encoded_data:crc
The printer calculates a CRC across the received data bytes and compare this to the CRC in the
header. A CRC mismatch is treated as an aborted download.
The B64 and Z64 encodings can be used in place of the ASCII hexadecimal encoding in any
download command. The commands are:
~DB Download Bitmap Font
~DE Download Encoding
~DG Download Graphic
~DL Download Unicode Bitmap Font
~DS Download Scalable Font
~DT Download TrueType Font
~DU Download Unbounded TrueType Font
^GF Graphic Field (with compression type set to ASCII hex)
Table 14 Format Parameters
Parameter Details
:id the identifying string B64 or Z64
:iencoded_data data to download, compressed with LZ77 (if the id parameter is
set to Z64) and encoded with Base64.
:crc four hexadecimal digits representing the CRC calculated over the
:encoded_data field.
915
The ~DB (Download Bitmap Font) command can use the new encodings in place of the ASCII
hexadecimal encoding in data sub-fields. Each character is encoded individually. However, for
small amounts of data, the identifying B64 or Z64 header and trailing CRC may negate any
gains made by using the new format.
For backward compatibility, the ^HG (Host Graphic) command uses the ASCII hexadecimal
encoding. It does not use the new encodings.
916

Notes ___________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
F
Field Interactions
This section provides you with examples that show how commands interact with various
justification parameters. The examples are in charts for these orientations:
Normal
Rotated
Bottom-up
Inverted
These charts are designed so that you can identify the location of the field origin and
interactions between the rotation, formatting and justification commands.
Field Interactions
Normal Orientation
918
Normal Orientation
Table 15 shows you the various normal orientation outputs:
Table 15 Normal Orientation Examples
^FPH ^FPV ^FPR
^FO
Left
Justified
^FT
Left
Justified
^FO
Right
Justified
^FT
Right
Justified
919
Field Interactions
Rotated Orientation
Rotated Orientation
Table 16 shows you the various rotated orientation outputs:
Table 16 Rotated Orientation Examples
^FPH ^FPV ^FPR
^FO
Left
Justified
^FT
Left
Justified
^FO
Right
Justified
^FT
Right
Justified
Field Interactions
Bottom Up Orientation
920
Bottom Up Orientation
Table 17 shows you the various bottom up orientation outputs:
Table 17 Bottom Orientation Examples
^FPH ^FPV ^FPR
^FO
Left
Justified
^FT
Left
Justified
^FO
Right
Justified
^FT
Right
Justified
921
Field Interactions
Inverted Orientation
Table 18 shows you the various inverted orientation outputs:
Table 18 Inverted Orientation Examples
^FPH ^FPV ^FPR
^FO
Left
Justified
^FT
Left
Justified
^FO
Right
Justified
^FT
Right
Justified
Field Interactions
922

Notes ___________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
G
Real Time Clock
This appendix contains the information needed to install, program, and operate the Real Time
Clock (RTC) option.
Real Time Clock
Overview
924
Overview
This hardware option is available as either a factory-installed or field-installable option in
specific printer products manufactured and sold by Zebra Technologies Corporation.
The Real Time Clock option is currently available for following printers, and requires that the
firmware version shown is installed on that printer.
Supported Zebra Printer and Print Engine Models
Requires this
Firmware Version
or Later
105SL printers that meet any one of the following criteria:
if the printer was manufactured after April 2006
if the RTC Date and the RTC Time fields are printed on the
configuration label
if the RTC Date and the RTC Time appear on the LCD
display
60.13.0.13Z
DA402 & T402 printers 32.8.4
LP2844-Z, TPL2844-Z, and TPL3844-Z printers 45.10.x
PAX Series
print engines
170PAX2 print engines 29.9.x or 31.9.x
110PAX3 print engines using Standard Font 34.10.x
110PAX3 print engines using TT Font 49.10.x
170PAX3 print engines using Standard Font 37.10.x
110PAX4 and 170PAX4 print engines 60.13.0.12
S4M printers (field-installable kit) 50.13.x
S600 printers 27.10.3
Xi Series
printers
90XiII, 140XiII, 170XiII & 220XiII printers 18.9.x
90XiIII, 96XiIII, 140XiIII, 170XiIII, and 220XiIII
printers
33.10.0
90XiIIIPlus, 96XiIIIPlus, 140XiIIIPlus,
170XiIIIPlus, and 220XiIIIPlus printers
60.13.0.12
Z4Mplus and Z6Mplus printers 60.13.0.12
ZM400/ZM600 printers 53.15.xZ
925
Real Time Clock
Control Panel Programming
New parameters for the Real Time Clock have been added to the Control Panel Configuration.
These parameters are located immediately following the FORMAT CONVERT prompt. Refer
to the printer/print engine User Guide for complete configuration information.
X.9.x firmware added the parameters to XiII printers and 170PAX/170PAX2 print engines.
X.10.x firmware added the parameters to XiIII printers and PAX3 print engines.
X.13.x firmware added the parameters to XiIIIPlus printers, PAX4 print engines.
X.13.0.13Z firmware added the parameters to 105SL printers.
Real Time Clock Parameters
The parameters listed on the following pages are added to the Control Panel Configuration
prompts only when both the Real Time Clock hardware option and the appropriate version of
firmware are installed:
X.9.x or later firmware installed in the XiII series printers or the 170PAX/170PAX2 series
print engines.
X.10.x or later firmware installed in the XiIII series printers or the PAX3 series print
engines.
X.13.0.13Z or later firmware installed in the 105SL printers
X.13.x or later firmware installed in the XiIIIPlus series printers, the PAX4 series print
engines, or the S4M printers.
The RTC ZPL II commands apply to all printers/print engines with the Real Time Clock
hardware option and proper firmware.
Idle Display
Selects the printer/print engine Idle Display format and the method of displaying the time/date
information. This parameter also affects the Configuration Label printout and the RTC DATE
and RTC TIME formats.
Selections
FW VERSION
MM/DD/YY 24HR
MM/DD/YY 12HR
DD/MM/YY 24HR
DD/MM/YY 12HR
If FW VERSION is selected, the format on the Configuration Label and on the RTC DATE
and RTC TIME parameters is MM/DD/YY 24HR.
Real Time Clock
926
RTC Date
Allows entry of the RTC date in the format selected by the IDLE DISPLAY parameter.
Note The RTC parameters are password-protected. Refer to your printers user guide for
specific instructions on accessing and modifying printer parameters.
Printer Model Action
PAX Series print
engines, Xi Series
printers, and 105SL
printers
1. Use the LEFT oval key to select the position to be adjusted
2. Then, use the RIGHT oval key to select the correct value for that
position.
Z4Mplus and
Z6Mplus printers
1. Press SELECT to select the parameter.
2. Use the MINUS (-) key to select the position to be adjusted
3. Then, use the PLUS (+) key to select the correct value for that
position.
4. Press SELECT to accept any changes and deselect the parameter.
S4M printer 1. Press ENTER. The printer displays the current RTC date.
2. Modify the values as follows:
Press the right arrow to move to the next digit position.
To increase the value, press the up arrow.
To decrease the value, press the down arrow.
3. Press ENTER to accept the value shown.
Note Invalid dates, such as 2/29/1999, may be entered, but will not be saved.
927
Real Time Clock
RTC Time
Allows entry of the RTC time in the format selected by the IDLE DISPLAY parameter.
Note The RTC parameters are password-protected. Refer to your printers user guide for
specific instructions on accessing and modifying printer parameters.
Printer Model Action
PAX Series print
engines, Xi Series
printers, and 105SL
printers
1. Use the LEFT oval key to select the position to be adjusted
2. Use the RIGHT oval key to select the correct value for that
position.
Z4Mplus and
Z6Mplus printers
1. Press SELECT to select the parameter.
2. Use the MINUS (-) key to select the position to be adjusted.
3. Use the PLUS (+) key to select the correct value for that position.
4. Press SELECT to accept any changes and deselect the parameter.
S4M printer 1. Press ENTER. The printer displays the current RTC date.
2. Modify the values as follows:
Press the right arrow to move to the next digit position.
To increase the value, press the up arrow.
To decrease the value, press the down arrow.
3. Press ENTER to accept the value shown.
Real Time Clock
RTC General Information
928
The Real Time Clock commands are only applicable if the Real Time Clock option is installed
in the printer. For those printers with an LCD control panel display, additional control panel
configuration parameters are also included.
The ZPL II Field Clock ^FC command is used to specify the clock-indicator character for the
primary, secondary, and third clocks. This command must be included within each label field
command string whenever the date or time clock values are required within the field. No date
or time clock information can be printed in a label field unless this command is included. The
^FC command can now be combined with the ^SN command in V60.13.0.10 and later.
A clock-indicator can be any printable character except the ZPL II Format Prefix, Control
Prefix, or Delimiter characters. The default value for the primary clock-indicator is the percent
sign %. The secondary and third clock-indicators have no defaults and must be specified in
order for that clock to be used.
The Field Data ^FD command has been expanded to recognize the clock-indicators and
associated command characters, and to replace them during the printing process with the
corresponding time or date parameter. For example, if the primary clock-indicator is the
percent sign %, then during printing, the character sequence %H in the ^FD statement would be
replaced by the 2-digit current hour.
Note If the Real Time Clock is not installed, or the ^FC command has not preceded the
^FD statement, no replacement would occur. In this case, the characters %H would print as
text on the label.
929
Real Time Clock
The name of the day of the week, the name of the month, and the AM or PM designation can
also be inserted in place of a specific clock-indicator/command character sequence. See
Table 19 on page 929 for the list of command characters and their functions.
The Set Offset ^SO command permits the printing of specific times and dates relative to the
primary clock. The secondary (or third) clock is enabled when secondary (or third) offsets are
entered using this command. The secondary (or third) clock time and date are determined by
adding the offsets to the current clock reading.
One ^SO command is required to set the secondary offset; an additional ^SO command is
required for a third offset. The offsets remain until changed or until the printer is either
powered down or reset.
Table 19 Command Characters
Command
Character
Function
%a is replaced by the abbreviated weekday name
%A is replaced by the weekday name
%b is replaced by the abbreviated month name
%B is replaced by the month name
%d is replaced by the day of the month number, 01 to 31
%H is replaced by the hour of the day (military), 00 to 23
%I is replaced by the hour of the day (civilian), 01 to 12
%j is replaced by the day of the year, 001 to 366
%m is replaced by the month number, 01 to 12
%M is replaced by the minute, 00 to 59
%p is replaced by the AM or PM designation
%S is replaced by the seconds, 00 to 59
%U is replaced by the week# of the year, 00 to 53, Sunday is 1st day*
*. %U establishes Sunday as the first day of the year.
%W is replaced by the week# of the year, 00 to 53, Monday is 1st day**
**.%W establishes Monday as the first day of the year.
%w is replaced by the day# of the week, 00 (Sunday) to 06 (Saturday)
%y is replaced by the 2 digits of the year, 00 to 99
%Y is replaced by the full 4 digit year numberwhere% is the specified
clock-indicator character
Note Only dates from January 1, 1998 to December 31, 2097 are supported. Setting the
offsets to values that result in dates outside this range is not recommended and may have
unexpected results.
Real Time Clock
930
The Set Mode/Language ^SL (see page 330) command is used to select the language the days
of the week and the months are printed in. This command also sets the printing mode, which
can be S for START TIME, T for TIME NOW, or a Numeric Value for the time accuracy. In
START TIME mode, the time printed on the label is the time that is read from the Real Time
Clock when the label formatting begins (when the ^XA command is received by the printer).
In TIME NOW mode, the time printed on the label is the time that is read from the Real Time
Clock when the label is placed in the queue to be printed. In Numeric Value mode, a time
accuracy tolerance can be specified.
First Day of the Week Affects Calendar Week
The %U and %W commands set the first day of the week. The week numbering starts at the
beginning of the year with Week 01 representing the first full week of the year. Any day(s)
before that established first day of the week are part of the Week 00. The following examples
show how setting different days as the first day of the week affect the calendar week.
Example January, 2005 with Week 00
Set Sunday as the first day of the week using the %U command. In this example,
notice that Saturday, January 1st is Week 00 and Sunday, January 2nd begins
Week 01.
Important The %U and %W commands determine the numbering for all weeks in the year.
Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat
1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29
30 31
First Day of
the Week
Week 00
Week 01
931
Real Time Clock
Set Monday as the first day of the week using the %W command. In this example,
notice that Saturday, January 1st and Sunday, January 2nd are Week 00 and Monday,
January 3rd begins Week 01.
Example January, 2006 without Week 00
Set Sunday as the first day of the week using the %U command. Since 2006 begins on
a Sunday, there is no Week 00 in this example.
Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun
1 2
3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23
24 25 26 27 28 29 30
31
First Day of
the Week
Week 00
Week 01
Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat
No Week 00
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
15 16 17 18 19 20 21
22 23 24 25 26 27 28
29 30 31
First Day of
the Week Week 01
Real Time Clock
932
Set Monday as the first day of the week using the %W command. In this example,
Saturday, January 1st is Week 00 and Sunday, January 2nd begins Week 01.
Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun
1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29
30 31
First Day of
the Week
Week 00
Week 01
933
Real Time Clock
Time and Date Precision
As of V60.13.0.1 firmware, the ^CO command is now ignored. While the S4M printer has a
lower firmware version number (V50.x), its firmware was recently released and follows the
rule to ignore the ^CO command.
The time and date placed in a label field is determined at the time the label bitmap is created by
the printer (start time mode). If a batch of labels is formatted, the date and time will be the
same for all labels in the batch. If the printer is paused during the printing process and remains
in that state for a period of time, when printing resumes, the time and date will still be the same
as when the batch was first started.
If more precise time and date stamps are required on versions prior to V60, follow the process
below. For versions after V60, use the Numeric Value mode shown on page 330.
Cycle the printer/print engine power Off (O) and On (l) to clear the memory before performing
the steps below.
1. Print a Memory Usage Label (^XA^WD*:*.*^XZ)
and note the following value:
Available RAM (in BYTES)
(A) __________
2. Print a Configuration Label and note these values:
Printer Print Width (in DOTS)
(NOT the Label Width)
(B) __________
Label Length (in DOTS) (C) __________
3. Determine the desired maximum number of queued labels with the
same Time and Date value.
(D) __________
Note Increasing the number of queued labels will improve throughput performance, but
Real Time Clock values will be less accurate. Two is usually a good compromise.
4. Substitute the values for B through D from the previous page into
the following formula:
The label queue memory required (in BYTES)
(B x C x D)/8 =
(E) __________
5. Substitute the values for A and E into the following formula:
The ^CO command memory required (in KBYTES)
(A-E)/1024)-5=
(F) __________
Note If the value of (F) is less than zero, then no ^CO command is needed. If the value
of (F) is greater than zero, use the integer portion in the ^CO command.
Real Time Clock
934
This command string will cause 489 KBYTES to be set aside as Font Memory and make it
unavailable as label format memory. The memory remaining will only allow two labels to be
formatted at one time, and the time and date will be more precise for those two labels.
Example
Note For the 170PAX2 print engine, you must disable the Reprint Function for the Time
Now Mode to function properly.
Available RAM (A) = 71478 BYTES
Print Width (B) = 832 DOTS
Label Length (C) = 1000 DOTS
Max Labels Queued (D) = 2
Then
The label queue memory required (E) =
(B x C x D)/8 = 208000 BYTES
And
The ^CO command memory required (F) =
(71478-208000)/1024)-5=489.87 KBYTES
Therefore, the correct ^CO command string to add to
the label format would be:
^XA^COY,489^XZ
935
Real Time Clock
ZPL II Samples
ZPL II Samples
The ZPL II scripts shown on this page establish the initial settings for the date and time clock.
The script below then references these settings to provide the output shown in Figure 5
on page 936.
Setting the date and time for the Real Time Clock only needs to be done once. The date and
time are maintained by an on-board battery when the printer is reset or the printer is turned
Off (O).
To set the date and time to April 23, 2005 at 2:30pm, the following command string should be
sent to the printer:
^XA
^ST04,23,2005,02,30,0,P^FS
^XZ
To initialize the Real Time Clock and set up two offset values (offset #2 set to 3 months and 1
hour in the future, offset #3 set to 1 year in the past), the following command sequence should
be sent to the printer:
^XA
^SL
^SO2,3,0,0,1,0,0^FS
^SO3,0,0,-1,0,0,0^FS
^XZ
The above ZPL II scripts initialize the RTC date and time and must be sent to a printer to
provide proper date and time parameters for the ZPL II script below.
The following ZPL II script illustrates the various methods of printing the date and time
initialized in the script above within separate fields on continuous media. Figure 5 on page 936
illustrates the printout of this script on a label.
Real Time Clock
ZPL II Samples
936
For the below example, the ^FC command delimiters are:
% Primary clock indicator
{ Secondary clock indicator
# Third clock indicator
^XA
^LL175
^FO10,025ÂD^FC%,{,#^FD1: Mil: %H:%M:%S Civ: %I:%M:%S
%p^FS
^FO10,050ÂD^FC%,{,#^FD2: Mil: {H:{M:{S Civ: {I:{M:{S
{p^FS
^FO10,075ÂD^FC%,{,#^FD3: Mil: #H:#M:#S Civ: #I:#M:#S
#p^FS
^FO10,100ÂD^FC%,{,#^FD1: On %A, %B %d
, %Y (%a, %m/%d/%y, %d %b %Y).^FS
^FO10,125ÂD^FC%,{,#^FD2: On {A, {B {d, {Y (
{a, {m/{d/{y, {d {b {Y).^FS
^FO10,150ÂD^FC%,{,#^FD3: On #A, #B #d, #Y (
#a, #m/#d/#y, #d #b #Y).^FS
^XZ
Figure 5 Printed Result of the Above ZPL II Script
1: Mil: 14:30:00 Civ: 02:30:00 PM
2: Mil: 15:30:00 Civ: 03:30:00 PM
3: Mil: 14:30:00 Civ: 02:30:00 PM
1: On Wed, April 23, 2005 (Fri, 04/23/05, 23 Apr 2005)
2: On Saturday, July 23, 2005 (Fri, 07/23/05, 23 Jul 2005)
3: On Friday, April 23, 2004 (Fri, 04/23/04, 23 Apr 2004)
937
Real Time Clock
ZPL II Samples
The following are examples of the time stamp using the ^SL1 and ^SL5 at 2 ips and 10 ips
for the Enhanced Real Time Clock (V60.13.0.10 and later).
^XA
^SL1^FS
^FO187,184Â0N,101,121^FC%^FD%H:%M:%S^FS
^PQ10
^XZ
Figure 6 Example of ^SL1, 2 ips and 10 ips
Note They show the variation of time due to print speed and label complexity.
1 Label 1 6 Label 6
2 Label 2 7 Label 7
3 Label 3 8 Label 8
4 Label 4 9 Label 9
5 Label 5 10 Label 10
15:42:20
15:42:22
15:42:24
15:42:27
15:42:29
15:42:31
15:42:18
15:42:16
15:42:13
15:42:11
15:47:05
15:47:06
15:47:07
15:47:08
15:47:09
15:47:10
15:47:04
15:47:03
15:47:02
15:47:01
2 ips
10
10 ips
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Real Time Clock
ZPL II Samples
938
^XA
^SL5^FS
^FO187,184Â0N,101,121^FC%^FD%H:%M:%S^FS
^PQ10
^XZ
Figure 7 Example of ^SL5, 2 ips and 10 ips
1 Label 1 6 Label 6
2 Label 2 7 Label 7
3 Label 3 8 Label 8
4 Label 4 9 Label 9
5 Label 5 10 Label 10
15:43:50
15:43:50
15:43:50
15:43:55
15:43:55
15:43:55
15:43:47
15:43:42
15:43:42
15:43:42
15:48:22
15:48:22
15:48:22
15:48:22
15:48:22
15:48:22
15:48:22
15:48:22
15:48:22
15:48:22
2 ips 10 ips
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
H
ZBI Character Set
This section provides you with the set of characters that are supported on the front panel of the
following Zebra printers with ZBI 2.0: XiIIIPlus, 105SL, Z4M/Z6M, ZM400, ZM600, PAX4
and S4M when V60.16.0Z or V53.16.0Z, or later firmware are loaded. These characters can be
used in ZBI programs to display content on the LCD.
ZBI Character Set
Character Set
940
Character Set
These are the supported characters for these Zebra printers: XiIIIPlus, 105SL, Z4M/Z6M,
PAX4, and S4M:
941
ZBI Character Set
Character Set
These are the supported characters for these Zebra printers: ZM400 and ZM600:
ZBI Character Set
Character Set
942

Notes ____________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
I
SGD Command Support
This appendix provides you with details identifying which SGD commands can be used with
different printers and firmware versions.
SGD Command Support
944
This section provides supported printer models and minumum firmware versions for all SGD
commands. In order to set and get configurations, the SGD commands can be used through the
Ethernet, serial, parallel, and USB interfaces.
Printer Type
If you know the printer type that you currently have, answer this question:
What type of printer do you have?
Standard Printer
Note The printer responds with the printer setting of "?" if the printer setting:
does not exist
has not been configured yet
If you have a Then
Standard Printer Go to Table 20 on page 944.
RFID printer Go to Table 21 on page 956.
Important All the firmware versions noted in Table 20 refer to the minimum firmware
version required. For RFID printer support, see Table 21.
Table 20 SGD Standard Printer and Firmware Compatibility
SGD Commands
XiIIIPlus
105SL
PAX4
Z4MPlus
Z6MPlus
S4M
ZM400
ZM600
HC100 G-Series
appl.bootblock
V60.15.8Z V53.15.5Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
appl.name
V60.15.8Z V53.15.5Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
bluetooth.address
V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
bluetooth.afh_map
V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
bluetooth.afh_mode
V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
* On these printers with ZebraNet 10/100 Internal Print Server.
** On these printers with ZebraNet 10/100 External Print Server, firmware version 1.1.5
945
SGD Command Support
V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
bluetooth.date
V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
bluetooth.enable
V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
bluetooth.version
V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
card.inserted
V60.15.2Z V50.15.2Z V53.15.5Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
card.mac_addr
V60.15.2Z V50.15.2Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
cutter.clean_cutter
V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
V60.16.2Z V53.16.2Z V53.16.2Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
V60.16.2Z V53.16.2Z V53.16.2Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
V60.16.2Z V53.16.2Z V53.16.2Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
V60.16.2Z V53.16.2Z V53.16.2Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
Table 20 SGD Standard Printer and Firmware Compatibility (Continued)
SGD Commands
XiIIIPlus
105SL
PAX4
Z4MPlus
Z6MPlus
S4M
ZM400
ZM600
HC100 G-Series
SGD Command Support
946
device.languages
V60.15.8Z V53.15.5Z V53.15.5Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
device.pnp_option
V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
device.jobs_print
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
device.reset
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
device.unique_id
V60.16.2Z V53.16.2Z V53.16.2Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
device.user_p1
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
device.user_p2
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
device.uptime
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
device.xml.enable
V60.15.8Z V53.15.8Z V53.15.8Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
display.text
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V56.16.5Z
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
V60.15.8Z **V53.15.5Z **V53.15.5Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
V60.15.8Z V53.15.5Z V53.15.5Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
V60.15.8Z V53.15.5Z V53.15.5Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
V60.15.8Z **V53.15.5Z **V53.15.5Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
V60.15.8Z **V53.15.5Z **V53.15.5Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
V60.15.8Z **V53.15.5Z **V53.15.5Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
V60.15.8Z **V53.15.5Z **V53.15.5Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
V60.15.8Z V53.15.5Z **V53.15.5Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
V60.15.8Z V53.15.5Z V53.15.5Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
SGD Commands
XiIIIPlus
105SL
PAX4
Z4MPlus
Z6MPlus
S4M
ZM400
ZM600
HC100 G-Series
947
SGD Command Support
V60.15.8Z V53.15.5Z V53.15.5Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
V60.15.8Z V53.15.5Z V53.15.5Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
V60.15.8Z V53.15.5Z V53.15.5Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
V60.15.8Z V53.15.5Z V53.15.5Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
V60.15.8Z V53.15.5Z V53.15.5Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
v60.16.5Z v53.16.5Z v53.16.5Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
v60.16.5Z v53.16.5Z v53.16.5Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
v60.16.5Z v53.16.5Z v53.16.5Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
V60.15.8Z V53.15.5Z V53.15.5Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
file.delete
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
file.dir
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
file.run
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
file.type
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
head.latch
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
SGD Commands
XiIIIPlus
105SL
PAX4
Z4MPlus
Z6MPlus
S4M
ZM400
ZM600
HC100 G-Series
SGD Command Support
948
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
* V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
* V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
* V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
* V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
* V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
* V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
* V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
* V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
SGD Commands
XiIIIPlus
105SL
PAX4
Z4MPlus
Z6MPlus
S4M
ZM400
ZM600
HC100 G-Series
949
SGD Command Support
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
* V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
* V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
* V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
* V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
* V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
* V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
ip.active_network
V60.15.8Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
ip.addr
V60.15.2Z V50.15.2Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
ip.arp_interval
V60.15.2Z V50.15.2Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
ip.bootp.enable
V60.15.2Z V53.15.5Z
V50.15.2Z
V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
ip.dhcp.cache_ip
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
ip.dhcp.cid_all
V60.15.2Z V50.15.2Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
ip.dhcp.cid_enable
V60.15.2Z V50.15.2Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
ip.dhcp.cid_prefix
V60.15.2Z V50.15.2Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
ip.dhcp.cid_suffix
V60.15.2Z V50.15.2Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
ip.dhcp.cid_type
V60.15.2Z V50.15.2Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
ip.dhcp.enable
V60.15.2Z V53.15.5Z
V50.15.2Z
V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
SGD Commands
XiIIIPlus
105SL
PAX4
Z4MPlus
Z6MPlus
S4M
ZM400
ZM600
HC100 G-Series
SGD Command Support
950
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
ip.dhcp.option12
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
ip.dns.domain
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
ip.dns.servers
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
ip.ftp.enable
V60.15.2Z V50.15.2Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
ip.gateway
V60.15.2Z V50.15.2Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
ip.http.enable
V60.15.2Z V50.15.2Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
ip.lpd.enable
V60.15.2Z V50.15.2Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
ip.mac_raw
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
ip.netmask
V60.15.2Z V50.15.2Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
ip.pop3.enable
V60.15.2Z V50.15.2Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
ip.pop3.password
V60.15.2Z V50.15.2Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
SGD Commands
XiIIIPlus
105SL
PAX4
Z4MPlus
Z6MPlus
S4M
ZM400
ZM600
HC100 G-Series
951
SGD Command Support
ip.pop3.poll
V60.15.2Z V50.15.2Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
ip.pop3.server_addr
V60.15.2Z V50.15.2Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
ip.pop3.username
V60.15.2Z V50.15.2Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
ip.port
V60.15.2Z V50.15.2Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
ip.primary_network
V53.15.5Z V53.15.5Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
ip.smtp.domain
V60.15.2Z V53.15.5Z
V50.15.2Z
V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
ip.smtp.enable
V60.15.2Z V50.15.2Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
ip.smtp.server_addr
V60.15.2Z V53.15.5Z
V50.15.2Z
V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
ip.snmp.enable
V60.15.2Z V50.15.2Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
V60.15.2Z V53.15.5Z
V50.15.2Z
V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
V60.15.2Z V53.15.5Z
V50.15.2Z
V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
ip.tcp.enable
V60.15.2Z V50.15.2Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
ip.telnet.enable
V60.15.2Z V50.15.2Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
ip.udp.enable
V60.15.2Z V50.15.2Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
media.darkness_mode
V54.16.1Z
media.printmode
V60.15.8Z V53.15.5Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
media.speed
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V61.16.6Z
V56.16.6Z
odometer.headclean
V60.15.8Z V53.15.5Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
odometer.headnew
V60.15.8Z V53.15.5Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
V60.15.8Z V53.15.5Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
SGD Commands
XiIIIPlus
105SL
PAX4
Z4MPlus
Z6MPlus
S4M
ZM400
ZM600
HC100 G-Series
SGD Command Support
952
V60.15.8Z V53.15.5Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
V60.15.8Z V53.15.5Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
V60.15.8Z V53.15.5Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.15.6Z
V56.15.6Z
print.tone
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V61.16.6Z
V56.16.6Z
wlan.adhocautomode
V60.15.2Z V50.15.2Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
wlan.adhocchannel
V60.15.2Z V50.15.2Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
wlan.associated
V60.15.2Z V50.15.2Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
wlan.bssid
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
wlan.channel
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
wlan.channel_mask
V60.15.2Z V50.15.2Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
wlan.essid
V60.15.2Z V50.15.2Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
V60.15.2Z V50.15.2Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
wlan.ip.addr
V60.15.8Z V53.15.5Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
V60.15.8Z V53.15.5Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
V60.15.8Z V53.15.5Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
V60.15.8Z V53.15.5Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
V60.15.8Z V53.15.5Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
V60.15.8Z V53.15.5Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
SGD Commands
XiIIIPlus
105SL
PAX4
Z4MPlus
Z6MPlus
S4M
ZM400
ZM600
HC100 G-Series
953
SGD Command Support
V60.15.8Z V53.15.5Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
V60.15.8Z V53.15.5Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
wlan.ip.gateway
V60.15.8Z V53.15.5Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
wlan.ip.netmask
V60.15.8Z V53.15.5Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
wlan.ip.port
V60.15.8Z V53.15.5Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
wlan.ip.protocol
V60.15.8Z V53.15.5Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
V60.15.8Z V53.15.5Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
V60.15.8Z V53.15.5Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
V60.15.2Z V50.15.2Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
V60.15.2Z V50.15.2Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
SGD Commands
XiIIIPlus
105SL
PAX4
Z4MPlus
Z6MPlus
S4M
ZM400
ZM600
HC100 G-Series
SGD Command Support
954
wlan.kerberos.kdc
V60.15.2Z V50.15.2Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
V60.15.2Z V50.15.2Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
wlan.kerberos.realm
V60.15.2Z V50.15.2Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
V60.15.2Z V50.15.2Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
wlan.mac_addr
V60.15.8Z V53.15.5Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
wlan.mac_raw
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
wlan.operating_mode
V60.15.2Z V50.15.2Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
wlan.password
V60.15.2Z V50.15.2Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
wlan.preamble
V60.15.2Z V50.15.2Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
V60.15.2Z V50.15.2Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
wlan.roam.interval
V60.15.2Z V50.15.2Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
V60.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V53.16.4Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
wlan.roam.signal
V60.15.2Z V50.15.2Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
wlan.security
V60.15.2Z V50.15.2Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
wlan.signal_noise
V60.15.2Z V50.15.2Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
wlan.signal_quality
V60.15.2Z V50.15.2Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
V60.15.2Z V50.15.2Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
wlan.station_name
V60.15.2Z V50.15.2Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
wlan.tx_power
V60.15.2Z V50.15.2Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
SGD Commands
XiIIIPlus
105SL
PAX4
Z4MPlus
Z6MPlus
S4M
ZM400
ZM600
HC100 G-Series
955
SGD Command Support
wlan.tx_rate
V60.15.2Z V50.15.2Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
wlan.username
V60.15.2Z V50.15.2Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
wlan.wep.auth_type
V60.15.2Z V50.15.2Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
wlan.wep.index
V60.15.2Z V50.15.2Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
wlan.wep.key_format
V60.15.2Z V50.15.2Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
wlan.wep.key1
V60.15.2Z V50.15.2Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
wlan.wep.key2
V60.15.2Z V50.15.2Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
wlan.wep.key3
V60.15.2Z V50.15.2Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
wlan.wep.key4
V60.15.2Z V50.15.2Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
wlan.wpa.psk
V60.15.2Z V50.15.2Z V53.15.5Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
V60.16.2Z V53.16.2Z V53.16.2Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
zbi.control.break
V60.16.2Z V53.16.2Z V53.16.2Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
V60.16.2Z V53.16.2Z V53.16.2Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
V60.16.2Z V53.16.2Z V53.16.2Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
V60.16.2Z V53.16.2Z V53.16.2Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
zbi.control.restart
V60.16.2Z V53.16.2Z V53.16.2Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
zbi.control.run
V60.16.2Z V53.16.2Z V53.16.2Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
zbi.control.step
V60.16.2Z V53.16.2Z V53.16.2Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
V60.16.2Z V53.16.2Z V53.16.2Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
V60.16.2Z V53.16.2Z V53.16.2Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
SGD Commands
XiIIIPlus
105SL
PAX4
Z4MPlus
Z6MPlus
S4M
ZM400
ZM600
HC100 G-Series
SGD Command Support
956
V60.16.2Z V53.16.2Z V53.16.2Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
zbi.key
V60.16.2Z V53.16.2Z V53.16.2Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
zbi.last_error
V60.16.2Z V53.16.2Z V53.16.2Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
zbi.reseller_key
V60.16.2Z V53.16.2Z V53.16.2Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
zbi.revision
V60.16.2Z V53.16.2Z V53.16.2Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
V60.16.2Z V53.16.2Z V53.16.2Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
V60.16.2Z V53.16.2Z V53.16.2Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
V60.16.2Z V53.16.2Z V53.16.2Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
V60.16.2Z V53.16.2Z V53.16.2Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
zbi.state
V60.16.2Z V53.16.2Z V53.16.2Z V54.16.1Z V61.16.5Z
V56.16.5Z
SGD Commands
XiIIIPlus
105SL
PAX4
Z4MPlus
Z6MPlus
S4M
ZM400
ZM600
HC100 G-Series
957
SGD Command Support
RFID Printers
S
Important All the firmware versions noted in Table 21, refer to minimum firmware version
required. For non-RFID printers, see Table 20. Once an RFID Ready printer has been
reconfigured as a RFID Printer, Table 21 should be used
Table 21 SGD RFID Printer and Firmware Compatibility
SGD Commands
R110Xi (UHF) and
R170Xi R110PAX4 R4Mplus R110Xi HF
card.inserted
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
card.mac_addr
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
ip.addr
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
ip.arp_interval
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
ip.bootp.enable
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
ip.dhcp.cid_all
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
ip.dhcp.cid_enable
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
ip.dhcp.cid_prefix
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
ip.dhcp.cid_suffix
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
ip.dhcp.cid_type
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
ip.dhcp.enable
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
ip.ftp.enable
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
ip.gateway
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
SGD Command Support
958
ip.http.enable
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
ip.lpd.enable
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
ip.netmask
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
ip.pop3.enable
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
ip.pop3.password
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
ip.pop3.poll
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
ip.pop3.server_addr
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
ip.pop3.username
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
ip.port
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
ip.primary_network
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
ip.smtp.domain
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
ip.smtp.enable
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
ip.smtp.server_addr
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
ip.snmp.enable
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
Table 21 SGD RFID Printer and Firmware Compatibility (Continued)
SGD Commands
R110Xi (UHF) and
959
SGD Command Support
ip.tcp.enable
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
ip.telnet.enable
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
ip.udp.enable
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
rfid.error.response
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
wlan.adhocautomode
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
wlan.adhocchannel
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
wlan.associated
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
wlan.channel_mask
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
wlan.essid
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
SGD Commands
R110Xi (UHF) and
SGD Command Support
960
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
wlan.kerberos.kdc
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
wlan.kerberos.realm
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
wlan.operating_mode
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
wlan.password
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
wlan.preamble
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
wlan.roam.interval
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
wlan.roam.signal
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
wlan.security
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
wlan.signal_noise
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
wlan.signal_quality
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
wlan.station_name
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
SGD Commands
R110Xi (UHF) and
961
SGD Command Support
wlan.tx_power
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
wlan.tx_rate
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
wlan.username
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
wlan.wep.auth_type
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
wlan.wep.index
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
wlan.wep.key_format
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
wlan.wep.key1
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
wlan.wep.key2
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
wlan.wep.key3
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
wlan.wep.key4
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
wlan.wpa.psk
R60.15.8Z R62.15.8Z
R63.15.8Z
SP994P SP999F
SP1027F SP1056E
SP1082F
R65.15.8Z
SGD Commands
R110Xi (UHF) and
SGD Command Support
962

Notes ___________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
J
Features
This appendix covers features added to major firmware releases.
Features
Firmware x.16
962
Firmware x.16
The following is an overview of the new and enhanced features available in firmware version
V53.16.x and V60.16.x, and later; it is ZBI 2.0-Ready. These include:
ZBI 2.0 can be enabled by placing a ZBI 2.0 key on the printer via the ZBI Key Manager
& Downloader utility. Printers can be ordered from the factory with the ZBI 2.0 option
enabled. Printers can be ZBI-Enabled in the field by purchasing and using a ZBI Key Kit.
Printers can be ZBI-Enabled in the field by purchasing a key at www.zebrasoftware.com.
Printers which have been ZBI-Enabled will not display a Z at the end of the firmware
version string. For example, a printer which has been ZBI-Enabled will display the
firmware version as V53.16.1, while a printer which has not been ZBI-Enabled will
display the firmware version as V53.16.1Z
The printer configuration label will display the ZBI status for the printer:
ZBI-Enabled
Not ZBI-Enabled
The printer configuration label will list which ZBI program is running.
ZBI 2.0 is backwards compatible with previous versions of ZBI. Any code which was
specifically written to handle a maximum string length of 255 characters will need to be
reviewed to ensure it works with unlimited string lengths.
Other ZBI 2.0 Features:
List ZBI programs from the front panel
Start/Stop ZBI programs from the front panel
Button presses on front panel can be registered as events in ZBI programs.
Applicator port control
Support for longer strings, the length of the string dependent on available memory.
Support for NULL values in Strings and String operations
SNMP & Set/Get/Do (SGD) Control of ZBI
On-printer Debugging (via ZBI-Developer)
ZBI 2.0 Program Encryption
ZBI 2.0 programs can be made hidden and/or persistent
later.
963
Features
Firmware x.16
New ZBI 2.0 Commands:
ACCEPT INTTOHEX$
ADDBREAK READ
AUXPORT_GETPIN REGISTEREVENTS
AUXPORT_RELEASEPIN SERVERSOCKET
AUXPORT_SETPIN SPLIT
AUXPORT_STEALPIN SPLITCOUNT
CLIENTSOCKET SUB
CLOSE ALL TCPX
DELBREAK TRIGGEREVENT
HANDLEEVENT UNREGISTEREVENTS
HEXTOINT WRITE
Features
Firmware x.15
964
Firmware x.15
The following is an overview of the new and enhanced features available in firmware version
V60.15.x, V50.15.x, or later. These include:
Additional wireless securities
New and updated ZPL commands (including wireless commands)
Extended SNMP features, providing SNMP based control over commonly-needed printer
settings.
Support for Set / Get / Do (SGD) commands
Wireless Securities
Firmware V60.15.x and V50.15.x offer support for a wider range of wireless securities. These
are the supported wireless securities:
WEP-40-BIT
WEP-128-BIT
EAP-TLS
EAP-TTLS
EAP-FAST
PEAP
LEAP
WPA-PSK
WPA EAP-TLS
WPA EAP-TTLS
WPA EAP-FAST
WPA PEAP
WPA LEAP
KERBEROS*
* Use of any given wireless security is dependent on the RF card being used.
later.
965
Features
Firmware x.15
ZPL and SGD Commands
Table 22 identifies the new commands and updates to existing commands in firmware version
V60.15.x, V50.15.x, or later. The bolded items are either new commands or new
enhancements to existing commands.
SNMP
Firmware V60.15.x, V50.15.x, or later feature support for an extended Management
Information Base (MIB) file. The extended support now covers many of the printer settings,
such as darkness, media type, and other printer specific settings. The MIB file can be
downloaded from www.zebra.com for use with SNMP management systems.
Set / Get / Do Support
Printers with firmware V60.15.x and V50.15.x support a new set of commands known as
Set / Get / Do (SGD) commands. These commands allow you to configure and get status on
the wireless settings in the printer. For details on the supported commands, see SGD Printer
Setting Commands on page 615.
XML-Enabled Printing
Printers with firmware V60.15.8Z, V53.15.8Z, or later support XML-Enabled printing. For
details, go to http://www.zebra.com/xml. This new feature does not alter the ZPL capabilities
of the printer.
Table 22 x.14 Features in Detail
Command Details
^KC The ^KC command is a new command with firmware version V60.15.x,
V50.15.x, or later. It allows wireless print servers to have their own client
identifier (CID). When the print server is active is uses the CID on the
printer. When both print servers are active they have the option to use the
CID on the printer, or their own CID.
~DY Firmware version V60.15.x, V50.15.x, or later supports .NRD (non readable
file) files and .PAC files (protected access credential).
~WS Firmware version V60.15.x, V50.15.x, or later added these new parameters:
wireless pulseadds a pulse to the network traffic generated by the
printer. To keep the printer online, a pulse is necessary with some
network configurations.
wireless pulse intervalwhen the wireless pulse feature is enabled
this sets the interval at which the wireless pulse is sent.
channel maskfor commonly used channel masks.
international modedisables or enables International mode
^WX The ^WX command configures the wireless security settings for printers
using the wireless print server.
Features
Firmware x.14
966
Firmware x.14
Table 23 identifies the new commands and enhancements to existing commands in firmware
V60.14.x, V50.14.x, or later. The bolded items are either new commands or new
enhancements to existing commands.
later.
Table 23 Features in Detail
Command Details
^CI The ^CI command selects the encoding and character set. To identify the
encoding, include a ^CI in the ZPL script. These encodings are now
supported with the ^CI command:
These are new variables that were added to the desired character set or
a parameter of the existing ^CI command:
Big 5 HKSCS (^CI26) with BIGHK.DAT. This supports the Hong
Kong supplementary character set of the Big 5 character set and
encoding. You can download the Big 5 HKSCS DAT table from
www.zebra.com.
Code Page 1252 (^CI27). The ^CI27 command supports code page
1252.
GB 18030 (^CI26) with GB18030.DAT. This supports the GB 18030
character set and encoding standard.
Unicode Support. These new values were added to the ^CI command:
28 = Unicode (UTF-8 encoding)
29 = Unicode (UTF-16 Big-Endian encoding)
30 = Unicode (UTF-16 Little-Endian encoding)
~DY The ~DY command downloads fonts to the printer. Firmware version
V60.14.x, V50.14.x, or later improves support for TrueType fonts and adds
support for TrueType Extension fonts. When OpenType fonts can be
downloaded as a TrueType font they are supported.
^FH The ^FH command allows you to enter the hexadecimal value for any
character directly into the ^FD statement. It has been updated to function
with Unicode encodings.
^FL The ^FL command provides the ability to link any TrueType font, including
private character fonts to associated fonts, such that if the base font does not
have a glyph for the required character, the printer looks to the linked fonts
for the glyph. The font links are user-definable.
^FO, ^FT,
^FW
In firmware version earlier than V60.15.x, V50.15.x or later, the ^FO and
^FT commands were left-justified. In firmware version V60.14.x, V50.14.x,
or later, a new parameter supports right- and auto-justification. Using the
^FW command allows you to set justification options.
^HT Over a communication port, the ^HT command receives the complete list of
the font links.
967
Features
Firmware x.14
Global Printing Solution
The Global Printing solution greatly simplifies international character label printing by
supporting Unicode compatible fonts and encoding (UTF-8, UTF-16BE and UTF-16LE)
directly in its printers.
These are new and enhanced features available in firmware version V60.14.x, v50,14.x, or
later:
Advanced text layout options
Big 5 HKSCS
GB 18030
Unicode support (UTF-8 and UTF-16)
Code Page 1252
Field hexadecimal
Field origin justification
Font linking
Improved font support
Real-time clock Japanese support
Text block
For details on these new features, see Table 23 on page 966.
^LF The ^LF command prints out a list of the linked fonts.
^PA The Advanced Text Layout Options command (^PA) is new in firmware
version V60.14.x, V50.14.x, or later.
Advanced text layout, such as bidirectional text layout, character shaping,
and OpenType support, can be activated with the ^PA command. The glyph
displayed when the character is missing from a font (default glyph) can be
changed from a space character to the default glyph of a font, which is often
a square box.
^SL A new parameter was added to the ^SL command to support the Japanese
language in the Real Time Clock feature set.
^TB The text block (^TB) command is a new command in firmware version
V60.14.x, V50.14.x, or later. The ^FB command allows you to print text into
a defined block type format; it does not support complex text layout. In
contrast, the ^TB command supports a text block with complex text.
Table 23 Features in Detail
Command Details
Features
Firmware x.14
968
Zebra firware V60.14.x, V50.14.x, or later continues to support locale-specific encoding
formats. These formats include:
Code Page 850
Shift JIS
GB
Unified Hangul Code
Big 5
What Is Unicode?
Unicode is a universal code page (which converts numeric codes into characters) that can be
used with many computer platforms and software applications. While ASCII and other
traditional code page encoding systems support 256 characters or less, Unicode can support
almost 100,000 characters for all major languages. The languages include complex non-
Western languages that can be difficult to print.
Unicode encoding and supporting fonts allow the printer to seamlessly output in any language.
As a result, you do not have to select the language, font, code page, or configure or adjust the
printer. Zebras printer-resident capabilities provide fast label output and seamless multi-
language printing.
You can create private libraries of logos and special characters and include them in labels. The
ability to create custom characters is valuable for creating shipping labels for Asia, as many
Asian fonts dont support characters for names, street names, and other proper nouns.
Firmware V60.14.x, V50.14.x, or later offers features that support bidirectional printing or
complex text layout, including:
Arabic
Hindi
Thai
Vietnamese
Other languages
Glossary
This is a glossary of terms.
Glossary
Terms
970
Terms
ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange. A 7-bit character set that
includes Latin characters, as well as control and punctuation characters.
bidirectional text layout The arrangement of characters with mixed directionality on a
single line. For example, English and Arabic.
big-endian In the encoding, the most significant byte is stored first.
byte order mark BOM; indicates big-endian (BE) or little-endian (LE).
character The smallest component of a writing system that has understanding, refers to the
abstract meaning not the specific shape.
character code Another term for code point.
character set A collection of characters.
character shaping Characters assume different glyphic forms depending on the
context.They can be used with a script-based language.
code point An integral reference number assigned to a character.
coded character set An ordered collection of characters that are assigned an integral
reference number.
combining semantic cluster Consists of an atomic character, a combining character
sequence consisting of a base character plus one or more nonspacing marks, enclosing marks,
combining word joiner, such as an Indic virama, or a sequence of Hangul jamos equivalent to a
Hangual syllable. .
diacritic A mark that is added to a letter or other character to change its value or meaning.
encoding The mapping of a characters code points to a sequence of bytes used to represent
the data.
font An electronic collection of glyphs used for the visual representation of characters.
GB18030 A standard required by the Peoples Republic of China for operating systems of
non-handheld computers.
GB 2312 A Chinese character set and encoding.
glyph The visual representation of a character, such as a shape or image.
grapheme cluster Consists of an atomic character, a combining character sequence
consisting of a base character plus one or more nonspacing marks or enclosing marks, or a
sequence of Hangul jamos equivalent to a Hangul syllable.
ISO 10646 An international standard that defines the Universal Character Set (UCS) and a
character encoding. The UCS matches Unicode.
971
Glossary
Terms
ISO 8859-1 An encoding standard for representing Western European languages using the
Latin Alphabet.
language A system of sounds and scripts used to represent and communicate concepts,
ideas, meanings, and thoughts.
ligature A glyph representing a combination of two or more characters.
little-endian In the encoding, the least significant byte is stored first.
open type A file format for scalable font files that extends the existing TrueType font file
format used by Microsoft Windows and Apple Macintosh operating systems.OpenType tables
support advanced layout features.
presentation form A pre-combined character, ligature or variant glyph that has a separate
code point; used for compatibility.
script A collection of symbols used to represent textual information in one or more writing
systems.
Shift-JIS A shifted encoding of the Japanese character encoding standard, JIS X 0208,
heavily deployed in PCs.
True type An outline font format that is scalable without quality loss.
Unicode The universal character set and encoding maintained by the Unicode Consortium.
UTF-8 The Unicode encoding that assigns each character code point to a sequence of one to
four bytes.
UTF-16 A Unicode encoding form that represents Unicode code point values in the BMP
with 16-bit code units and Unicode code point values in the supplementary planes with pairs of
16-bit code units.
UTF-16BE A Unicode encoding scheme based on UTF-16 that serializes the bytes in each
code unit in big-endian order.
UTF-16LE A Unicode encoding scheme based on UTF-16 that serializes the bytes in each
code unit in little-endian order.
Glossary
Terms
972

Notes ___________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
Index
A
abort download graphic 168
ACCEPT ZBI command 494
access password
set via ^RQ 387
set via ^RZ 402
access point
associated 809
MAC address 810
ADDBREAK ZBI command 463
adhoc auto mode 807
adhoc channel 808
advanced counter
reset 321
AFI byte
read command (^RA) 376
write command (^WF) 405
alphanumeric default font
change 146
antenna parameter setting via ZPL 418
antenna port
select using ZPL 401
appl.bootblock 620
appl.name 621
appl.option_board_version 619
applicator functions (ZBI)
AUXPORT_GETPIN 547
AUXPORT_RELEASEPIN 548
AUXPORT_SETPIN 546
AUXPORT_STEALPIN 544
description 543
applicator reprint 318
ARP
setting using external_wired.ip.arp_interval 695
setting using internal_wired.ip.arp_interval 715
ARP interval or cache time out 695, 715, 764, 817
array functions
description 574
array functions (ZBI)
COLUMNSIZE 580
DELROW 578
FIND 581
INSERTROW 577
REDIM 575
ROWSIZE 579
authentication
timeout for printer home page 417
AUTONUM ZBI command 450
auxiliary port
set 252, 255
AUXPORT_GETPIN ZBI command 547
AUXPORT_RELEASEPIN ZBI command 548
AUXPORT_SETPIN ZBI command 546
AUXPORT_STEALPIN ZBI command 544
B
backfeed sequence
change 264, 265, 329
bar code field default 140
base types and expressions
variable names 467
Index
974
base types and expressions (ZBI) 467
arrays 468
assignment 470
boolean expressions 475
combined boolean expressions 477
constants 468
numeric expressions 471
string concatenation 473
sub-strings 473
variable declarations 468
variable names 468
battery
set condition 248
battery status 210
bitmap font
download 160
bitmapped fonts 894
bluetooth.address 745
bluetooth.afh_map 746
bluetooth.afh_map_curr 747
bluetooth.afh_mode 748
bluetooth.authentication 749
bluetooth.bluetooth_pin 750
bluetooth.date 751
bluetooth.discoverable 752
bluetooth.enable 753
bluetooth.friendly_name 754
bluetooth.local_name 755
bluetooth.radio_auto_baud 756
bluetooth.radio_version 757
bluetooth.short_address 758
bluetooth.version 759
bootp
enable or disable 765
box 201
BREAK ZBI command 462
C
cache on 153
calibration
RFID tag using ZPL (^HR) 374
calibration, setting dynamic media 365
cancel all 242
cancel format 261
card.inserted 761
card.mac_addr 760, 847
caret
change 144
change alphanumeric default font 146
change backfeed sequence 264, 265, 329
change caret 144
change delimiter 145
change international font 147
change memory letter designation 152
change tilde 155
channel mask
setting via ^WS 428
CHR$ ZBI command 551
circle 203
client identifier 701, 722, 772, 824
client identifier (CID) 412
CLIENTSOCKET ZBI command 493
CLOSE ZBI command 489
CLRERR ZBI command 541
CODABLOCK 78
considerations for ^FD character set 81
considerations for the ^BY 80
code 11 53
code 128
subsets 84
subsets A and C 87
subsets a, b, and c 82
code 39 57
code 49 61
automatic mode 64
field data character set 64
code 93 74
full ASCII mode 75
code validation 156
COLUMNSIZE ZBI command 580
comma separated values (CSV) ZBI commands
CSVLOAD 520
CSVSTORE 522
description 519
TXTLOAD 523
TXTSTORE 524
command compatibility with printers and firmware
371
command structure 618, 692, 744
Command/Function NAME 440
comment 200
communications diagnostics 246
enable 246
concantination 195
configuation
update 268
configuration
using ZPL commands 411, 881, 917
configuration label
print 351
contacts 31
975
Index
control and flow commands (ZBI)
description 478
DO loops 480
END 485
EXIT 484
FOR loops 481
GOTO/GOSUB 482
IF statements 479
SUB 483
CSVLOAD ZBI command 520, 524
CSVSTORE ZBI command 522
CTRL-C ZBI command 456
current partially input format
cancel 270
currently connected printer
set transparent 308
customer service 31
cutter.clean_cutter 622
D
darkness
set 323
data log for RFID 373
data matrix 135
DATAREADY ZBI command 490
date for real time clock
set 342
DATE ZBI command 586
DATE$ ZBI command 584
DEBUG ZBI command 460
define EPC data structure (^RB) 378
define language 274
define password 277
define printer name 275
DELBREAK ZBI command 464
delete object 235
delimiter
change 145
DELROW ZBI command 578
description information
display 233
detect multiple RFID tags (^RN) 386
device.download_connection_timeout 623
device.friendly_name 624
device.frontpanel.key_press 625
device.frontpanel.line1 626
device.frontpanel.line2 627
device.frontpanel.xml 628
device.jobs_print 629
device.languages 630
device.pnp_option 631
device.reset 632
device.restore_defaults 633
device.unique_id 634
device.uptime 635
device.user_p1 636
device.user_p2 637
device.xml.enable 638
DHCP
CID prefix 699, 720
enable 698, 719
diagnostics
disable 247
diagonal line 204
directory label
print 352
disable diagnostics 247
discharge mode
battery 272
display description information 233
display.text 639
do
device.restore_defaults 633
file.dir 641
do command 617, 691, 743
DO loops ZBI command 480
double signal mode
setting 392
download bitmap font 160
download encoding 162
download format 164
download graphic
abort 168
download graphics 165, 172
download Intellifont 169
download true type font 170
download unbounded true type font 171
dynamic media calibration, setting 365
E
E.A.S. bit enable/disable command (^RE) 380
EAN-13 99
EAN-8 70
ECHO ZBI command 452
editing commands (ZBI)
! (EXCLAMATION MARK) 448
AUTONUM ZBI command 450
description 445
ECHO ZBI command 452
LIST ZBI command 449
NEW 446
REM 447
RENUM ZBI command 451
Index
976
Electronic Product Code (EPC)
define EPC data structure (^RB) 378
write EPC data via ^RQ 387
write EPC data via ^RZ 402
ellipse 205
enable RFID motion (^RM) 385
encoding
download 162
select 324
encoding results 399
encryption
set LEAP parameters 423
set values via ZPL 419
end format 366
END ZBI command 485
erase download graphics 176
error handling 391
ESSID
printer 814
setting via ^WS 428
events (ZBI)
available events 526
description 525
HANDLEEVENT 533
REGISTEREVENT 530
TRIGGEREVENT 535
UNREGISTEREVENT 532
ZBI Key Names 528
EXIT ZBI command 484
external wired gateway address
change 702
external wired subnet mask address
external_wired.check 693
external_wired.ip.addr 694
external_wired.ip.arp_interval 695
external_wired.ip.default_addr.enable 696
external_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_all 697, 718
external_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_enable 698
external_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_prefix 699
external_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_suffix 700
external_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_type 701
external_wired.ip.gateway 702
external_wired.ip.netmask 703
external_wired.ip.port 704
external_wired.ip.protocol 705
external_wired.ip.timeout value 707, 738
external_wired.ip.timeout.value 707, 738
external_wired.ip.v6.addr 708
external_wired.ip.v6.gateway 709
external_wired.ip.v6.prefix_length 710
external_wired.mac_addr 711
external_wired.mac_raw 712
EXTRACT$ ZBI command 560
F
feedback
suppress 362
field
field reverse 193
orientation 198
parameter 192
separator 194
typeset 195
variable 197
field block 176, 177
field data 181
field hexadecimal indicator 182
field number 190
field orientation 198
field origin 191
field parameter 192
field reverse print 193
field separator 194
field typeset 195
field variable 197
file system commands (ZBI)
DELETE ZBI command 518
descripiton 512
DIR ZBI command 517
LOAD ZBI command 516
STORE ZBI command 515
file.delete 640
file.dir 641
file.run 643
file.type 642
FIND ZBI command 581
firmware
supported tag types for each version 393
ZPL command compatibility 371
flash memory
initialize 243
font identifier 158
font linking 184
font name
to call font 49
fonts
font matrices 900
standard printer fonts 894
FOR loops ZBI command 481
977
Index
format
cancel 261
download 164
end 366
pause 261
recall 363
set 361
FTP protocol setting 785
function rules 441
G
gateway address
change 786
Gen 2
printers and firmware that support Gen 2 393
setting password or locking tag 402
specify tag type using ZPL 390
write EPC data to tag via ^RQ 387
write EPC data to tag via ^RZ 402
getvar
appl.bootblock 620
appl.name 621
appl.option_board_version 619
arp_interval 764
bluetooth.address 745
bluetooth.afh_map_curr 747
bluetooth.date 751
bluetooth.local_name 755
bluetooth.radio_version 757
bluetooth.short_address 758
bluetooth.version 759
card.inserted 761
card.mac_addr 760, 847
getvar (continued)
device.jobs_print 629
device.languages 630
device.uptime 635
device.user_p1 636
device.user_p2 637
display.text 639
external_wired..ip.arp_interval 695
external_wired.ip.addr 694
external_wired.ip.default_addr.enable address
printer 696
external_wired.ip.timeout.value 707, 738
external_wired.ip.v6.addr 708
external_wired.ip.v6.gateway 709
external_wired.ip.v6.prefix_length 710
external_wired.mac_addr 711
external_wired.mac_raw 712
file.dir 641
file.type 642
head.latch 644
iip.dhcp.lease.last_attempt 774, 825
interface.network.active.gateway 645
interface.network.active.ip_addr 646
interface.network.active.mac_addr 647
interface.network.active.mac_raw 648
interface.network.active.netmask 649
interface.network.active.protocol 650
internal_wired..ip.arp_interval 715
internal_wired.auto_switchover 713
internal_wired.ip.addr 714
internal_wired.ip.default_addr.enable address
Index
978
printer 716
internal_wired.ip.dhcp.cache_ip 717
internal_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_enable 719
internal_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_prefix 720
internal_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_suffix 721
internal_wired.ip.dhcp.cid_type 722
internal_wired.ip.dhcp.lease.last_attempt 723
internal_wired.ip.dhcp.lease.length 724
internal_wired.ip.dhcp.lease.server 725
internal_wired.ip.dhcp.lease.time_left 726
internal_wired.ip.dhcp.option12 727
internal_wired.ip.dhcp.option12_format 728
internal_wired.ip.dhcp.option12_value 729
internal_wired.ip.dhcp.requests_per_session 731
internal_wired.ip.dhcp.request_timeout 730
internal_wired.ip.dhcp.session_interval 732
internal_wired.ip.gateway 733
internal_wired.ip.netmask 734
internal_wired.ip.port 735, 837
internal_wired.ip.protocol 736
internal_wired.ip.timeout.enable 706, 737
internal_wired.mac_addr 739
internal_wired.mac_raw 740
ip.active_network 762
ip.addr 763
ip.bootp.enable 765
ip.dhcp.cache_ip 766
ip.dhcp.cid_all 767
ip.dhcp.cid_enable 768
ip.dhcp.cid_prefix 769
ip.dhcp.cid_suffix 770
ip.dhcp.cid_type 772
ip.dhcp.enable 773
ip.dhcp.lease.length 771
ip.dhcp.lease.server 775
ip.dhcp.lease.time_left 776
ip.dhcp.option12 777
ip.dhcp.option12_format 778
ip.dhcp.option12_value 779
ip.dhcp.requests_per_session 781
ip.dhcp.request_timeout 780
ip.dhcp.session_interval 782
ip.dns.domain 783
ip.dns.servers 784
ip.ftp.enable 785
ip.gateway 786
ip.http.enable 787
ip.lpd.enable 788
ip.mac_raw 789
ip.netmask 790
ip.pop3.enable 791
ip.pop3.password 792
ip.pop3.poll 793
ip.pop3.server_addr 794
ip.pop3.username 795
ip.port 796
ip.primary_network 797
ip.smtp.domain 798
ip.smtp.enable 799
ip.smtp.server_addr 800
ip.snmp.enable 803
ip.snmp.get_community_name 801
ip.snmp.set_community_name 802
ip.tcp.enable 655, 805
ip.telnet.enable 804
ip.udp.enable 806
media.speed 654
odometer.headclean 655
odometer.headnew 656
odometer.media_marker_count 658
odometer.media_marker_count1 658
odometer.total_print_length 660
print.tone 661
wlan.adhocautomode 807
wlan.adhocchannel 808
wlan.associated 809
wlan.bssid 810
wlan.channel 811
wlan.channel_mask 812
wlan.current_tx.rate 813
wlan.essid 814
wlan.firmware_version 815
wlan.ip.addr 816
wlan.ip.arp_interval 817
wlan.ip.default_addr.enable address
979
Index
printer 818
wlan.ip.dhcp.cache_ip 819
wlan.ip.dhcp.cid_all 820
wlan.ip.dhcp.cid_enable 821
wlan.ip.dhcp.cid_prefix 822
wlan.ip.dhcp.cid_suffix 823
wlan.ip.dhcp.cid_type 824
wlan.ip.dhcp.lease.length 826
wlan.ip.dhcp.lease.server 827
wlan.ip.dhcp.lease.time_left 828
wlan.ip.dhcp.option12 829
wlan.ip.dhcp.option12_format 830
wlan.ip.dhcp.option12_value 831
wlan.ip.dhcp.requests_per_session 833
wlan.ip.dhcp.request_timeout 832
wlan.ip.dhcp.session_interval 834
wlan.ip.gateway 835
wlan.ip.netmask 836
wlan.ip.protocol 838
wlan.ip.timeout.enable 839
wlan.ip.timeout.value 840
wlan.keep_alive.enable 841
wlan.keep_alive.timeout 842
wlan.kerberos.kdc 843
wlan.kerberos.password 844
wlan.kerberos.realm 845
wlan.kerberos.username 846
wlan.mac_raw 848
wlan.operating_mode 849
wlan.password 850
wlan.preamble 851
wlan.private_key_password 852
wlan.roam.interchannel_delay 853
wlan.roam.interval 854
wlan.roam.signal 856
wlan.security 857
wlan.signal_noise 866
wlan.signal_quality 867
wlan.signal_strength 868
wlan.station_name 869
wlan.tx_power 870
wlan.tx_rate 871
wlan.username 872
wlan.wep.auth_type 873
wlan.wep.index 874
wlan.wep.key1 875
wlan.wep.key2 876
wlan.wep.key3 877
wlan.wep.key4 878
wlan.wep.key_format 880
wlan.wpa.psk 879
wlanroam.max_chan_scan_time 855
getvar command 616, 690, 742
GETVAR ZBI command 590
GOTO/GOSUB ZBI command 482
graphic
box 201
circle 203
diagonal line 204
ellipse 205
field 206
recall 364
symbol 208
graphic field 206
graphics
download 165, 172
erase download 176
upload 232
graphing sensor calibration 249
H
HANDLEEVENT ZBI command 533
head test
fatal 259
interval 267
non-fatal 260
head test fatal 259
head test interval 267
head test non-fatal 260
head.latch 644
HEXTOINT ZBI command 573
host
directory list 230
graphic 213
identification 215
RAM status 216
status return 224
host directory list 230
host graphic 213
host identification 215
host linked font list 227
host query 217, 354
host RAM status 216
host status return 224
host verification command (^HV) 229
~HQ Host Query 354
HTTP protocol 787
I
IF statements (ZBI) 479
Index
980
image
load 237
move 239
save 240
image load 237
image move 239
image save 240
INBYTE ZBI command 500
industrial 2 of 5 104
initialize Flash memory 243
input and output commands (ZBI)
ACCEPT 494
CLIENTSOCKET 493
CLOSE 489
DATAREADY 490
description 486
INBYTE 500
INPUT 496
OPEN 488
OUTBYTE 499
PRINT 498
READ 501
SEARCHTO$ 503
SERVERCLOSE 492
SERVERSOCKET 491
WRITE 502
INPUT ZBI command 496
INSERTROW ZBI command 577
interface.network.active.gateway 645
interface.network.active.ip_addr 646
interface.network.active.mac_addr 647
interface.network.active.mac_raw 648
interface.network.active.netmask 649
interface.network.active.protocol 650
interleaved
2 of 5 55
internal wired gateway address
change 733
internal wired subnet mask address
internal wired timeout enable 706, 737
internal wired.ip.timeout enable 706, 737
internal.wired.mac_addr 739
internal_wired.ip.addr 714
internal_wired.ip.arp_interval 715
internal_wired.ip.default_addr.enable 716
internal_wired.ip.dhcp.cache_ip 717
internal_wired.ip.dhcp.lease.last_attempt 723
internal_wired.ip.dhcp.lease.length 724
internal_wired.ip.dhcp.lease.server 725
internal_wired.ip.dhcp.lease.time_left 726
internal_wired.ip.port 735
internal_wired.ip.timeout.enable 706, 737
internal_wired.mac_addr 739
internal_wired.mac_raw 740
international font
change 147
international mode
setting via ^WS 428
Introduction to Zebra Basic Interpreter (ZBI) 441
INTTOHEX$ ZBI command 572
IP address
printer 694, 714, 763, 816
setting via ip.addr 797
ip.addr 763
ip.arp_interval 764
ip.bootp.enable 765
ip.dhcp.cache_ip 766
ip.dhcp.cid_all 718, 767
ip.dhcp.enable 773
ip.dhcp.lease.last_attempt 774, 825
ip.dhcp.lease.length 771
ip.dhcp.lease.server 775
ip.dhcp.lease.time_left 776
ip.dns.domain 783
ip.dns.servers 784
ip.ftp.enable 785
ip.gateway 702, 786
ip.http.enable 787
981
Index
ip.lpd.enable 788
ip.mac_raw 789
ip.netmask 790
ip.pop3.enable 791
ip.pop3.poll 793
ip.port 704, 735, 796, 837
ip.smtp.domain 798
ip.smtp.enable 799
ip.snmp.server_addr 803
ip.snmp.set_community_name 801, 802
ip.tcp.enable 805
ip.udp.enable 806
ISERRORd ZBI command 537
K
Kerberos
password 844
realm 845
username 846
key distribution center (KDC) 843
key rotation
firmware version required 436, 862
kill battery 272
kill password 402
set via ^RQ 387
set via ^RZ 402
L
label
maximum length 290
reverse print 281
shift 282
top 283
label home 278, 279
label length 280
set 257
language
define 274
LCASE$ ZBI command 550
LEAP mode
setting using ZPL 423
LEN ZBI command 564
liability 2
linked font
host list 227
LIST ZBI command 449
lock RFID tag
Gen 2 402
not Gen 2 381
log file for RFID 373
LOGMARS 110
LPD protocol setting 788
LTRIM$ ZBI command 552
M
^MA Set Maintenance Alerts 284
MAC address
access point 810
retrieve via external_wired.mac_addr 711
retrieve via internal_wired.mac_addr 739
maintenance alerts, setting 284
map clear 286
math functions
description 565
math functions (ZBI)
HEXTOINT 573
INTTOHEX$ 572
MAX 567
MAXNUM 569
MIN 568
MOD 570
STR$ 566
VAL 571
MAX ZBI command 567
maximum label length 290
MAXNUM ZBI command 569
media
darkness 287
feed 288
tracking 293
type 296
media calibration, setting dynamic 365
media darkness 287
media sensor
set 340
media sensor calibration 245
set 245
media tracking 293
media type 296
media.printmode 652
media.speed 654
memory letter designation
change 152
^MI Set Maintenance Information Message 289
MIN ZBI command 568
Index
982
mirror image
printing 312
MOD ZBI command 570
mode protection 294
modify head warning 299
motion in RFID label 385
MSI 112
multiple field origin locations 187
N
network
connect 301
ID number 304
network boot command 413
network configuration label
print via ZPL 424
network connect 301
network ID number 304
network operating mode 849
network printers
set all transparent 305
network settings
setting via ZPL 421
NEW ZBI command 446
number of retries for block (^RR) 389
O
object delete 235
odometer related commands
^JH 250
^MA 284
^MI 289
~HQ 217
~RO 321
~WQ 354
odometer.label_dot_length 657
odometer.label_dot_length 657
odometer.media_marker_count 655, 658, 659
offset for real time clock
set 334
ON ERROR ZBI command 542
OPEN ZBI command 488
option 61 701, 722, 772, 824
CID prefix 699, 720
enable 698, 719
ip.dhcp.cid_prefix 699, 720, 769, 822
optional memory
reset 244
OUTBYTE ZBI command 499
P
password
define 277
set wireless password via ^WP 425
password for RFID tag 402
pause
programmable 314
pause format 261
PDF417 66
consideration for ^FD 69
permanently lock Gen 2 tag data 402
POP3
mailbox 791
mailbox password 792
poll interval 793
username 795
POP3 server
IP address 794
POS ZBI command 563
POSTNET 142
power on
reset 263
preamble length
radio 851
pre-shared key value 879
primary network device
selection by ^NC 300
primary/secondary device
setting via ZPL 415
print
start 319
width 320
print mode 291
print network configuration label
via ZPL command 424
print orientation 313
print quantity 315
print rate 316
print start 319
983
Index
print width 320
PRINT ZBI command 498
print.tone 661
printer
sleep 367
printer IP address 694, 714, 763, 816
printer name
define 275
printer sleep 367
printer web pages
set timeout value 417
Printers, ZBI Keys, & ZBI Versions 442
printhead resistance
set 339
printing mirror image of label 312
private key password 852
programmable pause 314
programming position
set using ZPL 391
Q
QR code
normal mode 121
quantity
print 315
R
read power
change using ZPL 400
read RFID tag
read or write RFID format (^RF) 381
read RFID tag (^RT) 396
READ ZBI command 501
read/write position
set using ZPL 391
real time clock
set language 330
set mode 330
real time clock date format
select 273
real time clock time format
select 273
recall format 363
recall graphic 364
REDIM ZBI command 575
REGISTEREVENT ZBI command 530
REM ZBI command 447
RENUM ZBI command 451
REPEAT$ ZBI command 553
report RFID encoding results 399
reprint
after error 271
applicator 318
reset
power on 263
reset advanced counter 321
reset optional memory 244
reset wireless radio card and print server 427
RESTART ZBI command 457
return data to host computer (^HV) 229
return RFID data log to host 373
RFID
calibrate RFID tag using ZPL (^HR) 374
change read power using ZPL 400
change write power using ZPL 400
detect multiple tags (^RN) 386
enable motion (^RM) 385
number of retries for block (^RR) 389
RFID setup command (^RS) 390
verify write operation (^WV) 409
RFID tag ID command (^RI) 384
ribbon tension
set 269
ROWSIZE ZBI command 579
RTRIM$ ZBI command 554
RUN ZBI command 455
running and debugging commands (ZBI)
ADDBREAK ZBI command 463
BREAK ZBI command 462
CTRL-C ZBI command 456
DEBUG ZBI command 460
DELBREAK ZBI command 464
description 453
RESTART ZBI command 457
RUN ZBI command 455
STEP ZBI command 459
TRACE ZBI command 461
ZPL ZBI command 466
S
sales 31
scalable font 47, 894
download Intellifont 169
SEARCHTO$ ZBI command 503
select encoding 324
sensor calibration
graphing 249
serial communications
set 322
serialization data 332
serialization field
standard ^FD string 325
Index
984
SERVERCLOSE ZBI command 492
SERVERSOCKET ZBI command 491
set all network printers transparent 305
set auxiliary port 255
set battery condition 248
set darkness 323
set dots
millimeter 258
set dots per millimeter 258
set dynamic media calibration 365
set label length 257
set maintenance alerts 284
set maintenance information message 289
set RFID tag or kill password (^RZ) 402
set serial communications 322
set units of measurements 297
set up RFID information (^RS) 390
Set/Get/Do interactions
description 588
Set/Get/Do interactions (ZBI)
GETVAR 590
SETVAR 589
SETERR ZBI command 540
setvar
device.reset 632
device.uptime 635
device.user_p1 636
device.user_p2 637
external_wired.ip.addr 694, 696
external_wired.ip.arp_interval 695
setvar (continued)
external_wired.ip.timeout value 707, 738
file.dir 641
file.run 643
file.type 642
head.latch 644
internal_wired.ip.addr 714, 716
internal_wired.ip.arp_interval 715
internal_wired.ip.port 735, 837
internal_wired.ip.timeout enable 706, 737
ip.addr 763
ip.arp_interval 764
ip.bootp.enable 765
ip.dhcp.cid_all 767
ip.dhcp.enable 773
ip.dns.domain 783
ip.dns.servers 784
ip.ftp.enable 785
ip.gateway 786
ip.http.enable 787
ip.lpd.enable 788
ip.netmask 790
ip.pop3.enable 791
985
Index
setvar (continued)
ip.pop3.poll 793
ip.port 796
ip.smtp.domain 798
ip.smtp.enable 799
ip.snmp.enable 803
ip.snmp.set_community_name 802
ip.tcp.enable 805
ip.udp.enable 806
media.printmode 652
media.speed 654
odometer.media_marker_count 658
print.tone 661
wlan.essid 814
wlan.ip.addr 816, 818
wlan.ip.gateway 835
wlan.ip.netmask 836
wlan.ip.timeout enable 839
wlan.ip.timeout value 840
wlan.password 850
wlan.preamble 851
wlan.roam.max_chan_scan_time 855
wlan.security 857
wlan.tx_power 870
wlan.tx_rate 871
wlan.username 872
wlan.wep.index 874
wlan.wep.key1 875
wlan.wep.key2 876
wlan.wep.key3 877
wlan.wep.key4 878
wlan.wpa.psk 879
setvar command 616, 690, 742
SETVAR ZBI command 589
SGD command structure 618, 692, 744
SGTIN-64 standard programming example 379
single signal mode
setting 392
SLEEP ZBI command 539
slew
home position 311
slew given number
dot rows 310
slew to home position 311
SMTP IP address 800
SMTP parameters
setting via ZPL 416
SMTP protocol 798, 799
SNMP
get community 801
set community 802
SNMP parameters
setting via ZPL 414
SNMP protocol 803
SNMP query 801
specify number of retries for block (^RR) 389
SPLIT ZBI command 555
SPLITCOUNT ZBI command 558
standard printer fonts 894
start print 335
start ZBI 252
STEP ZBI command 459
STR$ ZBI command 566
Index
986
string functions (ZBI)
CHR$ 551
description 549
EXTRACT$ 560
LCASE$ 550
LEN 564
LTRIM$ 552
POS 563
REPEAT$ 553
RTRIM$ 554
SPLIT 555
SPLITCOUNT 558
UCASE$ 559
SUB ZBI command 483
subnet mask
change 703, 734
subnet mask address
supported
printers 442
symbol 208, 212
systems (ZBI)
CLRERR 541
description 536
ISERRORd 537
ON ERROR 542
SETERR 540
SLEEP 539
TRIGGEREVENT 538
T
tag type
specify using ZPL 390
TCP communication 704, 735, 796, 837
TCP socket protocol 805
tear-off adjust position 347
technical support 31
TELNET protocol 804
terminate ZBI 262
text blocks 348
text properties
advanced 309
tilde
change 155
time and date functions
description 583
time and date functions (ZBI)
DATE 586
DATE$ 584
TIME 587
TIME$ 585
time for real time clock
set 342
TIME ZBI command 587
TIME$ ZBI command 585
timeout value 707, 738
timeout value for printer home page 417
TRACE ZBI command 461
transfer object 349
transmit rate
setting via ^WR 426
transponders
calibration using ZPL (^HR) 374
TRIGGEREVENT ZBI command 535, 538
true type font
download 170
TXTLOAD ZBI command 523
U
UCASE$ ZBI command 559
UDP communication 704, 735, 796, 837
UDP socket protocol 806
unbounded true type font
download 171
units of measurement
set 297
UNREGISTEREVENT ZBI command 532
UPC/EAN extensions 128
UPC-A 133
UPC-E 72
update configuration 268
upload graphics 232
UPS maxicode 96
considerations for ^FD 97
use font name to call font 49
V
VAL ZBI command 571
verify RFID write operation (^WV) 409
void handling 391
W
web authentication timeout value 417
web server setting 787
WEP key format 880
WEP mode
setting encryption index via ^WX 431
width
print 320
wired equivalent privacy 874
wired print server
^NB to set check for 413
987
Index
wireless password
setting via ^WP 425
Wireless Print Server
ZPL commands 881, 917
wireless print server
change network settings 421
wireless pulse and interval
setting via ^WS 428
wireless radio card
reset via ZPL 427
setting values via ^WS 428
wireless timeout enable 839
wlan gateway address
change 835
wlan subnet mask address
wlan.associated 809
wlan.bssid 810
wlan.channel 811
wlan.current_tx_rate 813
wlan.essid 814
wlan.firmware_version 815
wlan.ip.addr 816
wlan.ip.default_addr.enable 818
wlan.ip.dhcp.cache_ip 819
wlan.ip.dhcp.lease.length 826
wlan.ip.dhcp.lease.server 827
wlan.ip.dhcp.lease.time_left 828
wlan.ip.gateway 835
wlan.ip.netmask 836
wlan.ip.timeout enable 839
wlan.ip.timeout value 840
wlan.ip.timeout.enable 839
wlan.mac_raw 848
wlan.password 850
wlan.preamble 851
wlan.roam.max_chan_scan_time 855
wlan.security 857
wlan.signal_noise 866
wlan.signal_quality 867
wlan.signal_strength 868
wlan.tx_power 870
wlan.tx_rate 871
wlan.username 872
wlan.wep.index 874
wlan.wep.key1 875
wlan.wep.key2 876
wlan.wep.key3 877
wlan.wep.key4 878
wlan.wpa.psk 879
write AFI byte command (^WF) 405
write data to tag
via ^RQ 387
via ^RZ 402
write power
change using ZPL 400
write RFID format (^RF) 381
write RFID tag (^WT) 407
WRITE ZBI command 502
Writing ZBI Programs 444
X
^XS Set Dynamic Calibration Defaults 365
Z
ZBI
Command/Function Name description 440
function rules 441
start 252
terminate 262
ZBI character set 939
Index
988
ZBI commands
! (EXCLAMATION MARK) 448
ACCEPT 494
ADDBREAK 463
AUTONUM 450
AUXPORT_GETPIN 547
AUXPORT_RELEASEPIN 548
AUXPORT_SETPIN 546
AUXPORT_STEALPIN 544
BREAK 462
CHR$ 551
CLIENTSOCKET 493
CLOSE 489
CLRERR 541
COLUMNSIZE 580
CSVLOAD 520
CSVSTORE 522
CTRL-C 456
DATAREADY 490
DATE 586
DATE$ 584
DEBUG 460
DELBREAK 464
DELETE 518
DELROW 578
DIR 517
DO loops 480
ECHO 452
END 485
EXIT 484
EXTRACT$ 560
FIND 581
FOR loops 481
GETVAR 590
GOTO/GOSUB 482
HANDLEEVENT 533
HEXTOINT 573
IF statements 479
INBYTE 500
INPUT 496
INSERTROW 577
INTTOHEX$ 572
ISERRORd 537
LCASE$ 550
LEN 564
LIST 449
LOAD 516
LTRIM$ 552
MAX 567
MAXNUM 569
MIN 568
MOD 570
NEW 446
ON ERROR 542
OPEN 488
OUTBYTE 499
POS 563
PRINT 498
READ 501
REDIM 575
REGISTEREVENT 530
REM 447
RENUM 451
REPEAT$ 553
RESTART 457
ROWSIZE 579
RTRIM$ 554
RUN 455
SEARCHTO$ 503
SERVERCLOSE 492
SERVERSOCKET 491
SETERR 540
SETVAR 589
SLEEP 539
SPLIT 555
SPLITCOUNT 558
STEP 459
STORE 515
STR$ 566
SUB 483
TIME 587
TIME$ 585
TRACE 461
TRIGGEREVENT 535, 538
TXTLOAD 523
TXTSTORE 524
UCASE$ 559
UNREGISTEREVENT 532
VAL 571
WRITE 502
ZBI Key Names 528
ZPL 466
ZBI keys 442
ZBI printers 442
ZBI versions 442
1.0 through 1.5 442
2.0 and higher 442
zbi.control.add_breakpoint 668
zbi.control.break 669
zbi.control.clear_breakpoints 670
zbi.control.delete_breakpoint 671
zbi.control.line_number 672
zbi.control.restart 673
zbi.control.run 674
989
Index
zbi.control.step 675
zbi.control.terminate 676
zbi.control.variable_name 677
zbi.control.variable_value 678
zbi.key 679
zbi.last_error 680
zbi.reseller_key 681
zbi.revision 682
zbi.running_program_name 683
zbi.start_info.execute 684
zbi.start_info.file_name 685
zbi.start_info.memory_alloc 686
zbi.state 687
Zebra Programming Language (ZPL II)
^HL or ~HL, Return RFID Data Log to Host (^HL
or ~HL) 373
^HR, Calibrate RFID Transponder 374
^RA, Read AFI Byte 376
^RB, Define EPC Data Structure 378
^RE, Enable/Disable E.A.S. Bit 380
^RF, Read or Write RFID Format 381
^RI, Get RFID Tag ID 384
^RM, Enable RFID Motion 385
^RN, Detect Multiple RFID Tags 386
^RQ, Quick Write EPC Data and Passwords 387
^RR, Specify RFID Retries for a Block 389
^RS, RFID Setup 390
^RT, Read RFID Tag 396
^RW, Set RFID Read and Write Power 400
^RZ, Set RFID Tag Password and Lock Tag 402
^WF, Write AFI Byte 405
^WT, Write Tag 407
^WV, Verify RFID Write Operation 409
~RV, Report RFID Encoding Results 399
command compatibility with printers and firmware
371
ZebraNet Alert
halt 337
set 343
ZPL
set 346
ZPL commands 411
^B7 66
~HQ 250, 354
^MA 284
^MI 289
Wireless Print Server commands 881, 917
^XS 365
ZPL ZBI command 466
Index
990
Zebra Technologies International, LLC
333 Corporate Woods Parkway
Vernon Hills, Illinois 60061.3109 U.S.A
T: +1 847 793 2600
Toll-free +1 800 423 0422
F: +1 847 913 8766
Zebra Technologies Europe Limited
Dukes Meadow
Millboard Road
Bourne End
Buckinghamshire
SL8 5XF
United Kingdom
Switchboard: +44 (0)1628 556000
Fax: +44 (0)1628 556001
Zebra Technologies Asia Pacific, LLC
120 Robinson Road
#06-01 Parakou Building
Singapore 068913
T: +65 6858 0722
F: +65 6885 0838
http://www.zebra.com
2008 ZIH Corp.

Manual ZPL II

Uploaded by

Manual ZPL II

Uploaded by

ZPL II Programming

, and ZebraLink programs; Element Energy Equalizer

<error correction level> L (high-density level)

<character mode> N (numeric data)

<character mode> A (alphanumeric data)

<character mode> B (8-bit byte data)

printers, the ~NT command functions the same as the ~NR

S-300 and S-500 printers.

Lightweight Extensible Authentication

compression program PKZIP and

You might also like